JP7160138B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, lottery processing is executed by the control means by operating the start lever while medals are being bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the invention according to claim 1 includes game control means for controlling a game execution means so that one game is executed based on the establishment of a start condition;
a first setting means for setting a first expected state in which, when a first predetermined condition corresponding to awarding of a privilege is satisfied, the privilege is granted after the game is completed and continues over a plurality of games;
a second setting means for setting a second expected state that continues over a plurality of games and that the privilege is not awarded after the end of a plurality of games when a second predetermined condition that does not correspond to the awarding of the privilege is satisfied;
expectation effect control means for performing an expectation effect that enables the player to expect the awarding of a privilege in each game in the first expectation state or the second expectation state;
standby information setting means for setting standby information for newly starting the first expected state after the end of the second expected state when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state; ,
grant lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to grant the privilege when a lottery trigger occurs in a situation other than the first expected state;
addition lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to increase the number of times the privilege is granted when the lottery trigger occurs in the first expected state;
When the lottery opportunity occurs in the second expected state and the first predetermined condition is not satisfied, the lottery is performed by the grant lottery means, and the second expected state and the changing means for performing a lottery by the additional lottery means when the lottery is triggered in a situation where a first predetermined condition is satisfied ;
with
The degree of expectation that the privilege will be granted by the lottery of the grant lottery means is configured to be higher as the number of games played before the lottery triggers is larger,
The addition lottery means performs a lottery as to whether or not to add the lottery so as not to be affected by the number of games played before the lottery is triggered .

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern and a combination line that can be visually recognized through a display window; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; (a) to (g) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the mode of stop symbols when each winning occurs. (a) to (g) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the mode of stop symbols when each winning occurs. (a) is a front view of an acquired number display section and an internal state notification section, (b) is a front view of a privilege point notification section and a stock notification section, and (c) is a front view of a win number notification section. 1 is an electrical configuration diagram of a slot machine; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process performed by main side MPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for non-internal states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for internal post-states. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the order in which the reels are stopped and the winning mode to be established; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing winning data acquisition processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing winning determination processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing CB state processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode of game state transition that occurs under the control of the main MPU; 4 is a time chart for explaining a light emission control mode of an internal state notification unit; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a first wait setting process executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a second wait setting process executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus AT management processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a time chart showing the state when the first special replay winning or losing result is obtained in the post-CB internal state. It is a time chart showing the state when the second special replay winning or the third special replay winning is won in the post-CB internal state. FIG. 10 is a time chart for explaining the relationship between the CB in-progress state and the bonus AT state; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing periodic processing executed by a sub-side MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the standby|waiting effect setting process performed by sub side MPU. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing CB setting processing executed by a sub-side MPU; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode of transition from a non-AT state to an AT state; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing non-AT processing executed by a sub-side MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing migration chance management processing executed by a sub-side MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing during a transition chance executed by a sub-side MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing ceiling game management processing executed by a sub-side MPU; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining each game state included in the AT state. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a process during AT executed by a sub-side MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing pre-branch AT state processing executed by a sub-side MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a first add-on process executed by a sub-side MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for setting an additional state executed by a sub-side MPU; FIG. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the notification control processing performed by sub-side MPU, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for a stock notification. (A) Time charts for explaining how privilege points are distributed and added to a plurality of games in the pre-branch AT state, and (B1) to (B4) light emission modes of the privilege point notification unit and the stock notification unit. It is an explanatory view for explaining. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing branch AT state setting processing executed by a sub-side MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing branch AT state processing executed by a sub-side MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a second add-on process executed by the sub-side MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing branch AT state end processing executed by a sub-side MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing pre-branch AT state setting processing executed by a sub-side MPU; FIG. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the progress of the branch AT state, and (B1) to (B6) are diagrams simply showing the content of the battle effect on the image display device. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the AT continuation probability is promoted in the AT continuation lottery process. 4 is a time chart showing transition timings to an add-on state in a pre-branch AT state and a branch AT state; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for an added state executed by a sub-side MPU; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an add-on mode in an add-on state; (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a privilege point counter; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing last chance processing executed by a sub-side MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus AT processing executed by a sub-side MPU; FIG. (a) It is a schematic diagram for explaining the outline of the electrical configuration of a game hall in which a large number of slot machines are installed, and (b) is a front view of an external terminal plate provided in the slot machine. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing external output setting processing at the time of termination, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a bell winning determination process executed by the main MPU; FIG. 4 is a time chart showing how the output state of the AT1 signal is changed in relation to the bell combination; 10 is a flowchart showing normal replay push order determination processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an external output setting process at the time of starting, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing normal replay processing executed by a sub-side MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for avoiding pressing order executed by a sub-side MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing how the AT1 signal output mode is changed in relation to the normal replay combination; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process before the start performed by main side MPU. 4 is a time chart showing output modes of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal in the case of transitioning to the normal AT state triggered by the bonus AT state; 4 is a time chart showing how AT1 and AT2 signals are output when a transition is made to a bonus AT state in the middle of a normal AT state; (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an omen game counter, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a stock game counter, (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an omen combination determination area, (d) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining various flag areas. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a precursor setting process executed by a sub-side MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing setting processing for this precursor executed by the sub-side MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing setting processing for a false portent executed by a sub-side MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the present portent effect table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the portent effect is executed over a plurality of games; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a false portent effect table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a continuous-soul-time production table; FIG. 10 is a time chart showing how the number of continued games in the premonitory state is stocked; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing a state in which a transition chance state is generated and won in the middle of a false portent state; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing the flow of a game when a penalty event occurs in the transition chance precursor state; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing a game flow when a penalty event occurs in the ceiling game precursor state; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content of the image display device in the AT preparation state; (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content of the image display device in the normal AT state; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing setting processing of AT1 signal and AT2 signal executed by the main MPU in the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing final chance state setting processing executed by a sub-side MPU in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing normal AT state end processing executed by a sub-side MPU in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing setting processing for this precursor executed by the sub-side MPU in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing setting processing for this precursor executed by the sub-side MPU in the sixth embodiment; FIG.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine, which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened.

As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape with an open front as a whole by fixing a plurality of wooden panels.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 . The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the housing 11 with its left side as a pivot shaft. The front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the rear side thereof.

As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game status. The game panel 20 has three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R arranged side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M, 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate, and the reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are each formed in a cylindrical shape. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R one-to-one. there is Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected through the respective display windows 21L, 21M, 21R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

These reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are connected to stepping motors (not shown), and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be driven to rotate individually by driving the stepping motors. It's becoming

As shown in FIG. 1, on the lower left side of the game panel 20, there is provided a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. When the start lever 41 is operated while medals are inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The respective stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively. Each of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44 is in a state in which it can be stopped after a predetermined time has passed since the left reel 32L started rotating.

The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are started to rotate based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating based on the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44, and medals are awarded. Execution of various processes such as management of the game state and management of the game state corresponds to one game.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals as an investment value is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 by the selector 52 provided on the back side of the front door 12 when the medals can be inserted, and when the medals cannot be inserted. The medals are guided to a medal receiving tray 59 from a medal discharge port 58 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12 . The hopper device 53 has a function of discharging the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiving tray 59 through the medal ejection port 58 when a winning corresponding to the awarding of medals is established on the above-mentioned effective line. there is

Below the medal slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 is provided to be pushed when the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are stuck in the selector 52. As shown in FIG. Further, on the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R, there is a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum amount of credited virtual medals that can be betted at once, and two virtual medals are inserted at once. and a third credit insertion button 49 for inserting one virtual medal at a time.

A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the checkout button 51 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 58 as real medals.

A power supply device 54 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 53 as shown in FIG. The power supply device 54 includes a power button 55 operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and a setting state of the slot machine 10 from "setting 1" to "setting 1". and a setting key insertion hole 57 operated to change within the range of setting 6”.

<Designs attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R>
Next, the symbols attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 3 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and these numbers are visible to the main controller 70 through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. These are numbers for recognizing symbols, and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “bell” symbol (for example, the 20th reel on the left reel 32L), a “replay 1” symbol (for example, the 19th reel on the left reel 32L), a “watermelon” symbol (for example, the 18th reel on the left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol (eg, 15th on the left reel 32L), "Replay 2" symbol (eg, 11th on the left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 10th on the left reel 32L), "Cherry" There are nine types of symbols (eg, 9th on the left reel 32L), "replay 3" symbols (eg, 6th on the left reel 32L), and "white 7" symbols (eg, 5th on the left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 3, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIG. 4 is a front view of the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R. Each of the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R.

In this slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect positions where symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line connecting the lower symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbols of the right reel 32R. Spinning of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started with a prescribed number of medals bet, and when a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, a privilege of payout of medals and a replay are given. Either the privilege of the privilege or the privilege of transition of the game state is given.

That is, in the present slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which winning can be established. The main line ML is set not as a straight line but as a bending line. Therefore, a subline SL1 connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, and the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the upper pattern of the middle reel 32M and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R. A subline SL3 connecting a connected subline SL2, a middle pattern of the left reel 32L, a middle pattern of the middle reel 32M and a middle pattern of the right reel 32R, a lower pattern of the left reel 32L, a lower pattern of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. A subline SL4 connecting the lower symbols and a subline SL5 connecting the lower symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M and the upper symbols of the right reel 32R are arranged on a line extending in a straight line. Even if a combination is established, a winning prize is not established. The number of main lines is not limited to one, and may be two, three, four, or five or more. A configuration in which the number of main lines to be activated by each switch may be different. Further, the main line is not limited to a bent line, and may be a straight line.

5 to 7, the relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning will be described below. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning, and FIG. 6(a) to FIG. 6(g) and FIG. (a) to FIG. 7(g) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the mode of the stop symbols when each winning occurs.

The minor combination prizes for which medals are paid out include 1st to 12th compensation prizes, 1st bell prizes, 2nd bell prizes, 1st watermelon prizes and 2nd watermelon prizes.

Specifically, on the main line ML, the left reel 32L has any one of the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol, and the middle reel 32M has the stopped symbol "Replay 1" symbol, "Replay 2" symbol and "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is any of "Replay 1" symbol, "Replay 2" symbol and "Replay 3" symbol If it is, it will be one of the 1st compensation winning prize to the 9th compensation winning prize. Also, when the "Red 7", "Bell", and "Bell" symbols stop from the left on the main line ML, the 10th compensation prize is won, and the "BAR" and "Bell" symbols from the left on the main line ML. And when the "bell" pattern stops, the 11th supplementary prize is won, and when the "watermelon" pattern, the "bell" pattern and the "bell" pattern from the left on the main line ML stop, the 12th supplementary prize is awarded. When any one of the first to twelfth supplementary prizes is won, one medal is paid out when three coins are betted, and two medals are paid out when two coins are betted.

On the main line ML, the stopped symbol of the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol of the middle reel 32M is any of "replay 1", "replay 2" and "replay 3" symbols, and the right When the symbol stopped on the reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the first bell wins. When the first bell wins, four medals are paid out if three are bet, and two medals are paid out if two are bet.

In the case of winning the first bell, as shown in FIG. 6(a), the stop symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are all "bell" symbols on the lower subline SL4. A player can easily recognize that a prize has been won when a combination of the same symbols is stop-displayed on a straight line. In this case, the combination of the same "bell" pattern is stopped and displayed when the first bell is won, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the occurrence of the winning in the configuration designed to diversify the manner of establishing the winning on the main line ML. becomes possible.

On the main line ML, the stopped symbol of the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol of the right reel 32R is a "cherry" symbol and a "watermelon" symbol. In either case, the second bell wins. When the second bell wins, 9 medals are paid out if 3 are bet, and 2 medals are paid out if 2 are bet.

In the case of winning the second bell, as shown in FIG. 6(b), the stop symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are all "bell" symbols on the rising sub-line SL5. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second bell has been won. Further, the line on which the combination of "Bell" symbols is stop-displayed when the second bell is won is the sub-line SL5, which is different from the sub-line SL4 on which the combination of "Bell" patterns is stop-displayed when the first bell is won. Due to this difference, it is possible to distinguish between the first bell winning and the second bell winning for the player who judges the presence or absence of winning based on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed.

On the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is one of the "replay 1" symbol, the "replay 2" symbol and the "replay 3" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the right When the symbol stopped on the reel 32R is a "watermelon" symbol, the first watermelon wins. When the first watermelon wins, four medals are paid out if three are bet, and two medals are paid out if two are bet.

In the case of winning the first watermelon, as shown in FIG. 6(c), the stop symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can all be "watermelon" symbols on the sub-line SL1 that descends to the right. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first watermelon has won. However, depending on the stop timing of the left reel 32L, the combinations of "watermelon" symbols are not stop-displayed in a straight line. When the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the "cherry" symbol passes through the upper stage, the middle stage or the lower stage, the combination of the "watermelon" symbol is stop-displayed on the subline SL1 when the first watermelon prize is won.

On the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is either a "BAR" symbol or a "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is " If the symbol is "watermelon", the second watermelon wins. When the second watermelon wins, four medals are paid out if three are bet, and two medals are paid out if two are bet.

In the case of winning the second watermelon prize, as shown in FIG. 6(d), the stopped symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are all "watermelon" symbols on the lower sub-line SL4. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second watermelon has won. The line on which the combination of "watermelon" symbols is stop-displayed when the second watermelon wins is the sub-line SL4, which is different from the sub-line SL1 on which the combination of "watermelon" symbols is stop-displays when the first watermelon wins. Due to this difference, it is possible to distinguish between the first watermelon winning and the second watermelon winning for the player who judges whether or not the combination of the same symbols has been stop-displayed.

Winnings that give the privilege of replaying the next game without betting medals (or virtual medals) include normal replay winnings, 1st bell replay winnings, 2nd bell replay winnings, and 1st bell replay winnings. There are a cherry replay win, a second cherry replay win, a first special replay win, a second special replay win, a first special replay win, a second special replay win, and a third special replay win.

Specifically, on the main line ML, the left reel 32L has any one of the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol, and the middle reel 32M has the stopped symbol If the pattern is one of "Replay 1", "Replay 2" and "Replay 3" and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is either "White 7" or "Watermelon", the normal replay wins. becomes.

In the case of normal replay winning, as shown in FIG. 6(e), all of the stopped symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the middle sub-line SL3 are "replay 1", "replay 2" and "replay 3" symbols. Any of the patterns. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the normal replay win has been achieved.

On the main line ML, the stopped symbol of the left reel 32L is any one of the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol. , and when the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is either the "cherry" symbol or the "watermelon" symbol, the first bell replay wins.

In the case of winning the first bell replay, as shown in FIG. 6(f), the stopped symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the upper subline SL2 are all "bell" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first bell replay has been won. In addition, the line on which the combination of "Bell" symbols is stop-displayed when the first bell replay wins is the subline SL2, and the sub-line SL4 on which the combination of "Bell" patterns is stop-displayed when the first bell wins and when the second bell wins. This is different from the subline SL5 in which the combination of "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed. Due to such a difference, it is possible to distinguish the first bell replay winning from the first bell winning and the second bell winning for the player who judges whether or not the winning is based on whether the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed. It becomes possible.

On the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is one of the "replay 1" symbol, the "replay 2" symbol and the "replay 3" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the right If the stopped symbol on the reel 32R is any one of the "white 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol, the second bell replay wins.

In the case of winning the second bell replay, as shown in FIG. 6(g), the stopped symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are all "bell" symbols in the middle sub-line SL3. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second bell replay has been won. In addition, the line on which the combination of "bell" symbols is stop-displayed when the second bell replay wins is subline SL3, the line on which the combination of "bell" patterns is stop-displayed when the first bell wins is subline SL4, when the second bell wins It differs from the sub-line SL5 in which the combination of "bell" symbols is statically displayed and the sub-line SL2 in which the combination of "bell" symbols is statically displayed upon winning the first bell replay. Due to this difference, the second bell replay winning is changed to the first bell winning, the second bell winning and the first bell replay winning for the player who determines whether or not the winning is determined by whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed. It is possible to distinguish between

On the main line ML, the stopped symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white 7" symbol and the "cherry" symbol. and "watermelon" symbol, the first cherry replay wins.

In the case of winning the first cherry replay, as shown in FIG. 7(a), the stop symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can all be "cherry" symbols on the subline SL1 that descends to the right. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first cherry replay has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of the left reel 32L or the right reel 32R, the combinations of "cherry" symbols are not stop-displayed in a straight line. When winning a combination corresponding to the winning of the first cherry replay, an image display device 24 provided on the front door 12 attempts to stop and display a "cherry" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification. Motivational rendition is performed. When each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to stop and display the "cherry" symbols after confirming the effect, two "cherry" symbols or three "cherry" symbols are stopped on the subline SL1. can be displayed.

On the main line ML, the stopped symbol of the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol of the middle reel 32M is any one of "replay 1", "replay 2" and "replay 3" symbols, and the right If the stopped symbol on the reel 32R is any one of the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol, the second cherry replay wins.

In the case of winning the second cherry replay, as shown in FIG. 7(b), the stop symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R can all be "cherry" symbols in the upper sub-line SL2. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second cherry replay has been won. However, depending on the timing at which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, the combinations of "cherry" symbols are not stopped and displayed in a straight line. When winning a combination corresponding to the winning of the second cherry replay, an image display device 24 provided on the front door 12 attempts to stop and display a "cherry" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification. Motivational rendition is performed. When each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to stop displaying the "cherry" symbols after confirming the effect, two "cherry" symbols or three "cherry" symbols are stopped on the subline SL2. can be displayed. Also, the line on which the combination of "cherry" symbols is stop-displayed at the time of winning the second cherry replay is the sub-line SL2, which is different from the sub-line SL1 at which the combination of "cherry" patterns is stop-displayed at the time of winning the first cherry replay. Due to such a difference, it is possible to distinguish between the first cherry replay winning and the second cherry replay winning for the player who judges whether or not the winning is based on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed.

On the main line ML, the stopped symbols on the left reel 32L are any one of "replay 1" symbols, "replay 2" symbols and "replay 3" symbols, and the stopped symbols on the right reel 32R are "replay 1" symbols and "replay" symbols. 2” symbol or “replay 3” symbol, the first special replay prize is won. Incidentally, regarding whether or not the first special replay prize is awarded, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is arbitrary.

On the main line ML, the stopped symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay 1" symbol and the "replay 2" symbol. If it is either the symbol or the "Replay 3" symbol, it becomes the second special replay winning prize.

On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol and the stopped symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white 7" symbol, the first special replay prize is awarded. Incidentally, regarding whether or not the first special replay prize is won, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is arbitrary.

In the case of winning the first special replay, as shown in FIG. 7(c), the stop symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are all "white 7" symbols on the sub-line SL1 falling to the right and the sub-line SL5 rising to the right. can be. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first special replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, the combinations of "white 7" symbols are not stop-displayed in a straight line. When a winning combination corresponding to the first special replay prize is won, the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12 stops and displays the "white 7" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as a chance notification. A production that motivates to play is executed. By stopping operation of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 to stop display of the "white 7" pattern after confirming the effect, three "white 7" patterns can be stopped on the sub-line SL1. Note that the effect can be executed even when the winning combination corresponding to the first special replay prize is not won.

On the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is either a "white 7" symbol or a "replay 1" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is If it is a "white 7" symbol, it will be the second special replay prize.

In the case of winning the second special replay, as shown in FIG. 7(d), the stop symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the upper subline SL2 can all be "white 7" symbols. In addition to this, all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the lower sub-line SL4 can be "white 7" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second special replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, the combinations of "white 7" symbols are not stop-displayed in a straight line. When a winning combination corresponding to the second special replay prize is won, the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12 stops and displays the "white 7" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as a chance notification. A production that motivates to play is executed. By stopping operation of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 to stop display of the "white 7" pattern after confirming the effect, three "white 7" patterns can be stopped and displayed on the sub line SL2. Further, the line on which the combination of "white 7" symbols is stop-displayed when the second special replay prize is won is the sub-line SL2 or the sub-line SL4, and the line where the combination of "white 7" symbols is stop-displayed on the first special replay win is the sub-line SL1. and sub-line SL5. Due to such a difference, it is possible to distinguish between the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning for the player who judges whether or not the combination of the same symbols has been stop-displayed. Note that the effect can be executed even when the winning combination corresponding to the second special replay prize is not won.

On the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is one of the "white 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the right reel 32M has a stopped symbol. If the stop symbol of 32R is the "red 7" symbol, the third special replay win is awarded.

In the case of winning the third special replay, as shown in FIG. 7(e), all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the lower subline SL4 can be "red 7" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the third special replay prize has been won. However, depending on the timing at which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, the combinations of "red 7" symbols are not stopped and displayed in a straight line. When a winning combination corresponding to the third special replay prize is won, the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12 stops and displays the "red 7" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as a chance notification. A production that motivates to play is executed. By stopping operation of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 to stop display of the "red 7" symbols after confirming the effect, three "red 7" symbols can be stopped on the subline SL4. Note that the effect can be executed even when the winning combination corresponding to the third special replay prize is not won.

If any of the above replay wins, it is possible to play the next game without betting on both medals and virtual medals. Specifically, in a game in which three medals are bet, if any of the replay wins, it is possible to start the next game with three bets while eliminating the need to bet both medals and virtual medals. It becomes possible. In addition, when one of the replay wins in a game in which two medals are betted, it is possible to start the next game with two bets while eliminating the need to bet both medals and virtual medals. .

A CB (challenge bonus) prize is available as a state transition prize in which only game state transition is performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "BAR" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol. If there is, it will be a CB prize. When the CB winning is established, the game state shifts to the CB state.

The CB state is a game state in which when the combination of symbols corresponding to a small winning combination stops on the main line ML, medals are paid out as a winning regardless of whether there is a winning combination. For example, even if the win flag corresponding to the first bell winning is not set to "1", when the combination of symbols corresponding to the first bell winning stops on the main line ML, the first bell winning The number of medals corresponding to is given to the player. On the other hand, the replay winning prize is established on the condition that the corresponding combination is won in the lottery.

In the CB state, different reel control is performed than in the non-CB state, which is not the CB state. In the non-CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled so that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can slide up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated. In other words, in the non-CB state, it can be said that the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are controlled to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R within a specified time (190 msec) after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated. On the other hand, in the CB state, the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are subjected to the above-described reel control, that is, the same reel control as in the normal game, but the left reel 32L is not subjected to the reel control. As for the left reel 32L, reel control is performed such that the left reel 32L is slid only up to one symbol after the left stop button 42 is operated. In other words, in the CB game state, it can be said that the left reel 32L is reel-controlled to stop within a specified time (75 msec) shorter than the specified time after the left stop button 42 is operated.

In the CB state, if the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning prize is won, the replay winning prize is given priority, and if the replay winning prize is not possible, one of the minor winning prizes is generated at 100%. In addition, if the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning prize is not won, any minor winning combination is generated at 100%. In this case, in the CB state, the number of bets for each game is set to two. As already explained, when the number of bets is 2, the number of medals to be paid out is 2 even if any minor winning combination is established. Therefore, in the CB state, the number of medals to be paid out when a small combination is won is only two. Also, if a replay win is established in the CB state, the number of bets in the next game is two. Therefore, in the CB state, in each game in which two coins are betted, either two medals are paid out or the game is played again in the state where two coins are betted. do not do. The CB state ends when 19 small wins occur.

In the CB game, the reel control to slip only up to one symbol is not limited to the left reel 32L, but the reel corresponding to the stop button operated first is controlled to slip up to one symbol. may be performed, and reel control may be performed such that only predetermined reels are slid by a maximum of one symbol. Further, the stop button operated in a certain order is controlled such that the reel corresponding to the stop button operated second or the stop button operated last is controlled to slide only up to one symbol. Reel control may be performed such that the reel corresponding to .

As described above, there are small wins, replay wins, and CB wins as modes of winning, but the lottery results of the internal lottery include outliers in which none of these wins can occur. Then, in the case of a misalignment result, as shown in FIG. A combination of "red 7" symbols can be stopped on the middle sub-line SL3. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the result is a failure. However, in the case of the result of being out of line, the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the above wins is not stop-displayed on the main line ML. In addition, since the subline SL3 is the line on which the combination of "white 7" symbols or the combination of "red 7" symbols is stopped and displayed in the case of the result of being out, the first special replay winning prize, the second special replay winning prize and the third special replay winning prize It is different from the sub-line in which a combination of "white 7" symbols or a combination of "red 7" symbols is stop-displayed in the case of a replay win. Due to this difference, the player who judges whether or not the combination of the same symbols has won a prize is determined by whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed, and the result of the loss is determined for the first special replay win, the second special replay win, and the third special replay win. It is possible to distinguish

<Device for executing various notifications and various effects>
Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

On the game panel 20 of the front door 12, below the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R, a credit display part 61 for displaying the number of virtual medals stored and the number of medals obtained at the time of winning are displayed. A winning number display section 62 is provided. These display units 61 and 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, and each segment uses a single-color light emitting LED such as green.

Here, as shown in FIG. 8A, the acquired number display section 62 is provided with an internal state notification section 63 separately from the segment light emitting section 62a for displaying the acquired number. The internal state notification unit 63 uses a single-color light-emitting type LED with a display color different from that of the segment light-emitting unit 62a. In addition, while the segment light emitting portion 62a is arranged on the central side of the display surface of the obtained number display portion 62, the internal state notification portion 63 is arranged on the corner side of the display surface of the obtained number display portion 62. there is

The internal state notification unit 63 is a display unit for notifying that the CB combination is won. When the CB role is won, unlike other winning roles, the winning status of the CB role is carried over until the CB prize is established in the main line ML, and when the CB award is established, the winning status of the CB role is cancelled. . In this case, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned off as a non-internal notification mode when the CB hand is not won and in the CB state, and as an internal notification mode when the CB hand is won. Lighted state. This lighting state is a state in which the lighting is maintained, but instead of this, it may be configured to blink at a predetermined cycle.

By providing the internal state notification unit 63, it becomes possible to notify the manager of the game hall or the like that the CB combination is won. In addition, the segment light-emitting portion 62a of the acquired number display portion 62 is turned on when medals or virtual medals are given at the end of one game, and turned off at the start of the next game. is maintained until a new small winning prize is established. Therefore, in a configuration in which the internal state notification unit 63 is arranged in the acquired number display unit 62 so as to prevent it from being too conspicuous to the player, the acquired number display unit 62 is in a situation where the CB combination is won. In , it is possible to positively create a situation in which only the internal state notification unit 63 is in a lighting state, and it is possible to facilitate confirmation of the internal state notification unit 63 for the manager of the game hall. Such an effect of facilitating confirmation can also be achieved by having the internal state notification section 63 emit light in a color different from that of the segment light emitting section 62a.

It should be noted that other displays such as a liquid crystal display device may be used as the segment light-emitting portions of the credit display portion 61 and the winning number display portion 62 and the internal state notification portion 63 . Even in this case, by setting the internal state reporting section 63 within the display screen of the acquired number display section 62, the confirmation of the internal state reporting section 63 can be facilitated.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 64 lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps emits various sound effects as the game progresses and notifies the player of the game state. A speaker 65 and an image display device 66 such as a liquid crystal display device for giving various information to the player are provided.

Below the image display device 66, a privilege point notification unit 67 and a stock notification unit 68 are provided, and on the game panel 20, a winning number notification unit 69 is provided to the right of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R. It is

FIG. 8B is a front view of the privilege point notification unit 67 and the stock notification unit 68. FIG. As will be described later in detail, when a predetermined role is won in the normal AT (assist time) state and the prize is won in the privilege point lottery process, privilege points are added, and the number of points accumulated by the addition is determined as the reference point. When the total number of points is 7, the set number of times in the normal AT state is incremented by one and the state is shifted to the additional state.

When the number of privilege points divided by 7 has a remainder of 1 or more, the privilege point notification unit 67 notifies the number of the remainder. The privilege point notification portion 67 is provided with 7×2 unit point display portions 67a using monochromatic LEDs. evenly distributed. Each of the pair of left and right display areas is provided with seven unit point display portions 67a. The unit point display portions 67a are lit. For example, when the number of privilege points is "5", the five unit point display portions 67a from the outside in each of the pair of left and right display areas are lit.

The stock notification unit 68 is for notifying the number of the quotient when the quotient obtained by dividing the number of privilege points by 7 is 1 or more. The stock notification unit 68 uses a multi-color LED, and the number of stocks in the normal AT state is notified by the color of the emitted light.

FIG. 8(c) is a front view of the number-of-wins notification unit 69. FIG. As will be described in detail later, the normal AT state includes a pre-branching AT state and a branching AT state. Then, when the normal AT state continues, as the battle effect, a victory effect for the ally side character or a draw effect between the ally side character and the enemy side character is performed, and when the normal AT state does not continue, As the battle effect, a defeat effect of the character on the ally side is performed. Then, when the winning effect is executed a predetermined number of times in a series of normal AT states, the winning probability in the continuous lottery in the normal AT state is set to the highest probability.

The number-of-wins display section 69 is for notifying the number of times the winning effects have been executed in a series of normal AT states. The winning number display section 69 is provided with 12 unit winning number display sections 69a using monochromatic LEDs, which corresponds to the predetermined number of executions. They are arranged in a circle. For example, when the number of win effects in a series of normal AT states is one, one unit win number display section 69a is turned on, and when the number is five, for example, five consecutive unit win numbers are displayed. The portion 69a is turned on.

<Various control devices>
The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, a main controller 70 is provided above the reel unit 31 . The main controller 70 is attached to the back plate of the housing 11 . The main controller 70 has a main board, which is housed in a board box as encapsulation means made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are fastened together by fastening units so that they cannot be opened. In order to open the circuit board box, it is necessary to release the fastening state, and breaking of the fastening state occurs when the fastening state is released. By confirming the presence or absence of the broken portion, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the board box has been opened.

The slot machine 10 is provided with a sub-controller 80 in addition to the main controller 70 . The sub-controller 80 is stacked behind the image display device 66 on the front door 12 . The sub-controller 80 controls the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, the image display device 66, the privilege point notification unit 67, the stock notification unit 68, and the number-of-wins notification unit 69 based on commands received from the main controller 70. . The sub-controller 80, like the main controller 70, has a control board housed in a board box.

<Electrical Configuration of Slot Machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The main control device 70 has a main control board 71 that controls the main game. An MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71 . The MPU 72 includes a ROM 73 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 72, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73. A RAM 74, a clock circuit 75 for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are incorporated. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 72, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 72, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, and 44a for individually detecting the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44; an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45; and credit insertion buttons 47, 48, and 49. credit insertion detection sensors 47a, 48a, and 49a that individually detect the operation of , a settlement detection sensor 51a that detects the operation of the settlement button 51, a payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, and a reset detection sensor 56a that detects the operation of the reset button 56. , and a setting key detection sensor 57 a for detecting insertion of a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 . Signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 72 .

On the output side of the MPU 72, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the credit display section 61, the winning number display section 62, the internal state A notification unit 63, a sub-control device 80, and the like are connected. In each game, the rotation drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R of the reel unit 31 is performed by the MPU 72, and the MPU 72 controls the drive of the hopper device 53 when a small win is established and medals are to be paid out. performed by Further, the display control of the credit display section 61, the winning number display section 62, and the internal state notification section 63 is directly executed by the MPU 72 without going through other control devices. A command is transmitted from the MPU 72 to the sub control device 80 at each timing of each game.

An external terminal board 90 is provided on the output side of the MPU 72 . Although not shown, the external terminal plate 90 is provided adjacent to the main controller 70 on the back plate of the housing 11 . Although details will be described later, the MPU 72 externally outputs various signals corresponding to the state of the slot machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall through the external terminal board 90 .

An input side of the MPU 72 is connected to a power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply 54 (not shown). The power supply device 54 is equipped with a power supply unit that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit. It monitors the voltage being applied, and outputs a power failure signal to the MPU 72 when the voltage is below the reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes power failure processing upon receiving the power failure signal, and after the power is restored, it is possible to return to the processing state before the power failure. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power-off power supply unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power-off power when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted. As a result, even when the supply of operating power from the external power source is interrupted, data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 in a situation where backup power can be supplied to the power supply unit during a power failure (for example, for one or two days). be done. However, the data stored in the RAM 74 is initialized by turning on the slot machine 10 while pressing the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54 .

The sub-control device 80 has a sub-control board 81 for executing execution control of various notifications and various effects. An MPU 82 is mounted on the sub-control board 81 . The MPU 82 includes a ROM 83 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 82, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 83. A RAM 84, a clock circuit 85 for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generating circuit, and the like are incorporated.

It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 82, and they may be individually integrated into chips. In addition, the RAM 84 is supplied with backup power from the power failure power supply unit of the power supply unit 54 in a situation where the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted, and in a situation where the backup power is supplied (for example, one day 2 days), the data is stored in the RAM 84 . However, the data stored in the RAM 84 is initialized by turning on the power of the slot machine 10 while pressing the reset button 56 provided on the power supply 54 .

The MPU 82 is provided with an input port and an output port. The MPU 72 of the main control device 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 82 as already described, and various commands are received from the MPU 72 .

An upper lamp 64 , a speaker 65 , an image display device 66 , a privilege point notification section 67 , a stock notification section 68 and a win number notification section 69 are connected to the output side of the MPU 82 . Based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control unit 70, the MPU 82 controls light emission of the upper lamp 64, controls sound output of the speaker 65, controls display of the image display device 66, controls light emission of the privilege point notification section 67, and controls the stock notification section. By executing the light emission control of 68 and the light emission control of the number-of-wins reporting unit 69, various reports and various effects are performed.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73 and RAM 74 of the main controller 70 are referred to as the main MPU 72, the main ROM 73 and the main RAM 74, respectively, and the MPU 82, ROM 83 and RAM 84 of the sub-controller 80 are respectively referred to as the sub-side. It is called MPU82, sub side ROM83, and sub side RAM84.

<Processing Executed by Main-side MPU 72 and Sub-side MPU 82>
Next, processing executed by the main MPU 72 and the sub MPU 82 will be described. First, the contents of basic processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described.

The processing of the main MPU 72 can be broadly divided into normal processing that is repeatedly executed after the main processing started upon power-on, and timer interrupt processing that periodically interrupts the normal processing and is started. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing will be explained first, and then the normal processing will be explained.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 msec.

In the register save processing shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal processing described later are saved in the main RAM 74. FIG. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1", and if the power failure flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S103, and the power failure processing is executed.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply 54 is input to the main MPU 72 . In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74 . After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the main RAM 74 is normal is calculated and stored in the main RAM 74, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

When the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed. That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the main MPU 72 performs interrupt end declaration processing to enable setting of the next timer interrupt. In step S106, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the respective stepping motors in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, sensor monitoring processing is performed to read the states of various sensors connected to the input port and to monitor whether the read results are normal. In step S108, a timer calculation process is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S109, counter processing for outputting the result of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts to the outside is performed.

In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands to the sub-control device 80 is performed. In step S111, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S112, the values of each register saved in the main side RAM 74 in the previous step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the main side MPU 72, respectively. Thereafter, in step S113, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S201, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the sub-controller 80 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the sub-controller 80 and the like is completed, the process proceeds to steps S203 to S219.

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the wait time before the start set in the previous game has elapsed. If the wait time before the start has not passed, the process of step S203 is executed again, and if the wait time before the start has passed, the start waiting process is executed in step S204. Note that when the wait time before the start is set, the measurement of the wait time is started when a negative determination is made once in step S203. If the wait time has not been set, the process proceeds directly to step S204.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has occurred in the previous game. If any of the replay winnings have occurred, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. When no replay win has occurred, it is determined whether or not a settlement button 51 has been operated, and when the settlement button 51 has been operated, the same number of medals as credited virtual medals are paid out. Perform medal return processing. After completion of the medal return process or when the settlement button 51 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither the insertion of medals nor the operation of the insertion of credit buttons 47 to 49 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the end of the start waiting process, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached a specified number (“3” or “2” in this embodiment), and the number of bets has not reached the specified number. In that case, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204. When the number of bets has reached the specified number, the pre-start external output setting process is executed in step S206. In the external output setting process, various settings for external output to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 90 are performed. Thereafter, in step S207, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated.

If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204. On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the prescribed number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, after activating the main line ML, acceptance of a bet is prohibited by controlling the selector 52 in step S208. After that, in step S209, a lottery process for performing a lottery for a winning combination in the current game is executed, and in step S210, various settings are made for external output to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 90. Execute the external output setting process at the start of the Then, in step S211, it is determined whether or not the freeze time set in the lottery process in step S209 has elapsed. If the freeze time has not passed, the process of step S211 is executed again, and if the freeze time has passed, the processes after step S212 are executed. When the freeze time is set, measurement of the freeze time is started when a negative determination is made once in step S211. If the freeze time has not been set, the process proceeds directly to step S212 and subsequent steps.

In step S212, a reel control process for driving and controlling the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed. Thereafter, in step S213, medal payout processing is executed. In the medal payout process, when a minor winning combination has been established in the current game, a process for awarding the player with the number of medals or virtual medals corresponding to the minor winning combination is executed. Specifically, when a virtual medal is awarded, a value corresponding to the current small winning combination is added to the virtual medal area provided in the main RAM 74, and the value of the virtual medal area reaches the maximum value. If so, the hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the number of medals exceeding the maximum value is paid out to the medal receiving tray 59.例文帳に追加

After that, in step S214, CB state processing for controlling the CB state is executed, in step S215 bonus AT management processing for controlling the bonus AT (assist time) state is executed, and the process proceeds to step S216. Then, an external output setting process at the time of completion for performing various settings for external output to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 90 is executed.

After that, in step S217, it is determined whether or not the wait flag before start provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and if an affirmative determination is made in step S217, the process directly returns to step S201. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S217, it is determined in step S218 whether or not the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has not passed, the process of step S218 is executed again. If the wait time has passed, the bonus AT setting process is executed in step S219, and then the process returns to step S201. Note that when the wait time is set, the measurement of the wait time is started when a negative determination is made once in step S218. If the wait time has not been set, the process proceeds directly to step S219.

Lottery processing in step S209, reel control processing in step S212, CB state processing in step S214, and bonus AT management processing in step S215 will be described in detail below. The external output setting processing in steps S206, S210 and S216 will be described in detail after the game flow is described.

<Lottery processing>
FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the lottery process of step S209 in the normal process (FIG. 11).

In step S301, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and the main MPU 72 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the main RAM 74 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41 . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, the lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is read from the main ROM 73 . In this slot machine 10, there are three types of game states in which the lottery table is different in the main MPU 72: CB non-internal state, CB internal post-state, and CB in-process state. In step S302, the current game state of the slot machine 10 is discriminated based on the content of the flag corresponding to the game state provided in the main RAM 74, and the lottery table corresponding to the game state is selected. Specifically, when the current game state is the CB non-internal state, the non-internal state lottery table is selected, and when the current game state is the CB internal post-state, the internal post-state lottery table is selected. If the current game state is the CB state, the lottery table for the CB state is selected.

In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned ON and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. The internal post-state lottery table is prepared so as to correspond one-to-one to six levels of setting states. The lottery table for the internal post-state with the highest expected medal payout value is selected when "setting 6" is selected. On the other hand, only one kind of lottery table for non-internal state and lottery table for CB are prepared so as to be common to all setting states.

Each lottery table will be explained. First, the non-internal state lottery table will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 15 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 13, index values IV are set in the non-internal state lottery table, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination and set with a point value PV. . The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value ("65535") of the free run counter.

Specifically, at IV=1, the second bell winning data, the first supplementary winning data, the fifth supplementary winning data, and the ninth supplementary winning data are set. When winning with IV=1, as shown in FIG. 15, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. A bell winning prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, any one of the first compensation winning prize, the fifth compensation winning prize and the ninth compensation winning prize can occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the first compensation winning prize, the fifth compensation winning prize, and the ninth compensation winning prize will occur.

For IV=2, as shown in FIG. 13, the second bell winning data, the second supplementary winning data, the fourth supplementary winning data, and the ninth supplementary winning data are set. When winning with IV=2, as shown in FIG. 15, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. A bell winning prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, any one of the second compensation winning prize, the fourth compensation winning prize and the ninth compensation winning prize can occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the second compensation winning prize, the fourth compensation winning prize, and the ninth compensation winning prize will occur.

For IV=3, as shown in FIG. 13, second bell winning data, second supplementary winning data, sixth supplementary winning data, and seventh supplementary winning data are set. When winning with IV=3, as shown in FIG. 15, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. A bell winning prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, any one of the second compensation winning prize, the sixth compensation winning prize and the seventh compensation winning prize can occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the second compensation winning prize, the sixth compensation winning prize, and the seventh compensation winning prize will occur.

For IV=4, as shown in FIG. 13, the second bell winning data, the third supplementary winning data, the fifth supplementary winning data, and the seventh supplementary winning data are set. When winning with IV=4, as shown in FIG. 15, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. A bell winning prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, any one of the third compensation winning prize, the fifth compensation winning prize and the seventh compensation winning prize can occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the third compensation winning prize, the fifth compensation winning prize, and the seventh compensation winning prize will occur.

For IV=5, as shown in FIG. 13, the first bell winning data, the first supplementary winning data, the third supplementary winning data, the fourth supplementary winning data, the fifth supplementary winning data, and the eighth Compensation winning data and ninth compensation winning data are set. When winning with IV=5, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the first bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In other cases, any of the first compensation winning, third compensation winning, fourth compensation winning, fifth compensation winning, eighth compensation winning and ninth compensation winning can occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, none of the first compensation winning prize, third compensation winning prize, fourth compensation winning prize, fifth compensation winning prize, eighth compensation winning prize and ninth compensation winning prize will occur. there is a possibility. The probability of this dropout occurring is lower than when IV=1-4.

For IV=6, as shown in FIG. 13, the first bell winning data, the first supplementary winning data, the second supplementary winning data, the fourth supplementary winning data, the sixth supplementary winning data, and the eighth Compensation winning data and ninth compensation winning data are set. When winning with IV=6, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the first bell prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In other cases, any one of the first compensation winning, second compensation winning, fourth compensation winning, sixth compensation winning, eighth compensation winning and ninth compensation winning can occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, none of the first compensation winning prize, second compensation winning prize, fourth compensation winning prize, sixth compensation winning prize, eighth compensation winning prize and ninth compensation winning prize will occur. there is a possibility. The probability of this dropout occurring is lower than when IV=1-4.

For IV=7, as shown in FIG. 13, the first watermelon winning data, the second watermelon winning data, the tenth supplementary winning data, the eleventh supplementary winning data, and the twelfth supplementary winning data are set. ing. If the game is won at IV=7, as shown in FIG. 15, the first watermelon win or the second watermelon win can be established when the first stop is the left reel 32L. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that neither the first watermelon winning nor the second watermelon winning will occur. Further, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, any one of the tenth compensation winning prize, the eleventh compensation winning prize and the twelfth compensation winning prize can occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the 10th compensation winning prize, the 11th compensation winning prize, and the 12th compensation winning prize will occur.

For IV=8, as shown in FIG. 13, normal replay winning data is set. When winning with IV=8, as shown in FIG. 15, a normal replay winning is guaranteed regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44.

CB winning data is set to IV=9 as shown in FIG. When winning with IV=9, CB winning can occur regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44, there is a possibility that the CB winning will not occur.

When the non-internal state lottery table is selected, the probability of winning when IV=1, the probability of winning when IV=2, the probability of winning when IV=3, and the probability of winning when IV=4 The probability of winning is about 1/9.3 respectively, and the probability of winning when IV=5 and the probability of winning when IV=6 are about 1/11.6, respectively. , the probability of winning when IV=7 is about 1/66.7, the probability of winning when IV=8 is about 1/7, and the probability of winning when IV=9 is It is about 1/4.3.

Next, the internal post-state lottery table will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 15 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 14, in the lottery table for internal post-state, index values IV are set in the same way as in the lottery table for non-internal state, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination. and a point value PV is set.

Winning data set to IV=1 to 8 are the same as in the non-internal state lottery table.

IV=9 is set with first bell replay winning data and first cherry replay winning data. When winning with IV=9, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the first bell replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44. , otherwise, the first cherry replay win is reliably generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44.

For IV=10, as shown in FIG. 14, second bell replay winning data, first cherry replay winning data, and first special replay winning data are set. When winning with IV=10, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second bell replay winning prize or the first special replay winning prize occurs. In this case, the second bell replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, whereas the first special replay winning may occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. do. When winning at IV=10 and the left reel 32L is stopped first, if the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is the timing enabling the occurrence of the second bell replay winning, the second bell replay winning is given priority, and if the timing is such that the second bell replay winning is not possible, the first special replay winning is generated. Further, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, the first cherry replay winning prize is reliably generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44.

In IV=11, as shown in FIG. 14, first bell replay winning data, first cherry replay winning data, second special replay winning data, and third special replay winning data are set. When winning with IV=11, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the first bell replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44. . Otherwise, a first cherry replay winning prize, a second special replay winning prize, or a third special replay winning prize is generated. In this case, the second special replay winning prize and the third special replay winning prize may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. Occurs regardless of operation timing. When IV=11 is won and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped first, the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 is the timing at which the second special replay prize or the third special replay prize can be generated. , the occurrence of the 2nd special replay winning prize or the 3rd special replay winning prize is prioritized, and if the timing does not allow the occurrence of the 2nd special replay winning prize or the 3rd special replay winning prize, the 1st cherry replay winning prize occurs.

In IV=12, as shown in FIG. 14, second bell replay winning data, first cherry replay winning data, first special replay winning data, and second special replay winning data are set. When winning with IV=12, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second bell replay winning or the first special replay winning occurs. In this case, the second bell replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, whereas the first special replay winning may occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. do. When winning at IV=12 and the left reel 32L is stopped first, if the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44 is the timing enabling the occurrence of the second bell replay winning, the second bell replay winning is given priority, and if the timing is such that the second bell replay winning is not possible, the first special replay winning is generated. Also, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, a first cherry replay winning prize or a second special replay winning prize is generated. In this case, the second special replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, whereas the first cherry replay winning may occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. do. If IV=12 is won and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped first, if the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is the timing that enables the occurrence of the second special replay prize, the second The occurrence of the second special replay winning prize is given priority, and the first cherry replay winning prize is generated when the timing is such that the second special replay winning prize cannot be generated.

In IV=13, as shown in FIG. 14, second bell replay winning data, first cherry replay winning data, first special replay winning data, and first special replay winning data are set. If the game is won at IV=13, as shown in FIG. 15, the second bell replay win or the first special replay win occurs when the first stop is the left reel 32L. In this case, the second bell replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, whereas the first special replay winning may occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. do. When winning at IV=13 and the left reel 32L is stopped first, if the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is the timing enabling the occurrence of the second bell replay winning, the second bell replay winning is given priority, and if the timing is such that the second bell replay winning is not possible, the first special replay winning is generated. Also, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, a first cherry replay winning prize or a first special replay winning prize is generated. In this case, the first special replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, whereas the first cherry replay winning may occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. do. If a win is made at IV=13 and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped, if the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 is the timing that enables the generation of the first special replay prize, the second Priority is given to the occurrence of the first special replay winning prize, and the first cherry replay winning prize is generated when the timing is such that the first special replay winning prize cannot be generated.

IV=14, as shown in FIG. 14, is set with first cherry replay winning data. When winning with IV=14, as shown in FIG. 15, the first cherry replay winning is surely generated regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44. .

At IV=15, as shown in FIG. 14, second cherry replay winning data is set. When winning with IV=15, as shown in FIG. 15, the second cherry replay winning is surely generated regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44. .

For IV=16, as shown in FIG. 14, first special replay winning data and second special replay winning data are set. When winning with IV=16, as shown in FIG. 15, the first special replay winning prize or the second special replay winning prize occurs regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. In this case, the second special replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, whereas the first special replay winning may occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. do. In the case of winning with IV=16, if the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is the timing at which the occurrence of the second special replay winning prize is possible, the second special replay winning prize is given priority. If the timing is such that the special replay prize cannot be generated, the first special replay prize is generated.

If the internal post-state lottery table is selected, the probability of winning when IV=1, the probability of winning when IV=2, the probability of winning when IV=3, and the probability of winning when IV=4. The probability of winning is about 1/9.3 respectively, and the probability of winning when IV=5 and the probability of winning when IV=6 are about 1/11.6, respectively. , the probability of winning when IV=7 is about 1/66.7, the probability of winning when IV=8 is about 1/2.9, and the probability of winning when IV=9. The probability of winning is about 1/65, the probability of winning when IV=10 is about 1/135, the probability of winning when IV=11 is about 1/3277, and the probability of winning when IV=12 is about 1/3277. The probability of winning is about 1/1456, the probability of winning when IV=13 is about 1/1456, the probability of winning when IV=14 is about 1/212, and the probability of winning when IV=14 is about 1/212. = 15, the probability of winning is about 1/185, and the probability of winning when IV = 16 is about 1/328. The probability of becoming is 1/65536.

Next, the CB state lottery table will be described.

Index values IV are set in the CB state lottery table in the same manner as in the non-internal state lottery table and the internal post-state lottery table, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination. A point value PV is also set. In the lottery table for CB status, only normal replay winning data is set with IV=1, and other winning data is not set. Also, the winning probability is the same as in the case of the internal post-state lottery table. However, it is not limited to this, and the winning probability of the normal replay combination may be higher or lower than in the case of the internal post-state lottery table.

As described above, only the normal replay combination is set in the lottery table for the CB state, but as already explained, in the CB state, if the normal replay combination is not won, a small combination wins regardless of the result of the lottery process. Furthermore, reel control is executed so that any of the minor wins will surely occur in the situation where the normal replay combination has not been won. Therefore, in the CB state, when the normal replay combination is won, the normal replay winning prize is surely generated, and when the normal replay combination is not won, any minor winning combination is surely generated.

Returning to the description of the lottery process (FIG. 12), after selecting the lottery table in step S302, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining the winning combination is set in step S304. do. In this determination value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current determination value DV to set a new determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, the process advances to step S306 to execute winning data acquisition processing for setting the winning combination data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM74.

In the winning data acquisition process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16, first, in step S401, a corresponding winning flag setting process is executed. For example, when IV = 1 is won in the state after the CB internal state, a flag indicating that it was won with IV = 1 among the flags provided in the main side RAM 74 and a second bell winning "1" is set to each of the flag, the first compensation winning flag, the fifth compensation winning flag, and the ninth compensation winning flag. In addition, for example, when winning IV=8 in the state after the CB internal state, a flag indicating that the winning at IV=8 among the flags provided in the main side RAM 74 and the normal replay winning Set "1" to each of the flags.

In the subsequent step S402, it is determined whether or not the CB winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 has been set to "1" in the previous step S401. If an affirmative determination is made in step S402, after the lighting processing of the internal state notification unit 63 is executed in step S403, the winning data acquisition processing ends. As a result, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned on, and the manager of the game hall and the players are notified that the CB is in the post-internal state.

If a negative determination is made in step S402, it is determined in step S404 whether or not the normal replay winning flag is set to "1". If an affirmative determination is made in step S404, a push order lottery process is executed in step S405, and a push order command including push order data corresponding to the result of the push order lottery process is sub-submitted in step S406. After setting to transmit to the side MPU 82, the process of acquiring the winning data is finished.

As already explained, when the normal replay combination is won, the normal replay winning occurs regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. In this case, in step S405, a push order lottery process is executed in order to generate an opportunity for setting the AT1 signal, which will be described later, to the OFF state. In the pressing order lottery process, the first reel to be stopped and the second reel to be stopped are determined by lottery, and a lottery is performed so that the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is selected as the first reel to be stopped. The sub-side MPU 82 controls the display of the image display device 66 so that the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the pushing order data of the pushing order command is displayed when the normal AT state described later continues. to run. Actions and effects resulting from the execution of such processing will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S404, it is determined in step S407 whether or not the first special replay winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S407, the winning data acquisition process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S407, in step S408, after setting a value corresponding to the first freeze time (specifically 39 sec) to the freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74, the winning data end the acquisition process.

If the value of the freeze counter is 1 or more, a negative determination is made in step S211 in the normal processing (FIG. 11), and execution of the processing from step S212 onwards is awaited. That is, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R do not start rotating. Also, the value set in the freeze counter is periodically decremented in the timer subtraction process of step S108 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10). Thus, when the first special replay winning flag is set to "1" as a result of the lottery process, the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is waited for 39 seconds. During this freeze period, as will be described later, control by the sub-side MPU 82 is performed so that the first freeze-compatible effect is performed on the speaker 65 and the image display device 66 . This allows the player to clearly recognize that the first special replay combination has been won.

If the win flag set to "1" is not the CB win flag, the win flag is cleared to "0" after the game in which the win flag is set ends. On the other hand, if the winning flag set to "1" is the CB winning flag, it is reset under the condition that the CB winning has been established. In other words, the state in which the CB winning flag is set to "1" may be valid over a plurality of games.

Returning to the description of the lottery process (FIG. 12), if the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the following step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 to continue the determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

If it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the lottery processing result of the current game is a losing result. In this case, in step S309, it is determined whether or not it is in the CB internal post-state by checking the flag in the main RAM 74 . When an affirmative determination is made in step S309, a value corresponding to the second freeze time (specifically 35 sec) is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74 in step S310.

As already explained, when the value of the freeze counter is 1 or more, a negative determination is made in step S211 in the normal processing (FIG. 11), and execution of the processing from step S212 onwards is awaited. That is, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R do not start rotating. Also, the value set in the freeze counter is periodically decremented by the timer subtraction process of step S108 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10). As a result, when the result of the lottery process is a failure in the post-CB internal state, the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is waited for 35 seconds. During this freeze period, as will be described later, control by the sub-side MPU 82 is executed so that the second freeze corresponding effect is executed in the speaker 65 and the image display device 66 . As a result, the player can clearly recognize that the lottery result has been lost in the post-CB internal state.

If the process of step S306 has been executed, if a negative determination is made in step S309, or if the process of step S310 has been executed, this means that the winning judgment has been completed. In this case, a lottery result command is set in step S311. The lottery result command is a command sent to the sub-control device 80 in order to let the sub-controller 80 grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the role, and the lottery result command includes data corresponding to the result of the win/loss determination of the role. Thereafter, in step S312, stop information first setting processing for setting stop information for reel stop control is performed, and this lottery processing ends.

<Reel control processing>
Next, the reel control process of step S212 in the normal process (FIG. 11) will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S501, a rotation start process for starting rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed. In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the main side RAM 74 is performed. By performing such processing, stepping motor acceleration processing is started in the stepping motor control processing of step S106 in the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. Further, when the rotational speeds of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become constant, the main MPU 72 can generate a stop command by turning on lamps (not shown) of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Players and the like are notified of the fact.

Following the rotation start process, in step S502, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop buttons 42-44 has been operated. If none of the stop buttons 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop buttons 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, the process advances to step S503 to determine whether or not the stop button corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S502 and waits until any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S504.

A stop instruction command is a command sent to the sub-controller 80 in order to grasp which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S505 to S511 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In step S505, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop button is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step S506, based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74, the number of reel slides to be stopped this time is calculated.

In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step S506, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74. FIG.

After that, in step S507, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. In step S508, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol. conduct. After that, in step S510, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S511, and the process returns to step S502.

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12). When the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop, it is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") with respect to the arrival symbol that has reached the base position. As the stop information, sliding number data indicating the correspondence between each symbol and the sliding number is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in association with each lottery result and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the sliding number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stopping order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. .

As a process for setting the stop information, the first stop information setting process executed in step S312 of the lottery process (FIG. 12) and the stop information first set process executed in step S511 of the reel control process (FIG. 17) There is a second setting process. In the first stop information setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the lottery process. As for the stop information set in this case, if IV=1 to 7 in the CB non-internal state, the stop information corresponding to the relationship between the first stop and the winning combination as shown in FIG. If IV=1 to 7 and 9 to 13 in the post state, stop information corresponding to the relationship between the first stop and the winning combination as shown in FIG. 15 is set.

In the second stop information setting process, the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74 in the first stop information setting process or the previous second stop information setting process is changed after the reel is stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, and the stop numbers of the stopped reels 32L, 32M and 32R. do. In the present slot machine 10, when winning is won when IV=1 to 7, 9 to 13 in the CB non-internal state and the CB post-internal state (see FIG. 15), set winning data and a stop command Stop information second setting processing is performed to change the winning mode established by the order of operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 that generated the , and the stop result.

By the way, the symbols forming the symbol combination corresponding to the 1st bell win, 2nd bell win, normal replay win, 1st bell replay win, 1st cherry replay win, 2nd cherry replay win or 1st special replay win are: The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged so that the maximum number of symbols spaced apart in the winding direction is four symbols. In such a configuration, the combination of the result of the lottery process and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is the first bell winning, the second bell winning, the normal replay winning, the first bell replay winning, the first cherry replay winning, and the second bell winning. Stop information is set so that the winning occurs regardless of the order of operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 when any one of the 2 cherry replay winning and the first special replay winning is supported.

In addition, in the post-CB internal state, under the condition that the CB winning flag is set to "1", one of the minor winning combinations or the replay winning combination is won. Alternatively, the stop information is set so that the replay winning prize is given priority over the CB winning prize. For example, in the case of winning with IV=1 in the CB internal state, even if the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at the timing at which the CB winning can be generated, the small win will not be possible in relation to the stop information. By selecting the number of slips with priority, a small win is generated and a CB win is not generated. Further, for example, if a replay combination is won in the post-CB internal state, even if the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at the timing at which the CB winning can occur, the replay winning will not be possible due to the relationship with the stop information. A replay prize is generated by selecting a sliding number with priority, and a CB prize is not generated. However, if the lottery result is lost, there is no combination that is given priority over the CB winning, so depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the CB winning may occur.

Returning to the description of the reel control process (FIG. 17), when it is determined in step S510 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, the winning determination process is executed in step S512, and the process proceeds to step S513. After setting a prize result command including data corresponding to the result of the prize determination process as an object to be output to the sub-control device 80, the reel control process is terminated.

FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the winning determination process.

In the winning determination process, in step S601, the type of symbol stopped on the main line ML on the left reel 32L is grasped, and in step S602, the type of symbol stopped on the main line ML on the middle reel 32M is determined. The type is grasped, and in step S603, the type of symbol stopped on the main line ML on the right reel 32R is grasped. When grasping the type of the pattern, the 2-byte data set for each type of pattern is read from the main ROM 73 . Then, in step S604, as a logical operation process of the symbol combination, each 2-byte data grasped in steps S601 to S603 are AND-processed with the bits of the same order, so that the 2-byte data corresponding to the symbol combination is processed. Derive the data.

In subsequent step S605, it is determined whether or not the 2-byte data derived in step S604 corresponds to any winning data. When an affirmative determination is made in step S605, a winning handling process is executed in step S606. In the winning handling process, it is determined whether or not the winning flag corresponding to the winning that has occurred this time is set to "1", and if "1" is not set, an abnormal command is output to the sub-control device 80. Set as target. Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sub-side MPU 82 uses the speaker 65 and the image display device 66 to notify the abnormality corresponding to the illegal winning. When the winning flag is set to "1", the number of medals to be paid out is set by the main side so that medals or virtual medals can be given in the medal payout process if the winning is a minor win. It is set in the payout object counter of the RAM74. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, in the next step S204 in the normal processing (FIG. 11), a flag setting process is executed to enable setting of the same number of bets as the current bet number.

After that, in step S607, bell winning determination processing is executed, and in step S608, normal replay pressing order determination processing is executed. These processes are processes for switching the ON/OFF state of the AT1 signal output to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 90 . Details of these processes will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S605, or if the process of step S608 is executed, the process proceeds to step S609, and in this lottery process (FIG. 12), the second special replay winning flag or It is determined whether or not the third special replay winning flag is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S609, the first weight setting process is executed in step S610, and then the main winning determination process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S609, the first After executing the 2-wait setting process, the winning determination process is terminated. These first weight setting processing and second weight setting processing will be described later.

<CB state processing>
Next, the CB state processing executed in step S214 of the normal processing (FIG. 11) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the CB state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", thereby determining whether or not the game state is in the CB state. If a negative determination is made in step S701, it is determined in step S702 whether or not the CB winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S702, this CB state processing is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S702, the process proceeds to step S703. Further, in step S703, it is determined whether or not a CB win has occurred by determining whether or not the CB establishment flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S703, this CB state processing is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S703, the process proceeds to step S704.

In step S704, the CB status flag is set to "1", and the CB winning flag and CB establishment flag are cleared to "0". In the following step S705, "19" is set in the CB counter provided in the main RAM74. The counter during CB is a counter for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not the number of times of winning a small combination in the state during CB has reached the number of times of the CB end condition.

In the subsequent step S706, the prescribed bet number counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "2". Accordingly, in step S205 of the normal process (FIG. 11), it is determined whether or not the number of bets is "2". Therefore, if the number of bets has not reached "2", the operation of the start lever 41 is invalidated and the bet of 3 or more is not allowed.

In the subsequent step S707, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned off. As a result, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned off, and the game hall manager and players are notified that the CB internal post-state has ended. After that, in step S708, after a CB start command including data indicating that the CB state has started is set as an output target to the sub-control device 80, this CB state processing ends. As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 controls the speaker 65, the image display device 66, etc. so that an effect corresponding to the CB state is executed.

On the other hand, if it is in the CB state and an affirmative determination is made in step S701, it is determined in step S709 whether or not a minor winning combination has been established in the current game. If a negative determination is made in step S709, this CB state processing is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S709, the process proceeds to step S710.

In step S710, 1 is subtracted from the value of the counter during CB of the main side RAM 74 . Then, in step S711, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter during CB is "0". If it is not "0", this CB state processing is terminated as it is, and if it is "0", the processing proceeds to steps S712 to S714.

In step S712, the CB state is terminated by clearing the CB state flag of the main RAM 74 to "0". In the subsequent step S713, the prescribed bet number counter of the main side RAM 74 is set to "3". Accordingly, in step S205 of the normal process (FIG. 11), it is determined whether or not the number of bets is "3". Therefore, if the number of bets has not reached "3", the operation of the start lever 41 is invalidated, and four or more bets are not permitted.

Thereafter, in step S714, after setting a CB end command including data indicating that the CB state has ended as an object to be output to the sub-controller 80, this CB state processing ends. As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 terminates the effect corresponding to the CB in-progress state on the speaker 65, the image display device 66, and the like.

<Aspect of game state transition that occurs under the control of the main side MPU 72>
Next, the mode of game state transition occurring under the control of the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

When the main side RAM 74 is initialized, or when the setting is changed under the condition that the CB winning flag is "0", the CB non-internal state ST1 is entered. For example, the CB non-internal state ST1 is entered when the game hall starts operating. In the CB non-internal state ST1, the normal replay probability is about 1/7. In the CB non-internal state ST1, no other replay combination is set as the lottery combination. In addition, in the CB non-internal state ST1, the CB probability is about 1/4.3 and the payout occurrence probability is about 1/1.6. However, in the CB non-internal state, the AT state control is not executed in the sub-side MPU 82, and furthermore, it is necessary to correctly press the stop buttons 42 to 44 in order of 1/4 to win the first bell. In order to win the second bell, it is necessary to correctly press the stop buttons 42 to 44 in the order of 1/2. is basically one. This number is smaller than the prescribed number of bets, which is three.

When the CB winning combination is won in the CB non-internal state ST1 and no CB winning occurs, the state shifts to the CB internal post-state ST2. Further, the CB internal post state ST2 is also entered when the setting is changed under the condition that the CB winning flag is "1". In the CB internal post-state ST2, the normal replay probability is higher than in the CB non-internal state ST1 and is about 1/2.9. In addition, in the post-CB internal state ST2, there are replay hands other than the normal replay hand, so the replay occurrence probability is higher. Further, in the state ST2 after the inside of the CB, the CB winning flag is already set to "1", so the CB winning combination is not set as the lottery winning combination.

Further, in the post-CB internal state ST2, the payout occurrence probability is approximately 1/1.6. Here, in the CB internal post-state ST2, control for the AT state can be executed in the sub-side MPU 82, as will be described later in detail. In the situation where the control for the AT state is not executed, as in the case of the CB non-internal state ST1, even if the payout occurrence probability is relatively high at about 1/1.6, the number of coins to be paid out is basically 1 sheet. This number is smaller than the prescribed number of bets, which is three. On the other hand, in the situation where the sub-side MPU 82 is executing control for the AT state, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 for winning the first bell is notified, and the stop for winning the second bell is notified. The pressing order of the buttons 42 to 44 is notified. As a result, in the AT state, the payout occurrence probability is about 1/1.6, which is relatively high, and the number of coins to be paid out is basically 9 or 4. This number is larger than the prescribed number of bets, which is three.

When a CB win occurs in the post-CB internal state ST2, or when a CB role is won in the CB non-internal state ST1 and a CB win occurs in the game, the state shifts to a CB state ST3. In the CB state ST3, as already explained, a small win or a replay win occurs in each game. However, in the CB state ST3, since the specified number of bets is limited to "2", the number of coins to be paid out is limited to 2 even if a small winning combination occurs. Therefore, in the CB state ST3, the medals owned by the player neither decrease nor increase. In the CB medium state ST3, when a small winning combination has been won 19 times, the game shifts to the CB non-internal state ST1.

<Light emission control mode of internal state notification unit 63>
Next, the light emission control mode of the internal state notification unit 63 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 21 .

21(a) shows the execution period of the CB winning game, FIG. 21(b) shows the execution period of the post-CB internal state, FIG. 21(c) shows the execution period of the CB mid-state, and FIG. ) indicates the light emission period of the internal state notification unit 63 .

At the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 21(a), the game in which the CB role is won is started. In this case, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 21(d), lighting of the internal state notification unit 63 is started. By starting the lighting of the internal state notification unit 63 at the start of the game in which the CB role is won in this way, the player starts the stop operation of at least the button corresponding to the final stop reel among the stop buttons 42 to 44. It is possible to make the player recognize that he/she has won the CB role by.

After that, at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 21(a), the game in which the CB role is won ends. In this case, since no CB winning has occurred, the CB internal state is entered as shown in FIG. 21(b).

After that, at the timing of t3, a CB win occurs, so that the state after the inside of the CB ends as shown in FIG. 21(b) and shifts to the state during the CB as shown in FIG. At the timing of t3 when the state is shifted to the CB state, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned off as shown in FIG. 21(d).

After that, at the timing of t4, the state during CB ends as shown in FIG. 21(c). Then, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 21(a), the game in which the CB role is won is started again, so that the internal state notification unit 63 starts lighting up as shown in FIG. 21(d). At the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 21(a), the game in which the CB role is won ends without the establishment of the CB winning, and the state shifts to the CB internal state as shown in FIG. 21(b). .

<First wait setting process>
Next, the first weight setting process executed in step S610 of the prize determination process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the first special replay win flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" in the current lottery process (FIG. 12). When an affirmative determination is made in step S801, in step S802, the number of lottery process for the first special time is executed. In the number lottery process for the first special time, the first number lottery table stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and the value of the number lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 1.49 msec) in the main RAM 74 is updated. Data of the number of times of bonus AT corresponding to the value of the counter for the number of times lottery is read out from the first number of times lottery table. Specifically, 1 time, 2 times, and 3 times are set as the number of times of bonus AT, the probability of selecting 1 time is 2/10, and the probability of selecting 2 times is 5/10. , three times are selected with a probability of 3/10. Then, in step S803, a value corresponding to the result of the lottery process in step S802 is set in the bonus AT number counter provided in the main side RAM74.

In the slot machine 10, even if the first bell winning flag is set to "1" as already explained, the correct order of pressing the stop buttons 42 to 44, which is 1/4, is required to generate the first bell winning. Even if the winning flag of the second bell is set to "1", it is necessary to correctly press the stop buttons 42 to 44, which is 1/2, in order to generate the winning of the second bell. In this case, by entering the AT state, the sub-side MPU 82 performs display control so that the image display device 66 notifies the correct pressing order. Therefore, in the AT state, the payout of 9 or 4 will occur with high probability. This number is larger than the prescribed number of bets, which is three.

The AT state includes a normal AT state in which the main MPU 72 does not manage the transition trigger and the termination trigger, but the sub MPU 82 manages the transition trigger and the sub MPU 82, and the main MPU 72 manages the transition trigger and the termination trigger. There is a bonus AT state that is not broken. The bonus AT state is entered when a value of 1 or more is set in the bonus AT number counter. The normal AT state will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S803 in the first weight setting process, it is determined in step S804 whether or not the value of the bonus AT counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more. The bonus AT counter is a counter for specifying the number of continuation times of one bonus AT state in the main side MPU 72 .

If the determination in step S804 is affirmative, the first weight setting process is terminated, and if the determination in step S804 is negative, the process proceeds to step S805. In step S805, the pre-start wait flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and in step S806, the wait counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to the value of the start wait time (8 sec). The wait counter is a counter for measuring the wait time that is forcibly set during the game in the main MPU 72, and the pre-start wait flag indicates that the set wait time is set at the end of the set game and the next time. This flag is for the main MPU 72 to specify at which timing of the start of the game.

Thereafter, in step S807, after the start wait command is set as an object to be output to the sub-control device 80, the first wait setting process is terminated. Upon receiving the start wait command, the sub-side MPU 82 executes various controls so that the speaker 65 and the image display device 66 execute the start wait corresponding effect.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S801, it is checked in step S808 whether or not the value of the CB winning flag is "1" and the lottery process (FIG. 12) of this time resulted in a loss. judge. By the way, as already explained, the probability that the lottery result is lost in the CB internal post-state is 1/65536.

If a negative determination is made in step S808, the first weight setting process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S808, the process proceeds to step S809. In step S809, a lottery process for the number of times when the result is out is executed. In the number-of-times lottery process when the result is out, the second number-of-times lottery table stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and the value of the number-of-times lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 1.49 msec) in the main RAM 74 is read. , the data of the number of times of bonus AT corresponding to the value of the counter for the number of times lottery is read from the second number of lottery table. Specifically, 1 time, 2 times, and 3 times are set as the number of times of bonus AT, the probability of selecting 1 time is 1/10, and the probability of selecting 2 times is 3/10. , three times are selected with a probability of 6/10. That is, when the second lottery table is referred to, a larger number of bonus ATs is likely to be selected than when the first lottery table is referred to. Then, in step S810, a value corresponding to the result of the number of lottery process in step S809 is set in the bonus AT number counter provided in the main side RAM74.

After that, in step S811, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus AT counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. If the determination in step S811 is affirmative, the first weight setting process is terminated, and if the determination in step S811 is negative, the process proceeds to step S812.

In step S812, the wait generation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and in the subsequent step S813, the value of the start wait time (8 sec) is set in the wait counter of the main RAM 74. The wait occurrence flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that a wait time will occur at the end of the current game. After that, in step S814, after the start wait command is set as an object to be output to the sub-control device 80, the first wait setting process is terminated. Upon receiving the start wait command, the sub-side MPU 82 performs various controls so that the speaker 65 and the image display device 66 execute the first wait corresponding effect.

As described above, when the first special replay combination is won in the post-CB state, or when the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) is lost in the post-CB state, the game shifts to the bonus AT state. In particular, when the first special replay role is won, a prize different from the first special replay prize may occur depending on the stop order of the stop buttons 42-44 and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44. The state transitions regardless of the type of winning that has occurred.

<Second wait setting process>
Next, the second weight setting process executed in step S611 of the winning determination process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The second wait setting process is started when the second special replay winning flag or the third special replay winning flag is set to "1" as already described.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the AT1 signal output state through the external terminal board 90 is in the ON state. The AT1 signal is a signal output from the slot machine 10 to allow the hall computer HC to recognize whether or not it is in the normal AT state. Also, in step S902, it is determined whether or not the first stop of the current game is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R. If a negative determination is made in step S901 or step S902, the second weight setting process is terminated, and if a positive determination is made in both steps S901 and S902, the process proceeds to step S903.

In step S903, the number-of-times lottery process for the second special time is executed. In the second special time lottery process, the third number lottery table stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and the value of the number lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 1.49 msec) in the main RAM 74 is updated. Data of the number of times of bonus AT corresponding to the value of the counter for the number of times lottery is read from the third number of lottery table. Specifically, 1 time, 2 times, and 3 times are set as the number of times of bonus AT, the probability of selecting 1 time is 7/10, and the probability of selecting 2 time is 2/10. , three times are selected with a probability of 1/10. That is, when the third lottery table is referred to, a smaller number of bonus ATs is more likely to be selected than when the first lottery table and the second lottery table are referred to. Then, in step S904, a value corresponding to the result of the lottery process in step S903 is set in the bonus AT number counter of the main side RAM74.

After that, in step S905, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus AT counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. If the determination in step S905 is affirmative, the second weight setting process is terminated, and if the determination in step S905 is negative, the process proceeds to step S906.

In step S906, the pre-start wait flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and in subsequent step S907, the value of the start wait time (8 sec) is set in the wait counter of the main RAM 74. FIG. After that, in step S908, after the start wait command is set as an object to be output to the sub-control device 80, the second wait setting process ends. Upon receiving the start wait command, the sub-side MPU 82 performs various controls so that the speaker 65 and the image display device 66 execute the first wait corresponding effect.

As described above, when the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination is won in the post-CB internal state, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop. It shifts to the bonus AT state on the condition that it has been operated. However, when the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination is won, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, even if the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is operated to stop as the first stop, the first special Winning different from replay winning can occur, but the type of winning won is irrelevant when shifting to the bonus AT state.

<Bonus AT management processing>
Next, the bonus AT management process executed in step S215 of the normal process (FIG. 11) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the bonus AT state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", thereby determining whether or not the bonus AT state. By making a negative determination in step S1001, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the value of the bonus AT number counter of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more. If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the bonus AT management process is terminated.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, in step S1003, the bonus AT counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "30", which is the number of continuations of one set, and the bonus AT state of the main RAM 74 is set. Set "1" to the flag. The bonus AT counter is a counter for specifying the number of continuation times of one bonus AT state in the main side MPU 72 . After that, in step S1004, after the bonus AT start command is set as an object to be output to the sub-control device 80, this bonus AT management process ends. By receiving the bonus AT start command, the sub-side MPU 82 recognizes that the bonus AT state has started, and makes the content of the performance in the speaker 65, the image display device 66, etc. correspond to the start of the bonus AT state. .

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, 1 is subtracted from the value of the bonus AT counter of the main side RAM 74 in step S1005. Then, in step S1006, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus AT counter is "0". If it is not "0", the bonus AT management process is terminated, and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1007, 1 is subtracted from the value of the bonus AT number counter of the main side RAM 74, and in subsequent step S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus AT number counter is "0". If it is "0", in step S1009, the bonus AT state flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0", and in step S1010, the bonus AT end flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". ” is set. The bonus AT end flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that the bonus AT state has ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S1008, or if the process of step S1010 is executed, the value of the end wait time (5 sec) is set in the wait counter of the main RAM 74 in step S1011. After that, in step S1012, after the bonus AT end command is set as an object to be output to the sub-control device 80, this bonus AT management process is ended. The bonus AT end command includes data corresponding to the value of the bonus AT number counter, that is, data indicating whether or not a new execution cycle of the bonus AT state is started after the current execution cycle of the bonus AT state is completed. is included.

When the sub-side MPU 82 receives a bonus AT end command including data indicating the start of a new execution of the bonus AT state, the speaker 65 is configured to execute an effect indicating the continuation of the bonus AT state. and controls the image display device 66 and the like. On the other hand, when receiving a bonus AT end command that does not include data indicating that a new execution of the bonus AT state is to be started, the speaker 65 and the image are arranged so that an effect indicating that the bonus AT state is to be ended is executed. It controls the display device 66 and the like.

Here, in the normal processing (FIG. 11), when it is determined in step S218 that the end wait time has elapsed, bonus AT setting processing is executed in step S219. In the bonus AT setting process, the processes of steps S1001 to S1004 in the bonus AT management process (FIG. 24) are executed. That is, when the bonus AT state flag is "0" and the value of the bonus AT number counter is 1 or more, "30" is set to the bonus AT counter and "1" is set to the bonus AT state flag. , and further transmits a bonus AT start command to the sub-side MPU 82 . As a result, when the bonus AT state continues, a new bonus AT state is started from the game immediately after the last game in the bonus AT state for one execution ends.

In addition, since the ending wait time as described above intervenes between the bonus AT state of one execution time and the bonus AT state of a new execution time, there is a continuous A period for executing various operations for the sole time is ensured.

<What happens when the first special replay wins or loses>
Next, the state in which the first special replay winning or losing result is obtained in the post-CB internal state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG.

FIG. 25(a) shows the execution period of the bonus AT state, FIG. 25(b) shows the execution period of the game when the first special replay winning or losing result is shown, and FIG. 25(c) shows other games. FIG. 25(d) shows the freeze period, and FIG. 25(e) shows the wait period.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 25(b), the game in which the first special replay win is started, and as shown in FIG. 25(d), a freeze period (39 sec) occurs. Rotation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is not started during this freeze period. After that, at timing t2, the freeze period ends as shown in FIG. 25(d). In this case, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. Then, at timing t3, as shown in FIG. 25(b), the current game ends, and the bonus AT state starts as shown in FIG. 25(a).

After that, at timing t4, as shown in FIG. 25(c), a new game is started, and as shown in FIG. be done. During this waiting period, the bet setting for the previous replay win is not performed and the operation of the start lever 41 is not validated. After that, at the timing of t5, the wait period ends as shown in FIG. 25(e). In this case, the bet setting for the previous replay win is performed and the operation of the start lever 41 is validated. Then, at the timing t6, as shown in FIG. 25(c), the current game ends.

Thereafter, at timing t7 when the bonus AT state continues, as shown in FIG. 25(b), the game in which the first special replay was won is restarted. In this case, as shown in FIG. 25(d), a freeze period occurs from timing t7 to timing t8, while as shown in FIG. No wait period occurs in the next game to continue.

That is, even if the first special replay is won, the wait period occurs if the situation is not the bonus AT state, but the wait period does not occur if the situation is the bonus AT state. As a result, when the first special replay winning occurs in a situation other than the bonus AT state, the execution period of the effect corresponding to the transition to the bonus AT state is ensured in order to favorably enhance the player's sense of superiority, while the bonus AT state is ensured. If the first special replay win occurs in the AT state, the period can be omitted to increase the sense of speed of the game during the bonus AT state.

After that, at the timing of t11 after the end of the bonus AT state, as shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 25(d), a freeze period occurs from timing t11 to timing t12, and as shown in FIG. 25(e), from timing t13 to timing t14. , a wait period will occur in this game. At the timing of t14, which is the timing at which this wait period ends, as shown in FIG. 25(b), the game resulting in a loss ends, and furthermore, as shown in FIG. 25(a), the bonus AT state starts. be done. Then, at timing t15, a new game is started under the bonus AT state, as shown in FIG. 25(c).

<When winning the second special replay or winning the third special replay>
Next, the state in which the second special replay winning or the third special replay winning is won in the post-CB internal state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG.

FIG. 26(a) shows the execution period of the normal AT state, FIG. 26(b) shows the execution period of the bonus AT state, and FIG. 26(c) shows the second special replay winning or the third special replay winning. FIG. 26(d) shows the execution period of other games, and FIG. 26(e) shows the wait period.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), at timing t1 in the normal AT state, the game in which the second special replay win or the third special replay win is started, as shown in FIG. 26(c). . Then, at timing t2, the game ends as shown in FIG. 26(c), thereby ending the normal AT state as shown in FIG. As such, the bonus AT state is initiated.

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 26(d), a new game starts, and as shown in FIG. 26(e), the wait period set at the end of the previous game starts. be done. During this waiting period, the bet setting for the previous replay win is not performed and the operation of the start lever 41 is not validated. After that, at the timing of t4, the wait period ends as shown in FIG. 25(e). In this case, the bet setting for the previous replay win is performed and the operation of the start lever 41 is validated. Then, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 26(d), the current game ends.

After that, at timing t6 when the bonus AT state continues, the game in which the second special replay win or the third special replay win is started as shown in FIG. 26(c). Then, the game ends at timing t7, and the next game starts at timing t8. However, no wait period occurs in the game.

In other words, even if the second special replay win or the third special replay win is made, the wait period is generated if the state is not the bonus AT state, but the wait period is not generated if the state is the bonus AT state. As a result, when the second special replay winning or the third special replay winning occurs in a situation that is not the bonus AT state, the performance execution period corresponding to the shift to the bonus AT state to favorably enhance the player's sense of superiority. On the other hand, if the second special replay winning or the third special replay winning occurs in the bonus AT state, the period can be omitted to increase the speed of the game during the bonus AT state. becomes.

After that, at the timing of t9, which is after the bonus AT state is over and not in the normal AT state, as shown in FIG. be started. Then, the game ends at timing t10, and the next game is executed at timing t11, as shown in FIG. 26(d). However, no wait period occurs in the game. Furthermore, even if the game ends, the transition to the bonus AT state does not occur.

That is, even if the second special replay win or the third special replay win is won in a situation other than the normal AT state, it does not trigger a shift to the bonus AT state. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit for the player staying in the normal AT state, and to increase the degree of attention to the normal AT state. In addition, by preventing the wait period from being generated under the circumstances that do not trigger the transition to the bonus AT state, the wait period for presentation is generated under the circumstances where no profit is generated for the player. is suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Relationship between CB state and bonus AT state>
Next, the relationship between the CB state and the bonus AT state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG.

FIG. 27(a) shows the setting status of the CB winning flag, FIG. 27(b) shows the execution period of the CB in progress state, FIG. ) indicates the execution period of the other games, FIG. 27(e) indicates the execution period of the bonus AT state, and FIG. 27(f) indicates the timing at which the number of games is counted.

As shown in FIG. 27(a), at the timing of t1 under the condition that the CB win flag is set to "1", as shown in FIG. Then the game is ended. In this case, a CB winning occurs at the end of the game. Therefore, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 27(e), not only is the bonus AT state started, but also the CB winning flag is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 27(a). A CB state is also initiated as shown in (b). In this case, since the CB state is given priority as the gaming state, the prescribed number of bets, the content of the lottery process, the reel control mode, and the number of payouts for winning a small winning combination are set to those in the CB state. . However, the progress of the bonus AT state is not waited, and the number of games executed in the CB state are consumed as games during the bonus AT state.

After that, under the condition of the CB state and the bonus AT state, the game is executed at timings t3 and t4, as shown in FIGS. are counted. As a result, the completion of the game in the CB state and the completion of the game in the bonus AT state occur simultaneously. Then, at the timing of t5, 19 minor wins occur in the CB state, and the CB state ends as shown in FIG. 27(b). As a result, only the bonus AT state is set. However, as shown in FIG. 27(a), the CB winning flag is in the state of "0" and the CB is in the non-internal state. In this case, notification of the pushing order for generating the first bell winning and the second bell winning is not executed.

After that, at timing t6 and timing t7, as shown in FIGS. counted. Then, at the timing t8, as shown in FIG. 27(a), the CB win is won and the CB winning flag is set to "1". As a result, not only is the main MPU 72 executing the process of progressing the bonus AT state, but also the sub MPU 82 is performing notification of the pushing order for generating the first bell winning and the second bell winning.

<Execution control of various notifications and various effects in the sub-side MPU 82>
Next, the processing configuration of the sub-side MPU 82 for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

<Cycle processing>
First, periodic processing executed periodically (for example, every 2 msec) in the sub-side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1101, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main MPU 72 . If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, the command received this time is stored in the ring buffer provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1102. A ring buffer is a buffer that can store multiple commands. Each time a command is written to an area indicated by a write pointer, the write pointer is updated each time a write operation is performed. The read pointer is updated each time the command is read from the area indicated by the pointer and the read process is executed. Note that the read point is updated when the command is read in one cycle of the periodic processing and when the next cycle of periodic processing is started.

If a negative determination is made in step S1101, or if the process of step S1102 is executed, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not the CB is in the post-internal state. As will be described later, the sub-side MPU 82 receives a lottery result command corresponding to the winning of the CB role from the main-side MPU 72 to specify that the CB internal post-state has started, and receives the CB start command to Specifies that the post-state has ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1103, the flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is checked in step S1104 to determine whether or not the sub-side MPU 82 is executing AT control. judge. If a negative determination is made in step S1104, non-AT processing is executed in step S1105, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, AT processing is executed in step S1106. These non-AT processing and AT processing will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S1103, if the process of step S1105 is executed, or if the process of step S1106 is executed, then in step S1107, the freeze period and the wait period are set in the main MPU 72. In step S1108, along with executing a standby effect setting process for enabling the corresponding effect and notification to be executed, the CB setting process for enabling the effect and notification corresponding to the CB state to be executed to run.

After that, in step S1109, display data setting processing for executing effects and notifications by displaying moving images and still images on the image display device 66 is executed. Setting processing of light emission data for executing light emission control of the notification unit 67, stock notification unit 68, and number-of-wins notification unit 69 is executed. Execute processing for setting sound output data for After that, this periodic processing is terminated.

<Standby effect setting process>
Next, the standby effect setting process of step S1107 in the periodic process (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command corresponding to the winning of the first special replay has been received from the main MPU 72 or not. When the lottery result command is received, in step S1202, after setting the first freeze flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 to "1", the standby effect setting process is terminated. By setting the first freeze flag to "1", it is possible to display a moving image corresponding to the first freeze time (39 sec) in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). A data table to be used is read out from the sub-side ROM 83, and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, a display effect corresponding to the first freeze time is performed on the image display device 66 . In addition, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the first freeze time is read, and in the sound output data setting processing (step S1111) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28) Sound output data corresponding to the first freeze time is read, and light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, a light emission effect and a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the first freeze time in the image display device 66 are performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not a lottery result command corresponding to the result of being out of the CB internal state has been received from the main MPU 72. When the lottery result command is received, in step S1204, after setting the second freeze flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 to "1", the standby effect setting process is terminated. By setting the flag for the second freeze to "1", it is possible to display a moving image corresponding to the second freeze time (35 sec) in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). A data table to be used is read out from the sub-side ROM 83, and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, a display effect corresponding to the second freeze time is performed on the image display device 66 . Further, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the second freeze time is read, and in the sound output data setting processing (step S1111) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28) Sound output data corresponding to the second freeze time is read, and light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, a light emission effect and a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 66 are performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined whether or not a start wait command has been received from the main MPU 72 in step S1205. When the start wait command is received, in step S1206, after setting the start wait flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 to "1", the standby effect setting process is terminated. By setting the start wait flag to "1", in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), data that enables the display of a moving image corresponding to the start wait time (8 sec). The table is read out from the sub-side ROM 83, and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, a display effect corresponding to the start wait time is performed on the image display device 66 . Specifically, a display effect indicating that the transition to the bonus AT state has occurred is performed. In addition, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the start wait time is read, and in the sound output data setting processing (step S1111) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), start Sound output data corresponding to the wait time is read, and light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the start wait time in the image display device 66 are performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1207 whether or not a bonus AT end command has been received from the main MPU 72. When the bonus AT end command is received, in step S1208, after setting "1" to the bonus AT end flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84, this standby effect setting process is ended. By setting the bonus AT end flag to "1", display data corresponding to the end wait time (5 sec) can be displayed in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). A data table is read out from the sub-side ROM 83, and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, the image display device 66 performs a display effect corresponding to the end wait time. Specifically, a display effect indicating that one set of the bonus AT state is completed is performed. Also, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the end wait time is read, and the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28) ends. Sound output data corresponding to the wait time is read, and light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, a light emitting effect and a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the end wait time in the image display device 66 are performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1207, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not a continuous wait command has been received from the main side MPU72. As will be described later, the continuous wait command is a command sent from the main MPU 72 when the output state of the AT1 signal, which has been set to the ON state, is once set to the OFF state and then set to the ON state again. Then, when the AT1 signal output setting is performed, the main MPU 72 sets a continuous wait time (1 sec).

If the consecutive villa wait command has not been received, this standby effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the consecutive villa wait command has been received, in step S1210, the flag for the consecutive villa wait provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1", and then this standby effect setting process is terminated. By setting "1" to the flag for waiting for consecutive villas, it is possible to display a still image corresponding to the waiting time for consecutive villas (1 sec) in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28). A data table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, the image display device 66 performs a display effect corresponding to the continuous wait time.

<Setting processing for CB>
Next, the CB setting process of step S1108 in the periodic process (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not a prize winning result command corresponding to CB winning and CB non-winning has been received from the main side MPU 72 or not. When the winning result command has been received, the CB internal flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1" in step S1302. This makes it possible for the sub-side MPU 82 to recognize that it is in the post-CB internal state.

If a negative determination is made in step S1301, or if the process of step S1302 is executed, it is determined in step S1303 whether a CB start command has been received from the main MPU 72 or not. If the CB start command has been received, in step S1304 the CB flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1", and in step S1305 the CB internal flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to " 0” clear. This makes it possible for the sub-side MPU 82 to recognize that it is in the CB state.

Further, when the CB flag is set to "1", in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), a data table that enables the display of moving images corresponding to the CB state is generated. It reads out from the sub-side ROM 83 and outputs a signal to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, the image display device 66 performs a display effect corresponding to the CB in-progress state. Further, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the CB state is read, and in the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the CB Sound output data corresponding to the middle state is read, and light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, a light emission effect and a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the CB in-progress state on the image display device 66 are performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1303, or if the process of step S1305 is executed, it is determined in step S1306 whether or not the flag during CB of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1". When "1" is set to the flag during CB, update processing of the content of effect is executed in step S1307. In the effect content update process, in response to receiving the winning result command from the main MPU 72, the process for updating the display of the number of remaining small win wins in the CB displayed on the image display device 66 is performed. Along with execution, a process for informing information of the winning combination is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1306 or if the process of step S1307 is executed, it is determined in step S1308 whether or not a CB end command has been received from the main MPU 72 . If the CB end command has not been received, this CB setting process is terminated as it is, and if the CB end command has been received, the CB flag in the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" in step S1309. , this CB setting process ends. As a result, the effect corresponding to the CB in-progress state in the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65 and the image display device 66 is ended.

<Processing during non-AT in sub-side MPU 82>
Next, the contents of the non-AT processing executed in the sub-side MPU 82 will be described. Before explaining the specific processing contents executed by the sub-side MPU 82, the mode of transition from the non-AT state to the AT state will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

As a mode of transitioning from a state in which the CB internal state is a non-AT state (hereinafter referred to as normal state ST11) to a state in which the CB internal state is a normal AT state (hereinafter referred to as normal AT state ST12) has three modes.

The first mode of transition is when the sub-side RAM 84 is initialized, when the normal AT state ST12 ends and shifts to the normal state ST11, or when the bonus AT state ST17 ends and shifts to the normal AT state ST12. This is the case where the sub-side MPU 82 has completed the number of ceiling games determined by lottery when transitioning to the normal state ST11 without transitioning. When shifting to the normal AT state ST12 in this mode, the state shifts to the ceiling game precursor state ST13 first, and then the number of ceiling games is completed (ST14), resulting in the normal AT state ST12. The ceiling game precursor state ST13 is entered when the number of ceiling games remains 32 games. In the ceiling game premonitory state ST13, as the content of each game on the image display device 66, it becomes easier to execute a presentation with a high degree of expectation for the transition to the normal AT state ST12. Also, in the ceiling game precursor state ST13, a more flashy effect is executed on the final game side than on the starting game side. Specifically, in some consecutive games including the final game in the ceiling game precursor state ST13, an effect in which the same character is displayed between a plurality of games or an effect in accordance with a series of stories can be executed. . Then, an effect is displayed for making the player aware that the transition to the normal AT state ST12 will occur in the final game.

In the second transition mode, the activation lottery process executed when a predetermined winning combination is won results in the activation winning, and the transition chance state ST16 is entered. This is a case where the transfer lottery process is executed when the game becomes a transfer lottery process. However, if the conditions for ending the transition chance state ST16 are satisfied without the transition being won, the game returns to the normal state ST11 without transitioning to the normal AT state ST12. In the transition chance state ST16, the image display device 66 executes a display effect for clearly indicating to the player that it is the transition chance state ST16.

When transitioning to the transition chance state ST16, the transition chance state ST15 is first transitioned to, and the transition chance state ST16 is transitioned to when the number of games corresponding to the precursor is completed in the transition chance precursor state ST15. In the transition chance portent state ST15, over a plurality of games with an upper limit of 32 games, the content of each game on the image display device 66 includes an effect with a high degree of expectation for transition to the normal AT state ST12 or the transition chance state ST16. easier to execute. Further, in the shift chance portent state ST16, a more flashy effect is executed on the final game side than on the starting game side. Specifically, in some consecutive games including the final game of the transition chance precursor state ST16, an effect in which the same character is displayed in a plurality of games or an effect in accordance with a series of stories can be executed. . Then, an effect is displayed to make the player recognize that the transition to the transition chance state ST16 will occur in the final game. The effect executed in the shift chance precursor state ST15 can also be executed in the ceiling game precursor state ST13.

Even in a situation where the number of ceiling games does not reach 32 games remaining and the transition chance portent state ST15 is not reached, the sub-side MPU 82 wins the false portent lottery, so that the false portent state is established. Become. In the false portent state, an effect with a high degree of expectation of shifting to the normal AT state ST12 or the transition chance state ST16 is executed as the effect content of each game on the image display device 66 over a plurality of games with an upper limit of 32 games. becomes easier. In addition, in the false portent state, a more flashy effect is executed on the final game side than on the starting game side. Specifically, in some consecutive games including the final game in the false omen state, an effect in which the same character is displayed in a plurality of games or an effect in accordance with a series of stories can be executed. Then, an effect is displayed to make the player recognize that neither the normal AT state ST12 nor the transition chance state ST16 will occur in the final game.

The effect executed in the false portent state can also be executed in the ceiling game portent state ST13 and transition chance portent state ST15. Therefore, when an effect with a high expectation of transition to a state advantageous to the player frequently occurs between a plurality of games, the player expects the ceiling game portent state ST13 or the transition chance portent state ST15. do. Further, unlike the transition chance precursor state ST15, the ceiling game precursor state ST13 is a state in which a transition to the normal AT state occurs directly. expect. As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation through the execution of the effect, and to improve the interest in the game.

As a part of the portent effects that can be executed in various portent states, it is possible to include effects that are executed in the ceiling game portent state ST13 or the transition chance portent state ST15 but not executed in the false portent state. An effect may be included in which the probability of occurrence in the ceiling game precursor state ST13 or the transition chance precursor state ST15 is higher than the probability of occurrence in the false precursor state. An effect that is not executed in the portent state ST15 and the false portent state may be included, and an effect that has a higher probability of occurrence in the ceiling game portent state ST13 than in the transition chance portent state ST15 and the false portent state is included. It may be configured to include an effect that is executed in the transition chance precursor state ST15 but not executed in the ceiling game precursor state ST13 and the false precursor state, and the probability of occurrence in the transition chance precursor state ST15. may include an effect with a higher probability of occurrence than the ceiling game portent state ST13 and the false portent state.

A third transition mode is a transition to a bonus AT state ST17 and a transition after the bonus AT state ST17 ends. However, when the bonus AT state ST17 is shifted under a penalty situation, which will be described later, even if the bonus AT state ST17 ends, it does not shift to the normal AT state ST12. A transition from the normal AT state ST12 to the bonus AT state ST17 may also occur.

<Non-AT processing>
Next, the non-AT processing in step S1105 in the periodic processing (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command has been received from the main side MPU 72 . When the lottery result command is received, the winning combination data corresponding to the lottery result command is written in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1402.

If a negative determination is made in step S1401, or if the process of step S1402 is executed, it is determined in step S1403 whether or not a stop instruction command has been received from the main MPU 72. When the stop instruction command is received, at step S1404, stop order data is written to the sub-side RAM 84 to store the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the current game.

If a negative determination is made in step S1403 or if the process of step S1404 is executed, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 . If the winning result command has not been received, this non-AT processing is terminated as it is, and if the winning result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1406.

In step S1406, it is determined whether or not the current winning result command corresponds to the transition to the bonus AT state. Specifically, if the data indicating that the first special replay combination has been won in the CB internal post state is specified from the winning result command, or if the data indicating that the CB internal post state has resulted in a loss, If specified from the winning result command, an affirmative determination is made in step S1406. In addition to this, data indicating that the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination is won in the situation where the AT1 signal is in the ON state after the inside of the CB is specified from the winning result command. Also, when it is specified by the stop order data stored in the sub-side RAM 84 that the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, an affirmative determination is made in step S1406.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, it is determined in step S1407 whether or not data indicating that the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination is won is included in the winning result command. do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1407, it means that the transition to the bonus AT state this time has occurred under penalty conditions.

Specifically, as a result of stopping reels other than the left reel 32L as the first stop even though the sub-side MPU 82 is not in the AT state, on the condition that the first bell winning or the second bell winning has occurred three times. As will be described later, when the AT1 signal is turned ON, and under such circumstances, when the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination is won and the reels other than the left reel 32L are stopped as the first stop, the main MPU 72 starts the game. The state is shifted to the bonus AT state. However, since this event is a penalty target event, the sub-side MPU 82 does not set the AT state. Therefore, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1407, the penalty AT flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1" in step S1408. The penalty AT flag is a flag for specifying in the sub-side MPU 82 that the bonus AT state occurred under the penalty situation.

When a negative determination is made in step S1407, or when the process of step S1408 is executed, in step S1409, the bonus AT flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1", and the sub-side RAM 84 "4" is set in the provided counter to be executed. The bonus AT flag is a flag for specifying in the sub-side MPU 82 that the gaming state managed in the main side MPU 72 is the bonus AT state, and the execution target counter indicates the content of processing to be executed in the AT state as a sub-side. This is a counter for identification by the side MPU 82 . By setting the execution target counter to "4", the sub-side MPU 82 executes a process for advancing the bonus AT state. After that, this non-AT processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1406, it is determined in step S1410 whether or not a penalty event has occurred. A penalty event is an event in which the center reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop in the CB internal post-state and non-AT state, and either winning occurs. When a penalty event occurs, there is a possibility that the actual medal award rate will be higher than the medal award rate during the non-AT state set in the design stage of the slot machine 10 . Therefore, when a penalty event occurs, the player is disadvantaged, and is encouraged to stop the left reel 32L as the first stop during the non-AT state.

When a penalty event occurs, image data for penalty is set in display data setting processing (step S1109) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), and sound output data setting processing (step S1111). , the sound output data for penalty is set. This informs the player that a penalty event has occurred.

When a penalty event occurs, addition processing to the penalty counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is executed in step S1411. In the addition process, "5", which is a value corresponding to the number of penalty games, is added to the value of the penalty counter. If the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the transition to the AT state is delayed by the value of the penalty counter.

In the subsequent step S1412, it is determined whether or not the ceiling game precursor state is present by determining whether or not the value of the ceiling remaining game counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is 32 or less corresponding to the ceiling game precursor state. do. If the state is not the state of precursor to the ceiling game (step S1412: NO), this non-AT processing is terminated as it is, and if the state is the state of precursor to the ceiling game (step S1412: YES), the process proceeds to step S1413.

When a negative determination is made in step S1410 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S1412, transition chance management processing is executed in step S1413, and ceiling game management processing is executed in step S1414. Then, after executing the winning process in step S1415, the non-AT process ends. In the winning handling process, a process for displaying an image corresponding to the current winning combination on the image display device 66 is executed, and a sound corresponding to the occurrence of the winning is output through the speaker 65. Execute the process for

<Migration chance management processing>
Next, the shift chance management process of step S1413 in the non-AT process (FIG. 32) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the transition chance management process is started on the condition that a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72, so it is started at the end of each game in the non-AT state.

First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the value of the transition chance counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more, thereby determining whether or not the transition chance state ST16 is in progress. The transition chance counter is a counter for specifying that the sub-side MPU 82 is staying in the transition chance state ST16. If the transition chance state ST16 is not in progress, it is determined in step S1502 whether or not the value of the portent game counter 84a provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more, thereby transitioning the chance portent state ST15 and the false portent. It is determined whether it is in one of the states. The portent game counter 84a is a counter for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify that it is staying in either the shift chance portent state ST15 or the false portent state.

If neither the shift chance portent state ST15 nor the false portent state is present, it is determined in step S1503 whether or not the player wins the transition chance role. Further, when the processing of steps S1513 to S1517 is executed in either the shift chance portent state ST15 or the false portent state, it is determined in step S1503 whether or not the player wins the transition chance role.

The shift chance trigger combination is IV=7, 9-12, 14-16 in the internal post-state lottery table (FIG. 14). Determine that you have been selected for the role. However, even if it corresponds to the winning of the transition chance trigger role, if the transition to the bonus AT state is triggered, the affirmative determination is not made in step S1503.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, it is determined in step S1504 whether or not the value of the penalty counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. If the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the processes of steps S1505 to S1511 are not executed, so that the transition chance state ST16 and the additional transition chance state ST16 are not generated in the penalty state. On the other hand, if the value of the penalty counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S1505.

In step S1505, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to either the main omen winning flag or the main omen execution flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84, thereby determining the winning state and the transition chance state of the transition chance state ST16. It is determined whether or not it is one of the precursor states ST15. Also, in step S1506, it is determined whether or not the value of the transition chance remaining counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. The transition chance remaining counter is a counter for specifying in the sub-side MPU 82 whether or not there is a transition opportunity to the transition chance state.

When negative determinations are made in both steps S1505 and S1506, the activation lottery process for transition chance is executed in step S1507. In the transition chance activation lottery process, the transition chance activation lottery table corresponding to both the current transition chance opportunity and the number of games played after the previous transition to the non-AT state is read from the sub-side ROM 83 . Then, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is collated with the activated lottery table.

Here, 0 times, 1 time, and 2 times are set as the remaining number of times of the transition chance in the activation lottery table for the transition chance. In addition, in the activation lottery table for transition chances, the higher the value of the winning IV, the higher the probability that one or more will be selected as the remaining number of transition chances, and the probability that a greater number of remaining transition chances will be selected. In addition, the higher the number of games played since the previous transition to the non-AT state, the higher the probability that one or more will be selected as the remaining number of transition chances, and the higher the number of remaining transition chances will be selected. It is set so that the probability of being

In step S1508, it is determined whether or not one or more transition chance remaining times has been selected in the activation lottery process for the transition chance in step S1507. When an affirmative determination is made at step S1508, at step S1509, the transition chance remaining number selected in the current activation lottery process is added to the transition chance remaining counter of the sub-side RAM84.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1505 or step S1506, an additional lottery process for transition chance is executed in step S1510. In the shift chance add-on lottery process, the shift chance add-on lottery table corresponding to the current shift chance trigger role is read from the sub-side ROM 83 . Then, the value of the sub-side lottery counter, which is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84, is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is collated with the above-mentioned additional lottery table.

Here, 0 times, 1 time, 2 times and 3 times are set as the remaining number of times of the transition chance in the additional lottery table for the transition chance. The maximum number of transition chance remaining times is greater than the maximum number of transition chance remaining times that can be selected in the activation lottery process. Therefore, in the additional lottery process, a larger number of transition chance remaining times can be selected than in the activation lottery process. In addition, in the addition lottery table for transition chances, the greater the value of the winning IV, the higher the probability that one or more additions will be selected as the remaining number of transition chances, and the greater the number of remaining transition chances. It is set to be highly probable. Further, the additional lottery table for transition chances is set so that the number of transition chance remaining times greater than that in the activation lottery process is likely to be selected. It should be noted that the additional lottery process may have a higher winning probability than the activated lottery process.

In step S1511, it is determined whether or not one or more transition chance remaining times has been selected in the additional lottery process for the transition chance in step S1510. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1511, in step S1509, the transition chance remaining number selected in the current addition lottery process is added to the transition chance remaining counter of the sub-side RAM 84. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503, if a positive determination is made in step S1504, if a negative determination is made in step S1508, if a negative determination is made in step S1511, or if the process of step S1509 is executed executes the predictor setting process in step S1512, and then ends the shift chance management process. In the port setting processing, processing for setting the transition chance portent state ST15 or the false portent state is executed. Details of the processing will be described later.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, that is, if the state is either transition chance portent state ST15 or false portent state, the process proceeds to step S1513. In step S1513, the value of the portent game counter 84a of the sub-side RAM 84 is decremented by one. In the subsequent step S1514, it is determined whether or not the value of the portent game counter 84a after the subtraction of 1 is "0". When the value of the portent game counter 84a is "0", in step S1515, it is determined whether or not the flag execution flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1". , determines whether or not the precursor state that ended this time is the transition chance precursor state ST15. When "1" is set to this precursor execution flag, 1 is subtracted from the value of the transition chance remaining counter of the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1516. Also, in step S1517, the transition chance counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "10", which is the number of continuous games in the transition chance state ST16. As a result, the transition chance state ST16 is entered. Also, in step S1517, this precursor execution flag is cleared to "0".

When the value of the transition chance counter is 1 or more, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), a data table enabling display of moving images corresponding to the transition chance state ST16 is stored from the sub-side ROM 83. It reads out and outputs a signal to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, the image display device 66 performs a display effect corresponding to the transition chance state ST16. In the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the transition chance state ST16 is read. Sound output data corresponding to the transition chance state ST16 is read, and light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, a light emitting effect and a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the transition chance state ST16 in the image display device 66 are performed.

If the transition chance state ST16 is reached, an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, and the process proceeds to step S1518. In step S1518, processing during transition chance is executed. After that, the transition chance management process is terminated.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing processing during a transition chance.

First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the player wins the expected degree-improving role. The expected degree-improving hand is the same as the transition chance trigger hand determined in step S1503 in the transition chance management process (FIG. 33). In other words, if a player wins any of IV=7, 9-12, 14-16 in the internal post-state lottery table (FIG. 14), it is determined that the player has won the expected degree-improving role. However, even if it corresponds to the winning of the expected degree-improving combination, if it is the opportunity to shift to the bonus AT state, the affirmative determination is not made in step S1601.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, it is determined in step S1602 whether or not the value of the penalty counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. If the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the process of steps S1603 to S1606 is not executed, so that the setting opportunity for improving expectations is not generated. On the other hand, if the value of the penalty counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S1603.

In step S1603, a shift probability UP lottery process is executed. In the shift-probability-up lottery process, a lottery is made to determine whether or not the probability of winning a transition win is increased by one level in the shift lottery process in step S1609, which will be described later. It should be noted that 1/10, 2/10, 3/10, 4/10, and 5/10 are set as the probabilities of winning the transition in the transition lottery process in step S1609. Concretely, the transition probability UP lottery processing contents are first read out from the sub-side ROM 83 of the transition probability UP lottery table corresponding to the expected degree-improving combination of this time. The transition probability UP lottery table is set so that the higher the value of the winning IV, the higher the probability of winning the transition probability UP. Further, in the transition probability UP lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is stored in the transition probability UP lottery table. to match.

In step S1604, it is determined whether or not the shift probability UP win has been made. In the event that a transfer probability UP win is made, in step S1605, the transfer lottery table referred to in step S1609, which will be described later, is changed to a table with a higher transfer probability than the current table by one level. As a result, the probability of winning the transfer is increased by one level.

When a negative determination is made in step S1604, or when the process of step S1605 is executed, a value corresponding to the current winning combination is set in the delay counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1606. The delay counter is a counter for specifying in the sub-side MPU 82 whether or not to delay the trigger for ending the transition chance state. "1", "3", "5", "7", and "10" are set as the values set in step S1606. When "1" is selected and the winning IV values are "9" and "10", "3" is selected and the winning IV values are "11" and "12" If the winning IV value is "14" or "15", "7" is selected. If the winning IV value is "16", "5" is selected. "10" is selected.

When a negative determination is made in step S1601, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, or when the process of step S1606 is executed, it is determined whether or not the normal replay combination is won in step S1607. If the normal replay combination is won, it is determined in step S1608 whether or not the value of the penalty counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the process of steps S1609 and S1610 is not executed, so that the transition lottery process is not executed. On the other hand, if the value of the penalty counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S1609.

In step S1609, a transfer lottery process is executed. In the shift lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is stored in the currently read transition lottery table. to match. Then, in step S1610, it is determined whether or not the transfer win has been made.

If a negative determination is made in step S1607, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1608, or if a negative determination is made in step S1610, then in step S1611 the value of the delay counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. Determine whether or not there is If the value of the delay counter is equal to or greater than 1, the value of the delay counter is decremented by 1 in step S1612, and then this process during transition chance ends. When the value of the delay counter is "0", in step S1613, the value of the transition chance counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is decremented by 1, and then this process during transition chance ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1610 that the transition has been won, a transition setting process to the normal AT state in steps S1614 to S1617 is executed. Specifically, in step S1614, the normal AT flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1". The normal AT flag is a flag for specifying that the sub-side MPU 82 is in the normal AT state.

In the subsequent step S1615, a number-of-continued-games lottery process at the start of normal AT is executed. In the lottery process, first, the continuous game number lottery table at the start of normal AT is read from the sub-side ROM 83 . As the number of continuous games in one set in the normal AT state, there are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games. In the continuous game number lottery table at the start of normal AT, the probability that 30 games will be selected as the number of continuous games in one set is 5/10, the probability that 50 games will be selected is 4/10, and 100 games will be selected. The probability of being selected is 1/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is added to the number-of-continued-games lottery table at the start of the normal AT. match against.

In the following step S1616, the value of the number of continuous games selected in the lottery process of step S1615 is set in the normal AT game counter provided in the sub-side RAM84. The normal AT game counter is a counter for specifying the number of continuous games in one set of normal AT states in the sub-side MPU 82 .

In the subsequent step S1617, the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". By setting the execution target counter to "0", the sub-side MPU 82 executes a process for advancing the pre-branch AT state in the normal AT state. After that, the processing during this shift chance ends.

<Ceiling game management processing>
Next, the ceiling game management process of step S1414 in the non-AT process (FIG. 32) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Since the ceiling game management process is started on the condition that a winning result command is received from the main MPU 72, it is started at the end of each game in the non-AT state.

First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling remaining game counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 32 or less, thereby determining whether or not the state is a precursor to the ceiling game. If a negative determination is made in step S1701, it is determined in step S1702 whether or not the value of the penalty counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, the penalty counter value is decremented by 1 in step S1703, and then the ceiling game management process ends. That is, when the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the number of ceiling games is not subtracted even if the game is completed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, or if a negative determination is made in step S1702, 1 is subtracted from the ceiling remaining game counter in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1704. Then, in step S1705, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ceiling game counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0".

If not "0", it is determined in step S1706 whether or not the value of the ceiling remaining game counter is "32" corresponding to the number of games started in the ceiling game precursor state ST13. If the number is not "32", the main ceiling game management process is terminated, and if the number is "32", the process proceeds to step S1707. In step S1707, a ceiling sign effect selection process is executed.

In the effect selection process for the ceiling portent, first, the lottery process of the ceiling portent effect table is executed. The contents of effects for 32 games are determined in the ceiling portent effect table, and a plurality of types of ceiling portent effect tables are stored in the sub-side ROM 83 in advance. As the content of the effect determined in the ceiling sign effect table, for example, in the 1st game to the 10th game, an effect image is displayed on the image display device 66 as the start lever 41 is operated. From the 23rd game to the 22nd game, an effect is set in which the screen is scrolled as if the line of sight is reflected in a situation where a predetermined character is displayed, and the predetermined character is specified from the 23rd game to the 32nd game. A production is set for a battle with the character of. In the ceiling sign effect table, effect data is set so as to be separated for each game, and the next game is started by operating the start lever 41 even during execution of the effect corresponding to each game. In this case, the effect data to be referred to in the ceiling portent effect table is switched to the data corresponding to the next game, thereby switching to the effect corresponding to the next game. Some or all of the effects defined in the ceiling portent effect table also occur in the transition chance portent state ST15 and the false portent state, which will be described later. Although the contents of effects for 32 games are determined for each of the ceiling portent effect tables, the determined effect contents are different between the ceiling portent effect tables.

In lottery processing for the ceiling portent effect table, the value of the effect lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the ceiling portent effect table corresponding to the read value is read from the sub-side ROM 83. Then, the read ceiling precursor effect table is stored in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1708.

By writing the ceiling precursor effect table to the sub-side RAM 84, a signal is output to the image display device 66 in accordance with the ceiling precursor effect table in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28). As a result, the display effect corresponding to the type of the current ceiling portent effect is performed over 32 games. In addition, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 is performed according to the above-described ceiling precursor effect table, and the sound output data setting processing (step S1110) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28) In S1111), the sound output control of the speaker 65 is performed according to the above-mentioned ceiling portent effect table. As a result, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, a light emission effect and a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the type of the ceiling precursor effect in the image display device 66 are performed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1705, the main ceiling game management process is terminated after executing the normal AT state transition setting process in steps S1709 to S1712. The processing contents of these steps S1709 to S1712 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1614 to S1617 in the process during transition chance (FIG. 34). As a result, the normal AT state is entered.

<Process during AT in sub-side MPU 82>
Next, the processing contents during AT executed in the sub-side MPU 82 will be described. Before explaining the specific processing contents executed by the sub-side MPU 82, each game state included in the AT state will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

As the AT state, as already explained, there are the normal AT state ST21 and the bonus AT state ST22. In both the normal AT state ST21 and the bonus AT state ST22, if the lottery process (FIG. 12) in the main side MPU 72 wins the 1st bell combination or the 2nd bell combination, it is possible to win them. Control by the sub-side MPU 82 is executed so that the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is notified. However, the start and end of the normal AT state ST21 are set by the sub-side MPU 82, not the main MPU 72, whereas the bonus AT state ST22 is set to start and end by the main side, not the sub-side MPU 82. It is performed by the side MPU 72 .

Of these normal AT state ST21 and bonus AT state ST22, the bonus AT state ST22 has only one kind of state, whereas the normal AT state ST21 consists of pre-branching AT state ST31 and branching AT state ST32. , a final chance state ST33, and an additional state ST34.

The pre-branching AT state ST31 is an AT state that continues for the number of continuous games set at the start of the AT state. In the pre-branching AT state ST31, the image display device 66 executes a display effect for clearly indicating to the player that it is the pre-branching AT state ST31. In the pre-branch AT state ST31, when the set number of games to be continued is completed, the state shifts to the branch AT state ST32.

In the branch AT state ST32, the image display device 66 performs a battle effect using a friend character and an enemy character. In the battle effect, when the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state ST21 is 1 or more, or when AT continuation winning is won in the AT continuation lottery process, the battle effect is a victory effect for the ally character or a draw for both characters. An effect is selected, and in other cases, a defeat effect for the ally character is selected.

When the victory effect or the draw effect is executed, the game returns to the pre-branch AT state ST31, and when the defeat effect is executed, the game shifts to the final chance state ST33. In the final chance state ST33, a resurrection lottery process is executed according to the contents of the winning combination of the game in the pre-branching AT state ST31 and the branching AT state ST32, and the contents of the winning combination of the game in the final chance state ST33. If so, it returns to the pre-branch AT state ST31.

In the pre-branching AT state ST31 and the branching AT state ST32, the state shifts to an additional state ST34 according to the content of the winning combination of the game in these states. When the conditions for shifting to the additional state ST34 are satisfied in the pre-branching AT state ST31, the transition to the additional state ST34 is made from the game next to the game in which the transition condition is satisfied even in the middle of the pre-branching AT state ST31. On the other hand, if the conditions for shifting to the add-on state ST33 are satisfied in the middle of the branch AT state ST32, the state shifts to the add-on state ST34 after the end of the branch AT state ST32.

In the added state ST34, the image display device 66 executes a display effect for clearly indicating to the player that it is the added state ST34. In the add-on state ST34, an add-on lottery process is executed according to the winning combination of the game, and the number of sets of the normal AT state ST21 is increased by winning the add-on win. When the termination condition is satisfied in the superposition state ST34, the state shifts to the pre-branch AT state ST31.

In any of the pre-branch AT state ST31, the branch AT state ST32, the final chance state ST33, and the add-on state ST34, the transition to the bonus AT state ST22 is set in the main MPU 72 to shift to the bonus AT state ST22. In the bonus AT state ST22, the image display device 66 executes a display effect for clearly indicating to the player that it is the bonus AT state ST22. When the pre-branching AT state ST31 shifts to the bonus AT state ST22, the pre-branching AT state ST31 is restored after the bonus AT state ST22 ends, and when the branching AT state ST32 shifts to the bonus AT state ST22, the bonus AT state ST31 is shifted to the bonus AT state ST22. After the end of the AT state ST22, it returns to the branch AT state ST32, and if it shifts to the bonus AT state ST22 in the add-on state ST34, it returns to the add-on state ST34 after the end of the bonus AT state ST22. On the other hand, when transitioning to the bonus AT state ST22 in the final chance state ST33, the transition to the pre-branch AT state ST31 is made after the bonus AT state ST22 ends.

<Processing during AT>
Next, the process during AT in step S1106 in the periodic process (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command has been received from the main MPU 72 . When the lottery result command is received, the winning combination data corresponding to the lottery result command is written in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1802.

After that, in step S1803, it is determined whether or not the penalty AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1", and in step S1804, it is determined whether or not the value of the penalty counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. , and in step S1805, it is determined whether or not the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won. If negative determinations are made in both steps S1803 and S1804 and affirmative determinations are made in step S1805, in step S1806 each stop button that enables the occurrence of the first bell winning or the second bell winning The pushing order data of 42 to 44 are read out from the content of the lottery result command received this time, and written in the sub-side RAM 84.例文帳に追加

In other words, in the bonus AT state generated by stopping operation of the middle reel 32M or 32R as the first stop when the second special replay winning or the third special replay winning is performed in a situation that is not the normal AT state, each stop button 42 to 44 is pressed. order is not reported. In addition, in the normal AT state that has been entered while a penalty event is occurring, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is not notified until the penalty game is completed. In addition, since the processing of step S1103 is executed in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), the processing during this AT is not executed in a situation other than the post-CB internal state. not. On the other hand, in the AT state which is not under the penalty situation, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is notified. As a result, in the AT state, the expectation of awarding medals is higher than in other game states.

Even if the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped in the order notified in the AT state, the bell winning will not occur, but it will not be treated as a penalty event. In other words, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the order notified in the AT state, phenomena such as the end of the AT state, the temporary interruption of the AT state, and the reduction in the winning probability of the normal replay combination. does not occur.

If a negative determination is made in step S1801, if affirmative determination is made in step S1803, if affirmative determination is made in step S1804, if a negative determination is made in step S1805, or if the process of step S1806 is executed determines whether or not a stop command is received from the main MPU 72 in step S1807. When the stop instruction command is received, at step S1808, the stop order data is written to the sub-side RAM 84 in order to store the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the current game.

If a negative determination is made in step S1807, or if the process of step S1808 is executed, it is determined in step S1809 whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. When the winning result command has been received, the winning handling process is executed in step S1810. In the winning handling process, a process for displaying an image corresponding to the current winning combination on the image display device 66 is executed, and a sound corresponding to the occurrence of the winning is output through the speaker 65. Execute the process for

When a negative determination is made in step S1809, or when the process of step S1810 is executed, the value of the execution target counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is grasped in step S1811. As already explained, the execution target counter is a counter for specifying the processing contents to be executed in the AT state by the sub-side MPU 82 .

As the processing executed by the sub-side MPU 82 in the AT state, pre-branch AT state processing (step S1812) for performing execution control of the pre-branch AT state and branch AT state processing for performing execution control of the branch AT state. processing (step S1813), additional state processing (step S1814) for performing execution control of the additional state, final chance processing (step S1815) for performing execution control of the final chance state, and bonus AT state A bonus AT process (step S1816) for performing execution control in the sub-side MPU 82 is set.

In such a processing configuration, the execution target counter is a counter for the sub-side MPU 82 to grasp which of the plurality of types of processing should be executed. In the address table, start addresses of programs for executing the above-described multiple types of processing are set in association with numerical information of counters to be executed.

In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the pre-branch AT state processing (step S1812), and the start address SA1 is the start address of the program for executing the branch AT state processing (step S1813). The start address SA2 is the start address of the program for executing the processing for the added state (step S1814), and the start address SA3 is the start address of the program for executing the processing for the final chance (step S1815). , and the start address SA4 is the start address of the program for executing the bonus AT processing (step S1816). Each process of steps S1812 to S1816 will be described in detail below.

<Processing for AT state before branching>
First, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 38, the pre-branch AT state processing executed in step S1812 of the AT-during processing (FIG. 37) will be described.

In step S1901, normal replay processing is executed. The normal replay process, which will be described later in detail, is a process for generating a trigger for changing the output state of the AT1 signal in the main side MPU 72 during continuous operation in the normal AT state.

In the following step S1902, it is determined whether or not a bonus AT start command has been received from the main MPU 72. When the bonus AT start command is received, the bonus AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1" and the execution object counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "4" in step S1903. As a result, the process for bonus AT in step S1816 is executed in the next process during AT (FIG. 37).

In the following step S1904, after adding "7", which is the privilege reference value, to the privilege point counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84, the pre-branch AT state processing ends. The privilege point counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the normal AT state is set in the sub-side MPU 82 . The privilege point counter is added when the privilege lottery trigger role is won in the normal AT state and the privilege point is won in the privilege point lottery process. Then, when the value of the privilege point counter is 7×n or more (n is an integer of 1 or more), the number of times the normal AT state is set is n, and even if the current normal AT state ends, the normal AT state is repeated n times.

If a negative determination is made in step S1902, it is determined in step S1905 whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command has been received, it is determined in step S1906 whether or not the value of the penalty counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. If the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the value of the penalty counter is decremented by 1 in step S1907, and then this pre-branching AT state processing ends.

When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more in the pre-branch AT state, the AT preparation data is set in the display data setting processing of step S1109 in the periodic processing (FIG. An image indicating that preparation is in progress is displayed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1906, the process advances to step S1908 to execute first addition processing. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the first addition process.

In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the bonus lottery trigger role is won. In the internal post-state lottery table (FIG. 14), if the player wins at any of IV=7, 9, 10, 14 to 16, it is determined that the privilege lottery trigger role has been won.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, privilege point lottery processing is executed in step S2002. In the privilege point lottery process, the privilege point lottery table corresponding to the present privilege lottery opportunity is read from the sub-side ROM 83 . In the privilege point lottery table, "0", "1", "2", "3", and "4" are set as privilege points. is set so as to increase the probability that is selected, and the higher the value of the winning IV, the higher the probability that a larger privilege point will be selected. Also, in the privilege point lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the privilege point lottery table. do.

In subsequent step S2003, it is determined whether or not one or more privilege points have been won. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the number of privilege points won this time is two or more. If a negative determination is made in step S2004, that is, if the number of privilege points won this time is "1", the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, the value of the privilege point counter just before is written in the register of the sub-side MPU 82, and the value of the privilege point won this time is added to the privilege point counter.

If a negative determination is made in step S2001, if a negative determination is made in step S2003, or if the process of step S2005 is executed, then in step S2006 the distribution flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1". is set. The distribution flag is used to specify in the sub-side MPU 82 that when two or more privilege points are selected in the privilege point lottery process, the two or more privilege points need to be divided into a plurality of consecutive games and given. flag.

If the allocation flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, the value of the privilege point counter just before is written in the register of the sub-side MPU 82, and the privilege points allocated to the current game are added to the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84.

If the number of privilege points won this time is 2 or more, an affirmative determination is made in step S2004, and the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, allocation lottery processing is executed. In the allocation lottery process, the allocation lottery table corresponding to the present privilege points is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) is read out from the sub-side RAM 84. The value of the lottery counter is checked against the allocation lottery table. For example, if the selected privilege point is "2", the probability that 2 will be added to the privilege point counter in the current game is 1/2, and the privilege point counter in the current game and in the next game is 1/2. The probability that 1 is added to is 1/2. Further, when the number of selected privilege points is 3 or more, addition to the privilege point counter can be distributed over 3 or more consecutive games including the current game.

In the subsequent step S2009, it is determined whether or not the result of the distribution lottery process is the distribution winning result. That is, it is determined whether or not addition to the privilege point counter is distributed to a plurality of consecutive games. If a negative determination is made in step S2009, the process proceeds to step S2005 already described.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2009, the allocation flag in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1" in step S2010, and allocation data indicating the mode of distribution of the privilege points selected this time is stored in the sub-side RAM 84. Write. After that, in step S2011, the value of the privilege point counter immediately before is written in the register of the sub-side MPU 82, and the privilege points allocated to the game this time are added to the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84.

When a negative determination is made in step S2006, when the process of step S2007 is executed, or when the process of step S2011 is executed, after executing the process of setting the addition state in step S2012, End the process.

FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing processing for setting the add-on state.

In step S2101, arithmetic processing is executed for the immediately preceding privilege points. Specifically, the last privilege point counter value stored in the register of the sub-side MPU 82 in step S2005, step S2007 or step S2011 is read. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value (specifically, "7") in the normal AT state.

In the subsequent step S2102, calculation processing is executed for the privilege points currently stored in the privilege point counter. Specifically, the value of the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is read. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value (specifically, "7") in the normal AT state.

After that, in step S2103, it is determined whether or not the value of the remainder derived by the arithmetic processing of step S2102 is smaller than the value of the remainder derived by the arithmetic processing of step S2101. In a configuration in which the value of the privilege points that can be selected in the privilege point lottery process is smaller than the reference value corresponding to the addition, the value of the remainder after addition to the privilege point counter is smaller than that before the addition. This means that the privilege points, which were larger than 7×(n−1) and smaller than 7×n by adding the counter, have become 7×n or more (n is an integer equal to or larger than 1). In other words, it means that the number of sets in the normal AT state is increased.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the processing for setting the additional state is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2104. In step S2104, the addition state flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1". In the following step S2105, "2" is set in the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM84. By setting "2" to the execution target counter, the addition state processing of step S1814 will be executed in the next processing during AT (FIG. 37).

In subsequent step S2106, lottery processing for the number of compensation replays is executed. In the additional state, the number of set times of the normal AT state is likely to be increased, but the additional state ends when the number of winning normal replays reaches the number of compensation replays. The lottery process for the number of compensating replays is a process for determining by lottery the number of compensating replays that triggers the end of the adding state when the adding state is shifted.

In the lottery process for the number of compensation replays, the compensation replay lottery table at the time of transition to the add-on state is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out. The value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the compensation replay lottery table. In the compensation replay lottery table at the time of transition to the added state, "1", "2", and "3" are set as the number of compensation replays, and "1" is selected with a probability of 6/10, and a probability of 3/10. , "2" is selected, and "3" is selected with a probability of 1/10.

After executing the lottery process for the number of compensation replays in step S2106, the number of compensation replays selected by the lottery process is set in the number of compensation replays counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S2107. The compensation replay number counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining compensation replays in the sub-side MPU 82 . After that, the processing for setting the additional state is terminated.

Here, as described above, the number of sets in the normal AT state is added according to the privilege points. A privilege point notification unit 67 for notification and a stock notification unit 68 for notification of the number of times the normal AT state is set are provided. The light emission control of the privilege point notification unit 67 and the stock notification unit 68 according to the privilege points is executed in the notification control process in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) of the periodic process (FIG. 28).

FIG. 41(a) is a flow chart showing the notification control process.

In the notification control process, first, in step S2201, calculation processing is executed for the privilege points currently stored in the privilege point counter. Specifically, the value of the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is read. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value (specifically, "7") in the normal AT state.

In subsequent step S2202, by referring to the stock notification table stored in the sub-side ROM 83, the group corresponding to the quotient of the calculation result in step S2201, that is, the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state is specified. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 41(b), the stock notification table has a correspondence relationship between the display color of the stock notification unit 68 and the numerical range of the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state (the quotient of the above calculation result). It is defined. Specifically, the number of remaining sets of 0 corresponds to white, the number of remaining sets of 1 to 3 corresponds to blue, and the number of remaining sets of 4 to 6 corresponds to yellow. , the number of remaining sets of 7 to 9 corresponds to green, the number of remaining sets of 10 to 11 corresponds to red, and the number of remaining sets of 12 or more corresponds to rainbow.

In step S2202, it is determined to which group the quotient value derived in step S2201 belongs in the stock notification table. Then, in step S2203, the display color data corresponding to the comprehended group is read out from the sub-side ROM 83 and written in the sub-side RAM 84. FIG. As a result, the light emission of the stock notification unit 68 is controlled so that the display color corresponds to the display color data.

In subsequent step S2204, the remainder of the calculation result in step S2201, that is, the number of privilege points that are not added to the number of sets is specified. Then, by writing the light emission data corresponding to the specified points to the sub-side RAM 84, the privilege point notification unit 67 is turned on so that the number of unit point display units 67a corresponding to the specified points is turned on. Light emission control is performed.

After that, in step S2205, the lighting data corresponding to the value of the win counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is written to the sub-side RAM 84, so that the unit win number display section 69a of the number corresponding to the value of the win counter is displayed. Light emission control of the number-of-wins notification unit 69 is performed so that the lighting state is achieved. The win counter is a counter for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify the number of times the battle effect has resulted in a win effect in an AT state that continues without becoming a non-AT state. After that, the notification control process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 42, a manner in which privilege points are distributed and added to a plurality of games in the pre-branch AT state will be described. FIG. 42(A) is a time chart showing how privilege points are distributed and added, FIG. 42(a) shows the execution period of a game in which privilege points are won, and FIG. 42(b) shows another game. FIG. 42(c) shows the state of the privilege point counter, and FIG. 42(d) shows the execution period of the additional state. 42(B1) to 42(B4) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the lighting modes of the privilege point notification section 67 and the stock notification section 68. FIG.

At timing t1 in the pre-branch AT state, as shown in FIG. 42(a), a game in which bonus points are won is started, and the game ends at timing t2. In this case, when the value of the bonus point counter is already "4", 3 points are selected as the bonus points to be added, and the distribution data is set so that 1 point is added to each of the three consecutive games including the game in question. be done. Therefore, at timing t2, the value of the privilege point counter increases by "1" as shown in FIG. 42(c). As a result, as shown in FIG. 42(B1), the number of unit point display portions 67a that are in the lighting state on the left side and the right side is four, and as shown in FIG. 42(B2), The number of unit point display portions 67a is five.

After that, as shown in FIG. 42(b), one game ends at each of timing t3 and timing t4, and the privilege point counter changes at each timing as shown in FIG. 42(c). The value is incremented by "1". As a result, as shown in FIGS. 42(B3) and 42(B4), the privilege point notification section 67 increases the number of unit point display sections 67a that are lit on the left side and the right side by one. By increasing the value of the privilege point counter in this way, the value of the privilege point counter becomes "7" at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 42(c). As a result, from the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 42(d), the added state is started.

Further, when the value of the privilege point counter becomes "7", the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state becomes 1, so the display color of the stock notification unit 68 is changed as shown in FIG. 42(B4). , specifically blue. By confirming that the display color of the stock notification unit 68 is blue, the player can understand that the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state is 1 or more and 3 or less. Become.

Returning to the description of the pre-branch AT state processing (FIG. 38), after the first addition processing is executed in step S1908, the value of the execution target counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is "2" in step S1909. Determine whether or not If the value of the execution target counter is "2", it means that the transition to the add-on state has occurred as a result of the first add-on process in step S1908. In this case, the pre-branch AT state processing ends without executing the processing after step S1910.

If a negative determination is made in step S1909, the process proceeds to step S1910. In step S1910, the value of the normal AT game counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. Then, in step S1911, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal AT game counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1911, the pre-branch AT state processing is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1911, the branch AT state setting processing is executed in step S1912, and then this processing is executed. End the pre-branch AT state processing.

FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the branch AT state setting process.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the value of the privilege point counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 7 or more. If it is 7 or more, 7 is subtracted from the value of the privilege point counter in step S2302.

In subsequent step S2303, a battle lottery process is executed. In the battle lottery process, the battle lottery table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec) is read from the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is updated as described above. Check against the battle draw table. A battle lottery table is set with a victory performance and a draw performance as battle performances, and is set so that the probability of winning performance is 1/2 and the probability of draw performance is 1/2. .

In subsequent step S2304, a value corresponding to the battle lottery result is set in the branch AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84, and a flag setting process corresponding to the battle lottery result is executed. The branch AT game counter is a counter for specifying the number of games continued in the branch AT state by the sub-side MPU 82, and is any one of 10 to 13 games in the case of a winning effect, and 10 in the case of a draw effect. Or 11 games. In the battle lottery process, not only is one of the win effect and the draw effect selected, but also the number of continuous games in the case of the win effect and the number of continuous games in the case of the draw effect are selected.

Also, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), a data table that enables the display of animation corresponding to the value set in the branch AT game counter and the type of battle effect is created on the sub side. It reads out from the ROM 83 and outputs a signal to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, a display effect corresponding to the selected battle effect is performed on the image display device 66 over a plurality of games. Further, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the selected battle effect is read, and the sound output data setting processing (step S1111) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28) is read out. ) reads the sound output data corresponding to the selected battle effect, and controls the light emission of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output of the speaker 65 according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, a light emission effect and a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 66 are performed.

After that, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the result of the battle lottery process in step S2303 is winning effect. If the winning effect is won, 1 is added to the value of the winning counter of the sub-side RAM 84 in step S2306. As already explained, when the value of the win counter is incremented by 1 as a result of the notification control process (FIG. 41(a)) being executed, the win number notification section 69 lights up the unit win indicator accordingly. The number display portion 69a is increased by one.

In the following step S2307, it is determined whether or not the value of the victory counter after adding 1 is "12". If it is "12", in step S2308, the AT continuation probability is set to the highest probability.

The AT continuation probability is the probability that the AT continuation lottery will be won in the AT continuation lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the normal AT state in a situation where the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state is "0". be. Specifically, 50%, 60%, 70%, 77%, 82%, and 88% are set as the probabilities of AT continuation winning. The AT continuation probability initially set when the non-AT state shifts to the normal AT state differs depending on the mode that triggers the transition to the normal AT state.

For example, when transitioning from the transition chance state to the normal AT state, the AT continuation probability is selected by lottery, and 50% is selected with a probability of 90/100, and 60% is selected with a probability of 8/100. 70% will be selected with a probability of 2/100. In addition, when the normal AT state is entered due to the number of ceiling games being consumed, the AT continuation probability lottery is performed, and 50% is selected with a probability of 80/100, and 50% is selected with a probability of 18/100. 60% will be chosen and 70% will be chosen with a probability of 2/100. Further, when the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination is won and the state shifts to the bonus AT state and then the state shifts to the normal AT state, 77% is selected, and the first special replay combination is won and the bonus is selected. 82% is selected when shifting to AT state and then shifting to normal AT state, and 88% which is the highest probability when shifting to bonus AT state and then shifting to normal AT state as a result of being out. is selected. In other words, the initially set AT continuation probability is higher in the case of transitioning to the normal AT state triggered by the transition to the bonus AT state than in the case of direct transition to the normal AT state.

As described above, the AT continuation probability is set at the time of transition to the normal AT state, but in the normal AT state that continues without becoming a non-AT state, the victory effect has occurred 12 times, which is the predetermined number of times. , the AT continuation probability is set to the highest probability of 88%. As a result, when a victory effect is achieved in the battle effect, not only is the continuation of the normal AT state confirmed, but also an opportunity to increase the AT continuation probability is given, so the player can win the battle effect in the battle effect. The game is played while expecting that the game will become more interesting.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2301, AT continuation lottery processing is executed in step S2309. In the AT continuation lottery process, first, the AT continuation lottery table corresponding to the currently set AT continuation probability is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the sub-side lottery counter updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is set. The value is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the AT continuation lottery table.

In subsequent step S2310, it is determined whether or not the result of the AT continuation lottery process is AT continuation winning. When the AT continuation winning is made, in step S2311, the battle lottery process is executed, and in step S2312, the value corresponding to the battle lottery result is set in the branch AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84, A flag setting process corresponding to the result of the battle lottery is executed. The processing contents of these steps S2311 and S2312 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2303 and S2304. Also, the contents of the battle presentation in the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65 and the image display device 66 are the same as those described in the case of steps S2303 and S2304.

In the subsequent step S2313, it is determined whether or not the result of the battle lottery process in the above step S2311 is winning effect. If the winning effect is won, 1 is added to the value of the winning counter of the sub-side RAM 84 in step S2314. Then, in step S2315, it is determined whether or not the value of the win counter is "12". When the win counter value is "12", in step S2308, the AT continuation probability is set to the highest probability.

On the other hand, if the win counter value is not "12", the process proceeds to step S2316. In step S2316, AT continuation probability promotion lottery processing is executed. In the promotion lottery process, the promotion lottery table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, the value of the sub-side lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is used as the value of the sub-side lottery counter. Match against the lottery table. The promotion lottery table is set so that the probability of winning promotion is 6/10. Then, in step S2317, it is determined whether or not the result of the promotion lottery process is promotion winning, and in the case of promotion winning, the AT continuation probability is set one step higher in step S2318.

The promotion lottery process for the AT continuation probability is executed when the winning effect is obtained in the battle effect as described above, and is not executed when the draw effect is obtained. As a result, when a victory effect is achieved in the battle effect, not only is the continuation of the normal AT state confirmed, but also an opportunity to increase the AT continuation probability is given, so the player can win the battle effect in the battle effect. The game is played while expecting that the game will become more interesting.

In addition, the promotion lottery process of the AT continuation probability is not executed when the normal AT state continues due to the value of the privilege point counter being 7 or more, and when the AT continuation lottery process wins the AT continuation lottery executed. When the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more, the continuation of the normal AT state is confirmed, so that the player can confirm the progress of the battle presentation with peace of mind. On the other hand, when the AT continuation lottery process is executed, the normal AT state may end if the AT continuation is lost, so the player confirms the progress of the battle production while expecting a win production or a draw production. It will be done. In this case, by executing the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process on the condition that the AT continuation lottery process achieves the AT continuation winning and win performance, the euphoria of the AT continuation winning is enhanced. It is possible to increase the player's skill level, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the AT continuation lottery process of step S2309, when it becomes AT continuation loss and negative determination is made in step S2310, it progresses to step S2319. In step S2319, a value corresponding to the defeat effect is set in the branch AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84, and the defeat effect flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1".

Also, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), a data table that enables the display of animation corresponding to the value set in the branch AT game counter and the type of battle effect is created on the sub side. It reads out from the ROM 83 and outputs a signal to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, a display effect corresponding to the selected battle effect is performed on the image display device 66 over a plurality of games. Further, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the selected battle effect is read, and the sound output data setting processing (step S1111) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28) is read out. ) reads the sound output data corresponding to the selected battle effect, and controls the light emission of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output of the speaker 65 according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, a light emission effect and a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 66 are performed.

Here, the number of games set in the branch AT game counter when the defeat effect is executed is "10". On the other hand, 10 to 13 games are set for the win effect, and 10 or 11 games are set for the draw effect. The branch AT state continues for the number of games equal to the value set in the branch AT game counter, and AT processing is executed in the sub-side MPU 82 during the branch AT state. Then, in the win effect or the draw effect, not only does the normal AT state simply continue, but the period itself during which the process for AT is executed can be longer than in the case of the defeat effect. As a result, the advantage of becoming a winning effect or a draw effect is further enhanced, and the degree of attention to the battle effect is increased.

If a negative determination is made in step S2305, if a negative determination is made in step S2307, if the processing of step S2308 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S2313, if a negative determination is made in step S2317, step When the process of S2318 is executed, or when the process of step S2319 is executed, in step S2320, the branch AT state flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1", and the sub-side RAM 84 is executed. After setting the value of the target counter to "1", this branch AT state setting process is terminated. As a result, the branch AT state process of step S1813 is executed in the next AT process (FIG. 37).

<Processing for branch AT state>
Next, the branch AT state processing executed in step S1813 of the AT-during processing (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2401, a process for avoiding the pressing order is executed. The push order avoidance process, which will be described later in detail, is intended to prevent the main MPU 72 from generating an opportunity to change the output state of the AT1 signal even though the normal AT state does not occur. processing.

In the following step S2402, it is determined whether or not a bonus AT start command has been received from the main side MPU72. When the bonus AT start command is received, the bonus AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1" and the execution object counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "4" in step S2403. As a result, the process for bonus AT in step S1816 is executed in the next process during AT (FIG. 37).

In the subsequent step S2404, the sub-side RAM 84 stores and retains the data of the battle effect already set in the current branch AT state. In this case, the battle effect data to be stored includes the value of the branch AT game counter set in the pre-branch AT state processing (step S1812) when the current branch AT state is started, and the battle effect data. The state of the flag corresponding to the type, and the control data of the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65 and the image display device 66 from the start game to the end game of the battle presentation in the current branch AT state are included. Thus, when returning to the branch AT state after the bonus AT state ends, it is possible to restart the battle performance in the branch AT state performed before the start of the bonus AT state from the start. Thereafter, in step S2405, after adding "7" to the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84, the pre-branch AT state processing is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S2402, it is determined in step S2406 whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. When the winning result command has not been received, this branch AT state processing is terminated as it is, and when the winning result command has been received, the second addition processing is executed in step S2407. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the second addition processing.

In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the player wins the privilege lottery opportunity role. In the internal post-state lottery table (FIG. 14), if the player wins at any of IV=7, 9, 10, 14 to 16, it is determined that the privilege lottery trigger role has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S2501, the second addition process is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, privilege point lottery processing is executed in step S2502. In the privilege point lottery process, the privilege point lottery table corresponding to the present privilege lottery opportunity is read from the sub-side ROM 83 . In the privilege point lottery table, "0", "1", "2", "3", and "4" are set as privilege points. is set so as to increase the probability that is selected, and the higher the value of the winning IV, the higher the probability that a larger privilege point will be selected. Also, in the privilege point lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the privilege point lottery table. do.

In subsequent step S2503, it is determined whether or not one or more privilege points have been won. If a negative determination is made in step S2503, this second addition processing is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, the process proceeds to step S2504. In step S2504, the value of the privilege point counter immediately before is written in the register of the sub-side MPU 82, and the value of the privilege point won this time is added to the privilege point counter.

In the following step S2505, arithmetic processing is executed for the immediately preceding privilege points. Specifically, the last privilege point counter value stored in the register of the sub-side MPU 82 in step S2504 is read. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value (specifically, "7") in the normal AT state.

In the subsequent step S2506, calculation processing is executed for the privilege points currently stored in the privilege point counter. Specifically, the value of the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is read. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value (specifically, "7") in the normal AT state.

After that, in step S2507, it is determined whether or not the value of the remainder derived by the arithmetic processing of step S2506 is smaller than the value of the remainder derived by the arithmetic processing of step S2505. In a configuration in which the value of the privilege points that can be selected in the privilege point lottery process is smaller than the reference value corresponding to the addition, the value of the remainder after addition to the privilege point counter is smaller than that before the addition. This means that the privilege points, which were larger than 7×(n−1) and smaller than 7×n by adding the counter, have become 7×n or more (n is an integer equal to or larger than 1). In other words, it means that the number of sets in the normal AT state is increased.

If a negative determination is made in step S2507, the processing for setting the additional state is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2507, the 1-bit addition state transition flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1" in step S2508, and then this second addition processing ends. The add state transition flag is a flag for specifying in the sub-side MPU 82 that the state should be shifted to the add state after the end of the branch AT state.

Returning to the description of the branch AT state processing (FIG. 44), after executing the second addition processing in step S2407, the value of the branch AT game counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 in step S2408. Incidentally, each time the value of the branch AT game counter is decremented by 1, at steps S1109 to S1111 in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), the display control data table and the light emission control data for the battle effect set this time are changed. The reference range of the table and sound output control data table is switched to the reference range corresponding to the next game. Thus, every time one game is completed, the effect range of the battle effect is switched to the effect range corresponding to the next game.

After that, in step S2409, it is determined whether or not the value of the branch AT game counter after subtracting 1 is "0". If it is not "0", the process for branch AT state is terminated as it is. End the process.

FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the end processing of the branch AT state.

First, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the defeat effect flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1", thereby determining whether or not the battle effect executed this time is the defeat effect. If the defeat effect flag is set to "1", it is determined in step S2602 whether or not the value of the privilege point counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 7 or more. If it is less than 7, in step S2603, the defeat effect flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and the branch AT state flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". In step S2603, the final chance flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1", and the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "3". As a result, the last chance process of step S1815 is executed in the next AT process (FIG. 37). After that, the end processing of this branch AT state is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2602 that the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more, the process proceeds to step S2604. In step S2604, 7 is subtracted from the value of the privilege point counter. In subsequent step S2605, a battle lottery process is executed. The processing content of the battle lottery processing is the same as the processing content of step S2303 and the processing content of step S2311 in the branch AT state setting processing (FIG. 43).

In subsequent step S2606, a value corresponding to the battle lottery result in step S2605 is set in the branch AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84, and a flag setting process corresponding to the battle lottery result is executed. In this case, the branch AT game counter is set to "3" so that the branch AT state is extended by three games when the win effect is selected, and the branch AT state is extended by one game when the draw effect is selected. Set the branch AT game counter to "1" to extend.

In other words, when the value of the privilege point counter becomes 7 or more in the middle of the branch AT state in which the defeat effect is selected as the battle effect, and the continuous game in the normal AT state is confirmed, the number of continuous games in the branch AT state is extended. . In the branch AT state, AT processing is executed. As a result, when the value of the privilege point counter becomes 7 or more in the middle of the branch AT state in which the defeat effect is selected, not only is the continuous game in the normal AT state fixed, but also the number of continuous games in the branch AT state is extended. This is advantageous for the player. By using this extended game, the resurrection effect is executed in which the defeat effect is changed to the victory effect or the draw effect, so that the degree of attention in the effect is increased.

Further, the number of continued games extended in the branch AT state is larger when the win effect is selected than when the draw effect is selected. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage when the winning effect is selected, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the occurrence of the winning effect.

Also, in step S2606, the defeat effect flag in the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and the revival flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1". The revival flag is a flag for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify that the revival of the victory effect or the draw effect has occurred in a situation where the defeat effect is selected.

After that, in step S2607, a process for winning effect is executed. In the process for the win effect, when the win effect is selected by the battle lottery process in the previous step S2605, the process of steps S2306 to S2308 in the branch AT state setting process (FIG. 43) is executed. Specifically, when the winning effect is selected, 1 is added to the value of the winning counter of the sub-side RAM 84, and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter after the addition of 1 is "12". Then, when it is "12", the AT continuation probability is set to the highest probability. After that, the end processing of this branch AT state is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2601, it is determined in step S2608 whether or not the revival flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1". It is determined whether or not a victory performance or a draw performance has been revived. In addition, in step S2609, by determining whether or not "1" is set to the addition state transition flag of the sub-side RAM 84, the benefit during the branch AT state in which the victory effect or the draw effect is selected It is determined whether or not the value of the point counter is 7 or more.

If a negative determination is made in both steps S2608 and S2609, the pre-branch AT state setting process is executed in step S2610, and then the branch AT state ending process is terminated.

FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the pre-branch AT state setting process.

In step S2701, it is determined whether or not the battle effect finally performed in the current branch AT state is the victory effect. In the case of the winning effect, in step S2702, the number-of-continued-games lottery process for the winning effect is executed. In the lottery process, first, the number-of-continued-games lottery table at the time of winning effect is read from the sub-side ROM 83 . As already explained, 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games exist as the number of continuous games in one set in the normal AT state. In the number-of-continued-games lottery table at the time of winning effect, the probability that 30 games will be selected as the number of continuous games for one set is 1/10, the probability that 50 games will be selected is 4/10, and 100 games will be selected. 5/10 chance of being In the lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is applied to the number-of-continued-games lottery table at the time of winning effect. to match.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2701 that the effect is a draw, in step S2703, the number-of-continued-games lottery process for the draw effect is executed. In the lottery process, first, the number-of-continued-games lottery table for the draw effect is read from the sub-side ROM 83 . As already explained, 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games exist as the number of continuous games in one set in the normal AT state. In the continuous game number lottery table for the draw effect, the probability that 30 games will be selected as the number of continuous games in one set is 3/10, the probability that 50 games will be selected is 5/10, and 100 games will be selected. 2/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is applied to the number-of-continued-games lottery table during the draw effect. to match.

When the process of step S2702 or step S2703 is executed, in step S2704, the value corresponding to the number of continuous games selected in the lottery process of step S2702 or the lottery process of step S2703 is set to the normal AT game in the sub-side RAM 84. set in the counter. Thereafter, in step S2705, the branch AT state flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, the pre-branch AT state process of step S1812 is executed in the next AT process (FIG. 37). After that, the pre-branch AT state setting processing ends.

Returning to the description of the end processing of the branch AT state (FIG. 46), if the determination in step S2608 or step S2609 is affirmative, the processing in steps S2611 to S2614 is executed. In step S2611, "1" is set to the superimposed state of the sub-side RAM 84, and "0" is cleared to the branch AT state flag. In the following step S2612, "2" is set in the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM84. By setting "2" to the execution target counter, the addition state processing of step S1814 will be executed in the next processing during AT (FIG. 37).

After that, in step S2613, lottery processing for the number of compensation replays is executed, and in step S2614, processing for setting the number of compensation replays counter is executed, and then this branch AT state end processing is terminated. The processing contents of these steps S2613 and S2614 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2106 and S2107 in the process of setting the added state (FIG. 40).

<Progress Mode of Branch AT State>
Next, the progress of the branch AT state will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. FIG. 48A is an explanatory diagram showing the progress of the branch AT state, and FIGS.

When the pre-branching AT state (ST41) ends, if the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more (ST42), a victory effect (ST43) or a draw effect (ST44) is selected in the battle lottery process. In this case, the normal AT state continues, and the state before branching (ST45) is restored. It should be noted that the transition to the add-on state or the bonus AT state may occur before transitioning to the pre-branch state (ST45).

When the pre-branching AT state (ST41) ends, if the value of the privilege point counter is less than 7 (ST51), AT continuation lottery processing (ST52) is executed. As a result, if the AT continuation wins, the victory effect (ST53) or the draw effect (ST54) is selected in the battle lottery process. In this case, the normal AT state continues, and the state before branching (ST45) is restored. It should be noted that the transition to the add-on state or the bonus AT state may occur before transitioning to the pre-branch state (ST45). On the other hand, when the continuation is lost in the AT continuation lottery process (ST52), the defeat effect (ST55) is selected as the battle effect.

Here, the contents of the battle presentation will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 48(B1) to (B6).

In the battle effect, first, as shown in FIG. 48(B1), the image display device 66 displays the friend character CH1 and the enemy character CH2. In addition, in the battle production, the animation will be displayed in each game, but if the display content before switching is determined by each game, the display content before switching will be displayed until the next game starts. Still image display by is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(B2), only the friend character CH1 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 48(B3), only the enemy character CH2 is displayed. After that, the state of the battle between the two characters CH1 and CH2 is displayed as a moving image. In the case of the victory effect, as shown in FIG. 48(B4), the ally character CH1 wins over the enemy character CH2.In the case of the draw effect, as shown in FIG. 48(B5). , the ally character CH1 and the enemy character CH2 are both standing up, and in the case of a defeat effect, as shown in FIG. 48B6, the ally character CH1 is defeated by the enemy character CH2. be.

Returning to the description of FIG. 48(A), when the AT continuation lottery process (ST52) fails to continue and the defeat effect (ST55) is selected as the battle effect, the value of the privilege point counter is 7 at the end of the defeat effect. It is determined whether or not the above is satisfied. If the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more (ST61), a resurrection victory effect (ST62) or a resurrection draw effect (ST63) is selected in the battle lottery process. In this case, the normal AT state continues, and after the addition state is performed, the state before branching (ST64) is restored. On the other hand, if the value of the privilege point counter is less than 7 (ST65), the game moves to the final chance state (ST66).

With the above configuration, if the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state is 1 or more, the regular AT state is confirmed, and even if the number of remaining sets is "0", it is possible to continue winning in the AT continuation lottery process. As a result, the normal AT state continues. This makes it possible to increase the chances that the normal AT state will continue.

In addition, even if the continuation is lost in the AT continuation lottery process, the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more in the branch AT state, and the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state is 1 or more, so that the normal AT state It will be a concession. As a result, even if the defeat effect occurs in the branch AT state, it is possible to maintain the expectation for the continuation of the normal AT state.

In addition, even if the AT continuation lottery process temporarily fails to continue, if the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more during the branch AT state and the normal AT state continues, at the start of the branch AT state after that If the value of the privilege point counter is less than 7, the AT continuation lottery process is executed again. As a result, an opportunity to execute the AT continuation lottery process is secured before the normal AT state ends, and it is possible to favorably increase expectations for the continuation of the normal AT state.

<How the AT continuation probability is promoted>
Next, how the AT continuation probability increases in the AT continuation lottery process will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

As already explained, six types of 50%, 60%, 70%, 77%, 82% and 88% are set as the AT continuation probability. In the case of transitioning to the normal AT state via the bonus AT state, the AT continuation probability at the time of transition is any of 77%, 82% and 88%. On the other hand, when directly transitioning to the normal AT state without going through the bonus AT state, the AT continuation probability at the time of the transition is basically 50%.

In this case, when the AT continuation lottery process wins the AT continuation, the battle lottery process wins the victory presentation, and the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process wins the promotion, the AT continuation probability is increased by one stage. . That is, 50% becomes 60%, 60% becomes 70%, 70% becomes 77%, 77% becomes 82%, and 82% becomes 88%. As a result, the longer the normal AT state continues, the higher the probability of AT continuation tends to become, and the more likely the normal AT state continues. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of the continuous AT state.

In addition, when the victory effect occurs 12 times in the normal AT state without intervening the non-AT state, regardless of which probability the AT continuation probability is at that time, the AT continuation probability is the highest probability. Some 88%. As a result, the player plays the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the winning effect in the battle effect, and the interest in the game is enhanced by increasing the degree of attention to the battle effect.

Here, when there are two opportunities for the normal AT state to continue, the number of remaining sets and the AT continuation lottery process, the normal AT state is triggered when the number of remaining sets is 1 or more. Battle lottery processing may be executed and a winning presentation may occur even when the game continues. Then, when the winning effect is generated 12 times, the AT continuation probability of the AT continuation lottery process becomes the highest probability. As a result, when there are two opportunities, the number of remaining sets and the AT continuation lottery process, as opportunities for the normal AT state to continue, both opportunities regarding whether the AT continuation probability is the highest probability or not. can be closely associated.

Further, the slot machine 10 is provided with a stock notification unit 68 for notifying the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state. Since the display color of the stock notification unit 68 is changed according to the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state, the player can grasp the number of remaining sets by checking the display color. It is possible to As a result, by checking the stock notification unit 68 and grasping the number of remaining sets, the player himself/herself can determine the degree of expectation that the AT continuation probability will be the highest in relation to the number of executions of the winning effect. will be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the expectation that the AT continuation probability will be the highest probability.

In addition, the slot machine 10 is provided with a win count notification unit 69 for notifying the number of winning effects. As a result, the player can clearly recognize the number of winning presentations by confirming the number-of-wins notification section 69 .

<Transition timing of the add-on state>
Next, the transition timing to the add state in the pre-branch AT state and the branch AT state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG.

50(a) shows the execution period of the pre-branch AT state, FIG. 50(b) shows the execution period of the branch AT state, FIG. 50(c) shows the execution period of the superposition state, and FIG. 50(d). indicates the timing when the value of the privilege point counter becomes a multiple of seven.

As shown in FIG. 50(a), the pre-branching AT state is started at timing t1, and as a result of each game in the pre-branching AT state, privilege points are obtained at timing t2, as shown in FIG. 50(d). The counter value becomes 7×n (n is an integer equal to or greater than 1). As a result, the pre-branch AT state ends as shown in FIG. 50(a), and the add-on state starts as shown in FIG. 50(c). That is, in the pre-branch AT state, when the value of the privilege point counter becomes a multiple of 7 or more, the state shifts to the add-on state.

After that, at the timing of t3, the addition state ends as shown in FIG. 50(c), thereby returning to the pre-branch AT state as shown in FIG. 50(a). In this case, the pre-branch AT state is restored with the number of continuing games remaining before shifting to the additional state.

After that, at timing t4, the pre-branch AT state ends as shown in FIG. 50(a), and the branch AT state starts as shown in FIG. 50(b). As a result of each game in the branch AT state, at timing t5, the value of the privilege point counter becomes 7×(n+1) (n is an integer equal to or greater than 1), as shown in FIG. 50(d). However, at the timing of t5, the branch AT state does not end as shown in FIG. 50(b).

After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the branch AT state ends, and the add-on state starts as shown in FIG. 50(c). In other words, in the branch AT state, the state does not shift to the add-on state when the value of the privilege point counter becomes a multiple of 7 or more, and the state shifts to the add-on state when the branch AT state ends. This prevents the execution mode of the battle presentation from becoming complicated.

After that, at the timing of t7, the addition state ends as shown in FIG. 50(c), and the pre-branch AT state starts as shown in FIG. 50(a).

<Additional state processing>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51, the additional state processing executed in step S1814 of the AT-during processing (FIG. 37) will be described.

In step S2801, a process for avoiding the pressing order is executed. The push order avoidance process, which will be described later in detail, is intended to prevent the main MPU 72 from generating an opportunity to change the output state of the AT1 signal even though the normal AT state does not occur. processing.

In the following step S2802, it is determined whether or not a bonus AT start command has been received from the main MPU72. When the bonus AT start command is received, the bonus AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1" and the execution object counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "4" in step S2803. As a result, the process for bonus AT in step S1816 is executed in the next process during AT (FIG. 37). After that, in step S2804, "7" is added to the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84, after which the processing for the extra status is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S2802, it is determined in step S2805 whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command has not been received, the processing for the additional state is terminated as it is, and if the winning result command has been received, the process advances to step S2806.

In step S2806, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery trigger role is won. In the internal post-state lottery table (FIG. 14), if the player wins at any of IV=7, 9, 10, 14 to 16, it is determined that the privilege lottery trigger role has been won.

If an affirmative determination is made at step S2806, at step S2807, the add-on lottery table corresponding to the current add-on mode and the winning combination of the current game is read from the sub-side ROM83. In the addition lottery table, "0", "1", "2", and "3" are set as the number of additions. Further, as the additional mode, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 52(a), a first additional mode, a second additional mode, and a third additional mode are set. The first add-on mode has the lowest add-on probability, and even when an add-on occurs, a small number of add-on times is likely to be selected. In addition, the second addition mode that can be shifted from the first addition mode has a higher addition probability than the first addition mode, and when addition occurs, the number of times of addition that is larger than that in the first addition mode is selected. easy to be In addition, the third add-on mode that can be shifted from the first add-on mode or the second add-on mode has a higher add-on probability than the second add-on mode. is likely to be selected. In addition, in relation to the winning combination, the higher the winning IV value, the higher the addition probability, and the higher the winning IV value, the greater the number of additions. It is set up to increase the probability of being selected.

In subsequent step S2808, an additional lottery process is executed. In the additional lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is collated with the above-mentioned additional lottery table.

In the subsequent step S2809, it is determined whether or not the result of the additional lottery process is an additional winning. In the case of an additional winning, 7×n (n is an integer equal to or greater than 1) is added to the privilege point counter in step S2810. In this case, n is the number of additions of 1 or more selected in the addition lottery process.

Here, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 52(b), the privilege point counter has a data amount of 1 byte. The privilege point counter is a counter to which a value less than the privilege reference value (specifically, "7") is added when privilege points are won in the privilege point lottery process in the pre-branching AT state or the branching AT state. is. In addition, in the bonus point counter, the bonus reference value is added when the number of remaining sets is added once in the bonus AT state, and the number of remaining sets is increased to n times (n is an integer of 1 or more), the value of privilege reference value x n (n is an integer of 1 or more) is added. That is, the privilege point counter is used not only as a counter for accumulating a value less than the privilege reference value, but also as a counter for adding a value when adding the number of remaining sets. This makes it possible to reduce the number of counters compared to a configuration in which a counter for cumulatively adding a value less than the privilege reference value and a counter for measuring the number of remaining sets are provided separately. Therefore, in a configuration that handles data in units of bytes, it is possible to reduce the data capacity.

Also, in the privilege point counter, not only is the value less than the privilege standard numerical value cumulatively added and the value of the privilege standard numerical value x n (n is an integer of 1 or more) is added, and the number of remaining sets is 1 or more. In the case where a series of games in the normal AT state occurs in a certain situation, the privilege reference value is subtracted from the privilege point counter. As a result, it becomes possible to centrally handle the numerical value related to the addition of the number of remaining sets in the privilege point counter. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified compared to, for example, a configuration in which a privilege point counter and a counter for the number of remaining sets are provided separately and addition processing for the counter for the number of remaining sets is executed according to the value of the privilege point counter. planned.

Returning to the description of the added state processing (FIG. 51), if a negative determination is made in step S2809, or if the processing of step S2810 is executed, mode UP lottery processing is executed in step S2811. In the mode-up lottery process, the mode-up lottery table corresponding to the current add-on mode and the winning combination of the current game is read from the sub-side ROM 83 . For example, in the mode UP lottery table in the first addition mode, the UP winning result to the second addition mode, the UP winning result to the third addition mode, and the losing result are set. In the mode UP lottery table in , UP winning results for the third addition mode and losing results are set. In addition, in the mode UP lottery table for the third addition mode, status quo win results are set as mode UP wins, and status quo loss results are set as loss results. Further, the mode UP lottery tables for the first and second addition modes are set such that the higher the winning IV value, the higher the mode UP probability. In the mode-up lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the mode-up lottery table. do.

In subsequent step S2812, it is determined whether or not the result of the mode UP lottery process is mode UP winning. If the mode UP win is not obtained, the processing for the additional state is terminated as it is, and if the mode UP win is obtained, the process advances to step S2813. In step S2813, processing is executed to change the add-on mode to a mode one step or two steps higher. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(a), if it is the first addition mode, it is changed to the second addition mode or the third addition mode, and if it is the second addition mode, it is changed to the third addition mode. , and if it is in the third add-on mode, the third add-on mode is maintained.

After that, in step S2814, lottery processing for the number of compensation replays is executed. As already explained, in the additional state, the number of sets in the normal AT state is likely to be increased, but the additional state ends when the normal replay win occurs the number of compensation replays. The lottery process for the number of compensating replays is a process for determining by lottery the number of compensating replays that triggers the end of the added state.

In the lottery process for the number of compensation replays, the compensation replay lottery table corresponding to the current add-on mode is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read. , the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the compensation replay lottery table. In the compensation replay lottery table for the first addition mode, "1", "2", and "3" are set as the number of compensation replays. "2" is selected with a probability, and "3" is selected with a probability of 1/10. In the compensation replay lottery table in the second addition mode, "1" is selected with a probability of 3/10, "2" is selected with a probability of 5/10, and "3" is selected with a probability of 2/10. be. In the compensation replay lottery table in the third addition mode, "1" is selected with a probability of 1/10, "2" is selected with a probability of 3/10, and "3" is selected with a probability of 6/10. be. That is, the second addition mode has a higher addition probability than the first addition mode, and the number of compensation replay selections is also large. In addition, the third addition mode has a higher addition probability than the second addition mode, and the number of compensation replay selections is also large.

After executing the lottery process for the number of compensation replays in step S2814, the number of compensation replays selected by the lottery process is added to the compensation replay number counter of the sub-side RAM 84 in step S2815. After that, the processing for setting the additional state is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2806, it is determined in step S2816 whether or not the normal replay combination has been won. If the normal replay combination has not been won, the processing for the extra state is terminated as it is, and if the normal replay combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S2817.

In step S2817, 1 is subtracted from the value of the compensation replay number counter in the sub-side RAM 84, and in subsequent step S2818, it is determined whether or not the value of the compensation replay number counter after the 1 subtraction is "0". If it is not "0", the processing for the additional state is ended as it is, and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step S2819.

In step S2819, by determining whether or not the value of the normal AT game counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is "0", it is determined whether or not the current addition state has shifted in the middle of the pre-branch AT state. judge. If the value of the normal AT game counter is "0", it means that the current add-on state has shifted to the end of the branch AT state. After executing the pre-branching AT state setting processing in S2820, the additional state processing ends. The processing contents of the pre-branch AT state setting process are the same as those shown in the flowchart of FIG. However, in step S2705, instead of clearing the branch AT state flag to "0", the add state flag is cleared to "0".

If the value of the normal AT game counter is not "0", a negative determination is made in step S2819, and the process proceeds to step S2821. In step S2821, the add-on state flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0", after which the add-on state process is terminated. As a result, the pre-branch AT state process of step S1812 is executed in the next AT process (FIG. 37).

<Last Chance Processing>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53, the final chance process executed in step S1815 of the AT-during process (FIG. 37) will be described.

In step S2901, a process for avoiding the pressing order is executed. The push order avoidance process, which will be described later in detail, is intended to prevent the main MPU 72 from generating an opportunity to change the output state of the AT1 signal even though the normal AT state does not occur. processing.

In subsequent step S2902, it is determined whether or not a bonus AT start command has been received from the main MPU 72 . When the bonus AT start command is received, in step S2903, the bonus AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1", the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "4", and the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "4". The final chance flag in the side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, the process for bonus AT in step S1816 is executed in the next process during AT (FIG. 37). After that, in step S2904, after adding "7" to the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84, the process for the final chance ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S2902, it is determined in step S2905 whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command has not been received, the processing for the additional state is terminated as it is, and if the winning result command has been received, the process advances to step S2906.

In step S2906, the resurrection lottery table corresponding to the winning combination of the current game and the current privilege point counter value is read from the sub-side ROM 83 . The resurrection lottery table is set so that the greater the value of the winning IV, the higher the resurrection winning probability, and the greater the value of the current privilege point counter, the higher the resurrection winning probability. It is

In subsequent step S2907, recovery lottery processing is executed. In the resurrection lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is collated with the above-mentioned resurrection lottery table.

In subsequent step S2908, it is determined whether or not the result of the resurrection lottery process is resurrection winning. In the case of a resurrection win, in step S2909, a lottery process for the number of continued games at resurrection is executed. In the lottery process, first, the number-of-continued-games lottery table at the time of revival is read from the sub-side ROM 83 . As already explained, 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games exist as the number of continuous games in one set in the normal AT state. In the continuous game number lottery table at the time of revival, the probability that 30 games will be selected as the number of continuous games for one set is 4/10, the probability that 50 games will be selected is 3/10, and 100 games will be selected. 3/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is applied to the number-of-continued-games lottery table at the time of revival. match. Then, in step S2910, a value corresponding to the number of continuous games selected in the lottery process of step S2909 is set in the normal AT game counter of the sub-side RAM84.

Thereafter, in step S2911, the final chance flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, the pre-branch AT state process of step S1812 is executed in the next AT process (FIG. 37). Furthermore, in step S2911, the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". After that, the process for the final chance ends.

By clearing the privilege point counter to "0" when winning the resurrection lottery process, the value of the privilege point counter that contributed to winning the resurrection is further used in the normal AT state of the subsequent destination. is prevented. Therefore, it is possible to limit the generation of profit from privilege points.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2908, the process proceeds to step S2912. In step S2912, it is determined whether or not the extension trigger role is won. In the internal post-state lottery table (FIG. 14), if the player wins at any of IV=7, 9, 10, 14-16, it is determined that the extension trigger role has been won. When the extension opportunity role is not won, in step S2913, various clear processes are executed. In various clearing processes, the final chance flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and the normal AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". This ends the normal AT state. Also, the privilege point counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, the value of the privilege point counter is inherited between sets in the case where the normal AT state is continuous, but when the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state becomes "0" and the state shifts to the non-AT state cannot be carried over. Also, the victory counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, the value of the victory counter is inherited between sets when the normal AT state is continuous, and is inherited when the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state becomes "0" and the state is shifted to the non-AT state. can't

After that, in step S2914, after the ceiling game number lottery process is executed, the final chance process ends. In the ceiling game number lottery process, the ceiling game lottery table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read. is checked against the ceiling game lottery table. Then, the value selected by lottery processing for the number of ceiling games is set in the ceiling remaining game counter of the sub-side RAM 84 .

If it is determined in step S2912 that the extension opportunity role has been won, the process for the final chance ends as it is. As a result, the final chance state continues. In other words, even if the resurrection winning role is not won in the resurrection lottery process in spite of winning the extension opportunity role in the final chance state, the final chance status continues as a benefit of winning the extension opportunity role. Become. If the extension trigger role is won in the final chance state, the resurrection lottery process is executed with a high probability of winning the resurrection. In that case, there is a risk that the player will be discouraged by that amount. On the other hand, if the player wins the extension opportunity role, the final chance state will be extended. It becomes possible.

<Bonus AT processing>
Next, the bonus AT process executed in step S1816 of the AT process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3001, a process for avoiding the pressing order is executed. The push order avoidance process, which will be described later in detail, is intended to prevent the main MPU 72 from generating an opportunity to change the output state of the AT1 signal even though the normal AT state does not occur. processing.

In subsequent step S3002, it is determined whether or not a bonus AT end command indicating that the bonus AT number counter of the main side RAM 74 is "0" has been received from the main side MPU 72 or not. It should be noted that the main MPU 72 transmits a bonus AT end command when one set of bonus AT states ends even when the bonus AT number counter is not "0". In this case, step S3002. does not make an affirmative judgment.

If a negative determination is made in step S3002, the process for bonus AT ends as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, the bonus AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0".

In the following step S3004, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the add-on state flag of the sub-side RAM84. If the add-on state flag is set to "1", it means that the series of bonus AT states that ended this time was shifted in the middle of the add-on state. After setting the value to "2", this bonus AT processing is terminated. As a result, the add-on state processing of step S1814 is executed in the next AT processing (FIG. 37).

If a negative determination is made in step S3004, it is determined in step S3006 whether or not the branch AT state flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1". If the branch AT state flag is set to "1", it means that the series of bonus AT states that ended this time has transitioned in the middle of the branch AT state. After setting the value of the counter to "1", the process for bonus AT ends. As a result, the branch AT state process of step S1813 is executed in the next AT process (FIG. 37).

If a negative determination is made in step S3006, it is determined in step S3008 whether or not the normal AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1". If the normal AT flag is set to "1", it means that the series of bonus AT states that ended this time has transitioned in the middle of the pre-branching AT state. After clearing the counter value to "0", this bonus AT processing is terminated. As a result, the pre-branch AT state process of step S1812 is executed in the next AT process (FIG. 37).

If a negative determination is made in step S3008, it is determined in step S3010 whether or not the penalty AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S3010, the normal AT flag in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1" in step S3011. In the subsequent step S3012, a number-of-continued-games lottery process after the bonus is executed.

In the lottery process, first, the number-of-continued-games lottery table after the bonus is read from the sub-side ROM 83 . As already explained, 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games exist as the number of continuous games in one set in the normal AT state. In the lottery table for the number of continuous games after the bonus, the probability that 30 games will be selected as the number of continuous games for one set is 1/10, the probability that 50 games will be selected is 2/10, and 100 games will be selected. 7/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is applied to the number-of-continued-games lottery table after the bonus. match.

When the process of step S3012 is executed, a value corresponding to the number of continuous games selected in the lottery process of step S3012 is set in the normal AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84 in step S3013. Thereafter, in step S3014, after the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0", this bonus AT process is terminated. As a result, the pre-branch AT state process of step S1812 is executed in the next AT process (FIG. 37).

On the other hand, if the penalty AT flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S3010, and this bonus AT process ends. As a result, even if the state is shifted to the bonus AT state in the penalty situation, the state is not shifted to the normal AT state after the end of the bonus AT state.

<External output from the slot machine 10 to the hall computer HC>
Next, a configuration for external output from the slot machine 10 to the hall computer HC will be described. FIG. 55(a) is a schematic diagram for explaining the outline of the electrical configuration of a game hall in which a large number of slot machines 10 are installed, and FIG. It is a front view of.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), an island facility S is provided in the game hall, and a large number of slot machines 10 are installed for the island facility S. As shown in FIG. Also, the island facility S is provided with a data counter DC corresponding to each slot machine 10 on a one-to-one basis. Each data counter DC is mounted above the corresponding slot machine 10, and has a first display section DC1 for displaying the number of game executions and a second display section DC1 for displaying the number of executions of a predetermined game state. A portion DC2 and a third display portion DC3 for displaying the number of executions of a specific game state different from the predetermined game state are provided.

A hall computer HC is provided in the game hall as management control means for managing each slot machine 10 and each data counter DC. Hall computer HC is an electronic computing device having a management program, and MPU 201 is mounted therein. The MPU 201 has a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and temporarily stores various data and information input from the slot machine 10 when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. and a RAM 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing the data.

The hall computer HC is electrically connected to each slot machine 10 through an electric wiring group EL1, and is also electrically connected to each data counter DC through an electric wiring group EL2. Then, it executes a management process based on the information received from each slot machine 10, and transmits a signal according to the result of the management process to each data counter DC.

Here, the configuration for transmitting information to the hall computer HC in the slot machine 10 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 55(b).

As shown in FIG. 55(b), the external terminal plate 90 is provided with a plurality of external terminals 90a to 90h. A total of eight external terminals 90a to 90h are provided, and different types of information are output to the hall computer HC.

Specifically, the input signal external terminal 90a is used for outputting information indicating the number of bets for each game, and the information indicating the number of medals awarded in each game is output. The external terminal 90b for the grant signal used for, the external terminal 90c for the first game state signal used for outputting information indicating that the first game state has started, and the second game state is started The external terminal 90d for the second game state signal used to output information indicating that the third game state has been started, and the third game state signal for output An external terminal 90e, an external terminal 90f for an abnormality signal used for outputting information indicating that the slot machine 10 has detected an irregularity such as an insertion abnormality or a payout abnormality, and a setting change operation being executed. An external terminal 90g for a setting operation signal used for outputting information indicating that the front door 12 is being opened, and an external terminal 90h for an open signal used for outputting information indicating that the front door 12 is being opened. include.

Out of these, the external terminal 90a for input signal outputs a number of pulse signals corresponding to the number of bets. For example, if the specified number of bets is "2", a pulse signal is output twice so that the ON time and OFF time are 50 msec each at the start of one game, and the specified number of bets is "2". 3", at the start of one game, a pulse signal is output three times so that the ON time and the OFF time are each 50 msec. The hall computer HC receives a group of pulse signals from the input signal external terminal 90a, determines that one game has started, and displays the number of game executions on the first display section DC1 of the data counter DC. is incremented by 1.

The number of pulse signals corresponding to the number of coins to be paid out is output from the external terminal 90b for giving signals. For example, when nine medals are awarded, the pulse signal is output nine times so that the ON time and OFF time are 50 msec each at the end of one game, and when four medals are awarded. , a pulse signal is output four times so that the ON time and the OFF time are each 50 msec at the end of one game.

The external terminal 90c for the first gaming state signal is used in the slot machine 10 to enable the hole computer HC to recognize the number of times the normal AT state is executed. Hereinafter, the first game state signal will be referred to as AT1 signal, and the external terminal 90c for the first game state signal will be referred to as AT1 signal external terminal 90c. The hall computer HC determines that the normal AT state has newly started by confirming the rise of the signal from the external terminal 90c for the AT1 signal, and executes the normal AT state on the second display section DC2 of the data counter DC. Add 1 to the display of the number of times.

The external terminal 90d for the second game state signal is used in the slot machine 10 to allow the hole computer HC to recognize the number of times the bonus AT state is executed. Hereinafter, the second game state signal will be referred to as AT2 signal, and the external terminal 90d for the second game state signal will be referred to as AT2 signal external terminal 90d. The hall computer HC determines that the bonus AT state has newly started by confirming the rise of the signal from the external terminal 90d for the AT2 signal, and executes the bonus AT state in the third display section DC3 of the data counter DC. Add 1 to the display of the number of times.

The external terminal 90e for the third game state signal is used in the slot machine 10 so that the hall computer HC can recognize the number of times the CB state has been executed. The external terminal 90f for the abnormal signal, the external terminal 90g for the setting operation signal, and the external terminal 90h for the open signal are kept ON while their target events are occurring.

The external terminal 90g for the setting operation signal may output an ON signal not only during the setting change operation but also during the confirmation operation of the current setting value. Alternatively, both the abnormal signal and the setting operation signal may be output from one external terminal.

The main MPU 72 is electrically connected to each of the external terminals 90a to 90h of the external terminal plate 90 through the electrical wiring group EL3 in a one-to-one correspondence. Output a signal.

<Processing for External Output Executed by Main MPU 72>
Next, processing for external output executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. However, in the following description, processing for external output through the external terminal 90c for the AT1 signal and the external terminal 90d for the AT2 signal on the external terminal plate 90 will be described.

First, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 56, the external output setting process at the end will be described. The external output setting process at the end is executed in step S216 of the normal process (FIG. 11).

In step S3101, it is determined whether the CB internal post state or the CB mid state. If it is not in the CB internal state or CB in-progress state, that is, if it is in the CB non-internal state, the output state of the AT1 signal is set to OFF in step S3102, and the output state of the AT2 signal is turned off in step S3103. After setting to the OFF state, the external output setting process at the time of this termination is terminated.

That is, the AT1 and AT2 signals are never set to the ON state in the CB non-internal state, and can be set to the ON state in the CB internal post state or the CB mid state. As a result, the hall computer HC can confirm whether the AT1 signal or the AT2 signal is in the ON state, thereby not only confirming whether it is in the normal AT state or the bonus AT state. It becomes possible to confirm that it is in the internal post-state or the CB-during state. In this case, as already explained, the slot machine 10 is provided with the internal state notification unit 63 for notifying that the CB winning flag is set to "1", and the CB winning flag is set to "1". ' is set, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned on without waiting for the end of the game. On the other hand, the setting of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal to the ON state is performed after the end of the game in which the CB win flag is set to "1". As a result, the slot machine 10 informs the post-CB internal state or the CB-in-progress state at a timing prior to outputting the state after the CB or during the CB to the hall computer HC. be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which only the manager of the game hall is aware of the post-CB internal state or the CB-in-progress state, and the player is not aware of it.

If it is in the CB internal post state or CB in-progress state and an affirmative determination is made in step S3101, the process proceeds to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether or not the value of the bell winning counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 3 or more. The bell winning counter is a counter for specifying, in the main MPU 72, the number of times the 1st bell winning or the 2nd bell winning has occurred without the pushing order being out of order when the 1st bell winning or the 2nd bell winning is won. is.

<Relationship between bell winning and output state of AT1 signal>
Here, the bell winning determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The bell winning determination process is executed in step S607 in the winning determination process (FIG. 18).

In the bell winning determination process, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the AT2 signal is ON. If a negative determination is made in step S3201, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the first bell combination or the second bell combination has been won in the current game. If neither the 1st bell combination nor the 2nd bell combination has been won, the bell winning judgment processing is terminated, and if the 1st bell combination or the 2nd bell combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S3203. .

In step S3203, it is determined whether or not it is confirmed that the first bell winning or the second bell winning has occurred as a result of the logical operation processing of the symbol combination in step S604 in the winning determination processing (FIG. 18). If the first bell win or the second bell win has occurred, in step S3204, 1 is added to the value of the bell win counter in the main RAM 74 and the bell missing flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "0". ', the bell winning judgment process is terminated. If neither the first bell winning nor the second bell winning has occurred, in step S3205 the bell missing flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the bell winning counter of the main RAM 74 is set to " 0” is cleared, the bell winning judgment process is terminated. The bell missing flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify that both the first bell winning and the second bell winning have not occurred in a situation where the first bell or second bell has been won.

On the other hand, if it is determined at step S3201 that the AT2 signal is ON, at step S3206 the value of the bell winning counter in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". After that, the bell winning determination process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the external output setting process at the time of termination (FIG. 56), when it is determined in step S3104 that the value of the bell winning counter in the main RAM 74 is 3 or more, in step S3105 the AT1 signal is output. Set the output state to the ON state.

If a negative determination is made in step S3104, or if the process of step S3105 is executed, it is determined in step S3106 whether or not the bell detachment flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". If the bell-off flag is set to "1", the output state of the AT1 signal is set to OFF in step S3107, and the bell-off flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" in the following step S3108. .

How the output state of the AT1 signal is changed in relation to the bell combination will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG.

FIG. 58(a) shows the execution period of the normal AT state, FIG. 58(b) shows the output state of the AT1 signal, and FIG. 58(c) shows the execution of the game in which the first bell or second bell is won. FIG. 58(d) shows the occurrence of first bell winning or second bell winning, and FIG. 58(e) shows other game execution periods.

At timing t1 and timing t2, which are neither the normal AT state nor the bonus AT state, as shown in FIG. . However, since it is not in the AT state, the sub-side MPU 82 does not execute notification control of the pressing order for generating a bell prize corresponding to the winning combination. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58(d), no bell winning occurs.

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the sub-side MPU 82 sets the transition to the normal AT state, thereby starting the normal AT state. Also, at timing t3, as shown in FIG. 58(e), a new game has started. No prizes will be awarded. However, at the timing t3, the AT1 signal remains OFF as shown in FIG. 58(b).

After that, at timing t4 and timing t6 in the normal AT state, a game in which the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won is started as shown in FIG. 58(c). In this case, since it is in the AT state, the sub-side MPU 82 executes notification control of the pressing order for generating a bell prize corresponding to the winning. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58(d), a bell prize corresponding to the winning combination occurs at timing t5 and timing t7. However, at this timing, the value of the bell winning counter is "2" and does not reach 3 or more, so the AT1 signal remains OFF as shown in FIG. 58(b).

After that, at timing t8, as shown in FIG. 58(e), after a game in which neither the first bell combination nor the second bell combination is won is started, at timing t9 after the end of the game. , as shown in FIG. 58(c), the game in which the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won is started. In this case, since it is in the AT state, the sub-side MPU 82 executes notification control of the pressing order for generating a bell prize corresponding to the winning. Therefore, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 58(d), a bell win corresponding to the winning combination occurs. As a result, the value of the bell winning counter becomes 3 or more, and the AT1 signal is turned ON at the timing t10, as shown in FIG. 58(b).

After that, at timings t11 and t12, as shown in FIG. 58(c), a game in which the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won is started, and a bell prize corresponding to the winning combination is generated. do. Then, at timing t13, as shown in FIG. 58(e), the final game in the normal AT state ends, and as shown in FIG. done. However, at the timing of t13, the AT1 signal remains ON as shown in FIG. 58(b).

After that, at timing t14, which is neither the normal AT state nor the bonus AT state, the game in which the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won is started. In this case, since it is not in the AT state, the sub-side MPU 82 does not execute notification control of the pressing order for generating a bell prize corresponding to the winning combination. In addition, in order to generate the first bell winning or the second bell winning, it is necessary to stop the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R as the first stop. If the center reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop in a situation where there is no reel, a penalty event will occur. Then, there is a high possibility that the bell winning will not occur in the game started at the timing of t14. Then, even though the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won, the corresponding bell winning does not occur, so that the bell missing flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" at the timing of t15, and the AT1 signal is generated. is turned off.

The processing load on the main MPU 72 can be reduced by allowing the sub-side MPU 82 to independently set the transition to the normal AT state and the end setting. In addition, by making the communication between the main MPU 72 and the sub MPU 82 one-way communication from the main MPU 72 to the sub MPU 82, the opportunity of inputting an illegal signal to the main MPU 72 is reduced. Further, by adopting a configuration in which external output is performed from the main MPU 72 to the hall computer HC, it is possible to directly control the external output in the main MPU 72 that controls the progress of the game.

In this case, the main MPU 72 shifts to the normal AT state when the bell wins a plurality of times (specifically, three times) without intervening the pushing order at the time of winning the bell combination. Then, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state. By adopting such a configuration, when various configurations are adopted as described above, the main MPU 72 indirectly judges the transition to the normal AT state, and externally outputs a signal indicating the normal AT state. It is possible to do

The main MPU 72 determines that the normal AT state is over when the pressing order is out of order when the bell is won, and sets the AT1 signal to the OFF state. By adopting such a configuration, when various configurations are adopted as described above, the main MPU 72 indirectly determines the end of the normal AT state, and externally outputs a signal indicating the normal AT state. It is possible to terminate.

The trigger for setting the AT1 signal to the ON state and the trigger for setting the AT1 signal to the OFF state are both whether or not the bell wins when the bell wins. This makes it possible to share the monitoring process for setting the ON state of the AT1 signal and the monitoring process for setting the OFF state of the AT1 signal, thereby reducing the processing load.

The number of bell winning occurrences when the bell wins necessary when the AT1 signal is set to the ON state is set to be greater than the number of bell non-winning occurrences when the bell wins which is necessary when the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state. . As a result, with respect to setting the AT1 signal to the ON state, priority is given to setting the AT1 signal to the ON state under the actual normal AT state rather than performing the setting processing early. It is possible to give priority to early setting processing to the OFF state rather than setting to the OFF state when the normal AT state actually ends. Therefore, it is possible to set the AT1 signal to the ON state at an early stage while carefully setting the AT1 signal to the ON state.

When the AT1 signal is set to the ON state and the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state, not only the first bell winning but also the second bell winning are monitored. This makes it possible to increase the setting trigger for the ON state and the setting trigger for the OFF state.

In the bonus AT state, even if a bell win occurs, the bell win counter is not incremented. This makes it possible to prevent the AT1 signal from being set to the ON state during the bonus AT state.

Both the first bell winning and the second bell winning require that the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R be stopped as the first stop. This makes it possible to prevent the AT1 signal from being set to the ON state in a situation other than the non-AT state.

<Relationship between the normal replay combination and the output state of the AT1 signal>
Returning to the description of the external output setting process at the time of termination (FIG. 56), if a negative determination is made in step S3106, or if the process of step S3108 is executed, in step S3109 the It is determined whether or not the value of the pressing order correct counter is 2 or more. The pressing order correct counter is used by the main MPU 72 to specify the number of stop operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in the pressing order determined by lottery in the main MPU 72 when the normal replay combination is won. is a counter. The pressing order lottery process when the normal replay combination is won is executed in step S405 in the winning data acquisition process (FIG. 16), as already described.

Here, the normal replay pressing order determination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal replay push order determination process is executed in step S608 in the winning determination process (FIG. 18).

In the normal replay pressing order determination process, first, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not a normal replay winning has occurred in the current game. As already explained, when winning the normal replay combination, the stop operation order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 and the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in relation to each other. Regardless of timing, replay wins usually occur.

If the normal replay winning has not occurred, the normal replay pressing order determination processing is terminated, and if the normal replay winning has occurred, the process proceeds to step S3302. In step S3302, the result of the push order lottery process (step S405) executed at the start of the current game is read out from the main side RAM74. In the subsequent step S3303, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in the current game is read. Then, in step S3304, it is determined whether or not the result read out in step S3302 and the result read out in step S3303 match. That is, it is determined whether or not the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the order corresponding to the result of the pushing order lottery process.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3304, 1 is added to the value of the correct pressing order counter in the main RAM 74 in step S3305, and then this normal replay pressing order determination processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3304, the value of the push order correct counter in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" and the set flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "0" in step S3306. ', the normal replay push order determination process is terminated. The set completion flag specifies whether or not the main MPU 72 has already executed processing corresponding to the fact that the value of the push order correct counter is 2 or more while the AT1 signal is ON. is a flag for

Returning to the description of the external output setting process at the time of termination (FIG. 56), if it is determined in step S3109 that the value of the push order correct counter is 2 or more, the AT1 signal is turned ON in step S3110. In step S3111, it is determined whether or not the value of the set flag provided in the main RAM 74 is "1".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3110 and a negative determination is made in step S3111, then in step S3112 the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state. In the subsequent step S3113, the wait counter of the main RAM 74 is set to a continuous wait time (specifically, 1 sec). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S218 of the normal processing (FIG. 11), and a wait time corresponding to the consecutive wait time is generated at the end of the current game. Also, in step S3113, the set flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". After that, in step S3114, a setting is made so as to transmit a continuous wait command to the sub-side MPU 82. FIG. As a result, in the sub-side MPU 82, as already described, in step S1210 of the standby effect setting process (FIG. 29), the multi-family wait flag is set to "1". The image is displayed on the image display device 66 .

As described above, when the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state when the value of the push order correct counter becomes 2 or more, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state at the start of the next game. The setting process is executed in the external output setting process at the start in step S210 of the normal process (FIG. 11).

FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing the external output setting process at the start.

In step S3401, it is determined whether the CB internal post state or the CB mid state. If it is not in the state after CB internal or during CB, that is, if it is in the CB non-internal state, the external output setting process at the time of this start is terminated.

If it is in the post-CB state or the mid-CB state, it is determined in step S3402 whether or not the value of the push order correct counter in the main side RAM 74 is 2 or more. If the number is 2 or more, it is determined in step S3403 whether or not the AT2 signal is ON. If the AT2 signal is not ON, the AT1 signal is set ON in step S3404.

As described above, when the value of the push order correct counter becomes 2 or more in a situation where the AT1 signal is ON and the AT2 signal is OFF, the AT1 signal is generated when the game becomes 2 or more. is set to the OFF state, and the AT1 signal is set to the ON state again at the start of the next game which is started after the lapse of the consecutive wait time (1 sec). Such AT1 signal setting processing is executed in order to allow the hall computer HC to grasp the number of execution sets of the normal AT state when the normal AT state continues. However, since it is impossible for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the normal AT state continues, the AT1 signal is turned OFF/ON according to the timing when the normal AT state continues. In the sub-side MPU 82, the normal replay process and the push order avoidance process are executed as described above. These normal replay processing and pressing order avoidance processing will be described below.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing normal replay processing in the sub-side MPU 82. FIG. The normal replay process is executed in step S1901 of the pre-branch AT state process (FIG. 38).

In the normal replay process, first, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command has been received from the main MPU 72 . If the lottery result command has been received, it is determined in step S3502 whether or not the current lottery result command includes data corresponding to winning a normal replay combination. If the data corresponding to the winning of the normal replay combination is included, in step S3503, by grasping the content of the push order command received together with the current lottery result command, the push order lottery in the main side MPU 72 is performed. The push order data corresponding to the result of the process (step S405) is written in the sub-side RAM84.

In the subsequent step S3504, it is determined whether or not the post-continuity flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1". The post-consecutive flag is a flag for specifying in the sub-side MPU 82 that the normal AT state has continued. The timing at which the post-continuous flag is set to "1" is when the victory effect or the draw effect is executed in the diverging AT state and returns to the pre-branching AT state, and after the diverging AT state ends, the added state that was shifted to ends. and return to the pre-branch AT state in the last chance state when the resurrection lottery process (step S2907) results in a resurrection win.

If "1" is set in the post-consecutive flag, the push order data written in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S3503 is set as the push order data to be notified on the image display device 66 in step S3505. As a result, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 selected in the pressing order lottery process (step S405) of the main MPU 72 is notified. When the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is notified by the image display device 66 in the AT state, the player generally operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 according to the pressing order. , the respective stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the order selected in the pressing order lottery process (step S405) in the main MPU 72 . Note that even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in accordance with the pressing order, a normal replay win will occur.

If "1" is not set to the post-consecutive flag, it is determined in step S3506 whether or not the value of the push order correct counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. The pressing order correct counter counts the number of times each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated in the mode selected in the pressing order lottery process (step S405) of the main MPU 72 in the game in which the normal replay role is won. It is a counter for specifying in .

If the value of the correct pressing order counter is 1 or more, in step S3507, pressing order data different from the pressing order data written in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S3503 is used as the pressing order data to be notified on the image display device 66. set. As a result, a pressing order different from the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 selected in the pressing order lottery process (step S405) of the main MPU 72 is notified. When the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is notified by the image display device 66 in the AT state, the player generally operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 according to the pressing order. , the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in an order different from the order selected in the pressing order lottery process (step S405) in the main MPU 72. Note that even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in accordance with the pressing order, a normal replay win will occur.

If a negative determination is made in step S3501, if a negative determination is made in step S3502, if a negative determination is made in step S3506, if the process of step S3505 is executed, or if the process of step S3507 is executed , in step S3508, it is determined whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 . If the winning result command has not been received, the normal replay processing is terminated, and if the winning result command has been received, the process advances to step S3509.

In step S3509, it is determined whether or not a normal replay winning has occurred in the current game. If the normal replay winning has not occurred, the normal replay processing is terminated, and if the normal replay winning has occurred, the process proceeds to step S3510. In step S3510, it is determined whether or not the pressing order data stored in the sub-side RAM 84 matches the actual pressing order in the current game.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3510, the value of the pressing order correct counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is incremented by 1 in step S3511. In the following step S3512, it is determined whether or not the value of the pressing order correct counter is 2 or more. If the number is not 2 or more, the normal replay processing is terminated as it is. End replay processing. If a negative determination is made in step S3510, then in step S3514 the push order correct counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and then this normal replay processing ends.

FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing the pressing order avoidance process in the sub-side MPU 82. As shown in FIG. The pressing order avoidance process includes step S2401 of the branch AT state process (FIG. 44), step S2801 of the add state process (FIG. 51), step S2901 of the final chance process (FIG. 53), and bonus AT process ( 54) is executed in step S3001.

In the pressing order avoidance process, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command has been received from the main MPU 72 . If the lottery result command has been received, it is determined in step S3602 whether or not the current lottery result command includes data corresponding to winning a normal replay combination. If the data corresponding to winning the normal replay combination is included, in step S3603, by grasping the content of the push order command received together with the current lottery result command, the push order lottery in the main side MPU 72 is performed. The push order data corresponding to the result of the process (step S405) is written in the sub-side RAM84.

In the following step S3604, it is determined whether or not the value of the push order correct counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. If the value of the correct pressing order counter is 1 or more, in step S3605, pressing order data different from the pressing order data written in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S3603 is used as the pressing order data to be notified on the image display device 66. set. As a result, a pressing order different from the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 selected in the pressing order lottery process (step S405) of the main MPU 72 is notified. When the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is notified by the image display device 66 in the AT state, the player generally operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 according to the pressing order. , the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in an order different from the order selected in the pressing order lottery process (step S405) in the main MPU 72. Note that even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in accordance with the pressing order, a normal replay win will occur.

If a negative determination is made in step S3601, if a negative determination is made in step S3602, if a negative determination is made in step S3604, or if the process of step S3605 is executed, then in step S3606 the main MPU 72 determines whether or not a winning result command is received from. If the winning result command has not been received, the process for avoiding the actual pressing order is terminated, and if the winning result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3607.

In step S3607, it is determined whether or not a normal replay winning has occurred in the current game. If the normal replay winning has not occurred, the normal replay processing is terminated, and if the normal replay winning has occurred, the process advances to step S3608. In step S3608, it is determined whether or not the pressing order data stored in the sub-side RAM 84 matches the actual pressing order in the current game.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3608, the value of the pressing order correct counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is incremented by 1 in step S3609. After that, the normal replay processing ends. If a negative determination is made in step S3608, the normal replay processing is terminated after the pressing order correct counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" in step S3610.

By executing the normal replay process and the push order avoidance process as described above, in the pre-branch AT state after the normal AT state, the main MPU 72 determines the normal replay hand in the game. The order in which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are pressed is notified by the image display device 66 . As a result, if the player operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 according to the notification of the pressing order, the pressing order is correct. be done.

On the other hand, in a situation other than the pre-branch AT state after a series of normal AT states, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 determined by the main side MPU 72 in the game in which the normal replay role is won is different from the pressing order. The image display device 66 notifies. As a result, if the player operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 in accordance with the notification of the pressing order, the pressing order is not correct in a situation other than the pre-branching AT state after the normal AT state. After the signal is turned off once, the process of turning it on again is not executed.

In addition, in a configuration in which the main MPU 72 once turns the AT1 signal OFF and then turns it ON again when the correct pushing order occurs a plurality of times, the AT1 signal is turned ON again after the normal AT state. In a situation other than the AT state, notification control of a pressing order different from the correct pressing order is executed on condition that the correct pressing order has occurred one or more times. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency of notification of the pushing order when the normal replay combination is won, and it is possible to suppress meaningless continuous execution of the notification of the pushing order in the AT state. .

How the output state of the AT1 signal is changed in relation to the normal replay hand will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG.

63(a) shows the execution period of the pre-branch AT state, FIG. 63(b) shows the execution period of the branch AT state, FIG. 63(c) shows the output state of the AT1 signal, and FIG. 63(d). indicates the execution period of the normal replay combination winning game, FIG. 63(e) shows the execution period of other games, FIG. 63(f) shows the execution period of correct pressing order notification, and FIG. FIG. 63(h) shows the setting status of the correct pressing order counter of the main side RAM 74, and FIG. 63(i) shows the setting status of the continuous wait time.

As shown in FIG. 63(a), at timings t1 and t2 in the pre-branching AT state, a game in which a normal replay combination is won is started, as shown in FIG. 63(d). In this case, since it is not after the normal AT state, notification of the correct pressing order is not executed as shown in FIG. Since it is "0", as shown in FIG. 63(g), the wrong answer order notification is not executed. However, in the game started at timing t2, the pressing order of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44 happened to be correct. The value of the pressing order correct counter is "1". At the timing t3, the pre-branch AT state ends as shown in FIG. 63(a), and the branch AT state starts as shown in FIG. 63(b).

After that, at timing t4 in the branch AT state, as shown in FIG. 63(e), a game different from winning a normal replay combination is executed, and at timing t5, as shown in FIG. 63(d). Then, the game in which the normal replay role is won is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 63(h), the value of the push order correct counter is 1 or more, so at the timing t5, as shown in FIG. 63(g), the incorrect push order notification is executed. be done. As a result, in the game, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the order of pressing the incorrect answers, and at the timing t6, which is the end timing of the game, the correct pressing order counter is "0" as shown in FIG. 63(h). cleared.

After that, at the timing of t7 in the branch AT state, the game in which the normal replay combination is won is started as shown in FIG. 63(d). In this case, since it is not after the normal AT state, notification of the correct pressing order is not executed as shown in FIG. Since it is "0", as shown in FIG. 63(g), the wrong answer order notification is not executed. Therefore, in the game started at timing t7, the pressing order is incorrect.

After that, at the timing of t8, the other games are ended as shown in FIG. 63(e), thereby ending the branch AT state as shown in FIG. The pre-branch AT state is entered as follows.

After that, at timing t9, a game in which the normal replay combination is won is started as shown in FIG. 63(d). In this case, since it is in the pre-branching AT state after the normal AT state, the notification of the correct pressing order is executed as shown in FIG. 63(f). As a result, in the game, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the order of pressing the correct answer, and at the timing t10, which is the end timing of the game, the value of the correct pressing order counter is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 63(h). be done.

After that, at timing t11, another game is executed as shown in FIG. 63(e), and then, at timing t12, the game in which the normal replay combination is won is started as shown in FIG. 63(d). . In this case, since it is in the pre-branching AT state after the normal AT state, the notification of the correct pressing order is executed as shown in FIG. 63(f). As a result, the respective stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the correct order of pressing in the game, and at the timing of t13, the value of the pressing order/correct answer counter is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 63(h). As a result, the value of the push order correct counter becomes "2", so that the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state as shown in FIG. measurement is started. Then, at the timing of t14, the continuous wait time elapses. After that, at the timing of t15, another game is started as shown in FIG. 63(e), and accordingly the AT1 signal is set to the ON state as shown in FIG. 63(c).

After that, at the timing of t16, the game in which the normal replay combination is won is started as shown in FIG. 63(d). In this case, since it is not after the normal AT state, notification of the correct pressing order is not executed as shown in FIG. Since it is "2", the wrong answer order notification is executed as shown in FIG. 63(g). As a result, in the game, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the order of pressing the incorrect answers, and at the timing t17, which is the end timing of the game, the correct pressing order counter is set to "0" as shown in FIG. 63(h). cleared.

As described above, when the normal AT state continues, the sub-side MPU 82 performs execution control of the correct pressing order notification so as to prompt the correct pressing order when winning the normal replay combination. Even if the main MPU 72 does not directly know that the setting of the normal AT state has been performed, the main MPU 72 is in the normal AT state through the occurrence of the correct pressing order when winning the normal replay role multiple times. It is possible to indirectly grasp that a series of villas has occurred. As a result, in the main MPU 72, the AT1 signal can be temporarily turned OFF and then turned ON again in accordance with the normal AT state.

In the sub-side MPU 82, if the normal replay role is won in a situation that does not correspond to the normal AT state, the execution control of the incorrect answer pressing order notification is performed, so that the normal AT state is not the state. In spite of this, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the correct pressing order will occur multiple times when the normal replay combination is won. As a result, the control of turning the AT1 signal off once and then turning it on again can be easily executed in time with the continuous operation of the normal AT state.

When the AT1 signal is once turned OFF and then turned ON again during the normal AT state, the setting to the OFF state is performed before the measurement of the waiting time, and the setting to the ON state is performed during the waiting time. This is done after the measurement of By setting the Renso wait time in this manner, the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state at the end of one game, and the AT1 signal is set to the ON state at the start of the next game. , the period during which the hall computer HC recognizes that the AT1 signal is in the OFF state can be ensured.

Note that when the value of the correct pressing order counter becomes 2 or more and the AT1 signal is set to OFF and then to ON, the value of the correct pressing order counter may be cleared to "0".

<Relationship between bonus AT state and output state of AT1 signal and AT2 signal>
Returning to the description of the external output setting process at the time of termination (FIG. 56), if a negative determination is made in step S3109, if a negative determination is made in step S3110, if a positive determination is made in step S3111, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S3114 If the process has been executed, the process advances to step S3115. In step S3115, it is determined whether or not the bonus AT state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", thereby determining whether or not the bonus AT state is being executed. If the bonus AT state flag is set to "1", the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state in step S3116.

When a negative determination is made in step S3115, or when the process of step S3116 is executed, in step S3117 it is determined whether or not the wait generation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". , and after the CB internal state, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) is a failure result. If the wait generation flag is set to "1", the AT2 signal is set to ON state and the wait generation flag is cleared to "0" in step S3118.

When a negative determination is made in step S3117, or when the process of step S3118 is executed, in step S3119, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus AT counter of the main side RAM 74 is "0". , it is determined whether or not it is time to end one set of bonus AT state. If the value of the bonus AT counter is not "0", the external output setting process at the end of this process is terminated, and if the value of the bonus AT counter is "0", the AT2 After the signal is set to the OFF state, the external output setting process at the time of this termination is terminated.

Next, in the external output setting process at the start (FIG. 60), the contents of the process executed in relation to the bonus AT state and the output states of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal will be described.

When a negative determination is made in step S3402, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3403, or when the process of step S3404 is executed, in step S3405, the bonus AT end flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". By determining whether or not it is set, it is determined whether or not one set in the bonus AT state is completed and the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S3405, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state in step S3406.

If a negative determination is made in step S3405, or if the process of step S3406 is executed, in step S3407, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus AT number counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. , determines whether a new set of bonus AT states is to be started. If a negative determination is made in step S3407, the external output setting process at the start of this process is terminated as it is. The external output setting process at the time of this start ends.

Next, the external output setting process before starting will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The external output setting process before the start is executed in step S206 of the normal process (FIG. 11).

In step S3701, it is determined whether the CB internal post state or the CB mid state. If it is not in the CB post-internal state or the CB in-progress state, that is, if it is in the CB non-internal state, the external output setting processing before the start is terminated.

If it is in the state after CB or during CB, it is determined in step S3702 whether or not the wait flag before start of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The situation in which the pre-start wait flag is set to "1" is, as already explained, when the first special replay combination is won in the post-CB internal state. In addition, in the state after the inside of the CB and the AT1 signal is ON, the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination is won, and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is selected as the first stop. This is the case when it is manipulated. If a negative determination is made in step S3702, the external output setting process before the main start is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3702, the process proceeds to step S3703.

At step S3703, the AT2 signal is set to the ON state. Thereafter, in step S3704, after the pre-start wait flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0", the pre-start external output setting process is terminated.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 65, the output mode of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal in the case of shifting to the normal AT state triggered by the bonus AT state will be described.

FIG. 65(a) shows the output state of the AT1 signal, FIG. 65(b) shows the output state of the AT2 signal, FIG. 65(c) shows the execution period of the normal AT state, and FIG. FIG. 65(e) shows the execution period of the game that triggers the transition to the bonus AT state, FIG. 65(f) shows the execution period of other games, and FIG. 65(g) indicates the setting status of the wait period.

At the timing of t1, which is neither the normal AT state nor the bonus AT state, as shown in FIG. finish. In this case, at the timing of t2, the bonus AT state is started as shown in FIG. 65(d).

After that, at the timing t3, which is the timing immediately after the bonus AT state is started, another game is started as shown in FIG. 65(f). ), a wait period (8 sec) is set. This wait period elapses at the timing of t4, and at the timing of t4, the AT2 signal is set to the ON state as shown in FIG. 65(b).

Thereafter, at timing t5, the final game of the current set is started in the bonus AT state as shown in FIG. 65(f). Then, at timing t6, a wait period (5 sec) is set as shown in FIG. 65(g), the bonus AT state ends as shown in FIG. The AT2 signal is set to the OFF state as shown. At timing t7, the wait period elapses as shown in FIG. 65(g), and the current game ends as shown in FIG. 65(f).

After that, at timing t8, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 65(f), but in this case, the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state is 1 or more. Therefore, at the timing t8, the bonus AT state is set again as shown in FIG. 65(d), and the AT2 signal is again set to ON state as shown in FIG. 65(b).

Thereafter, at timing t9, the final game of the current set is started in the bonus AT state as shown in FIG. 65(f). Then, at the timing of t10, the wait period (5 sec) is set as shown in FIG. 65(g), the bonus AT state ends as shown in FIG. The AT2 signal is set to the OFF state as shown. At the timing of t11, the wait period elapses as shown in FIG. 65(g), and the current game ends as shown in FIG. 65(f). In this case, since the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state is "0", at the timing of t12, which is the timing at which a new game is started as shown in FIG. As shown, the normal AT state is started, and the AT1 signal is set to the ON state as shown in FIG. 65(a).

As described above, even if the bonus AT state continues, the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state each time one set of the bonus AT state ends, and when a new set of the bonus AT state starts. The AT2 signal is set to the ON state again. In addition, even when the bonus AT state continues in this way, a wait period occurs. By setting the wait period in this manner, the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state at the end of one game, and the AT2 signal is set to the ON state at the start of the next game. It is possible to secure a period during which the computer HC recognizes that the AT2 signal is in the OFF state. Also, during this wait period, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the continuous bonus AT state on the image display device 66 or the like.

When a bonus AT state occurs, the normal AT state is entered after the bonus AT state ends. In this case, when the bonus AT state is terminated and the state is shifted to the normal AT state, not only the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state but also the AT1 signal is set to the ON state. In this way, when the condition for shifting to the normal AT state is satisfied, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state without waiting for the occurrence of the bell winning three times, so that when the normal AT state is started, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state. It is possible to quickly set the signal to the ON state.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 66, the output mode of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal when shifting to the bonus AT state in the middle of the normal AT state will be described.

66(a) shows the output state of the AT1 signal, FIG. 66(b) shows the output state of the AT2 signal, FIG. 66(c) shows the execution period of the normal AT state, and FIG. 66(d) shows the bonus signal. FIG. 66(e) shows the execution period of the game that triggers the transition to the bonus AT state, FIG. 66(f) shows the execution period of other games, and FIG. 66(g) indicates the setting state of the wait period, and FIG. 66(h) indicates the occurrence state of the bell winning.

At the timing t1 in the normal AT state as shown in FIG. 66(c) and the AT1 signal being ON as shown in FIG. , the game that triggers the transition to the bonus AT state is started. Then, at the timing t2 when the game ends, the normal AT state ends as shown in FIG. 66(c), and the bonus AT state starts as shown in FIG. 66(d). Also, at the timing of t2, the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state as shown in FIG. 66(a).

After that, at the timing of t3, another game is started as shown in FIG. 66(f). In this case, at the timing of t3, measurement of the wait period (8 sec) is started as shown in FIG. 66(g). When the wait period elapses at timing t4, the AT2 signal is set to the ON state as shown in FIG. 66(b).

Thereafter, at timing t5, the final game of the current set is started in the bonus AT state as shown in FIG. 66(f). Then, at timing t6, a wait period (5 sec) is set as shown in FIG. 66(g), the bonus AT state ends as shown in FIG. The AT2 signal is set to the OFF state as shown. Also, at the timing of t6, the normal AT state is resumed as shown in FIG. 66(c). However, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the AT1 signal remains in the OFF state, and this OFF state continues after the timing t7, which is the timing after the wait period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 66(g). maintained.

After that, in the normal AT state, as shown in FIG. 66(h), bell winning occurs at each of timing t8, timing t9, and timing t10, so that at timing t10, as shown in FIG. 66(a) , the AT1 signal is set to the ON state.

<Processing Configuration for Executing Omen Effect>
Next, a processing configuration for executing the precursor effect will be described.

As already explained, the precursor effect is an effect executed in order to make the player expect the normal AT state ST12 or the transition chance state ST15 to occur in the non-AT state. It occurs over a plurality of games in the precursor state ST15 and the false precursor state.

Of these precursor states, the ceiling game precursor state ST13 occurs when the value of the ceiling remaining game counter in the sub-side RAM 84 reaches "32", which is the trigger number for the ceiling game precursor state.

The shift chance precursor state ST15 occurs when the shift chance trigger role is won and the prize is won in the activation lottery process for the shift chance, and the number of games of the transition chance precursor state ST15 continued is completed. , a transition chance state ST16 occurs. The number of games to be continued in the transition chance portent state ST15 is either 2 games or more and 32 games or less.

The false portent state can occur when the player wins the shift chance role, but does not win in the activation lottery process for the shift chance, and the number of games in the false portent state has been completed. However, the transition to the transition chance state ST16 does not occur. The number of continuous games in the false portent state is either 2 games or more and 32 games or less.

As a specific content of the precursor effect, for example, at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated and a new game is started, an effect image is displayed on the image display device 66 and a corresponding effect sound is output from the speaker 65. Content included. Further, for example, in a situation where a predetermined character is displayed, at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, another character appears in addition to or instead of the predetermined character. Also included is an effect in which the same character is displayed or an effect in accordance with a series of stories is executed in a plurality of games included in the foreshadowing state or a plurality of consecutive games including the final game, for example.

Execution determination and execution control of the precursor effect are executed by the sub-side MPU 82 . FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of the sub-side RAM 84 that are used in the sub-side MPU 82 to control the execution of the precursor effect. As shown in FIG. 67, the sub-side RAM 84 includes an omen game counter 84a, a stock game counter 84b, an omen combination determination area 84c, and various flag areas 84d.

The portent game counter 84a is a counter for the sub-side MPU 82 to count the number of continued games of the portent state in which the shift chance portent state ST15 or the false portent state remains. The portent game counter 84a has a 1-byte data structure as shown in FIG. 67(a), and the maximum number of portent games set in the portent game counter 84a is "32". Therefore, only the lower 6 bits are used when setting the number of precursor games, and the upper 2 bits are not actually used.

The stock game counter 84b determines the number of continuing games of the newly generated precursory state when the transition chance precursory state ST15 or the false precursory state is confirmed after the false precursory state ends, as the start timing of the corresponding precursory state. This is a counter for storing and holding up to In the present slot machine 10, when the transition chance precursor state ST15 or the execution condition of the false precursor state is satisfied while staying in the false precursor state, the current false precursor state is immediately ended or extended. Instead, the current false portent state is terminated according to the content determined at the start of execution, and then the portent state corresponding to the fulfillment of the execution condition is generated. In addition, it is assumed that the conditions for executing the false precursor state are satisfied two or more times during the execution of one false precursor state, and the transition opportunity is given after the conditions for executing the false precursor state are satisfied one or more times. It is assumed that the condition for executing the precursor state ST15 is satisfied. In this case, the number of continuous games corresponding to each execution condition is added to the stock game counter 84b. The stock game counter 84b has a 1-byte data structure as shown in FIG. 67(b), and the maximum number of precursor games set in the stock game counter 84b is set in the precursor game counter 84a. It is the same as the maximum number of precursor games, specifically "32". Therefore, only the lower 6 bits are used when setting the number of precursor games, and the upper 2 bits are not actually used.

The foreshadowing combination determination area 84c is a winning combination that is referred to when determining the content of the indication state corresponding to the number of continuous games in a situation where the stock game counter 84b stores and holds the number of continuous games of 1 or more. This is an area for storing and holding type information. As already explained, the transition chance trigger that triggers the execution of the transition chance precursor state ST15 and the false precursor state is any of IV=7, 9 to 12, and 14 to 16 in the internal post-state lottery table (FIG. 14). is. The portent combination determination area 84c has a 1-byte data structure as shown in FIG. 67(c), and each bit of 8 bits corresponds to each of the transition chance trigger combinations on a one-to-one basis. When the stock game counter 84b stores and holds the number of continuous games equal to or greater than 1, data "1" is set in any one bit of the portent combination determination area 84c.

Here, as already explained, when the execution condition of the precursor state is met a plurality of times while staying in the false precursor state, the number of continuous games corresponding to each execution condition is added to the stock game counter 84b. becomes. In this case, in the portent combination judging area 84c, not all types of transition chance triggering combinations corresponding to establishment of each execution condition are stored, but the type of transition chance triggering combination corresponding to establishment of each execution condition is stored. Among them, only the information of the type of trigger combination with the highest probability of winning in the activation lottery process for the shift chance is stored.

The various flags area 84d has a 1-byte data structure as shown in FIG. 67(d), in which 1 bit is set as the main omen winning flag, and the other 1 bit is set as the main omen execution flag. is set. This predictor winning flag is set to "1" when the execution condition of the transition chance predictor state ST15 is satisfied in a situation where the transition chance predictor state ST15 is not generated. This portent execution flag is set to "1" when staying in the shift chance portent state ST15.

Next, the precursor setting process executed by the sub-side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The predictor setting process is executed in step S1512 in the shift chance management process (FIG. 33).

First, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the flag execution flag of the various flags area 84d. When this portent execution flag is set to "1", it means that the state is transition chance portent state ST15, so there is no need to newly set the portent state and stock the number of continuing games of the portent state. . Therefore, this precursor setting process is terminated as it is.

If "1" is not set to the main omen execution flag, in step S3802, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the main omen winning flag in the various flag area 84d. is 1 or more. If "1" is not set to this omen winning flag and the value of the transition chance remaining counter is "0", then in step S3803, in the immediately preceding step S1507 in the transition chance management process (FIG. 33) It is determined whether or not the activation lottery process for the transition chance has won the activation lottery.

In the case of activation winning, "1" is set to the main omen winning flag in the various flag areas 84d in step S3804. In the following step S3805, setting processing for this precursor is executed.

In the setting process for the portent, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 69, first, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not the value of the portent game counter 84a is "0". In the sign setting process (FIG. 68), the setting process for this sign is executed on the condition that the execution flag for this sign is not set to "1". is not activated in Therefore, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not the state is a false precursor state.

When the value of the portent game counter 84a is "0" (step S3901: YES), in step S3902, the information of the shift chance triggering role that has triggered the current activation winning is read. Also, in step S3903, "1" is set in the bit corresponding to the type of transition chance trigger combination read out in step S3902 in the portent combination determination area 84c. Other bits are cleared to "0".

In the subsequent step S3904, the first number-of-games lottery process of this precursor is executed. In the first number-of-games lottery process of this omen, the first number-of-games lottery table of this omen corresponding to the current shift chance trigger is read from the sub-side ROM 83 . In the first game number lottery table of this omen, the correspondence relationship between each number of games in one game interval included in the range of 2 games to 32 games and the number of game lottery counter value is determined in advance, and the transition chance opportunity is set. The selection rate of each number of games differs according to the type of winning combination. Specifically, the higher the value of the IV corresponding to the current transition chance trigger, the higher the selection rate of the number of long games. In the first number-of-games lottery process of this precursor, the value of the number-of-games lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the number-of-games lottery counter is changed to the number-of-games lottery counter of the above precursor. The number of one-game lottery table is collated, and the current number of continuous games is read.

In the subsequent step S3905, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling remaining game counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 64 or less, which is the regulation reference number. If a negative determination is made at step S3905, at step S3906 the number of continuing games read out at step S3904 is set in the portent game counter 84a, and then this setting process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3905, then in step S3907 the number of continuous games read out in step S3904 is set in the stock game counter 84b, and then this setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transition to the transition chance state ST16 or stay in the transition chance state ST16 immediately before the transition to the normal AT state ST12 due to the completion of the number of ceiling games. , the occurrence of multiple triggers for transition to the normal AT state ST12 is prevented. Further, in a configuration in which the maximum number of games to be continued in the shift chance precursor state ST15 is 32 games and the number of games to be continued in the ceiling game precursor state ST13 is also 32 games, the ceiling remaining game number is equal to or less than the sum of these game numbers. In this case, by regulating the transition to the transition chance precursor state ST15, it is possible to prevent the ceiling game precursor state ST13 and the transition chance precursor state ST15 from overlapping. In addition, since the number of continuous games of the transition chance precursor state ST15 is set in the stock game counter 84b, the fulfillment of the conditions for execution of the transition chance precursor state ST15 is not invalidated, and the normal AT state ST12 is ended. In the AT state, the shift chance precursor state ST15 occurs.

On the other hand, when the activation lottery process for the transition chance is won in the false portent state, a negative determination is made in step S3901, and the process proceeds to step S3908. In step S3908, the information of the shift chance trigger role that has triggered the winning of this activation is read. In the subsequent step S3909, it is determined whether or not the transition chance trigger combination read out in step S3908 is more advantageous than the combination stored in the portent combination determination area 84c as an opportunity to execute the transition chance state ST16. do. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the transition chance triggering combination read in step S3908 corresponds to a larger IV value than the combination stored in the portent combination determination area 84c.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3909, "1" is set in the bit corresponding to the type of transition chance trigger combination read out in step S3908 in the portent combination determination area 84c. Other bits are cleared to "0".

When a negative determination is made in step S3909, or when the process of step S3910 is executed, the current value of the stock game counter 84b is read out in step S3911. Then, in step S3912, it is determined whether or not the read value of the stock game counter 84b is equal to or greater than 32, which is the maximum number of continuous games. If the number is 32 or more, this setting process is terminated, and if the number is less than 32, the process advances to step S3913.

In step S3913, the second game number lottery process of this precursor is executed. In the second game number lottery process of the present omen, the current value of the stock game counter 84b and the second game number lottery table of the present omen corresponding to the current shift chance trigger are read from the sub-side ROM 83 . The second number-of-games lottery table of the present sign is set in such a way that all patterns in which the current value of the stock game counter 84b is any one of 0 to 31 correspond to each other on a one-to-one basis. The second number-of-games lottery table for each main omen defines the number of continued games so that the number of continued games is equal to or less than the maximum value when the value of the corresponding stock game counter 84b is added. For example, in the second game number lottery table of this omen in which the value of the stock game counter 84b corresponds to "10", each number of games in one game interval included in the range of 1 game to 22 games and the counter value for game number lottery is determined in advance. In addition, in the second game number lottery table of this omen in which the value of the stock game counter 84b corresponds to "0", each number of games in one game interval included in the range of 2 games to 32 games and the counter value for game number lottery is determined in advance. In addition, in the second game number lottery table of this precursor corresponding to the value of the stock game counter 84b being "31", the number of continuous games in one game is determined regardless of the game number lottery counter value. Except for the second game number lottery table of this omen corresponding to the value of "31" of the stock game counter 84b, the second game number lottery table of each omen has each number of games according to the type of transition chance trigger. Selectivity is different. Specifically, the higher the value of the IV corresponding to the current transition chance trigger, the higher the selection rate of the number of long games. In the second number-of-games lottery process of this precursor, the value of the number-of-games lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the counter for number-of-games lottery is changed to the number-of-games lottery counter of the above precursor. The 2-game number lottery table is collated, and the current number of continuous games is read.

Thereafter, in step S3907, the number of continuous games read out in step S3913 is added to the stock game counter 84b, and this setting process ends. As a result, the number of games to be continued in the transition chance precursor state ST15 is set in the stock game counter 84b. A shift chance precursor state ST15 is generated.

Further, as described above, even if the transition chance state ST16 is activated and won in the false portent state, the processing for changing the number of continuous games in the false portent state and the processing for changing the effect content are executed. not. As a result, even if the transition chance state ST16 is activated and won in the middle of the game, the false portent state being executed is continued according to the number of continuous games and the effect content determined at the start. However, if the first special replay combination is won, or if the lottery process (FIG. 12) results in a loss, the standby effect setting process (step S1107) is executed by the sub-side MPU 82, so the false portent state The freeze performance is executed even during the period of , and thereafter the performance for the bonus AT state is executed.

Also, if the first special replay combination is won in the middle of the shift chance precursor state ST15 or the ceiling game precursor state ST13, or if the lottery process (FIG. 12) results in a loss, the sub-side MPU 82 will perform a standby effect. Since the setting process (step S1107) is executed, the freeze effect is executed, and thereafter the effect for the bonus AT state is executed.

In addition, in the setting process for this omen, by executing the processes of steps S3908 to S3910 before executing the process of step S3912, the stock game counter of those who have won the transition chance state ST16 during the false omen state is activated. Even if the value of 84b has already reached the upper limit number of games and the number of continuous games is not added, if the transition chance trigger role that triggered the winning is more expected, The information in the portent combination determination area 84c is updated. As a result, the transition chance trigger combination with a high degree of expectation is likely to be stored in the portent combination determination area 84c.

Returning to the description of the precursor setting process (FIG. 68), if a negative determination is made in step S3803, the process proceeds to step S3806. In step S3806, it is determined whether or not the transition chance trigger role has been won in the current game. If the transition chance trigger role is won, setting processing for a false portent is executed in step S3807.

In the false omen setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 70, first, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling remaining game counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is equal to or less than 64, which is the regulation reference number. . If an affirmative determination is made in step S4001, this setting process ends. In a configuration in which the maximum number of games to be continued in the false precursor state is 32 games and the number of games to be continued in the ceiling game precursor state ST13 is also 32 games, if the ceiling remaining game number is equal to or less than the sum of these game numbers, By regulating the occurrence of the false portent state, it is possible to prevent the ceiling game portent state ST13 and the false portent state from occurring redundantly.

If a negative determination is made in step S4001, a false portent lottery process is executed in step S4002. In the false portent lottery process, the false portent lottery table corresponding to the current shift chance trigger is read from the sub-side ROM 83 . The false portent lottery table is set so that the larger the value of the IV corresponding to the present shift chance trigger role, the higher the probability of winning the false portent occurrence. In the false portent lottery process, the value of the false portent lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the false portent lottery counter is compared with the above-mentioned false portent lottery table. do. Then, in step S4003, as a result of the false portent lottery process, it is determined whether or not the player has won a false portent occurrence. If a negative determination is made in step S4003, this setting process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S4003, the process proceeds to step S4004.

In step S4004, it is determined whether or not the value of the portent game counter 84a is "0". In the sign setting process (FIG. 68), the false sign setting process is executed on the condition that the present sign execution flag is not set to "1". is not activated in Therefore, in step S4004, it is determined whether or not the state is a false precursor state.

When the value of the portent game counter 84a is "0" (step S4004: YES), in step S4005, the information of the shift chance trigger role that triggered the current false portent setting process is read. In addition, in step S4006, the bit corresponding to the type of transition chance trigger combination read out in step S4005 is set to "1" in the portent combination determination area 84c. Other bits are cleared to "0".

In the subsequent step S4007, the first number-of-games lottery process for the false omen is executed. In the false omen first game number lottery process, the false omen first game number lottery table corresponding to the current transition chance trigger is read from the sub-side ROM 83 . In the false omen first game number lottery table, the correspondence relationship between each number of games in one game interval included in the range of 2 games to 32 games and the game number lottery counter value is determined in advance, and a transition chance opportunity is provided. The selection rate of each number of games differs according to the type of winning combination. Specifically, the higher the value of the IV corresponding to the current transition chance trigger, the higher the selection rate of the number of long games. In the first game number lottery process of the false omen, the value of the game number lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the game number lottery counter is set to the number of the game lottery counter. The number of one-game lottery table is collated, and the current number of continuous games is read. Then, after the read number of continuous games is set in the portent game counter 84a in step S4008, this setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the false portent setting process is activated in the false portent state, a negative determination is made in step S4004, and the process proceeds to step S4009. In step S4009, the information of the shift chance trigger role that triggered the setting process for the current false portent is read. In the subsequent step S4010, it is determined whether or not the transition chance trigger combination read in step S4009 is more advantageous than the combination stored in the portent combination determination area 84c as a trigger for the transition chance state ST16. do. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the transition chance triggering combination read in step S4009 corresponds to a larger IV value than the combination stored in the portent combination determination area 84c.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4010, "1" is set in the bit corresponding to the type of transition chance trigger combination read out in step S4009 in the portent combination determination area 84c. Other bits are cleared to "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S4010, or if the process of step S4011 is executed, the current value of the stock game counter 84b is read out in step S4012. Then, in step S4013, it is determined whether or not the read value of the stock game counter 84b is equal to or greater than 32, which is the maximum number of continuous games. If the number is 32 or more, this setting process is terminated, and if the number is less than 32, the process proceeds to step S4014.

In step S4014, a second number-of-games lottery process for a false omen is executed. In the false omen second game number lottery process, the current value of the stock game counter 84b and the false omen second game number lottery table corresponding to the current shift chance trigger are read from the sub-side ROM 83 . The second number-of-games lottery table for false omens is set in a one-to-one correspondence with all patterns in which the current value of the stock game counter 84b is any one of 0-31. The second number-of-games lottery table for each false omen defines the number of continuous games so that the number of continuous games is equal to or less than the maximum value when the value of the corresponding stock game counter 84b is added. For example, in the false omen second game number lottery table in which the value of the stock game counter 84b corresponds to "10", each game number and the game number lottery counter value of the one-game interval included in the range of 1 game to 22 games are is determined in advance. In addition, in the second game number lottery table of the false omen corresponding to the value of the stock game counter 84b being "0", each game number and the game number lottery counter value of the one game interval included in the range of 2 games to 32 games. is determined in advance. Further, in the second game number lottery table for the false omen corresponding to the stock game counter 84b having a value of "31", the number of continuous games in one game is determined regardless of the game number lottery counter value. Except for the false omen second game number lottery table in which the value of the stock game counter 84b corresponds to "31", each false omen second game number lottery table has each number of games according to the type of transition chance trigger. Selectivity is different. Specifically, the higher the value of the IV corresponding to the current transition chance trigger, the higher the selection rate of the number of long games. In the second number-of-games lottery process for the false omen, the value of the number-of-games lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the number-of-games lottery counter is used as the number-of-games lottery counter value of the above-mentioned false omen. The 2-game number lottery table is collated, and the current number of continuous games is read.

After that, in step S4015, the number of continuous games read out in step S4014 is added to the stock game counter 84b, and then this setting process ends. As a result, since the number of games in which the false portent state continues is set in the stock game counter 84b, the fulfillment of the conditions for executing the false portent state is not invalidated, and the false portent state is resumed after the termination of the false portent state. will occur.

Also, as described above, even if the occurrence of the false portent state is won in the false portent state, the processing for changing the number of games to be continued in the false portent state and the processing for changing the effect content are not executed. . As a result, even if the false portent state is generated and won in the middle of the game, the false portent state being executed is continued according to the number of continuous games and the content of the effect determined at the start.

In addition, in the setting processing for false portents, by executing the processing of steps S4009 to S4011 before executing the processing of step S4013, the stock game counter 84b of a player who has won the false portent state during the false portent state is executed. Even if the value of has already reached the upper limit of the number of games and the number of continuous games is not added, if the expectation for the transition chance that triggered the winning is higher, the omen The information in the winning combination determination area 84c is updated. As a result, the transition chance trigger combination with a high degree of expectation is likely to be stored in the portent combination determination area 84c.

Returning to the description of the portent setting process (FIG. 68), if affirmative determination is made in step S3802, if a negative determination is made in step S3806, if the process of step S3805 is executed, or if the process of step S3807 is executed If so, the process advances to step S3808.

In step S3808, it is determined whether or not the value of the portent game counter 84a is "0", thereby determining whether or not the state is a false portent. Also, in step S3809, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling remaining game counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 64 or less, which is the regulation reference number. If a negative determination is made in step S3808, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S3809, the current sign setting process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3808 and a negative determination is made in step S3809, it is determined in step S3810 whether or not the value of the stock game counter 84b is 1 or more.

When the value of the stock game counter 84b is equal to or greater than 1, it is determined in step S3811 whether or not "1" is set to the main omen winning flag in the various flags area 84d. When "1" is set in the win sign flag, the process of steps S3812 to S3816 is executed to generate the transition chance sign state ST15.

Specifically, in step S3812, the main omen winning flag in the various flag areas 84d is cleared to "0" and the main omen execution flag is set to "1". In the subsequent step S3813, the value of the number of continuous games set in the stock game counter 84b is shifted to the portent game counter 84a.

After that, in step S3814, by specifying the bit set to "1" in the portent combination determination area 84c, the type of transition chance trigger combination corresponding to the current transition chance portent state ST15 is specified. Then, in step S3815, an effect selection process for this precursor is executed. In the effect selection process for the main sign, first, the main sign effect table 83a is read out from the sub-side ROM 83 .

As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 71, this omen production table includes each game of 2 to 32 games that can be taken as the number of continuous games of this omen, and IV=7, 9 to 12, 14, which are transition chance triggers. The content of this precursor effect is determined in relation to the 16 predetermined combinations. Specifically, one group is set with IV=7, one group is set with IV=9 and 10, and one group is set with IV=11 and 12 for the shift chance trigger role. , IV=14 to 16, one group is set. For each group, the effect content for the number of games that can be taken as the number of continuous games of this omen is uniquely determined.

In this case, when comparing the same number of continuous games, the group with the larger IV value is configured to more easily execute an effect with a high degree of expectation. The greater the number, the easier it is to execute highly anticipated effects. For example, the selection rate of an effect that is executed along a series of stories over a plurality of games, such as an effect in which characters confront each other, is set higher on the side with a larger IV value, and a continuous game. The higher the number, the higher the setting. It should be noted that the higher the IV value, the easier it is to execute an effect with a high degree of expectation, and the greater the number of continuous games, the easier it is to execute an effect with a high degree of expectation. It is the same.

In this portent effect selection processing, the type of the main portent effect corresponding to the number of continuing games currently set in the portent game counter 84a and the combination set in the portent role determination area 84c is selected by the main portent effect table 83a. read from Then, the information on the type of the read out sign effect is written in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S3816. After that, the current sign setting processing is terminated.

By writing the information on the type of the main sign effect to the sub-side RAM 84, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), the moving image corresponding to the type of the main sign effect is displayed this time. A data table is read out from the sub-side ROM 83 to enable each game to be played in the number of continuous games, and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, the display effect corresponding to the type of the current sign effect is performed over the current number of continuous games. Further, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the type of the present indication effect is read, and the sound output data setting processing (step S1111) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28). Then, the sound output data corresponding to the type of the foreshadow effect is read, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, a light emission effect and a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the type of the present precursor effect on the image display device 66 are performed.

Here, how the precursor effect is executed over a plurality of games will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 72 .

In the example of FIG. 72, a data table is read out in which the number of continuing games in the precursor state is 14 games. In the data table, the content of effects corresponding to each of the 1st game to the 14th game is uniquely defined. For example, an effect A is set for the first game, and an effect image is displayed on the image display device 66 as the start lever 41 is operated. Such display of effect images is also performed in effect B in the second game, effect C in the third game, effect D in the fourth game, and effect E in the fifth game. In addition, in the effect F in the sixth game, the effect G in the seventh game, the effect H in the eighth game, and the effect I in the ninth game, the screen scrolls as if the line of sight is reflected in a situation in which a predetermined character is displayed. is performed. Further, in the effects J in the 10th game, the effects K in the 11th game, the effects L in the 12th game, the effects M in the 13th game, and the effects N in the 14th game, a predetermined character and a specific character battle. A performance is performed. In the data table, the effect data is set so as to be separated for each game, and even if the effect corresponding to each game is being executed, when the start lever 41 is operated and the next game is started, is switched to the data corresponding to the next game by switching the data for the effect to be referred to in the data table to the data corresponding to the next game.

Returning to the description of the portent setting process (FIG. 68), if a negative determination is made in step S3811, then in step S3817 the value of the number of continuous games set in the stock game counter 84b is set to the portent game counter 84a. shift.

After that, in step S3818, by specifying the bit set to "1" in the portent combination determination area 84c, the type of transition chance triggering combination corresponding to the current false portent state is specified. Then, in step S3819, an effect selection process for a false omen is executed. In the effect selection process for the false portent, first, the false portent effect table 83b is read from the sub-side ROM 83. FIG.

As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 73, the false omen effect table 83b includes each game of 2 to 32 games that can be taken as the number of continuous games of the false omen, and IV=7, 9 to 12, 14 that are transition chance triggers. The content of the false portent effect is determined in relation to the predetermined combination of 16. Specifically, as in the present portent effect table 83a, one group is set with IV=7, and one group is set with IV=9 and 10, and IV= One group is set with 11 and 12, and one group is set with IV=14-16. For each group, the effect content for the number of games that can be taken as the number of continuous games of the false omen is uniquely determined.

In the effect selection process for the false portent, the type of false portent effect corresponding to the number of continuing games currently set in the portent game counter 84a and the combination set in the portent combination determination area 84c is selected from the false portent effect table 83b. read from Then, the information on the type of the read-out false omen effect is written in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S3820. After that, the current sign setting processing is terminated.

By writing the information about the type of false portent effect to the sub-side RAM 84, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), the moving image corresponding to the type of the false portent effect is displayed this time. A data table is read out from the sub-side ROM 83 to enable each game to be played in the number of continuous games, and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, the display effect corresponding to the type of the current false omen effect is performed over the current number of continuous games. In addition, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the type of the false omen effect is read, and the sound output data setting processing (step S1111) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28). Then, sound output data corresponding to the type of false omen effect is read, and light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the type of the false omen effect in the image display device 66 are performed. It should be noted that the state in which the false portent effect is performed over the number of continuous games is the same as the state described in the case of the main portent effect.

When the value of the stock game counter 84b is "0", it is determined in step S3821 whether or not the value of the transition chance remaining counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. When the value of the transition chance remaining counter is "0", the current sign setting process is terminated as it is. When the value of the transition chance remaining counter is 1 or more, the processing of steps S3822 to S3825 is executed.

Specifically, a game number lottery process is executed in step S3822. In the number-of-games lottery process, the number-of-games lottery table is read from the sub-side ROM 83 . The number-of-games lottery table predetermines the correspondence relationship between each number of games at one-game intervals in the range of 2 to 32 games and the number-of-games lottery counter value. It should be noted that, unlike the first number-of-games lottery table and the like of this precursor, the number-of-games lottery table does not have data set according to the types of transition chance triggers. In the number-of-games lottery process, the value of the number-of-games lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec) is read out from the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the number-of-games lottery counter is checked against the number-of-games lottery table. , the number of games to be continued this time is read out. Then, in step S3823, the number of continued games that has been read out is set in the portent game counter 84a.

Incidentally, when the number-of-games lottery table is referred to, a shorter number of continuous games is more likely to be selected than when the first number-of-games lottery table for the real omen or the first number-of-games lottery table for the false omen is referenced. there is Thus, when the transition chance precursor state ST15 occurs based on the fact that the value of the transition chance remaining counter is 1 or more, the number of continued games can be shortened until the transition chance state ST16 occurs. It is possible to reduce the number of games for

In the subsequent step S3824, an effect selection process at the time of consecutive houses is executed. In the effect selection process at the time of consecutive residence, first, the effect table 83c at the time of consecutive residence is read from the sub-side ROM83. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 74, the consecutive game effect table 83c defines the content of the precursor effect in relation to each game of 2 to 32 games that can be taken as the number of games to be continued in the consecutive game.

The content of the main portent effect defined in the consecutive house time effect table 83c is common to the content of the main portent effect defined in the main portent effect table 83a. Specifically, in the main portent effect table 83a The contents of this precursor effect are the same as those defined for IV=14 to 16. IV=14 to 16 are the roles with the highest probability of winning the opportunity role among the transition chance role, and the content of the indication effect corresponding to this is more in the transition chance state than in the case of other transition chance opportunity roles. The content has a high degree of expectation for the occurrence of ST16.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the content of the present portent effect defined in the continuous-time performance table 83c is the main portent effect determined in correspondence with other transition chance triggering roles in the present portent effect table 83a. The configuration may be the same as the content of the portent effect, or the content may be different from the content of the portent effect defined in the main portent effect table 83a. In the case where the content of the main portent effect stipulated in the main portent effect table 83a is different from the content of the main portent effect, the content of the main portent effect stipulated in the continuous-time effect table 83c is set in the main portent effect table 83a. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the degree of expectation for occurrence of the shift chance state ST16 is higher than the contents of the present precursor effect.

In the consecutive game effect selection process, the kind of main precursor effect corresponding to the number of continuous games currently set in the precursor game counter 84a is read out from the consecutive game effect table 83c. Then, the information on the type of the read out sign effect is written in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S3825. After that, the current sign setting processing is terminated.

By writing the information on the type of the main sign effect to the sub-side RAM 84, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), the moving image corresponding to the type of the main sign effect is displayed this time. A data table is read out from the sub-side ROM 83 to enable each game to be played in the number of continuous games, and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. As a result, the display effect corresponding to the type of the current sign effect is performed over the current number of continuous games. Further, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the type of the present indication effect is read, and the sound output data setting processing (step S1111) in the periodic processing (FIG. 28). Then, the sound output data corresponding to the type of the foreshadow effect is read, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, a light emission effect and a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the type of the present precursor effect on the image display device 66 are performed.

<How the number of continued games in the omen state is stocked>
Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 75, the manner in which the number of continued games in the premonitory state is stocked will be described. FIG. 75(a) shows the state of the portent game counter 84a, FIG. 75(b) shows the state of winning of the false portent state, and FIG. 75(c) shows the state of the stock game counter 84b.

At each of the timings t1, t2, and t3 where the false portent state remains, as shown in FIG. ), the value of the stock game counter 84b is incremented. The value added at each timing is the value of the number of continuous games corresponding to the result of the game number lottery process executed at each timing. Also, although not shown in the drawings, the comparison processing of the corresponding transition chance triggers is executed at each timing, and the information of the transition chance triggers on the side that is advantageous as the execution trigger of the transition chance state ST16 is stored and held. As shown, the writing process to the portent combination determination area 84c is executed.

Thereafter, at timing t4, the value of the portent game counter 84a becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 75(a), and the current false portent state ends. In this case, as shown in FIG. 75(c), since the value of the stock game counter 84b is 1 or more, at the subsequent timing t5, as shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 75(c), The value of the stock game counter 84b is shifted to the precursor game counter 84a and the false precursor condition is newly initiated. In this case, the total number of continuous games selected when the occurrence of the false portent state is won in the previous false portent state is set as the new number of continuous games of the false portent state. That is, a series of presentation contents of the false portent state are determined with the total number of games as one unit. Further, when selecting the effect content of the false portent state, the effect content corresponding to the transition chance trigger combination stored in the portent combination determination area 84c at this time is selected.

<Situation when transition chance state ST16 is activated and won in the middle of the false omen state>
Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 76, the situation when the transition chance state ST16 is activated and won in the middle of the false portent state will be described. FIG. 76(a) shows the execution period of the false portent state, FIG. 76(b) shows the execution period of the shift chance portent state ST15, FIG. FIG. 76(d) shows the stockable period of the number of continued games in the portent state, FIG. 76(e) shows the period during which the lottery process for activating the shift chance state ST16 is performed, and FIG. 76(f) shows the shift chance state ST16. indicates the period during which the lottery process is performed in addition to the number of executions of .

At the timing of t1, the state becomes a false precursor state as shown in FIG. 76(a), so that the number of continued games in the precursor state can be stocked as shown in FIG. 76(d). Further, as shown in FIG. 76(e), the lottery for activating the shift chance state ST16 can still be performed in the false portent state.

After that, at timing t2 when the player stays in the false portent state, as shown in FIG. 76(c), the transition chance state ST16 is activated and won. In this case, the false portent state is continued rather than the transition chance portent state ST15 being generated after the false portent state is ended. The false portent state continues until the number of continuous games determined at the start of the false portent state is exhausted. Also, the execution of the transition chance precursor state ST15 is stocked. By stocking the execution of the transition chance precursor state ST15, as shown in FIG. 76(d), the number of continued games in the precursor state cannot be further stocked. Further, as shown in FIGS. 76(e) and 76(f), the state in which the activation lottery process of the shift chance state ST16 is performed is shifted to the state in which the lottery process for adding the number of executions of the transition chance state ST16 is performed. .

After that, at the timing of t3, the number of continuous games in the false portent state is consumed as shown in FIG. 76(a), thereby starting the shift chance portent state ST15 as shown in FIG. 76(b). The number of continuous games of the transition chance state ST15 is the number of continuous games determined by lottery when the transition chance state ST16 is activated. The number of games is the sum of the total number of continuous games selected when it becomes.

In addition, even after the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 76(f), the state in which the number of executions of the shift chance state ST16 is increased is maintained. In this case, as already explained, when the transition chance state ST16 is activated in the false portent state and the transition chance portent state ST15 is entered after the termination of the false portent state, the number of games to be played in the transition chance portent state ST15 is the same. The more the number of continuous games stocked up to, the more. As the number of continued games in the transition chance precursor state ST15 increases, the number of times the transition chance state ST16 is executed increases. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of stocking the number of continued games in the bogus state in the false omen state.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 76(b), the transition chance state ST16 is generated by completing the number of continued games of the transition chance precursor state ST15. Also, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 76(f), the state in which the number of executions of the transition chance state ST16 is added to the lottery ends.

<Relationship between precursor state and penalty event>
Next, the relationship between precursor states and penalty events will be described.

As already explained, the penalty event is an event in which the center reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop in the CB internal post-state and non-AT state, and either winning occurs. When a penalty event has occurred, by making an affirmative determination in step S1410 in the non-AT process (FIG. 32) and executing the process of step S1411, the number of games corresponding to the penalty is stored in the penalty counter of the sub-side RAM 84. "5" is added. The number of penalty games is added every time a penalty event occurs regardless of whether or not the value of the penalty counter is "0", so the penalty counter is set to a value greater than the number of penalty games. can be

If the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the value of the penalty counter is decremented by 1 in step S1703 of the ceiling game management process (FIG. 35), except for the ceiling game precursor state ST13. The value of the ceiling remaining game counter in the RAM 84 is not decremented. Therefore, when a penalty event occurs, basically, the transition to the normal AT state ST12 based on the completion of the number of ceiling remaining games is delayed.

Further, when the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, by making an affirmative determination in step S1504 of the shift chance management process (FIG. 33), even if the shift chance trigger role is won, the shift chance state ST16 is activated by lottery. The process (step S1507) and the additional lottery process (step S1510) are not executed. Therefore, when the penalty event occurs, the opportunity for the transition chance state ST16 to occur disappears.

In addition, if the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, by making an affirmative determination in step S1602 of the process during the transition chance (FIG. 34), even if the expectation improvement role is won, the transition probability UP lottery process (step S1603) is not executed. Further, by making an affirmative determination in step S1608 of the transition chance process (FIG. 34), even if the normal replay combination is won in the transition chance state ST16, the transition lottery process (step S1609) is not executed. Therefore, when a penalty event occurs, even if the shift chance state ST16 occurs, the opportunity for the occurrence of the normal AT state ST12 disappears. Furthermore, in the process during a transition chance (FIG. 34), regardless of whether the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the value of the delay counter or the transition chance counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is decremented by one. Even in a situation where the chance of generating the normal AT state ST12 disappears, the number of continuous games of the transition chance state ST16 is exhausted.

Here, the flow of the game when a penalty event occurs in the shift chance precursor state ST15 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG.

77(a) shows the execution period of the transition chance precursor state ST15, FIG. 77(b) shows the execution period of the transition chance state ST16, FIG. 77(c) shows the occurrence of penalty events, and FIG. d) indicates the period during which the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more.

A penalty event occurs as shown in FIG. 77(c) at t2, which is a situation in which transition chance precursor state ST15 started at t1 as shown in FIG. 77(a) continues. As a result, the penalty game is completed as shown in FIG. 77(d). That is, the additional lottery process of the shift chance state ST16 is not executed, and the number of ceiling remaining games is not consumed. However, the transition chance precursor state ST15 continues as it is.

After that, at the timing of t3, the shift chance precursor state ST15 ends as shown in FIG. 77(a), and the shift chance state ST16 starts as shown in FIG. 77(b). In this case, as shown in FIG. 77(d), since the penalty game continues to be consumed, even if the normal replay combination is won in the transition chance state ST16, the transition lottery process of the normal AT state ST12 is not executed. Further, even if the penalty game has been completed, the number of continued games in the transition chance state ST16 is decreased as one game is executed.

Thereafter, at timing t4 when the transition chance state ST16 continues, the penalty game completion state ends as shown in FIG. 77(d). As a result, when the normal replay combination is won, the transfer lottery process is executed, and when the game is won in the transfer lottery process, the normal AT state ST12 occurs. After that, at the timing of t5, the transition chance state ST16 ends as shown in FIG. 77(b).

Next, a case where a penalty event occurs in the ceiling game precursor state ST13 will be described.

In the ceiling game portent state ST13, by making an affirmative determination in step S1701 of the ceiling game management process (FIG. 35), even if the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the value of the remaining ceiling game counter is reduced in step S1704. is decremented by 1, and when the value of the ceiling remaining game counter becomes "0", processing for generating the normal AT state ST12 of steps S1709 to S1712 is executed. That is, when the ceiling game premonitory state ST13 is reached, regardless of whether or not the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the number of remaining ceiling games is consumed, and the shift setting to the normal AT state ST12 is performed. However, if the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more even in the ceiling game precursor state ST13, the transition chance state ST16 is activated by making an affirmative determination in step S1504 of the transition chance management process (FIG. 33). Lottery processing and additional lottery processing are not executed.

When the normal AT state ST12 is entered in a situation where the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the processing of steps S1805 and S1806 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S1804 of the processing during AT (FIG. 37). . Therefore, even if the transition to the normal AT state ST12 is set, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is not notified when winning the first and second bell combinations. Also, in a situation where the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the first addition process (step S1908) is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S1906 of the pre-branch AT state process (FIG. 38). Therefore, even if the player wins the privilege lottery opportunity in a situation where the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the privilege points are not added. On the other hand, even if one game is completed, the value of the penalty counter is only decremented by 1 in step S1907, and the process of subtracting the value of the normal AT game counter (step S1910) is not executed. Therefore, in the AT preparation state in which the value of the penalty counter is equal to or greater than 1 after the transition setting to the normal AT state ST12 has been performed, the normal AT state is performed although notification of the pressing order and addition of privilege points are not performed. The subtraction of the number of continued games in ST12 is also not performed. Further, even if a penalty event occurs in the AT ready state, the process of adding the penalty game to the penalty counter (step S1411) is not executed, so it is possible to prevent the AT ready state from continuing. It should be noted that the penalty counter may be incremented with respect to the occurrence of a penalty event in the AT preparation state up to a specific number of times as an upper limit.

Here, the flow of the game when a penalty event occurs in the ceiling game precursor state ST13 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG.

FIG. 78(a) shows a state in which the value of the remaining ceiling game counter is 1 or more, and the value of the remaining ceiling game counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is executed. FIG. 78(b) shows the execution period of the ceiling game precursor state ST13, FIG. 78(c) shows the occurrence of penalty events, and FIG. FIG. 78(e) shows an execution period of a penalty game digested state in which the value of the penalty counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is played. FIG. FIG. 78(f) shows the execution period of the normal AT state ST12, which is the state of "0" but not the AT state.

First, a case where a penalty event occurs in a state where the ceiling game is completed, not in the ceiling game precursor state ST13, will be described.

At the timing of t1, which is the state in which the ceiling game continues to be consumed as shown in FIG. 78(a), a penalty event occurs as shown in FIG. 78(c). As a result, the penalty game is completed as shown in FIG. 78(d). In this case, as shown in FIG. 78(a), the dead state of the ceiling game ends, and the subtraction of the remaining ceiling game counter is temporarily interrupted. After that, at the timing t2, the penalty game is finished as shown in FIG. 78(d). As a result, as shown in FIG. 78(a), the ceiling game is finished, and decrementing of the remaining ceiling game counter is resumed.

Next, a case where a penalty event occurs in the state of the ceiling game precursor state ST13 will be described.

At the timing of t3, which is the state in which the ceiling game has been completed as shown in FIG. 78(a), the ceiling game precursor state ST13 is started as shown in FIG. 78(b). Thereafter, at timing t4 when the ceiling game precursor state ST13 continues, a penalty event occurs as shown in FIG. 78(c). In this case, since the ceiling game precursor state ST13 is reached, the penalty game completion state is not started, and the ceiling game completion state continues as shown in FIG. As shown, the ceiling game precursor state ST13 continues.

After that, at timing t5, the value of the remaining ceiling game counter becomes "0" as shown in FIG. The game precursor state ST13 ends. However, since the penalty game is in a waiting state for the penalty event that occurred at the timing t4, the normal AT state ST12 is not started at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. 78(f). As shown in FIG. 78(d), the penalty game completion state is started, and as shown in FIG. 78(e), the AT preparation state is started.

In the AT preparation state, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 79(a), the image display device 66 displays an image P11 for notifying that the AT preparation state is in effect. Further, as an image P12 for clearly indicating that the number of continued games in the normal AT state ST12 has not been subtracted, the number of continued games in the normal AT state ST12 continues to be displayed in the state of the number of starting games.

After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 78(d), the penalty game digestion state ends and the AT preparation state ends as shown in FIG. 78(e). Thus, the normal AT state ST12 is started. In the normal AT state ST12, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 79(b), the image display device 66 displays an image P21 for notifying that the normal AT state ST12 is in effect. In addition, an image P22 is displayed for notifying the remaining number of continuous games in the normal AT state ST12. In addition, an image P23 is displayed for notifying the pressing order.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

By entering precursor states such as transition chance precursor state ST15 and false precursor state, precursor effects are executed in each game so that the player can expect occurrence of transition chance precursor state ST16. As a result, the player who confirms the premonition effect expects the transition chance state ST16 to occur, thereby improving the interest of the game. Further, since the false portent state exists in addition to the shift chance portent state ST15, it is possible to improve the interest of the game even in a situation where the shift chance portent state ST16 is not actually provided. In this case, even if the activation of the transition chance state ST16 is won in the false portent state or the generation of the false portent state is won, the false portent state is determined according to the contents determined when starting the false portent state being executed. The precursor condition is completed. This eliminates the need to adjust the execution mode of the false portent state, thereby reducing the processing load in executing the false portent state.

Even if the transition chance state ST16 is activated in the portent state or the false portent state is generated and won, the number of continuous games determined when starting the portent state under execution is not changed. As a result, it is not necessary to adjust the number of games to be continued in the precursory state in the middle, so the processing load for executing the precursory state can be reduced.

Even if the transition chance state ST16 is activated in the portent state or the false portent state is generated and won, the performance contents of each game determined when starting the portent state under execution are not changed. As a result, since it is not necessary to adjust the effect content of each game in the precursor state, the processing load for executing the precursor state can be reduced.

Since the game shifts to the normal AT state ST12 when the number of games corresponding to the number of ceiling games is played, it is possible to reliably generate an opportunity to shift to the normal AT state ST12. In addition, when the number of remaining games of the ceiling game number becomes the number of games corresponding to the start, the ceiling game precursor state ST13 is entered, and the precursor effect is performed in each game, so that it is expected to shift to the normal AT state ST12. It is possible to heighten the feeling of the game, and to improve the amusement of the game. In this case, in a situation where the remaining number of ceiling games is equal to or less than the sum of the upper limit number of games of transition chance precursor state ST15 and false precursor state and the number of continued games of ceiling game precursor state ST13, transition chance precursor state New initiation of ST15 and false precursor conditions is blocked. This prevents the occurrence of the ceiling game precursor state ST13 in the middle of the transition chance precursor state ST15 or the false precursor state, or the occurrence of the transition chance precursor state ST15 or the false precursor state in the middle of the ceiling game precursor state ST13. It is possible to reduce the processing load in executing various precursor states.

In a situation where the remaining number of ceiling games is equal to or less than the sum of the upper limit number of games of the transition chance precursor state ST15 and the false precursor state and the number of continuous games of the ceiling game precursor state ST13, the transition chance state ST16 is activated and won. If so, execution of the shift chance precursor state ST15 is awaited. This prevents the occurrence winning from being invalidated.

When the transition chance state ST16 is activated or the false portent state is generated in the middle of the false portent state, the portent state corresponding to the generated winning is newly started after the false portent state being executed is terminated. This makes it possible to increase the chances that the precursor state is executed.

When the winning occurs multiple times during the false portent state, the execution of the portent state is waited accordingly, so that it is possible to diversify the manner in which the execution of the portent state is waited. In addition, the more times the win is won during the false portent state, the more games are continued in the portent state after the end of the false portent state. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of improving the amusement of the game through the execution of the premonitory state.

If the occurrence of the false portent state is elected in the middle of the false portent state, the execution of the false portent state corresponding to the generation election is waited. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the false portent state is executed, and it is possible to generate many situations that increase the player's expectation without increasing the occurrence probability of the shift chance portent state ST15.

Even if the generation of the false portent state is won in the shift chance portent state ST15, the execution of the false portent state is not waited. As a result, after the transition chance state ST16 started after the transition chance precursor state ST15 ends, the transition chance precursor state ST15 is started immediately without winning the trigger role of the transition chance state ST16. can be prevented.

Even if the activation of the transition chance state ST16 is won in the false portent state, instead of generating the transition chance state ST16 after the termination of the false portent state, the transition chance state ST16 is generated after the transition chance portent state ST15 is generated. generate Thereby, even when the transition chance state ST16 is activated and won during the false portent state, the transition chance portent state ST15 can be generated before shifting to the transition chance state ST16.

If the transition chance state ST16 is activated or the false portent state is generated and won in the middle of the false portent state, information on the number of continued games is stored in the stock game counter 84b, so the false portent state being executed ends. There is no need to re-determine the number of continuous games when starting the precursory state later. In particular, in a configuration in which the number of continuous games changes according to the winning details, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for determining the number of continuous games.

When the winning occurs multiple times in the false portent state, the number of times the portent state is executed is not added, but the number of continuous games of one portent state is added, so the portent state is started. It is possible to prevent an excessive increase in the number of executions of one unit of operation from the beginning to the end. In addition, since it is only necessary to add the number of continuous games no matter how many times the occurrence winning occurs in the precursor state, it is necessary to collectively perform processing according to the number of occurrences of occurrence winning after the end of the false precursor state being executed. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

The stock game counter 84b stores the number of continuous games within the range of the upper limit number of games. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of continued games in the premonitory state from becoming excessively large.

Information on the number of continuous games is stored in the stock game counter 84b regardless of whether the transition chance state ST16 is activated or the false portent state is generated in the false portent state, and each of the above winnings is performed in the false portent state. If both have occurred, after the end of the false portent state, a shift chance portent state ST15 that continues over the total number of continuous games is started. As a result, it is possible to increase the chance of generating the transition chance portent state ST15 with a large number of continuous games in conjunction with the occurrence of the transition chance trigger role a plurality of times, and the transition chance to execute the portent effect with high expectation. It is possible to cause the precursor state ST15.

The transition chance portent state ST15 and the false portent state have different effects depending on the type of the trigger role that triggered the execution. As a result, it is possible to diversify the content of the presentation in the premonitory state and associate the expectation of the content of the presentation with the opportunity. Further, in the event that the transition chance state ST16 is activated in the false portent state or the event of the false portent state is won, the information on the type of the trigger combination is stored in the portent combination determination area 84c, so the execution is awaited. Even when the transition chance portent state ST15 or the false portent state is started, the content of each performance of the portent state can be set to the content corresponding to the type of the trigger combination.

When the occurrence winning occurs multiple times in the false portent state, the information of the type of trigger combination that is highly expected to be triggered and won in the transition chance state ST16 is preferentially stored in the portent combination determination area 84c. As a result, while reducing the storage capacity of the portent combination determination area 84c, it becomes easier to execute highly anticipated effects as the effects of the portent state.

Even if the occurrence win occurs multiple times in the same false portent state, it is only necessary to add the information on the number of continuous games and update the information on the type of opportunity for each occurrence win. Further, according to this configuration, when the occurrence winning occurs multiple times in the false portent state, after the end of the false portent state, the portent state with a large number of continued games and the highly anticipated portent effect are executed. It is possible to make it easier to generate the premonitory state to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the transition chance state ST16 is won after the occurrence of the false portent state is won in the same false portent state, the information of the type of the trigger combination with a high degree of expectation is preferentially displayed in the portent combination determination area 84c. remembered. As a result, for example, even if the activation of the transition chance state ST16 is won based on an opportunity with a low degree of expectation, the occurrence of the false portent state is won based on an opportunity with a high degree of expectation. In this case, it is possible to execute a predictive effect with a high degree of expectation as the shift chance predictive state ST15.

When the activation of the transition chance state ST16 is won in the false portent state, the transition chance state ST16 is added from the state in which the activation lottery process of the transition chance state ST16 is executed even in the situation where the false portent state continues. The state is changed to the state in which the lottery process is executed. This makes it possible to diversify the manner of determining whether or not to generate the transition chance state ST16. In addition, the mode of determining whether or not to generate the transition chance state ST16 is changed depending on whether or not the activation of the transition chance state ST16 occurs in the false portent state. Activation of the chance state ST16 It is possible to heighten expectations for winning.

In particular, since the degree of expectation for granting the number of executions of the transition chance state ST16 with respect to the unit execution times of the lottery is higher in the additional lottery process than in the activation lottery process, it is more likely that the transition chance state ST16 will be activated in the false portent state. be advantageous. As a result, the player expects to win by activating the transition chance state ST16 in the false portent state.

The manner in which the number of games to be continued in the precursory state is determined differs depending on whether or not the precursory state corresponds to the occurrence of a win in the middle of the false precursory state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the number of continued games in the precursory state is determined.

In the ceiling game precursor state ST13, the precursor effect is executed over a plurality of games in the same manner as in the shift chance precursor state ST15. Then, in the final game in which the number of ceiling remaining games is exhausted, the final effect in a series of precursor effects is executed, and when the ceiling remaining game number is exhausted, the normal AT state ST12 occurs. In this case, when a penalty event occurs in the ceiling game precursor state ST13, the number of ceiling remaining games is waited until the value of the penalty counter becomes "0". Unless the adjustment is made, the final effect will be executed as a premonition effect before the number of ceiling remaining games reaches "0". If so, the content of the portent effect will not match the timing at which the normal AT state ST12 transition setting is performed. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to adjust the content of execution of the sign effect in accordance with waiting until the value of the penalty counter reaches "0" for the number of remaining games to be completed, a process for performing the adjustment is required, increasing the processing load. There is a concern about an increase, and furthermore, there is a need to prepare performance data for adjustment in advance, and there is a concern about an increase in data capacity. On the other hand, when the ceiling game precursor state ST13 is reached as described above, the number of remaining ceiling games is consumed regardless of whether the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more. However, it is possible to match the contents of the presentation with the number of games remaining on the ceiling.

When a penalty event occurs in the ceiling game precursor state ST13, the AT preparation state is set after the ceiling game precursor state ST13 ends, and the shift to the normal AT state ST12 is delayed until the game for the penalty game is completed. be done. This allows penalties to be given for penalty events. Further, when a penalty event occurs in the ceiling game precursor state ST13, the penalty is given before the start of the normal AT state ST12, so the player can easily recognize the reason why the penalty has occurred.

The number of games played in the AT preparation state is not subtracted from the number of games continued in the normal AT state ST12. As a result, it is possible to sufficiently obtain the benefit of having shifted to the normal AT state ST12 while giving a fixed penalty to the penalty event.

Even if a penalty event occurs in the AT ready state, the value of the penalty counter is not incremented. This makes it possible to prevent the transition to the normal AT state ST12 from continuing to be delayed.

When a penalty event occurs in the ceiling game precursor state ST13, the decrementation of the remaining ceiling game counter is not prevented, but the chance of generating the shift chance state ST16 disappears. This makes it possible to give a certain amount of penalty to the occurrence of the penalty event in the ceiling game precursor state ST13.

If a penalty event occurs in the transition chance precursor state ST15, a penalty occurs in the transition chance precursor state ST15. Since the precursor effect in the transition chance precursor state ST15 is executed regardless of the number of ceiling games, it is possible to appropriately deal with the occurrence of the penalty event by immediately generating a penalty in the transition chance precursor state ST15. Become.

A bonus point counter is provided in the sub-side RAM 84, and the bonus points selected by winning the bonus points in the bonus point lottery process are added to the bonus point counter. When the value of the privilege point counter becomes equal to or greater than the privilege reference value, the normal AT state continues. In addition, when the conditions for transition to the bonus AT state are satisfied, the number of remaining executions of the normal AT state is added, and even if the additional lottery process in the additional state wins an additional lottery, the remaining execution of the normal AT state is performed. count is added. In this case, when the conditions for shifting to the bonus AT state are met, or when the additional lottery process results in an additional winning, the remaining number of executions itself is not stored, but the privilege reference value is stored in the privilege point counter. The configuration is such that information corresponding to xn (n is an integer equal to or greater than 1) is added. Therefore, it is possible to use the privilege point counter in common in the above-described configuration in which the diversification of the regular AT state mode is attempted. As a result, it is possible to aggregate the storage areas to be referred to when determining whether or not to continue the normal AT state, thereby reducing the processing load for the determination. In addition, in a configuration that handles data in 1-byte units, it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity compared to a configuration in which a privilege point counter and a counter for the number of remaining executions are provided in units of bytes.

If you win the privilege lottery opportunity role, one privilege point is selected from a plurality of types of privilege points by the privilege point lottery process. It is possible to diversify the mode of addition. In addition, since all of the privilege points selected in this case are values smaller than the privilege reference numerical value, the acquisition of privilege points accumulates, resulting in the occurrence of a series of normal AT states. It is possible to gradually raise the degree of expectation for the sojourn.

When the normal AT state is extended, the privilege points corresponding to the privilege reference value are subtracted from the privilege point counter. As a result, in a configuration in which the privilege point counter is used in common, it is possible to standardize the handling of privilege points when generating a series of games in the normal AT state, thereby reducing the processing load.

In a situation where the number of privilege points is greater than the privilege standard value x (n-1) and smaller than the privilege standard value x n (where n is an integer equal to or greater than 1), the privilege standard value x (n-1) is exceeded. Information corresponding to the numerical value of the minute is notified by the privilege point notification unit 67 . As a result, the player can play the game while clearly recognizing how much privilege points are required to generate a series of games in the normal AT state, thereby satisfying the player's expectations. can be increased to In this case, the privilege point notification unit 67 notifies the remainder of the privilege points divided by the privilege reference value. As a result, in a configuration in which a privilege point counter is commonly used, it is possible to derive the numerical value of the privilege points notified by the privilege point notification unit 67 with a simple processing configuration.

In a situation where the privilege points are equal to or greater than the privilege reference value x n and smaller than the privilege reference value x (n+1) (where n is an integer equal to or greater than 1), the stock notification unit 68 provides information corresponding to the n. be notified. As a result, the player can recognize the number of remaining executions in the normal AT state, and the player's sense of superiority can be favorably enhanced. In this case, the stock notification unit 68 notifies the value of the quotient obtained by dividing the privilege points by the privilege reference value. As a result, in a configuration in which a privilege point counter is commonly used, it is possible to derive the number of remaining executions in the normal AT state notified by the stock notification unit 68 with a simple processing configuration.

In the AT state before branching or in the branching AT state, when the privilege points become equal to or greater than the privilege reference value, the state is shifted to the add-on state. Then, a situation may occur in which the value of privilege reference value x n (where n is an integer equal to or greater than 1) is added to the privilege point counter in the added state. This allows each of these states to be closely related.

When the pre-branching AT state or the branching AT state ends, if the privilege points are equal to or higher than the privilege reference value, in a configuration where the normal AT state continues, in a situation where the privilege points are less than the privilege reference value, another When the normal AT state continues due to the continuation condition, the privilege points less than the pertinent privilege reference value are retained even in the normal AT state of the consecutive residence. As a result, the number of opportunities for the privilege points to reach the privilege reference value or more increases, and it is possible to generate many opportunities to have a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the privilege points can become the privilege reference value or more. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to receive the benefits even if the privilege points are obtained just before the end of the pre-branching AT state or the branching AT state. As a result, it is possible for the player to expect that the privilege point acquisition condition will be satisfied at any timing of the pre-branching AT state and the branching AT state. Furthermore, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the profit when the normal AT state continues, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the normal AT state to continue.

Not only is the normal AT state continuous when the AT continuation lottery process wins the AT continuation lottery process, but also the normal AT state is continuous when the privilege points become equal to or greater than the privilege reference numerical value. As a result, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the normal AT state continues to occur, and it is possible to preferably increase the expectation of the player who expects the normal AT state to continue.

When the normal AT state continues, a victory effect or a draw effect is executed as a battle effect in the branch AT state. As a result, the player plays the game in anticipation of the execution of the winning effect or the draw effect, thereby improving the interest in the game. In addition, when the number of executions of the winning effect reaches the predetermined number of executions (12 times), the probability of AT continuation winning becomes the highest probability regardless of the probability of AT continuation winning at that time. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the execution of the winning effect.

In addition, since the victory effect is executed even when the normal AT state is continuous due to the number of remaining executions being 1 or more, the greater the number of times set as the number of remaining executions, the more the number of executions of the victory effect is predetermined. The degree of expectation, which is the number of executions, is increased. Therefore, if a large number of times is set as the number of remaining executions, not only the benefit of increasing the number of times in the normal AT state, but also the benefit of increasing the possibility of winning continuously at AT is increased. As a result, the advantage of setting a large number of times as the number of remaining executions is increased.

The number of wins notifying unit 69 notifies the number of times the winning effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the expectation that the number of executions of the winning effect will reach the predetermined number of executions.

Since the remaining execution count of the normal AT state is notified by the stock notification unit 68, it is possible for the player to recognize at least how long the normal AT state continues through the stock notification unit 68. It is possible to enhance the sense of superiority. In addition, the player himself/herself can recognize the degree of expectation that the number of executions of the winning effect will reach the predetermined number of executions in relation to the remaining number of executions ascertained by the stock notification unit 68 . As a result, it is possible to establish a close relationship between the normal AT state renso related to the remaining number of executions and the probability of winning the AT continuation lottery in the AT continuation lottery process. can be made synergistic.

When the number of remaining executions in the normal AT state is 1 or more, priority is given to the consumption of the remaining number of executions, and the AT continuation lottery process is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the normal AT state from continuing unnecessarily, as compared with the configuration in which the remaining number of executions is exhausted when the AT continuation lottery process fails to continue.

In the case where the normal AT state continues, the probability that the AT continuation lottery process will win the AT continuation lottery can be increased. As a result, when the normal AT state continues to occur, it is more likely to occur, and the advantage of the normal AT state continuing is increased. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of exhilaration when the normal AT state continues, and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

When AT continuation lottery processing results in AT continuation winning, AT continuation probability promotion lottery processing is executed, and the promotion winning increases the probability of AT continuation winning. As a result, the player's attention to whether or not the AT continuation lottery process will result in AT continuation winning is enhanced. Further, by executing the promotion lottery process for the AT continuation probability in this way, it is possible to set the probability of winning promotion in the promotion lottery process independently of the probability of winning AT continuation. This increases the degree of freedom in probability setting.

In the diverging AT state, since a battle effect corresponding to whether or not the normal AT state will occur in a row, it is possible to provide the player with a notification as to whether or not the normal AT state will continue in a row. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, when the victory effect is executed as the battle effect, there is a high possibility that the AT continuation lottery process will increase the probability of the AT continuation winning. As a result, the player plays the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the winning effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Winning performance or draw performance is executed as a battle performance by winning AT continuation in AT continuation lottery processing, and when winning performance is executed as the battle performance, promotion lottery processing of AT continuation probability is executed, and the promotion is performed. The probability of AT continuation winning is increased by winning the promotion in the lottery process. In this case, when a victory effect or a draw effect is executed as a battle effect, the consecutive games in the normal AT state are confirmed, so the player should play the game expecting that the victory effect or the draw effect will be executed. becomes. In addition, when the winning effect is executed out of the winning effect and the draw effect, the probability that the AT will continue to be won may be high, so the player expects that the winning effect will be executed further. A game will be played. As a result, it is possible to make the player's sense of expectation multi-staged, and to improve the interest of the game.

When the normal AT state continues to run because the number of remaining executions of the normal AT state is 1 or more, the promotion lottery process for the AT continuation probability is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of chances of setting a high probability of winning promotion in the promotion lottery process from increasing more than necessary.

Even if the AT continuation is not continued in the AT continuation lottery process, the normal AT state continues when the privilege points become equal to or higher than the privilege reference value in the situation where the defeat performance is executed in the subsequent branch AT state. . As a result, even if the privilege points cannot reach the privilege reference value or more before the end of the pre-branching AT state, the higher the privilege points, the more likely it is that the normal AT state will occur. , the degree of attention to the acquisition of privilege points is heightened.

Even if the AT continuation lottery process fails to continue the AT, the AT continuation lottery process is executed again after the continuous operation in the configuration in which the normal AT state continues due to the establishment of other continuation conditions. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing at which the series of games in the normal AT state will end, and it is possible to favorably maintain the player's sense of expectation in the normal AT state.

If the AT continuation lottery process fails to continue the AT, and the normal AT state continues due to the fulfillment of another continuation condition, and the AT continuation lottery process is executed, the AT continuation lottery process on the subsequent side can increase the probability of AT continuation winning. This makes it possible to increase the probability that the normal AT state will continue even if an event of AT continuation failure occurs in the AT continuation lottery process, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The probability of AT continuation winning in AT continuation lottery processing increases by winning continuation in AT continuation lottery processing, and the number of executions of winning effects is predetermined even if continuation winning does not occur in AT continuation lottery processing. The number of times of execution (12 times) is increased. As a result, in the AT continuation lottery process, the probability that the AT continuation will be won is high both in the case where the AT continuation is won and the normal AT state continues, and in the case where the AT continuation is lost and the normal AT state continues. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the normal AT state continuing, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Even if the privilege points are not equal to or higher than the privilege reference value and AT continuation lottery processing fails AT continuation, the normal AT state continues by winning the revival lottery in the revival lottery processing in the final chance state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode in which the normal AT state is repeated, and to provide many opportunities for the normal AT state to be repeated. In this case, the probability of winning a resurrection prize in the resurrection lottery process differs depending on the privilege points. As a result, even if the privilege points are less than the privilege reference numerical value, the privilege points affect the probability of being revived in the resurrection lottery process, and the degree of attention to the privilege points can be increased. In particular, the higher the value of the privilege points, the higher the probability of being revived. Therefore, even in a situation where the privilege points cannot exceed the privilege reference value, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the acquisition of privilege points.

Whether the normal AT state continues due to the AT continuation winning in the AT continuation lottery process, or the normal AT state continues due to the privilege points exceeding the privilege reference value, While the remaining privilege points are handed over to the normal AT state of the destination, the privilege point counter is cleared to "0" when the resurrection lottery process wins the resurrection lottery. This makes it possible to limit the benefits of acquiring privilege points to some extent. In addition, depending on the type of event that triggered Renso in the normal AT state, there are cases where the privilege points are inherited and cases where they are not inherited, and the manner in which the privilege points are inherited will be diversified. . Therefore, the mode of progress of the game is diversified in relation to the privilege points, and the interest in the game is improved.

The probability of winning a resurrection prize in the resurrection lottery process varies depending on not only the privilege points but also the winning combination in the corresponding game. As a result, points to be noted when executing the resurrection lottery process are diversified, and the interest in the game is improved.

If the extension opportunity is won in the final chance state, the final chance state is extended. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of disadvantage when the resurrection prize is not won in the resurrection lottery process in spite of winning the extension opportunity combination.

A transition to the normal AT state can occur based on the winning of the normal replay combination in the transition chance state. As a result, the player can play the game while expecting to win the normal replay combination in the transition chance state, thereby improving the interest of the game. In this case, if the expected degree-improving role is won in the transition chance state, the degree of expectation that the transition to the normal AT state will occur in the transition chance state increases. As a result, in the shift chance state, not only the normal replay combination but also the expectation improvement combination can be expected to be won, thereby diversifying the combinations expected to be won. Therefore, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

If the player wins the expected degree-improving role, the transition chance state is extended. As a result, when winning the expectation-improving combination, the expectation that the transition to the normal AT state will occur in the transition chance state increases. In addition, by winning the expected degree-improving combination and further winning the transition probability UP in the transition probability UP lottery process, the probability of winning the transition in the transition lottery process increases. As a result, when winning the expectation-improving combination, the expectation that the transition to the normal AT state will occur in the transition chance state increases.

The probability of winning the normal replay role is higher than the probability of winning the expectation improvement role. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency of winning the normal replay combination in the shift chance state, and to provide many opportunities to expect the shift to the normal AT state. In general, if the player wins a role with a low winning probability, an advantageous situation may occur for the player. , the degree of expectation for the transition to the normal AT state is high, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when winning the expectation-increasing role.

The normal replay combination serves as a trigger for transition to the normal AT state in the transition chance state, but does not serve as a trigger for transition to the normal AT state in other game states. As a result, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to winning the normal replay combination in the transition chance state. In addition, the expectation-level-improving hand does not serve as a trigger for transition to the normal AT state in the transition chance state, but serves as a trigger for transition to the normal AT state in other game states. As a result, it is possible to give the player the recognition that the expectation level-improving role is an advantageous combination, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to winning the expectation level-improving role.

When the first to third special replay combinations are won, or when the lottery process results in a loss, the start wait time is set at the end of the game, and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the next game is started. Wait. Then, when the start wait time is set, the bonus AT state is started. In this case, it is possible to emphasize the start of the bonus AT state through the setting of the start wait time. As a result, the player feels unexpected that the start wait time has been set, and the feeling of exhilaration at the start of the bonus AT state is heightened. On the other hand, during the bonus AT state, the player's attention is focused on finishing the game, so if the start wait time is set during the bonus AT state, the player may find it troublesome. On the other hand, since the start wait time is not set in such a situation, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring.

Also, even if the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination is won, the bonus AT state is not entered if the occurrence of the penalty event is being dealt with. If the start wait time is set in such a situation, the player may feel uncomfortable, but since the start wait time is not set in such a situation, to prevent such inconvenience from occurring. becomes possible.

When the first special replay combination is won or when the lottery process results in a loss, the freeze time is set at the start of the game. Then, when these lottery results are obtained, the start of the bonus AT state or the increase in the number of remaining sets of the bonus AT state is surely generated. As a result, the player can feel the unexpectedness of the setting of the freeze time and feel uplifted, and can stop the game while recognizing the result of the lottery. becomes. In addition, since such a freeze time function can occur regardless of whether it is in the bonus AT state, by setting the freeze time even in the bonus AT state, the function can be preferably generated. It becomes possible.

The main MPU 72 deliberately selects the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R should be stopped when the normal replay winnings occur regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The side MPU 82 executes control for notifying the selected stop order when the normal AT state continues. Then, in the main MPU 72, based on the match between the selected stop order and the actual stop order, the external output of the AT1 signal is set so as to correspond to the normal AT state. As a result, even if the sub-side MPU 82 independently manages the progress of the normal AT state, the sub-side MPU 82 does not need to transmit information to the main side MPU 72, and the normal AT state can be handled. It becomes possible to perform the external output setting in the main side MPU 72 .

When the main MPU 72 wins the normal replay combination, the main MPU 72 always executes the pressing order lottery process for selecting the stop order. As a result, there is no need to switch between a situation in which the pressing order lottery process is executed and a situation in which it is not executed, so that the processing configuration can be simplified.

The normal replay combination is the combination with the highest winning probability in the normal AT state. Then, by using this normal replay combination to grasp the normal AT state of Renso, when the normal AT state of Renso occurs, it becomes possible for the main side MPU 72 to quickly grasp it. .

The main side MPU 72 corresponds to the normal AT state for the external output of the AT1 signal when the phenomenon that the selected stop order and the actual stop order match when the normal replay combination is won occurs multiple times. output settings. This reduces the possibility that the output setting will be performed when the coincident event occurs by chance. In particular, the main side MPU 72 does not cause an event in which the selected stop order and the actual stop order do not match when the normal replay combination is won, and when the matching events occur multiple times, the above output setting is performed. Therefore, the possibility that the output setting will be performed when the matching event occurs by chance is greatly reduced.

The normal replay combination is a combination in which a prize is awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. . As a result, the player's profit does not change depending on whether or not the stop order has been notified, so that the stop order is less likely to be notified.

The stop order selected when the normal replay combination is won does not include the stop order for stopping the left reel 32L first. In a situation where the stop order is not notified, the player generally stops the left reel 32L first. It is possible to reduce the possibility of an event in which the selected stop order and the actual stop order coincide with each other.

The sub-side MPU 82 can notify a stop order different from the stop order selected by the main-side MPU 72 when winning a normal replay combination in a situation where a series of games in the normal AT state has not occurred. As a result, it is possible to positively prevent an event in which the selected stop order and the actual stop order coincide with each other when the normal replay combination is won. It is possible to improve the accuracy.

When the event that the selected stop order and the actual stop order match when the normal replay role is won occurs a plurality of times, the main side MPU 72 changes the external output of the AT1 signal to the normal AT state. In a configuration in which corresponding output settings are performed, the sub-side MPU 82 notifies a stop order different from the selected stop order when the matching event occurs once. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of notification of the stop order.

In each of the bonus AT state and the normal AT state, the processing load of the main MPU 72 is reduced by performing execution control of notification of the pressing order for generating the bell winning. In this case, the sub-side MPU 82 does not determine whether the bonus AT state or the normal AT state should end, but the main MPU 72 determines whether the bonus AT state ends. As a result, in the bonus AT state of the bonus AT state and the normal AT state, the main MPU 72 can set the end wait time for enhancing the performance effect, thereby reducing the processing load of the main MPU 72. While it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As for the bonus AT state, only the transition triggered by the result of the lottery process for the role occurs. Migration triggered by digestion also occurs. As a result, for the bonus AT state in which transition control is performed by the main side MPU 72, the transition pattern is limited to reduce the processing load of the main side MPU 72, while a plurality of types of transition patterns for the normal AT state are set. This makes it possible to diversify games.

More establishment patterns of continuation conditions are set in the normal AT state than in the bonus AT state. As a result, with respect to the bonus AT state in which continuous control is performed by the main side MPU 72, by limiting the pattern of establishment of the continuation condition, the processing load of the main side MPU 72 is reduced, while the pattern of establishment of the continuation condition of the normal AT state is reduced. By setting multiple types, it is possible to diversify the game.

In a configuration in which a bell prize is awarded when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a stop order corresponding to the winning combination when the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won, the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won. The AT1 signal is set to the ON state based on the fact that the main MPU 72 specifies that the bell has been won when the 2-bell combination is won. As a result, even if the sub-side MPU 82 independently manages the progress of the normal AT state, it is possible to set the output of the AT1 signal to the ON state without requiring transmission of information from the sub-side MPU 82 to the main side MPU 72. It is possible to do

The main MPU 72 sets the output of the AT1 signal to the ON state when the bell wins multiple times. This reduces the possibility that the output will be set to the ON state when a bell win happens by chance. In particular, the main MPU 72 performs the above-described output setting when the bell win occurs multiple times without the occurrence of an event in which the bell win does not occur even though the 1st bell win or the 2nd bell win has been won. This greatly reduces the possibility that the output setting will be performed when a bell prize is won by chance.

The stop order that enables the bell prize to be won when the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won does not include the stop order for stopping the left reel 32L first. In a situation where the stop order is not notified, the player generally stops the left reel 32L first, so the possibility of accidentally winning a bell prize is reduced by selecting the stop order as described above. can be reduced.

When the bell winning does not occur even though the first bell combination or the second bell combination is won, the main side MPU 72 sets the AT1 signal to the OFF state. As a result, the main MPU 72 may monitor whether or not the bell wins when the AT1 signal is set to the ON state or when the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state. This reduces the types of events to be monitored and reduces the processing load.

The number of occurrences of bell winnings, which triggers the setting of the AT1 signal to the ON state, is greater than the number of occurrences of out-of-order pressings when winning the bell combination, which triggers the setting of the AT1 signal to the OFF state. As a result, it is possible to set the AT1 signal to the ON state with high accuracy while enabling the AT1 signal to be set to the OFF state early when the normal AT state ends.

The winning combination to be monitored when the AT1 signal is set to the ON state and the AT1 signal to the OFF state is of two types, ie, the first bell combination and the second bell combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in setting the winning probability of each combination, and to generate many opportunities to perform each output setting.

When the winning state of the CB hand is maintained, the transition to the normal AT state occurs. As a result, it is possible to limit the period during which the transition to the normal AT state is possible in relation to the winning combination, and the player wins the CB combination and maintains the winning state of the CB combination. becomes. Therefore, it is possible to provide novel game contents.

In the CB state, medals (or virtual medals) possessed by the player do not increase. In this case, when the CB role is won, if the prize is generated, the state shifts to the non-favorable CB state, and if the prize is not generated, the shift to the normal AT state can occur. have a nature. As a result, it is possible to greatly differ the profit of the player depending on whether or not the CB winning is generated, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the winning state of the CB combination.

In the CB state, the number of medals (or virtual medals) possessed by the player does not increase, nor does it decrease. This makes it possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling of the player who has unintentionally caused the CB winning.

An internal state notification unit 63 is provided which is turned on when the CB combination is won. As a result, it is possible to urge the player not to win the prize when the CB combination is won.

In the configuration in which the AT1 signal is set to the ON state in the main MPU 72 when the normal AT state is entered and the AT2 signal is set to the ON state in the main MPU 72 when the bonus AT state is entered, the CB role is set to the ON state. , the internal state notification unit 63 is turned on before the ON state of the AT1 signal and the ON state of the AT2 signal are set. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the CB combination has been won before notifying the outside of the slot machine 10 .

When the CB combination is won, the internal state notification section 63 is turned on before the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the CB role has been won before the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is started in the game, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the CB winning.

When the conditions for shifting to the bonus AT state are met, or when a CB win occurs in the bonus AT state, the game content in the CB state is given priority, and the bonus AT state continues for the amount of the game executed in the CB state. It is treated as the consumption of the number of games. As a result, the player plays the game so as not to generate a CB win when the condition for transition to the bonus AT state is established or in the bonus AT state. Therefore, the stopping operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is carefully performed, and the interest in the game is improved. In addition, compared to a configuration in which the bonus AT state is simply invalidated, the bonus AT state and the CB-in-progress state can be associated with each other, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Even if the CB state ends, the bonus AT state is not immediately restored, but the bonus AT state is restored by winning the CB role. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not the CB combination is won after the end of the CB state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of games required until the winning state of the CB combination is reached is treated as the number of continuous games in the bonus AT state. As a result, after the end of the CB state, the game is played in anticipation of winning the CB role by the time the game for the number of continuous games in the bonus AT state is completed, and the amusement of the game is improved. .

<Second embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in the manner in which the AT1 signal is set when the AT1 signal is in the ON state and the state is shifted to the bonus AT state. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the AT1 signal and AT2 signal setting process executed by the main MPU 72 . This setting process is executed instead of the external output setting process (step S216) at the time of termination in the normal process (FIG. 11).

First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the condition for transition to the bonus AT state is established. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, it is determined in step S4102 whether or not the output state of the AT1 signal is ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4102, the midway transition flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" in step S4103. The halfway transition flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that the AT1 signal has transitioned to the bonus AT state in the ON state. After that, in step S4104, the output state of the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state. When a negative determination is made in step S4102, or when the process of step S4104 is executed, the output state of the AT2 signal is set to the ON state in step S4105.

If a negative determination is made in step S4101, it is determined in step S4106 whether or not the bonus AT state has ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4106, the output state of the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state in step S4107. In subsequent step S4108, it is determined whether or not the midway transition flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". If "1" is set, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state in step S4109.

If the process of step S4105 is performed, if the determination is negative in step S4106, if the determination is negative in step S4108, or if the process of step S4109 is performed, other processes are performed in step S4110. Run. In other processes, the processes of steps S3101 to S3114 and steps S3401 to S3404 in the first embodiment are executed. After that, the setting process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the AT1 signal is in the ON state and the transition is made to the bonus AT state, the AT1 signal set to the OFF state at the time of the transition to the bonus AT state is turned off at the end of the bonus AT state. It is set to the ON state again. When the normal AT state is shifted to the bonus AT state in the middle of the normal AT state, the remaining continuous game in the normal AT state at that time is held, and when the bonus AT state ends, the normal AT state is resumed from the remaining continuous game state. be. In this case, similar to the case of shifting from the non-AT state to the normal AT state, if the AT1 signal is set to the ON state on the condition that the bell winning has occurred multiple times, the bell winning will occur multiple times. There is a possibility that the remaining continuation game will be completed and the normal AT state will end without the AT1 signal being set to the ON state. On the other hand, in the situation where the bonus AT state ends and returns to the normal AT state as described above, by setting the AT1 signal to the ON state when the bonus AT state ends, the normal AT state after the return is restored. It is possible to have the AT1 signal set to the ON state by the time the state ends.

<Third Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in the form of the final chance state. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the final chance state setting process executed by the sub-side MPU 82. As shown in FIG. Note that the setting process is executed when shifting to the final chance state.

First, in step S4201, the value of the privilege point counter is grasped. In the following step S4202, the grasped benefit point counter value is set in the continuous game counter provided in the sub-side RAM84. The continuous game counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining continuous games in the final chance state in the sub-side MPU 82 .

After that, in step S4203, the resurrection lottery table corresponding to the value of the privilege point counter ascertained in step S4201 is read from the sub-side ROM83. The resurrection lottery table is set so that the higher the value of the privilege point counter, the higher the probability of winning the resurrection lottery process. After that, the final chance state setting process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, not only is the probability of winning a resurrection prize increased in the resurrection lottery process according to the value of the privilege point counter, but also the number of continuous games is set according to the value of the privilege point counter. As a result, the importance of the value of the privilege point counter is heightened, and expectations for winning the privilege lottery opportunity during the normal AT state are heightened.

Instead of setting the value of the privilege point counter to the continuous game counter as it is, the number of continuous games corresponding to the value of the privilege point counter may be set to the continuous game counter. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of levels are set according to the value range of the privilege point counter, and the number of continuous games corresponding to the level is set in the continuous game counter. Further, the number of continuous games corresponding to double the value of the privilege point counter, the number of continuous games corresponding to triple the value of the privilege point counter, or the number of continuous games corresponding to a predetermined integral multiple of four times or more may be set. good too.

<Fourth Embodiment>
The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the processing contents when the normal AT state ends. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing the end processing of the normal AT state executed by the sub-side MPU 82. As shown in FIG. Note that the termination process is executed when the final chance state is terminated without winning a resurrection win.

First, in step S4301, privilege point holding lottery processing is executed. In the holding lottery process, the holding lottery table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, the value of the sub-side lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is read. Collation is performed against the holding lottery table. The holding lottery table is set so that the winning lottery is held with a probability of 1/2, for example.

In subsequent step S4302, it is determined whether or not the result of the retention lottery process in step S4301 is retention winning. If the prize point counter is not held and won, the privilege point counter is cleared to "0" in step S4303, and then the end processing of the normal AT state is terminated. This end processing of the normal AT state ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the normal AT state ends with the number of remaining sets being "0", there is a possibility that the value of the privilege point counter will be carried over to the next normal AT state. As a result, when the normal AT state ends while the value of the privilege point counter remains to some extent, the next normal AT state will have a high degree of expectation for the series. In this case, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to continue playing the game.

It should be noted that the probability of holding winning in the holding lottery process may be changed according to the value of the privilege point counter. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the higher the value of the privilege point counter, the higher the probability of holding winning.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the setting process for this precursor executed by the sub-side MPU 82 is different from that in the first embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing the setting process for this precursor executed by the sub-side MPU 82. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S4401, lottery processing for the number of precursor games is executed. In the lottery process for the number of precursor games, the number lottery table for the number of precursor games corresponding to the current shift chance trigger is read from the sub-side ROM 83 . In the number-of-games lottery table of this omen, the correspondence relationship between each number of games in one game interval included in the range of 2 games to 32 games and the number-of-games lottery counter value is predetermined. The selection rate of each number of games differs depending on the type. Specifically, the larger the IV value corresponding to the current transition chance trigger role, the higher the selection rate of the number of long games. In the game number lottery process of the present omen, the value of the game number lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the game number lottery counter is used as the game number lottery of the above omen. Check against the table and read the current number of continuous games.

In the subsequent step S4402, it is determined whether or not the value of the portent game counter 84a is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S4402, it is determined in step S4403 whether or not the value of the ceiling remaining game counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 64 or less, which is the regulation reference number. If a negative determination is made at step S4403, at step S4404 the number of continuing games read out at step S4401 is set in the portent game counter 84a, and then this setting process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4403, then in step S4407 the number of continuous games read out in step S4401 is set in the stock game counter 84b, and then this setting process ends. The number of continuous games is set so long as the value of the stock game counter 84b does not exceed the upper limit number of games.

If a negative determination is made in step S4402, the current value stored in the portent game counter 84a is read out and the current value stored in the stock game counter 84b is read out in step S4405. In subsequent step S4406, the sum of the value of the portent game counter 84a, the value of the stock game counter 84b, and the number of main portent games selected by lottery in step S4401 exceeds 32, which is the maximum value of the number of continuous games. determine whether or not there is If it does not exceed 32 (step S4406: NO), in step S4407 the number of continuous games read out in step S4401 is added to the stock game counter 84b, and then this setting process ends.

If it exceeds 32 (step S4406: YES), in step S4408, the stock game counter 84b is overwritten with a value obtained by subtracting the value of the precursor game counter 84a from 32, which is the maximum number of continuous games. After that, the setting process is terminated. That is, the number of main precursor games selected by lottery in step S4401 is invalidated, and the number of continuous games derived by the arithmetic processing in step S4408 becomes the value of the stock game counter 84b.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, when the transition chance state ST16 is activated and won in the false portent state, the number of remaining games in the false portent state being executed and the transition to be executed after the termination of the false portent state are determined. The number of continuous games of the chance precursor state ST15 is determined so that the sum of the number of continuous games of the chance precursor state ST15 and the number of continuous games of the transition chance precursor state ST15 and the false precursor state is equal to or less than the upper limit number of games. This makes it possible to prevent the period during which the precursor state is being executed from becoming excessively long.

Further, when the transition chance state ST16 is activated and won in the false portent state, the number of games to be continued in the transition chance portent state ST15 is greater than the case where the transition chance state ST16 is activated and won in a situation other than the portent state. A shorter number of games is more likely to be selected. As a result, when the portent state is repeatedly executed, it is possible to reduce the number of games required from the start of the transition chance portent state ST15 to the start of the transition chance state ST16.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the process of updating the portent combination determination area 84c (steps S3908 to S3910) may be executed in the process of setting the portent combination. .

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the setting process for this precursor executed by the sub-side MPU 82 is different from that in the first embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing the setting process for this precursor executed by the sub-side MPU 82. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not the value of the portent game counter 84a is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, it is determined in step S4502 whether or not the value of the ceiling remaining game counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 64 or less, which is the regulation reference number. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4502, this setting process is terminated as it is. End the setting process.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4501, the stock game counter 84b is overwritten with a value obtained by subtracting the value of the portent game counter 84a from 32, which is the maximum number of continued games, in step S4504. After that, the setting process is terminated. That is, the number of continuous games derived by the arithmetic processing in step S4504 becomes the value of the stock game counter 84b.

In this embodiment, when the transition chance precursor state ST15 is started in a situation where the value of the transition chance remaining counter is 1 or more, the precursor game counter 84a is set to 32, which is the maximum number of continued games.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, when the transition chance state ST16 is activated and won in the false portent state, the number of remaining games in the false portent state being executed and the transition to be executed after the termination of the false portent state are determined. The number of continuous games of the chance precursor state ST15 is determined so that the sum of the number of continuous games of the chance precursor state ST15 and the number of continuous games of the transition chance precursor state ST15 and the number of continuous games of the false precursor state ST15 is the upper limit number of games. This makes it possible to prevent the period during which the precursor state is being executed from becoming excessively long.

Further, when the transition chance state ST16 is activated and won in the false portent state, the number of games to be continued in the transition chance portent state ST15 is greater than the case where the transition chance state ST16 is activated and won in a situation other than the portent state. A shorter number of games is more likely to be selected. As a result, when the portent state is repeatedly executed, it is possible to reduce the number of games required from the start of the transition chance portent state ST15 to the start of the transition chance state ST16.

Further, when the activation of the transition chance state ST16 is won in the false portent state, the sum of the number of remaining games in the false portent state being executed and the number of continuing games in the transition chance portent state ST15 to be executed thereafter is transferred. Since it is fixed to the upper limit number of games of the chance precursor state ST15, when the number of remaining games in the false precursor state is small and the transition chance state ST16 is activated and won, the transition chance precursor state ST15 with a large number of continuous games is generated. It is possible to

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the process of updating the portent combination determination area 84c (steps S3908 to S3910) may be executed in the process of setting the portent combination. .

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually or in combination with the configuration of the above-described embodiment.

(1) In the event that transition chance state ST16 is activated in a false portent state, the number of games to be continued in the false portent state is not changed, but the effects of each game during the false portent state can be changed. may be For example, regarding the effect contents of each game that have already been determined, the same character may be displayed while the display mode of the character is changed to display contents with a higher degree of expectation, or while the same background image is displayed. The display mode of the background image may be changed to display content with a higher degree of expectation. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a character appears additionally to the display content of each game that has already been determined. In this case, the additional characters are displayed while keeping the contents already determined except for the additional characters. By changing the contents of the presentation as described above when winning the chance role of the shift chance state ST16 during the false portent state, it is possible to raise expectations for the occurrence of the shift chance state ST16. In addition, since the number of continuous games is not changed and the effect content that has already been determined is not greatly changed, the processing load can be reduced.

A configuration may be adopted in which the change in the content of the effect as described above can occur even in the event that the false portent state is generated and won in the false portent state. In this case, when the content of the effect is changed, either the false omen state occurrence win or the shift chance state ST16 activation win is generated, so the player wins the shift chance state ST16 activation win. You will play the game while expecting something.

On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the change in the content of the effect as described above does not occur when the game is won in the false portent state. In this case, when the content of the performance is changed, it is confirmed that the transition chance state ST16 is generated and won.

(2) In the false portent state or the transitional chance portent state ST15, when the transitional chance trigger role is won, the color of the character or background already determined in the game is changed, the character is added, or the display content is changed. may be configured to generate a sound effect while maintaining the content that has already been determined. It is possible to make the player recognize that the transition chance trigger role has been won by generating an effect corresponding to winning the transition chance trigger role until the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped. becomes.

(3) In the false portent state, the lottery process for generating the false portent state may not be executed, the false portent state generation lottery process may not be executed, or even if the false portent state generation lottery is not won, it may be invalidated. . Even in this case, there is no need to adjust the contents of the effect of the false portent state or the number of continuous games during the game. However, even with this configuration, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the transition chance state ST16 can be activated and won in the false portent state.

(4) In a situation where the remaining number of ceiling games is equal to or less than the sum of the upper limit number of games to be continued in transition chance precursor state ST15 and false precursor state and the number of continued games in ceiling game precursor state ST13, false precursor state. , or even if it is won in a false premonitory state, it may be invalidated. However, even with this configuration, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the transition chance precursor state ST15 can be activated and won in the above situation.

(5) Also in the shift chance portent state ST15, the false portent lottery process (step S4002) may be executed when the shift chance trigger role is won. In this case, the execution of the false portent state is put on standby when winning the lottery in the false portent state lottery process, and when the shift chance state ST16 ends without shifting to the normal AT state ST12, it is put on standby. The configuration may be such that, while the false portent state is started, the waiting false portent state is invalidated when the transition chance state ST16 is shifted to the normal AT state ST12.

(6) Activation of the transition chance state ST16 in the false portent state When winning or the occurrence of the false portent state is won, the number of continuous games is not stocked, but corresponds to the number of winnings. A configuration in which the number of executions of the precursor state for each minute is stocked may be employed. In this case, when the number of executions of the false portent state is stocked, the execution of the transition chance portent state ST15 may be waited until the number of executions becomes "0". Conversely, even if the timing at which the execution count of the false portent state is stocked is earlier, when the transition chance portent state ST15 is stocked, the transition chance portent state ST15 is preferentially executed. It may be configured to be In this case, it is possible to generate the transition chance state ST16 early.

Even if the execution count of the precursor state is stocked as described above, only the role with the highest expected degree of expectation is preferentially stored as the transition chance triggering role that triggered the execution of the stock. The information on the low-side transition chance triggering combination may be deleted when the combination with high expectation is stored. In this case, when a plurality of times of execution of the portent state are stocked, the number of continuous games and the contents of the effect are determined in correspondence with one shift chance trigger role stored at that time.

(7) Even if the value of the stock game counter 84b is 1 or more, the precursory state may not start for a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) after the precursory state ends. In this case, it is possible for the player to clearly recognize that one precursory state and the next precursory state are different execution times.

(8) Activation of the transition chance state ST16 in the false portent state or generation of the false portent state If the player wins, the number of continued games of the transition chance portent state ST15 corresponding to the winning is the continuation of the ongoing false portent state. The number of games may be equal to or greater than the number of games, or the number of continuous games may be greater than the number of continuous games. In this case, when the precursory state occurs repeatedly, it is possible to give the player the impression that the precursory state is developing into something with a higher degree of expectation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(9) Activation of Transition Chance State ST16 in False Precursor State The number of continuous games in the transition chance premonition state ST15 executed based on winning is greater than or equal to the number of continued games in the ongoing false predictive state. On the other hand, the number of continuous games in the false precursory state that is executed based on the occurrence of the false precursory state in the false precursory state and the winning of the false precursory state is not equal to or greater than the number of continuous games in the ongoing false precursory state. good too. Conversely, the number of continuous games of the transitional chance state ST15 executed based on the fact that the transitional chance state ST16 is activated and won in the false portent state is the number of continuous games of the false portent state being executed. Occurrence of the false precursory state in the false precursory state The number of continuous games of the false precursory state executed based on winning is the number of continuous games of the false precursory state that is being executed. It is good also as a structure which does not become below. In the case of these configurations, when the precursory state occurs repeatedly, it is confirmed whether the number of continued games in the precursory state on the later side is greater than or equal to the number of continued games in the precursory state on the front side or less. Thus, it is possible to grasp whether or not the precursory state on the rear side is the shift chance precursory state ST15.

(10) In the case where the activation of the transition chance state ST16 is won in the false portent state, the transition chance trigger role that triggered the activation winning is more expected than the trigger role stored in the portent symbol determination area 84c. Even if the odds are low, it is possible to overwrite the area 84c for determining the portent combination with the transition chance trigger combination that has triggered the winning of the current activation.

(11) The number of cases where the transition chance state ST16 is activated or the occurrence of the false portent state is won in the false portent state is greater than the number of cases where the activation win or the occurrence of the false portent state is won in the non-false portent state. The number may be selected or may be easily selected. As a result, it is possible to generate an omen state with a higher sense of anticipation in the case of the activation winning or the generation winning in the false omen state.

(12) The degree of expectation is higher in the case of winning the activation of the transition chance state ST16 or the occurrence of the false portent state in the false portent state than in the case of the activation winning or the generation winning in the state not in the false portent state. A configuration may be adopted in which a sign state in which a high sign effect is executed occurs. As a result, it is possible to generate an omen state with a higher sense of anticipation in the case of the activation winning or the generation winning in the false omen state.

(13) The number of continuous games in which the transition chance state ST16 is activated or the occurrence of the false portent state is won in the false portent state is less than the case of the activation winning or the occurrence of the false portent state in the state without the false portent state. The number may be selected or may be easily selected.

(14) The degree of expectation is higher in the case of winning the activation of the transition chance state ST16 or the occurrence of the false portent state in the false portent state than in the case of the activation winning or the generation winning in the state not in the false portent state. A configuration may be adopted in which a precursor state in which a low precursor effect is executed occurs.

(15) Although the odds of winning are the same between the additional lottery process (step S1510) and the activated lottery process (step S1507), the number of executions of the transition chance state ST16 given when winning is greater than the additional lottery process. may be more likely to be greater than the activated lottery process. Even in this case, the additional lottery process is more advantageous to the player than the active lottery process. Further, the number of executions of the transition chance state ST16 selected when the activation lottery process is won is fixed to one, and the transition chance state ST16 which is selected when the addition lottery process is won is executed. The number of times may be configured to be two or more times.

(16) In the false portent state, when the transition chance state ST16 is activated and the execution of the transition chance portent state ST15 is stocked, the state in which the activation lottery process is executed is changed to the state in which the additional lottery process is executed. As a result, the number of executions of the transition chance state ST16 is likely to increase. Alternatively, the number of executions of the transition chance state ST16 may be difficult to increase, and the additional lottery process is not executed. As a result, the number of executions of the transition chance state ST16 may be prevented from increasing.

(17) Activation of the Transition Chance State ST16 in the False Precursor State If the player wins, the number of games from the start of the false precursor state being executed to the end of the transition chance precursor state ST15 is equal to the transition chance precursor state ST15. The configuration may be such that the number of games is within the upper limit number of games. In this case, it is possible to reduce the number of games required until the shift chance state ST16 starts in a configuration in which the precursor state is repeatedly executed.

(18) If a penalty event occurs in the AT preparation state, the penalty game may be added to the penalty counter. In this case, if the penalty event is repeated in the AT readiness state, the AT readiness state will continue.

(19) If a penalty event occurs in the ceiling game precursor state ST13, no penalty may occur in the ceiling game precursor state ST13. That is, in the above-described embodiment, when a penalty event occurs in the ceiling game precursor state ST13, the number of ceiling games continues to be consumed, and the additional lottery processing in the transition chance state ST16 is executed for winning of the transition chance trigger role. However, it may be configured such that no penalty is generated in the ceiling game precursor state ST13 by continuing the execution of the additional lottery process.

(20) A configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which the timing for issuing a penalty is differentiated depending on whether or not the penalty event occurred in a specific state. For example, in a pachinko machine, the occurrence of a stopping hit or vibration is set as a penalty event, and in a configuration in which the player's shooting is stopped as a penalty for the occurrence of the penalty event, the jackpot in which the opening and closing control of the big winning opening is executed When a penalty event occurs in the state, the shooting of the game ball may not be stopped in the big win state, but the shooting of the game ball may be stopped after the big win state ends.

(21) When the transition chance trigger role is won, the activation lottery process of the transition chance state ST16 is executed. , a configuration may be adopted in which a false precursor state is reliably generated.

(22) In place of the configuration in which the lottery processing for activating the transition chance state ST16 and the lottery processing for generating the false portent state are executed when the transition chance mechanism is won, the transition chance mechanism is won and the transition chance mechanism is selected. The lottery process for activating the shift chance state ST16 and the lottery process for generating the false portent state may be executed when a prize corresponding to is generated.

(23) The privilege that occurs after the end of the ceiling game precursor state ST13 and the privilege that occurs after the end of the transition chance precursor state ST15 are different. may be For example, regardless of whether the ceiling game precursor state ST13 or the transition chance precursor state ST15 ends, the transition chance state ST16 may occur, or the normal AT state ST12 may occur. good.

In addition, in the configuration in which the transition chance state ST16 occurs after the ceiling game precursor state ST13 ends, the number of ceiling games may be reset when the normal AT state ST12 occurs as in the above embodiment. The number of ceiling games may be reset when the shift chance state ST16 occurs.

(24) A configuration in which the same program is started and the lottery process for the number of continuous games is performed in a fixed manner regardless of whether the transition chance state ST16 is activated or the false portent state is generated and won in the portent state. may be In this case, if the number of continuous games corresponding to the result of the lottery is added to the stock game counter 84b while the lottery process for the number of continuous games is performed in a fixed manner, the value of the stock game counter 84b exceeds the upper limit number of games. , the value of the stock game counter 84b may be set to the value of the upper limit number of games.

(25) A configuration may be adopted in which the same program is started and the lottery process for the number of continued games is performed in a fixed manner regardless of whether the number of continued games is the transition chance portent state ST15 or the number of continued games of the false portent state. good.

(26) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the upper limit number of games to be continued in the transition chance portent state ST15 and the false portent state and the number of continuous games to be continued in the ceiling game portent state ST13 are the same. The number of games may be smaller or larger than the number of games of the latter.

(27) The production content that can be executed in the transition chance portent state ST15 and the false portent state is not limited to the configuration in which the performance content that can be executed in the ceiling game portent state ST13 is the same, and the transition chance portent state ST15. There may also be effects that are executed in the false portent state but not executed in the ceiling game portent state ST13, and are executed in the ceiling game portent state ST13 but in the transition chance portent state ST15 and the false portent state. There may be presentation contents that are not executed.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the effects that can be executed in the shift chance portent state ST15 and the false portent state do not match the effects that can be executed in the ceiling game portent state ST13. In this case, it is preferable that a false portent state corresponding to the shift chance portent state ST15 and a false portent state corresponding to the ceiling game portent state ST13 exist as the false portent state.

(28) The content of the effect that can be executed in the transition chance portent state ST15 and the content of the effect that can be executed in the false portent state are not limited to the same configuration. There may be performance contents that are not executed in the false portent state, and there may be performance contents that are executed in the false portent state but not executed in the transition chance portent state ST15.

(29) In the privilege point lottery process (steps S2002 and S2502), a value less than the privilege standard numerical value is selected when the privilege point is won. may be In this case, it is possible for the sub-side MPU 82 to identify the configuration for shifting to the added state or the establishment of the conditions for transition to the added state at the timing when a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference value is selected in the privilege point lottery process. By setting data, both the privilege points when winning the privilege point lottery process and the privilege points when winning the extra lottery process (step S2808) are added to the privilege point counter. WHEREIN: It becomes possible to correctly judge the transition conditions to an additional state.

(30) A sub-side RAM 84 is provided with a counter for the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state. A configuration may be adopted in which the privilege reference value is subtracted. In addition, in the case where an additional lottery process (step S2808) results in an additional winning, the added number of remaining sets is added to the remaining set number counter without adding the privilege points to the privilege point counter. good too. In this case, it becomes possible for the sub-side MPU 82 to grasp the number of remaining sets separately from the privilege points. When performing control, it is possible to have a processing configuration in which the remaining set number counter is referred to.

(31) The privilege reference value is not limited to "7" and is arbitrary. However, in the privilege point lottery process (step S2002, step S2502), the minimum value selected in the privilege point lottery process is set so that when the event of winning the privilege point occurs multiple times, the event of the privilege reference value or more occurs. It is preferable to set the value at least twice as large as the privilege points of .

(32) Instead of executing the privilege point lottery process (step S2002, step S2502) when winning the privilege lottery opportunity role, the privilege point lottery process is executed when the privilege lottery opportunity role is won and a prize is awarded. (Step S2002, Step S2502) may be executed. In this case, as the privilege lottery trigger role, the winning does not occur according to the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R or the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. may be included or not included.

(33) The privilege point counter may have a data capacity larger than 1 byte. Even in this case, in a configuration in which each counter is handled in units of bytes, the required storage capacity can be reduced by using the privilege point counters in common. For example, when the privilege points and the number of remaining sets of normal AT are managed by separate counters, if the privilege point counter is composed of 2 bytes and the counter of the number of remaining sets is composed of 1 byte, 3 bytes are required. However, it is possible to reduce by 1 byte by using a 2-byte privilege point counter in common.

(34) Instead of executing the privilege point lottery process (step S2002, step S2502) when winning the privilege lottery opportunity role, the privilege point lottery process is executed when the privilege lottery opportunity role is won. A configuration may be adopted in which the privilege points corresponding to the privilege lottery triggering role that is won without being selected are added to the privilege point counter. In this case, since the privilege point lottery process is not executed, the processing load is reduced, and the relationship between the privilege lottery opportunity and the privilege points is clarified, and attention is paid to the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in each game. is enhanced.

(35) If you win the privilege lottery trigger role, a lottery will be held to decide whether or not to add privilege points. It may be configured to be added to a counter. In this case, the relationship between the privilege lottery trigger role and the privilege points is clarified, and the degree of attention to the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in each game is increased.

(36) In place of the configuration in which the value of the privilege point counter used in common is separately set for the privilege point notification unit 67 and the stock notification unit 68, the value of the privilege point counter is directly sent to the predetermined notification unit It is good also as a structure alert|reported. In this case, by making it possible for the player to recognize the privilege points corresponding to the occurrence of one of the remaining sets, it becomes possible for the player to recognize the number of remaining sets from the value of the privilege point counter. It is possible to recognize the privilege points necessary for the number of times to be newly added once.

(37) When the normal AT state continues without passing through the final chance state, even if the value of the privilege point counter is less than the privilege reference value, the normal AT state of the successive residence is reliably carried over. In other words, the configuration may be such that the data is handed over when the handover condition is satisfied. For example, even if the value of the privilege point counter is less than the privilege reference value, it may be taken over in the case where the takeover lottery process executed during the above-mentioned normal AT state is successful. Also, for example, when the value of the privilege point counter is equal to or greater than the handover reference value, it may be configured to be handed over even if it is less than the privilege reference value.

(38) Even if the return to the normal AT state occurs in the final chance state, the privilege points less than the privilege reference value may be transferred to the normal AT state of the consecutive homes. In this case, it is possible to increase the chances that the privilege points become equal to or greater than the privilege reference value.

(39) A configuration may be adopted in which the value of the privilege point counter when the normal AT state ends is always carried over to the normal AT state to which a new shift condition is satisfied and the state is shifted to. In this case, it is possible to increase the chances that the privilege points become equal to or greater than the privilege reference value.

(40) In the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309), the AT continuation is lost and the value of the privilege point counter becomes equal to or greater than the privilege reference value during the period in which the defeat performance is executed as the battle performance. occurs, or if resurrection wins occur in the final chance state and a normal AT state renso occurs, the promotion lottery process at the time of resurrection is executed for the probability of AT continuation winning in the AT continuation lottery process. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning an AT continuation win becomes high when promotion wins in the promotion lottery process. In this case, the probability of winning promotion may be set higher than the probability of winning promotion in the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process (step S2316) that occurs when the AT continuation win is performed and the win effect is executed. good. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of AT continuation winning is likely to be higher in the case where resurrection winning is achieved in the final chance state. In these cases, the satisfaction of the normal AT state consecutive residence conditions is more likely to occur when the conditions set as the rear order are satisfied, so the player's expectations are high. can be kept high until the end of the normal AT state.

(41) A process of setting the AT continuation probability to the highest probability in relation to the win counter so that the normal AT state is more likely to continue when the normal AT state continues (step S2308) and sets the AT continuation probability. In addition to or instead of the configuration for executing the promotion lottery process (step S2316), there are a configuration that makes it easier to acquire privilege points, a configuration that increases the value of acquired privilege points, a configuration that makes it easier to acquire large privilege points, and a remaining By adopting at least one of a configuration in which the probability of adding the number of sets is increased and a configuration in which a large number of remaining sets is easily selected, the normal AT state continues in relation to the privilege points. It is good also as a structure which becomes easy.

(42) In the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309), when the AT continuation is lost but the normal AT state continues, the probability of AT continuation winning in the AT continuation lottery process executed thereafter is low. It is good also as a structure which can become low. In this case, it is possible to reduce the probability that the normal AT state will continue to exist while ensuring the chance of the normal AT state continuing.

(43) In the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309), the types of probability of AT continuation winning are not limited to 6 types and are arbitrary, and may be 2 types, 3 types, 4 types or 5 types. Well, it may be seven or more. However, it is preferable that there are three or more types of AT continuation winning probabilities in order to generate an opportunity to set the highest probability regardless of the probability of AT continuation winning.

(44) When the number of executions of the winning effect reaches a predetermined number of executions, the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) replaces the configuration in which the probability of winning the AT continuation is the highest probability, and the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process. In (step S2316), it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of levels is larger than that in the case of promotion winning. For example, in a configuration in which the probability of winning an AT continuation win is increased by one level when winning a promotion win in the promotion lottery process (step S2316) of the continuation probability of AT, when the number of executions of the winning effect reaches a predetermined number of times. , a configuration can be considered in which the probability of AT continuation winning is increased by two stages or more.

(45) The number of executions of the winning effect required to set the probability of winning the AT continuation high is not limited to 12 times and is arbitrary, and may be 1 time or 2 times. 3 times, 4 times, or 13 times or more. However, in order to raise the degree of attention to the number of executions of the winning effect, it is preferable that the number of times is two or more.

(46) Instead of the configuration in which the number of executions of the victory presentation is not transferred to the normal AT state that is shifted with the establishment of the next transition condition, the configuration may be such that it is surely transferred, or the configuration may be such that it can be transferred. As a configuration that can be handed over, a configuration in which a handover lottery process in which handover winning is performed with a predetermined probability may be executed, and a configuration that is handed over when the value of the privilege point counter is less than the privilege reference value but is equal to or more than the handover reference value. may be

(47) In order to execute the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process (step S2316), the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) is AT continuation winning, and the battle lottery process (step S2311) wins. Although it was necessary to be selected, instead of this, if the AT continuation win is won, the promotion lottery process (step S2316) may be executed without fail, and whether the AT continuation win is determined. Regardless, when the winning effect is executed, the promotion lottery process (step S2316) may be surely executed. Further, when the normal AT state continues, the promotion lottery process (step S2316) may be surely executed.

(48) The victory effect in the battle effect may be a victory that can be selected only when the value of the privilege point counter is equal to or greater than the privilege reference value, and the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309). It may be configured such that it can be selected only when In this case, in order to set the probability of AT continuation winning high in relation to the number of executions of the winning effect, it is necessary to generate many target conditions among the above conditions, and the probability of AT continuation winning It is possible to suppress the possibility that is set high.

(49) The configuration may be such that the probability that the winning effect is selected in the battle lottery process (step S2303, step S2311, step S2605) varies. For example, as the number of executions of the winning effect increases, the probability of selecting the winning effect may increase or decrease. In this case, depending on the number of times the winning effect is executed, the winning effect is likely to be selected or the winning effect is less likely to be selected. Alternatively, the higher the value of the privilege point counter, the higher or lower the probability of selection of the winning effect. In this case, it is possible to closely associate the privilege points and the winning effect. Further, the probability of selecting the winning effect may be increased or decreased as the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state increases. In this case, it is possible to closely associate the number of remaining sets with the winning effect.

(50) When the number of times the normal AT state has been set has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) due to the number of remaining sets of the normal AT state being 1 or more, the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of AT continuation winning increases (for example, the highest probability). In this case, the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state and the probability of winning AT continuation in the AT continuation lottery process are more closely related.

(51) Probability of AT continuation winning in AT continuation lottery processing (step S2309) according to the number of times the winning effect has been executed or the number of times the normal AT state has continued due to the number of remaining sets being 1 or more may increase stepwise. For example, when the number of times reaches the first reference number (for example, 3 times), the probability of AT continuation winning increases by one level, and when the number of times reaches the second reference number (for example, 5 times), the AT continues. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability set in relation to the reference number of times is different, such that the probability of winning is further increased by two stages.

(52) The stock notification unit 68 is configured to perform notification according to the number range of the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state. may be performed, or the number of remaining sets may be notified as it is.

(53) Even if the number of remaining sets is 1 or more, or if the AT continuation lottery process wins the AT continuation lottery process, once the normal AT state is completed once, the non-AT state is temporarily changed. After the transition, a new execution cycle of the normal AT state may occur again.

(54) A configuration may be adopted in which privilege points are not referred to when the resurrection lottery process is executed in the final chance state. In this case, in the resurrection lottery process, a lottery is made according to the lottery process result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) of the game. In this configuration, if the resurrection win is won in the final chance state, the privilege points may not be handed over to the normal AT state of the consecutive homes as in the above embodiment, or may be handed over.

(55) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which privilege points less than the privilege standard numerical value are referred to in the last chance state revival lottery processing (step S2907), in the AT continuation lottery processing (step S2309) The privilege points may be referenced, and the higher the privilege points, the higher the probability of winning the AT continuation. In this case, if the AT continuation lottery process wins the AT continuation lottery, the privilege point counter may be cleared to "0", and if it is not cleared to "0", the normal AT state of the consecutive residence will be taken over. It may be configured to be

(56) In the last chance state, instead of changing the probability of winning a resurrection win in the recovery lottery process (step S2907) according to the result of the game's lottery process (FIG. 12), the resurrection win is made according to the winning result. It is good also as a structure with which the probability of becoming fluctuates. In this case, prizes are awarded according to the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R or the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as a combination that varies the probability of winning the resurrection. It may be configured to include a combination that does not occur, or may be configured to not be included.

(57) The final chance state is configured to continue over a plurality of games (for example, 10 games). Accordingly, the probability of winning the resurrection lottery may vary in the resurrection lottery process (step S2907). For example, if the predetermined winning combination is won once or twice, the winning probability is set as the first winning probability, and if the winning combination is won three or four times, the winning probability is set as the second winning probability, which is higher than the first winning probability. can be considered. In this case, the player pays attention to the number of times a predetermined winning combination is won in the final chance state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

(58) The final chance state is configured to continue over a plurality of games (for example, 10 games), and points are added according to the result of the lottery process (Fig. 12) or the winning result in the final chance state. , the normal AT state may be continued according to the accumulated points. In this case, the addition of privilege points may be performed even in the final chance state, and the normal AT state may be continued when the privilege points become equal to or greater than the privilege reference value in the final chance state.

(59) The final chance state continues over a plurality of games (for example, 10 games), and the normal AT state changes depending on the number of times a predetermined combination is won or the number of times a predetermined combination is won in the final chance state. It is good also as a structure which carries out. In this case, the higher the number of executions of the monitoring event out of the number of winnings of a predetermined combination and the number of winnings of a predetermined combination, the higher the probability that the normal AT state will continue. A configuration in which the normal AT state continues in the case of the number of times or the maximum number of times may be adopted. In order for the player to be able to clearly recognize whether or not a monitoring event has occurred, the predetermined combination is preferably a combination that does not cause a so-called dropout, such as a normal replay combination. .

(60) In the transition chance state, the transition lottery process (step S1609) is executed when the normal replay combination is won, but the transition lottery process (step S1609) is executed when the other combination is won. It may be configured to be For example, it may be configured such that the shift lottery process (step S1609) is executed when the first bell combination or the second bell combination, which is a combination that does not result in a prize depending on the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, is won. Transition lottery processing (step S1609) when winning the first watermelon role or the second watermelon role, which is a role in which winning does not occur depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R ) may be executed. In addition, the transition lottery process (step S1609) may be executed regardless of which role is won, and in this case, the transition lottery probability may vary depending on the winning role. good.

(61) In the transition chance state, instead of executing the transition lottery process (step S1609) when the normal replay combination is won, the transition lottery process (step S1609) is executed when a normal replay win occurs. It may be configured to be

(62) In the transition chance state, when the expectation improvement role is won, the transition probability UP lottery process (step S1603) is executed and the transition probability UP lottery is won, so that the transition lottery process (step S1609) is won. Although the probability is set to be high, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the event that the expectation improvement role is won, the probability of winning the transition may be set high in the transition lottery process (step S1609). It may be configured to reliably occur.

(63) In the shift chance state, if the expectation-improving role is won, the number of games to be continued in the transition-chance state is surely extended. The number of continued games may be extended if the winning lottery process is executed. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of the number of continuous games are set, and the number of continuous games to be extended is selected from among them.

(64) A configuration may be adopted in which, when winning the expected degree-improving role in the shift chance state, the process of adding privilege points to the privilege point counter is executed. In this case, the privilege points may be transferred to the normal AT state on the condition that the transition to the normal AT state occurs in the transition chance state, and the transition to the normal AT state occurs in the transition chance state. A configuration may be adopted in which the privilege points are handed over to the next normal AT state regardless of whether or not the AT state has been completed.

(65) In the above embodiment, the bell win occurs three times and the AT1 signal is turned ON even though the penalty event has occurred and the AT state has not occurred, and furthermore, in that situation, the second special replay combination or the second When the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped in the game in which the 3 special replay combination is won, the start wait time is set in that game. In this case, instead of the image display device 66 displaying an image to the effect that the bonus AT state is started during the start wait time, the conditions for transition to the bonus AT state are satisfied in the penalty situation. The image display device 66 may display an image that allows the player to recognize that the player will be penalized and that no profit will be awarded. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a warning image for the penalty operation is displayed.

(66) In the bonus AT state, if the first to third special replay combinations are won in the lottery process (FIG. 12) or if the result is a loss, the start waiting time is not set in the bonus AT state. A configuration may be adopted in which the start wait time is set to be shorter than when the first to third special replay combinations are won in the lottery process (FIG. 12) in a situation in which there is no winning combination or when the result is a loss.

(67) In the bonus AT state, if the first special replay combination is won in the lottery process (Fig. 12) or if the result is a loss, not only the start wait time is not set, but also the freeze time is not set. may be As a result, it is possible to increase the speed at which the game is completed during the bonus AT state.

(68) Instead of the configuration in which the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state is added when the 1st to 3rd special replay combinations are won in the bonus AT state or the result is a loss, the bonus AT state A configuration in which the number of continuous games is extended may be adopted.

(69) In the added state, the push order selected by the main side MPU 72 is not reported when winning the normal replay. As a result, even when the AT state before branching immediately after the normal AT state has shifted to the additional state, there is an opportunity to turn the AT1 signal OFF and ON.

(70) When the normal AT state continues, the combination for which the main MPU 72 selects the push order for setting the AT1 signal to OFF and ON is not limited to the normal replay combination, and is not limited to other combinations. can be a role. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of winning combinations including a normal replay winning combination are targeted. However, the combination to be selected for the pressing order must be different from the combination for which the winning frequency is improved by notifying the stop order in the normal AT state and the bonus AT state. Further, it is preferable that the combination targeted for the selection of the pressing order is a combination that, if won, will result in a prize regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are pressed. It is preferable that a winning combination occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the position.

(71) In the pressing order lottery process (step S405) when the normal replay combination is won, the reel to be stopped first and the reel to be stopped second are selected from among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, the configuration may be such that only the first stopped reel is selected. Even in this case, by adopting a configuration in which the left reel 32L is not selected as the first stop, it is possible to reduce the possibility of accidental occurrence of the correct pressing order.

(72) When the normal replay combination is won, notification of the pushing order selected by the main side MPU 72 is performed when the normal AT state continues. It may be configured to be performed when In this case, the main side MPU 72 sets the AT1 signal to the ON state when the AT1 signal is in the OFF state and the pressing order is correct at the time of winning the normal replay combination. There is no need to set the signal to the ON state. In addition, when the AT1 signal is in the OFF state, the total number of times when the pressing order is correct at the time of winning the normal replay role and the number of times when the bell wins have become the reference number for setting the ON state. In this case, the AT1 signal may be set to the ON state. In this case, when the normal AT state is entered, the timing of setting the AT1 signal to the ON state can be advanced.

(73) Even in a situation where it is not necessary to set the OFF/ON state of the AT1 signal, until the value of the push order correct counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 becomes 1 or more, Instead of notifying a pressing order different from the pressing order, a configuration may be used in which the pressing order different from the pressing order is always notified in a situation where there is no need to set the OFF/ON state of the AT1 signal. In this case, it is possible to reduce the possibility of accidental setting of the OFF/ON state.

(74) When the normal AT state shifts to the bonus AT state, the output state of the AT1 signal is changed from the ON state to the OFF state. may be maintained at . This makes it possible for the hall computer HC of the game hall to recognize the number of times the normal AT state has been set.

(75) A configuration in which the AT2 signal is once set to the OFF state when one execution of the bonus AT state is completed even in the situation where the number of remaining sets of the bonus AT state is 1 or more as in the above embodiment. , there is a setting difference between the number of remaining sets selected when the condition for transition to the bonus AT state is satisfied and the number of remaining sets selected when the additional condition for the number of remaining sets is satisfied during the bonus AT state. It is good also as a structure with. In this case, the player can predict the setting value of the slot machine 10 by checking the third display portion DC3 of the data counter DC.

(76) When the condition for transition to the bonus AT state or the additional condition for the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state is satisfied, within the range of the number of remaining sets selected at one time, one execution of the bonus AT state ends ( Even if 30 games are completed, the AT2 signal may not be set to the OFF state. In this case, the third display portion DC3 of the data counter DC displays the total number of times that the condition for transition to the bonus AT state and the additional condition for the remaining set count of the bonus AT state have been met. In this configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which there is a setting difference between the transition condition and the additional condition. In this case, the player can predict the setting value of the slot machine 10 by checking the third display portion DC3 of the data counter DC.

(77) The AT1 signal may be set to the OFF state when a plurality of events in which no bell prize is won occur when the 1st bell combination or the 2nd bell combination is won. . In this case, the number of bell winning occurrences (number of times on the ON side) necessary for the AT1 signal to be set to the ON state may be greater than the number of times on the OFF side. may be the same, or the number of times on the OFF side may be greater than the number of times on the ON side.

(78) Various internal states may be notified using the internal state notification unit 63 by enabling the internal state notification unit 63 to display a plurality of types of luminescent colors. For example, the bonus AT state generated under the penalty situation may be notified separately from the CB internal post-state. In addition, in the case where a BB (big bonus) combination and an RB (regular bonus) combination exist in addition to the CB combination, the winning condition is maintained until a winning occurs when the winning condition is established. , the CB internal post-state, the BB internal post-state, and the RB internal post-state may be notified by the color of light emitted from the internal state notification unit 63 .

(79) Instead of the configuration in which the internal state reporting section 63 is integrated with the number-of-wins display section 62, a configuration in which the internal state reporting section 63 is integrated with the credit display section 61 may be employed. Further, the internal state notification section 63 may be provided separately from the win number display section 62 .

(80) The timing at which lighting of the internal state notification unit 63 is started when the CB internal post state is reached is not limited to before each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts rotating. The lighting may be started after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started and before the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated. The lighting may be started before the stop operation of the reel to be activated becomes possible.

(81) If a CB win occurs when shifting to the bonus AT state, the transition to the bonus AT state may be disabled.

(82) When transitioning to the bonus AT state, or when a CB win occurs while the bonus AT state is being executed, the number of games played during the CB state is subtracted from the number of games continued in the bonus AT state. Although it is subtracted, the number of games played after the end of the CB state and before the state after the CB is entered may not be subtracted from the number of continuous games.

(83) When the first to third special replay roles are won and the wait time is set, the wait time is set at the start of the game next to the winning game. It may be configured to be set at the end of the winning game.

(84) The setting of the AT1 signal to the ON state and the setting of the AT2 signal to the ON state may be performed at the start of the next game after the game in which the setting conditions for the ON state have been established. . In either case, the setting of the AT1 signal to the OFF state and the setting of the AT2 signal to the OFF state may be performed at the end of the game when the conditions for setting the OFF state are satisfied.

(85) In the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309), the probability of AT continuation winning may be reported, or an effect may be executed to allow the probability to be predicted.

(86) In the above embodiment, the privilege of paying out medals is given when a small winning combination is established. I wish I had. For example, it may be configured such that prizes other than medals are paid out when a minor win is established. In addition, in a slot machine that does not have actual medal insertion and medal payout functions and that manages the medals owned by the player as credits, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the granting of benefits.

(87) The present invention may be applied to so-called A-type slot machines, B-type, C-type, combination of A-type and C-type, combination of B-type and C-type, as well as RT games and CT machines. The present invention may be applied to any slot machine, such as a type equipped with games.

(88) The symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, letters, etc., and may be geometric lines, graphics, and the like. Also, it is possible to compose a pattern with light, color, etc., and a pattern can be configured with a three-dimensional shape, etc., or a composite of these can compose a pattern. In other words, the pattern may be anything as long as it functions as identifiable information.

(89) In each of the above-described embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 was shown, but it may be applied to a pachinko machine, and applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. good too.

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. When the first privilege numerical value condition is satisfied (that privilege points are won in privilege point lottery processing), privilege numerical value information (privilege points) corresponding to a value smaller than the privilege reference value is stored in privilege storage means (sub-side RAM 84). a first storage execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2005, S2007, S2011 and S2504 in the sub-side MPU 82) stored in a privilege point counter);
When the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference value, a predetermined privilege granting means (in the sub-side MPU 82) for granting a predetermined privilege advantageous to the player a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2301 and executing subsequent processing, and a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2609 in the sub-side MPU 82 and executing subsequent processing;
When the second privilege numerical condition is satisfied (the bonus AT state is started, and the additional winning is won in the additional lottery process), the information corresponding to the privilege reference value x n (n is an integer of 1 or more) a second storage execution means (function for executing the processes of steps S1904, S2405, S2804, S2810 and S2904 in the sub-side MPU 82) to store in the privilege storage means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature A1, regarding the provision of the predetermined privilege, the predetermined privilege is granted based on the fact that the stored privilege numerical value information is accumulated when the first privilege numerical condition is satisfied and becomes information equal to or greater than the privilege reference value. There are cases where the predetermined privilege is granted based on the fact that the second privilege numerical condition is satisfied. As a result, the manner in which the predetermined privilege is given is diversified, and the interest in the game is enhanced.

In this case, when the second privilege numerical value condition is satisfied, information corresponding to the privilege reference value xn is stored in the privilege storage means instead of storing the number of times the predetermined privilege is granted. As a result, the privilege storage means can be used in common in the configuration for diversifying the modes of granting the predetermined privilege as described above. Therefore, it is possible to aggregate the storage means to be referred to when determining whether or not to give the predetermined privilege, thereby reducing the processing load at the time of the determination. Also, it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity. As described above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature A2. A privilege number lottery means (a function of executing the process of step S2002 in the sub-side MPU 82) for determining the privilege number information to be stored by the first storage execution means by a privilege number lottery process. The gaming machine according to feature A1.

According to feature A2, it is possible to diversify the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means when the first privilege numerical condition is satisfied, and the first privilege numerical condition is satisfied and the privilege numerical value information is accumulated. Diversification is achieved in the case where a predetermined privilege is given by

As a more specific configuration of feature A2, "there are a plurality of types of the privilege numerical value information selected in the privilege numerical lottery process, and the privilege numerical value information has a value smaller than the privilege reference value. is”.

Feature A3. When the predetermined privilege granting means grants the predetermined privilege, grant time updating means for updating the privilege storage means so that the privilege reference value is subtracted (processing of steps S2302 and S2604 in the sub-side MPU 82 A gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to feature A3, in the configuration in which the privilege storage means is commonly used both when the first privilege numerical condition is satisfied and when the second privilege numerical condition is satisfied, the privilege when the predetermined privilege is granted It is possible to standardize the handling of numerical information. This reduces the processing load.

Feature A4. A numerical value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means is a numerical value larger than the privilege reference value x (n-1) and smaller than the privilege reference value x n (n is an integer equal to or greater than 1). Privilege value notification means (privilege point notification unit 67, function of executing step S2204 in sub-side MPU 82) for announcing information corresponding to a numerical value exceeding the above-mentioned privilege reference value x (n-1) under the circumstances The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, comprising:

According to feature A4, it is possible for the player to recognize that the bonus numerical value information is not enough to give the predetermined bonus. It is possible to play the game while clearly recognizing whether the As a result, it is possible to preferably increase the player's sense of expectation.

Feature A5. a division executing means (a function of executing the process of step S2201 in the sub-side MPU 82) that divides the numerical value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means by the privilege reference value;
The gaming machine according to feature A4, wherein the privilege numerical value notification means notifies information corresponding to the numerical value of the remainder of the division result of the division execution means.

According to feature A5, in the configuration in which the privilege storage means is used in common both when the first privilege numerical condition is satisfied and when the second privilege numerical condition is satisfied, the predetermined privilege is given as the privilege numerical value information. It becomes possible to derive the numerical value for the part less than , with a simple processing configuration.

Feature A6. A situation where the numerical value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means is equal to or greater than the privilege reference value x n and is smaller than the privilege reference value x (n+1) (where n is an integer equal to or greater than 1). any of the features A1 to A5, characterized in that it has privilege number reporting means (the function of executing the processing of step S2203 in the stock reporting unit 68 and the sub-side MPU 82) for reporting information corresponding to the n 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to feature A6, it is possible for the player to recognize the number of times the predetermined privilege is given, and it is possible to favorably enhance the player's sense of superiority.

Feature A7. a division executing means (a function of executing the process of step S2201 in the sub-side MPU 82) that divides the numerical value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means by the privilege reference value;
The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the privilege frequency reporting means reports information corresponding to the numerical value of the quotient of the division result of the division executing means.

According to feature A7, in the configuration in which the privilege storage means is commonly used both when the first privilege numerical condition is satisfied and when the second privilege numerical condition is satisfied, the number of times the predetermined privilege is granted is simplified. It can be derived by the processing configuration.

Feature A8. The first privilege numerical condition is established in a game state (normal AT state) corresponding to the first privilege,
As a result of the processing of storing the privilege numerical value information in the privilege storage means by the first memory executing means in the game state corresponding to the first privilege, the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means is the privilege. When the information is equal to or greater than the reference numerical value, means for shifting to a game state (additional state) corresponding to the second privilege in which the second privilege numerical condition can be established (steps S2104 to S2107 in the sub-side MPU 82 are executed) and a function of executing the processing of steps S2611 to S2614 in the sub-side MPU 82).

According to feature A8, there are a game state in which the first bonus numerical condition can be satisfied and a game state in which the second bonus numerical condition can be satisfied, thereby diversifying the game states. Further, when the privilege numerical value information becomes information equal to or greater than the privilege reference value in the game state corresponding to the first privilege, the game state shifts to the game state corresponding to the second privilege, so both game states can be closely related.

Feature A9. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The pattern display means is operated such that the variable display of the pattern is started when the starting operation means is operated, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. Variable display control means for controlling (function for executing reel control processing in main side MPU 72);
with
At least one of the first bonus numerical condition and the second bonus numerical condition is the result of a lottery process executed when the starting operation means is operated, or winning after the variable display of the pattern is stopped. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, which is established according to a result.

In the gaming machine having the feature A9, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature A10. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for the pattern,
A plurality of stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display part of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts the variable display of the pattern on the plurality of variable display portions based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
The game machine is
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a prize corresponding award means (a prize determination in the main side MPU 72) that gives a prize corresponding to the player based on the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process is displayed. function to perform processing) and
with
As a combination to be selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order-corresponding combination (a first bell combination and a second bell combination) that enables a prize to be awarded when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. and
The feature A9, characterized in that the predetermined privilege enables execution of the game in a game state (normal AT state) in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding combination is obtained. game machine.

In the game machine having the feature A10, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I16, features J1-J13, features K1-K11, features L1-L9, features M1-M10, features N1-N13, features O1-O38, features P1-P25, features Q1-Q20, features R1-R11, features S1- Any one or more of S3, features T1 to T4, features U1 to U6, and features V1 to V11 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. When a privilege numerical value condition is satisfied (a privilege point is won in a privilege point lottery process), a storage execution means (sub a function of executing the processes of steps S2005, S2007, S2011 and S2504 in the side MPU 82;
Privilege standard determination means (step S2301 in the sub-side MPU 82) that determines whether or not the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the privilege standard numerical value when a judgment trigger occurs. and a function to execute the processing of step S2609);
Predetermined privilege granting means (step in sub-side MPU 82) for granting a predetermined privilege advantageous to the player when the privilege criterion determination means determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege criterion numerical value a function of making an affirmative determination in S2301 and executing subsequent processing, and a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2609 in the sub-side MPU 82 and executing subsequent processing;
with
A gaming machine characterized in that the privilege numerical value information in the privilege storage means corresponding to a value less than the privilege reference value can be taken over even after the judgment trigger.

According to the characteristic B1, when the privilege numerical condition is established, the stored privilege numerical value information becomes information corresponding to a value equal to or larger than the privilege reference value, and the predetermined privilege is granted. The game is played while expecting that the condition will be established, and the game is played while expecting that the privilege numerical value information will be information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference value. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In this case, the privilege numerical value information corresponding to the value less than the privilege reference value can be inherited even after the judgment trigger. As a result, there are more opportunities for the numerical benefit information to correspond to a value greater than or equal to the standard numerical value for benefits. It is possible to generate more. As described above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as the privilege numerical value condition, "in a configuration provided with privilege number lottery means for executing privilege number lottery processing (function for executing privilege point lottery processing in sub-side RAM 84), it is possible to win in the privilege number lottery process. "That" is the condition. Further, it may be configured such that "the privilege numerical value information determined by the privilege numerical value lottery process is stored in the privilege storage means".

Feature B2. The feature B1 is characterized in that the storage executing means causes the privilege storage means to store privilege numerical value information corresponding to a value smaller than the privilege reference value when the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied. game machine.

According to the characteristic B2, by accumulating the privilege numerical value information acquired when the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied, the privilege numerical value information corresponding to the privilege reference value or more can be obtained. Thus, in order to obtain privilege numerical value information corresponding to the privilege reference value or more, it is necessary to satisfy the privilege numerical value condition a plurality of times, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation step by step.

Feature B3. The privilege numerical condition is a configuration that is established in a privilege-compatible game state (normal AT state),
A configuration in which one execution of the game state corresponding to the privilege is completed after the judgment trigger is reached,
Characteristic B1 or B2, characterized in that the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means in the privilege-compatible game state of a predetermined execution time can be handed over to the privilege-compatible game state in the next execution time. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature B3, since the bonus numerical value information acquired in one execution of the bonus game state can be inherited to the bonus game state in the next execution, it is acquired just before the bonus game state ends. It is possible to enjoy the benefits even if the privilege numerical information is given. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the bonus numerical condition will be satisfied at any timing of the game state corresponding to the bonus.

Feature B4. When the continuation condition is satisfied, after one execution of the game state corresponding to the privilege is completed, a new execution of the game state corresponding to the privilege is started,
When the continuation condition is satisfied and the game state corresponding to the privilege is continued, the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means is handed over to the game state corresponding to the privilege after continuation. The gaming machine described in B3.

According to the feature B4, when the game state corresponding to the privilege is repeated, the benefit numerical information is taken over to the game state corresponding to the privilege after the continuation, so that the profit is increased when the game state corresponding to the privilege is repeated. It is possible to increase the expectation that the game state corresponding to the privilege will continue.

Feature B5. The game state corresponding to the privilege is a game state in which the degree of expectation for the provision of game media is higher than a predetermined game state,
When the privilege reference determining means determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference numerical value, the predetermined privilege granting means determines that the continuation condition is satisfied, and executes the game state corresponding to the privilege once. The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein a new execution cycle of the game state corresponding to the privilege is started after the end of the game.

According to the feature B5, since the privilege numerical value information becomes information corresponding to the privilege reference value or more, the game state corresponding to the privilege continues, so that the game is played while expecting the privilege numerical condition to be satisfied. It will happen.

Feature B6. Characteristic B5, characterized in that, as the continuation condition, there is a condition different from a condition that the privilege criterion determination means determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege criterion numerical value. game machine.

According to the feature B6, even if the privilege numerical value information does not correspond to the privilege reference value or more, if another continuation condition is satisfied, the privilege-compliant game state can continue. It is possible to provide many opportunities for people to stay together. In addition, even if other conditions for continuation are satisfied and the game state corresponding to the privilege continues to be played, the numerical value information of the reward is inherited to the game state corresponding to the privilege after the continuation, so the gaming state corresponding to the privilege does not continue. It is possible to provide many opportunities for consecutive residences.

Feature B7. Even if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means can be inherited to the gaming state corresponding to the privilege generated by a new start opportunity. The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B6.

According to feature B7, it is possible to provide many opportunities for the benefit numerical information to be handed over.

Feature B8. If the continuation condition is not met, the handover lottery means (the process of step S4301 in the sub-side MPU 82) determines whether or not to store and hold the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means by the handover lottery process. function to execute).

According to feature B8, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the privilege numerical information is handed over.

Feature B9. The probability that the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means is information corresponding to a large value is higher than information corresponding to a small value to be handed over after the judgment opportunity. The game machine according to any one of the characterizing features B1 to B8.

According to feature B9, even if the benefit numerical value information corresponding to less than the benefit reference value is used as the judgment trigger, the probability that the value of the benefit value information at that time is large is taken over rather than the case that it is small. Therefore, it is advantageous to set the numerical value of the privilege numerical information as large as possible. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the privilege numerical condition is satisfied.

Feature B10. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The pattern display means is operated so that the variable display of the pattern is started when the starting operation means is operated, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. Variable display control means for controlling (function for executing reel control processing in main side MPU 72);
with
Characteristic B1, wherein the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied according to the result of a lottery process executed when the starting operation means is operated, or the winning result after the variable display of the pattern is stopped. The game machine according to any one of B9.

In the gaming machine having the feature B10, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

Feature B11. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display part of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts the variable display of the pattern on the plurality of variable display portions based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
The game machine is
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a prize corresponding award means (a prize determination in the main side MPU 72) that gives a prize corresponding to the player based on the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process is displayed. function to perform processing) and
with
As a combination to be selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order-corresponding combination (a first bell combination and a second bell combination) that enables a prize to be awarded when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. and
The gaming machine according to feature B10, wherein the predetermined privilege enables execution of a game in a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order-corresponding combination is obtained.

The gaming machine having the feature B11 can achieve the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features B1 to B11, features A1 to A10, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I16, features J1-J13, features K1-K11, features L1-L9, features M1-M10, features N1-N13, features O1-O38, features P1-P25, features Q1-Q20, features R1-R11, features S1- Any one or more of S3, features T1 to T4, features U1 to U6, and features V1 to V11 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. Advantageous transition means (steps S1614 to S1617 in the sub-side MPU 82, and steps S1709 to step function to execute the processing of S1712);
Continuous lottery execution for executing continuous lottery processing for determining whether or not a new execution round of the advantageous game state is to be started after one execution round of the advantageous game state is completed when a continuation lottery opportunity is reached. means (function for executing the process of step S2309 in the sub-side MPU 82);
When the continuation lottery process is out of continuation, a predetermined transition means (function of executing the processing of step S2913 in the sub-side MPU 82) to shift to the predetermined game state after the lapse of the period after continuation out of continuation;
Advantageous continuation means (function for executing pre-branch AT state setting processing in the sub-side MPU 82) for starting a new execution round of the advantageous gaming state when a continuation condition is satisfied in the post-continuation failure period;
with
The continuation lottery execution means re-executes the continuation lottery process after the continuation condition is satisfied and a new execution round of the advantageous gaming state is started in the middle of the post-continuation failure period. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature C1, not only is the advantageous gaming state continued in the case of winning continuation in the continuation lottery process, but it is also advantageous when the continuation condition is established in the period after continuation failure in the case of continuation failure. The game state continues. As a result, it is possible to diversify the modes in which the advantageous game state continues to occur, and it is possible to preferably increase the expectation of the player who expects the advantageous game state to continue.

In addition, even if the continuation lottery process is once discontinued, if the continuation condition is met during the continuation dissatisfaction period after that and the advantageous gaming state continues, the continuation lottery process will be executed again. Granted. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing at which the consecutive games in the advantageous game state will end, and it is possible to preferably maintain the player's sense of expectation in the advantageous game state. As described above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

It should be noted that one execution of the advantageous game state may be terminated when an end condition is established, and the end condition is defined as one game in which variable display of patterns on the pattern display means is started and ended. In this case, a predetermined number of games may be completed, or the end lottery process may result in a winning end.

In addition, the post-continuity period may be a period during which a predetermined plurality of games are executed when the start and end of the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means is regarded as one game. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which an effect indicating that it is a period is executed by the effect executing means.

Feature C2. Probability improving means for increasing the probability of winning a continuation lottery in the continuation lottery process (a function of executing the processing of steps S2308 and S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82),
When the continuation condition is satisfied in the middle of the post-continuation failure period and a new execution round of the advantageous gaming state is started, the probability improving means until the continuation lottery process is executed again after that The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that the probability of winning the continuation can be increased.

According to the feature C2, when the continuation condition is satisfied during the continuation failure period and the advantageous gaming state continues, not only is the opportunity to execute the continuation lottery process again provided, but also the continuation lottery is executed again. The probability of winning continuously in the process can be increased. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's profit when the continuation condition is met during the continuation failure period.

Feature C3. Characteristic feature C2, characterized in that the probability improving means sets the probability of the continuous winning to the maximum probability when the execution times of the advantageous gaming state are repeated and the maximum probability setting condition is satisfied. game machine.

According to the feature C3, the advantageous game state continues to be more advantageous for the player. As a result, the benefit of being given another opportunity to execute the continuation lottery process is increased, and it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation even during the continuation failure period.

It should be noted that there may be three or more types of probabilities of being continuously elected.

Feature C4. The probability improving means is
A first probability improving means (a function of executing the process of step S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82) that can increase the probability of winning the continuous winning when the continuous winning is achieved in the continuous lottery process;
Second probability improving means for increasing the probability of winning the continuation winning under at least one condition that the continuation of a new execution round in the advantageous gaming state occurs even if the continuation lottery process fails to continue. (the function of executing the process of step S2308 in the sub-side MPU 82);
The gaming machine according to feature C2 or C3, comprising:

According to the feature C4, in both the case where the winning is continued in the continuation lottery process and the advantageous gaming state continues, and the case where the continuation condition is satisfied and the advantageous gaming state continues even though the continuation is not continued. , the probability of being continuously elected in the continuous lottery process can be increased. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the advantageous game state will continue.

Feature C5. The gaming machine according to feature C4, wherein the second probability improving means increases the probability of winning continuously more than the first probability improving means.

According to the feature C5, it is possible to increase the profit when the continuation condition is satisfied and the advantageous gaming state continues even though the continuation failure period has come.

Feature C6. Provided with a specific storage means (privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84) that stores information that can specify the number of remaining executions of the advantageous gaming state,
When the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times, a new execution time of the advantageous game state is started without executing the continuous lottery process. The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized in that

According to the characteristic C6, when the number of remaining executions is 1 or more, the completion of the consecutive games in the advantageous gaming state is prioritized over the continuous lottery process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advantageous game state from continuing unnecessarily, as compared with the configuration in which the remaining number of executions is exhausted when the continuation lottery process fails to continue.

Feature C7. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the continuation condition is that the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution counts.

According to the characteristic C7, it is possible to cause the event of the occurrence of consecutive games in an advantageous gaming state after the start of the post-continuation failure period while using the information indicating the number of remaining executions.

Feature C8. When the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied (the privilege point is won in the privilege point lottery process), the memory executing means (steps S2005 and S2007 in the sub-side MPU 82) stores the privilege numerical information (privilege point) in the specific storage means. , a function of executing the processes of steps S2011 and S2504);
Privilege standard determination means (step S2301 in the sub-side MPU 82) that determines whether or not the privilege numerical value information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the privilege standard numerical value when the judgment trigger occurs. and a function to execute the processing of step S2609);
with
When it is determined by the privilege standard determination means that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege standard numerical value, a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is started without executing the continuous lottery process. and
The gaming machine according to feature C7, wherein the continuation condition is that the privilege numerical value information stored in the specific storage means becomes information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference value.

According to feature C8, even if the privilege numerical value information does not correspond to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference numerical value by the time the judgment is triggered, the privilege numerical value information becomes equal to or greater than the privilege reference numerical value in the period after the continuation failure. By providing the corresponding information, the advantageous game state will continue. As a result, it is advantageous for the player to increase the value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information until the judgment trigger is reached, so that the privilege numerical value information has a larger value until the judgment trigger. The game is played while expecting the game, and the interest in the game is improved.

Feature C9. Any one of the characteristics C1 to C8, characterized in that, when the winning is continued in the continuous lottery process, a new execution round of the advantageous gaming state is started after the continuation post-winning period elapses. The game machine described.

According to the feature C9, it is possible to teach the player that the winning has been continued.

The post-continuation win period may be a period during which a predetermined plurality of games are executed when the start and end of the variable display of patterns on the pattern display means is regarded as one game. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which an effect indicating that it is a period is executed by the effect executing means.

Feature C10. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The pattern display means is operated so that the variable display of the pattern is started when the starting operation means is operated, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. Variable display control means for controlling (function for executing reel control processing in main side MPU 72);
with
The continuation condition is satisfied according to the result of a lottery process executed when the starting operation means is operated, or the winning result after the variable display of the pattern is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of C9.

In the gaming machine having the feature C10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature C11. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for the pattern,
A plurality of stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display part of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts variable display of patterns on the plurality of variable display portions based on the operation of the start operation means, and controls the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
The game machine is
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a prize corresponding granting means (prize determination in the main side MPU 72) that gives a prize corresponding to the player based on the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process is displayed. function to perform processing) and
with
As a combination to be selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order-corresponding combination (a first bell combination and a second bell combination) that enables a prize to be awarded when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. and
The gaming machine according to feature C10, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order-corresponding combination is achieved.

In the gaming machine having the feature C11, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features C1 to C11, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I16, features J1-J13, features K1-K11, features L1-L9, features M1-M10, features N1-N13, features O1-O38, features P1-P25, features Q1-Q20, features R1-R11, features S1- Any one or more of S3, features T1 to T4, features U1 to U6, and features V1 to V11 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. Advantageous transition means (steps S1614 to S1617 in the sub-side MPU 82, and steps S1709 to step function to execute the processing of S1712);
Continuous lottery execution for executing continuous lottery processing for determining whether or not a new execution round of the advantageous game state is to be started after one execution round of the advantageous game state is completed when a continuation lottery opportunity is reached. means (function for executing the process of step S2309 in the sub-side MPU 82);
Probability improvement means for increasing the probability of winning continuously under at least one condition that the continuation of a new execution round of the advantageous gaming state occurs (function for executing the processing of steps S2308 and S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82 )When,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature D1, when the continuous lottery process results in continuous winning, the advantageous gaming state continues. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, when the advantageous gaming state continues, the probability of winning a continuous winning in the continuous lottery process can be improved. As a result, when the advantageous game state continues to occur, the occurrence of the consecutive game becomes more likely, and the advantage of the advantageous game state to occur in succession is increased. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's exhilaration when the advantageous game state continues. As described above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the probability improving means increases the probability of the continuous winning under at least one condition that the continuous winning is achieved in the continuous lottery process.

According to the feature D2, the probability of winning the continuous lottery is increased by winning the continuous lottery in the continuous lottery process. As a result, the player's attention to whether or not the winning will be continued in the continuous lottery process is heightened.

Feature D3. The probability improving means is
Probability lottery execution means (function for executing the process of step S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82) for executing the continuation probability lottery process under at least one condition that the continuation lottery process has been continuously won;
Probability setting means (function for executing the process of step S2318 in the sub-side MPU 82) for increasing the probability of the continuous winning according to the result of the probability lottery process;
The gaming machine according to feature D2, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature D3, in order to set the probability of winning continuously in the continuous lottery process to be high, the probability of winning continuously in the continuous lottery process and the probability of winning continuously in the continuous probability lottery process are set high. It must be a result for As a result, the degree of freedom in setting the probability that the probability of winning continuously is set high is increased.

Feature D4. The advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous period (pre-branch AT state) and a subsequent second advantageous period (branch AT state),
The continuation lottery executing means executes the continuation lottery process when the first advantageous period ends,
In the gaming machine, an advantageous period effect (battle effect) corresponding to whether or not the new execution times of the advantageous gaming state are continued in the second advantageous period is performed by the effect executing means (image display device 66). Effect control means to be executed (function to execute the process of step S1109 in the sub-side MPU82),
When a specific effect (victory effect) is executed as the advantageous period effect, there is a possibility that the probability of the continuous winning is increased by the probability improving means or the probability of the continuous winning is increased. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the value is higher than when the effect is executed.

According to the feature D4, since the advantageous period effect corresponding to whether or not the new execution round of the advantageous game state is continued is executed in the second advantageous period of the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state continues. It is possible to provide the player with a notification as to whether or not it is, as an effect, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced. In addition, when the specific effect is executed as the advantageous period effect, the probability of continuous winning is high or the possibility is high. As a result, the player plays the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the specific effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Feature D5. The production control means is
Effect lottery execution means (function for executing the process of step S2311 in the sub-side MPU 82) for executing the effect content lottery process when the continuation lottery process results in continued winning;
specific effect setting means (function of executing step S2312 in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting the specific effect as the effect to be executed in the second advantageous period according to the result of the effect content lottery process;
Predetermined effect setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2312 in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting a predetermined effect (draw effect) as a effect to be executed in the second advantageous period according to the result of the effect content lottery process;
with
The probability improving means is
probability lottery execution means (function of executing the process of step S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82) for executing the continuation probability lottery process when the specific effect is set as the effect to be executed in the second advantageous period;
Probability setting means (function for executing the process of step S2318 in the sub-side MPU 82) for improving the probability of winning the recurring winning according to the result of the probability lottery process;
The gaming machine according to feature D4, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature D5, when the specific effect or the predetermined effect is executed as the advantageous period effect, the continuous game in the advantageous gaming state is confirmed, so the player expects the specific effect or the predetermined effect to be executed. A game will be played. Further, when the specific effect is executed out of the specific effect and the predetermined effect, there is a possibility that the probability of winning continuously in the continuous lottery process is high, so the player further executes the specific effect. The game will be played while expecting that. As a result, it is possible to make the player's sense of expectation multi-staged, and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D6. Characteristic feature D4 or D5, characterized in that the probability improving means sets the probability of the continuous winning to a maximum probability when the number of executions of the specific effect reaches a predetermined number of executions. game machine.

According to feature D6, since the probability of winning continuously in the continuous lottery process becomes the highest when the number of executions of the specific performance reaches the predetermined number of executions, the player's expectation for the execution of the specific performance. can be increased.

It should be noted that there may be three or more types of probabilities of being continuously elected.

Feature D7. Provided with a specific storage means (privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84) that stores information that can specify the number of remaining executions of the advantageous gaming state,
When the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times, a new execution time of the advantageous game state is started without executing the continuous lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, characterized in that

According to the characteristic D7, when the number of remaining executions is 1 or more, the completion of the consecutive games in the advantageous game state is prioritized over the continuous lottery process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advantageous game state from continuing unnecessarily, as compared with the configuration in which the remaining number of executions is exhausted when the continuation lottery process fails to continue.

Feature D8. The probability improving means, when the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times, when a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started, the continuous winning The gaming machine according to feature D7, wherein no setting is made to increase the probability of winning.

According to the feature D8, it is possible to prevent the number of chances of setting the probability of being continuously selected to be high in the continuous lottery process from increasing more than necessary.

Feature D9. When the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied (the privilege point is won in the privilege point lottery process), the memory executing means (steps S2005 and S2007 in the sub-side MPU 82) stores the privilege numerical information (privilege point) in the specific storage means. , a function of executing the processes of steps S2011 and S2504);
Privilege standard determination means (step S2301 in the sub-side MPU 82) that determines whether or not the privilege numerical value information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the privilege standard numerical value when the judgment trigger occurs. and a function to execute the processing of step S2609);
with
When it is determined by the privilege standard determination means that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege standard numerical value, a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is started without executing the continuous lottery process. and
Even if the continuation lottery process fails to continue, the privilege numerical value information stored in the specific storage means in the subsequent post-continuation failure period is information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference value. Characteristic D7 or D8 characterized by comprising advantageous continuation means (a function of executing a pre-branch AT state setting process in the sub-side MPU 82) for starting a new execution round of the advantageous gaming state when it becomes The game machine described.

According to feature D9, even if the privilege numerical value information does not correspond to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference numerical value by the time the judgment is triggered, the privilege numerical value information becomes equal to or greater than the privilege reference numerical value in the period after the continuation failure. By providing the corresponding information, the advantageous game state will continue. As a result, it is advantageous for the player to increase the value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information until the judgment trigger is reached, so that the privilege numerical value information has a larger value until the judgment trigger. The game is played while expecting the game, and the interest in the game is improved.

Feature D10. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The pattern display means is operated such that the variable display of the pattern is started when the starting operation means is operated, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. Variable display control means for controlling (function for executing reel control processing in main side MPU 72);
with
The game according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein in the advantageous game state, a game in which the variable display of the pattern is stopped after the variable display of the pattern is started is executed a plurality of times. machine.

In a gaming machine like the feature D10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature D11. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for the pattern,
A plurality of stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display part of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts the variable display of the pattern on the plurality of variable display portions based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
The game machine is
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a prize corresponding award means (a prize determination in the main side MPU 72) that gives a prize corresponding to the player based on the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process is displayed. function to perform processing) and
with
As a combination to be selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order-corresponding combination (a first bell combination and a second bell combination) that enables a prize to be awarded when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. and
The gaming machine according to feature D10, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order-corresponding combination is achieved.

In a gaming machine like the feature D11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features D1 to D11, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I16, features J1-J13, features K1-K11, features L1-L9, features M1-M10, features N1-N13, features O1-O38, features P1-P25, features Q1-Q20, features R1-R11, features S1- Any one or more of S3, features T1 to T4, features U1 to U6, and features V1 to V11 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Features E1. Advantageous transition means (steps S1614 to S1617 in the sub-side MPU 82, and steps S1709 to step function to execute the processing of S1712);
Continuous lottery execution for executing continuous lottery processing for determining whether or not a new execution round of the advantageous game state is to be started after one execution round of the advantageous game state is completed when the continuation lottery is triggered. means (function for executing the process of step S2309 in the sub-side MPU 82);
A specific storage means (privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84) that stores information that can specify the number of remaining executions of the advantageous gaming state;
When the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to the number of remaining executions of 1 or more, or when the winning is continued in the continuous lottery process, a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started. Advantageous continuation means (a function of executing a pre-branch AT state setting process in the sub-side MPU 82)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E1, not only does the advantageous gaming state continue in the event of a continuous winning in the continuous lottery process, but the information stored in the specific storage means corresponds to the fact that the number of remaining executions is 1 or more. The advantageous game state continues even when the information is the information obtained. As a result, it is possible to diversify the modes in which the advantageous game state continues to occur, and it is possible to preferably increase the expectation of the player who expects the advantageous game state to continue. As described above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature E2. Probability improvement means for increasing the probability of winning continuously in the continuous lottery process when the execution times of the advantageous gaming state are repeated and the probability improvement condition is satisfied (executing the processing of steps S2308 and S2316 in the sub-side MPU 82 The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that it has a function of

According to the feature E2, the probability of being continuously won in the continuous lottery process can be improved by the continuous advantageous gaming state. In other words, the more the number of remaining execution times is set and the more the advantageous gaming state continues, the higher the probability that the continuous lottery process will be continuously won. As a result, when the advantageous game state continues to occur, the occurrence of the consecutive game becomes more likely, and the advantage of the advantageous game state to occur in succession is increased. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's exhilaration when the advantageous game state continues. In addition, it is possible to closely associate the advantageous game state related to the remaining number of executions with the continuation winning probability of the continuous lottery process, and the effect of setting the two consecutive game modes is synergistic. It becomes possible to

Feature E3. The advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous period (pre-branch AT state) and a subsequent second advantageous period (branch AT state),
The advantageous continuation means determines whether or not the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times when the first advantageous period ends, or whether the continuation lottery process It is to determine whether or not it has been continuously elected,
In the gaming machine, an advantageous period effect (battle effect) corresponding to whether or not the new execution times of the advantageous gaming state are continued in the second advantageous period is performed by the effect executing means (image display device 66). Effect control means to be executed (function to execute the process of step S1109 in the sub-side MPU82),
The production control means is
Effect lottery executing means (function for executing the process of step S2311 in the sub-side MPU 82) for executing the effect content lottery process when the new execution times of the advantageous gaming state are continuously implemented;
A specific effect setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2312 in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting a specific effect (winning effect) as the effect to be executed in the second advantageous period according to the result of the effect content lottery process;
Predetermined effect setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2312 in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting a predetermined effect (draw effect) as a effect to be executed in the second advantageous period according to the result of the effect content lottery process;
with
The game machine has probability improving means for increasing the probability of winning continuously in the continuous lottery process when the number of times the specific effect has been executed reaches a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, characterized in that it has a function to execute.

According to the feature E3, since the advantageous period effect corresponding to whether or not the new execution times of the advantageous game state are continued is executed in the second advantageous period of the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state continues. It is possible to provide the player with a notification as to whether or not it is, as an effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, when a specific effect or a predetermined effect is executed as an effect for an advantageous period, a continuous game in an advantageous game state is determined, so the player can play the game expecting that the specific effect or the predetermined effect will be executed. becomes. In addition, since the number of executions of the specific effect reaches the predetermined number of times, the probability of winning continuously in the continuous lottery process increases, so it is possible to increase the expectation of the player for the execution of the specific effect. Become.

In addition, since the specific effect is executed even when the advantageous gaming state continues due to the remaining number of executions being one or more, the greater the number of times set as the number of remaining executions, the more the number of times the specific effect is executed. Expectations for the number of times are increased. Therefore, when a large number of times is set as the number of remaining executions, not only the benefit of increasing the number of consecutive games in an advantageous game state, but also the benefit of increasing the possibility of increasing the probability of winning continuously will be given. The advantage of setting a large number of times as the number of remaining executions is enhanced.

Feature E4. The game according to feature E3, characterized by comprising an execution count notification means (win count notification unit 69, a function of executing the processing of step S2205 in the sub-side MPU 82) for notifying the number of times the specific effect is executed. machine.

According to the feature E4, it is possible to suitably increase the expectation that the number of executions of the specific effect will reach the predetermined number of executions.

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to any one of features E2 to E4, wherein the probability improving means sets the probability of the continuous winning to a maximum probability.

According to the feature E5, the advantage of the advantageous gaming state being repeated is increased.

Feature E6. Any of features E1 to E5 characterized by comprising remaining number of times notification means for notifying information corresponding to the remaining number of executions (stock notification unit 68, function of executing the process of step S2203 in sub-side MPU 82). 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the feature E6, it is possible to make the player recognize at least how long the advantageous game state will continue through the remaining number corresponding informing means, and it is possible to enhance the player's sense of superiority.

In particular, when the configuration of feature E3 is provided, the degree of expectation that the number of executions of the specific effect will reach the predetermined number of executions is determined by the player himself/herself in relation to the remaining number of executions grasped by the remaining number of execution notification means. It becomes possible to recognize As a result, it is possible to closely associate the continuous winning state of the advantageous game state related to the remaining number of executions with the continuation winning probability of the continuous lottery process, and the effect of setting the two continuous running modes is synergistic. It becomes possible to

Feature E7. When the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times, the advantageous continuation means repeats the advantageous gaming state a new execution time without executing the continuation lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E6, characterized in that it causes the to start.

According to the feature E7, when the number of remaining executions is 1 or more, the completion of the consecutive games in the advantageous gaming state is prioritized over the continuous lottery process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advantageous game state from continuing unnecessarily, as compared with the configuration in which the remaining number of executions is exhausted when the continuation lottery process fails to continue.

Feature E8. When the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied (the privilege point is won in the privilege point lottery process), the memory executing means (steps S2005 and S2007 in the sub-side MPU 82) stores the privilege numerical information (privilege point) in the specific storage means. , a function of executing the processes of steps S2011 and S2504);
Privilege standard determination means (step S2301 in the sub-side MPU 82) that determines whether or not the privilege numerical value information stored in the specific storage means corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege standard numerical value when the judgment trigger occurs. and a function to execute the processing of step S2609);
with
The advantageous continuation means re-executes the advantageous gaming state without executing the continuation lottery process when the privilege reference determination means determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference numerical value. The benefit numerical information stored in the specific storage means in the subsequent period after the continuation failure even if the continuation failure occurs in the continuation lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, characterized in that when the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference value, a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is started. .

According to feature E8, even if the privilege numerical value information does not correspond to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference numerical value by the time the judgment is triggered, the privilege numerical value information becomes equal to or greater than the privilege reference numerical value in the period after the continuation failure. By providing the corresponding information, the advantageous game state will continue. As a result, it is advantageous for the player to increase the value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information until the judgment trigger is reached, so that the privilege numerical value information has a larger value until the judgment trigger. The game is played while expecting the game, and the interest in the game is improved.

Feature E9. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The pattern display means is operated so that the variable display of the pattern is started when the starting operation means is operated, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. Variable display control means for controlling (function for executing reel control processing in main side MPU 72);
with
The game according to any one of features E1 to E8, characterized in that, in the advantageous game state, a game in which the variable display of the pattern is stopped after the variable display of the pattern is started is executed a plurality of times. machine.

In a game machine like the feature E9, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature E10. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display part of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts variable display of patterns on the plurality of variable display portions based on the operation of the start operation means, and controls the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
The game machine is
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a prize corresponding granting means (prize determination in the main side MPU 72) that gives a prize corresponding to the player based on the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process is displayed. function to perform processing) and
with
As a combination to be selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order-corresponding combination (a first bell combination and a second bell combination) that enables a prize to be awarded when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. and
The gaming machine according to feature E9, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order-corresponding combination is achieved.

In the gaming machine having the feature E10, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features E1 to E10, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I16, features J1-J13, features K1-K11, features L1-L9, features M1-M10, features N1-N13, features O1-O38, features P1-P25, features Q1-Q20, features R1-R11, features S1- Any one or more of S3, features T1 to T4, features U1 to U6, and features V1 to V11 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. When a privilege numerical value condition is satisfied (a privilege point is won in a privilege point lottery process), a storage execution means (sub a function of executing the processes of steps S2005, S2007, S2011 and S2504 in the side MPU 82;
Privilege standard determination means (step S2301 in the sub-side MPU 82) that determines whether or not the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the privilege standard numerical value when a judgment trigger occurs. and a function to execute the processing of step S2609);
Predetermined privilege granting means (step in sub-side MPU 82) for granting a predetermined privilege advantageous to the player when the privilege criterion determination means determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege criterion numerical value a function of making an affirmative determination in S2301 and executing subsequent processing, and a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2609 in the sub-side MPU 82 and executing subsequent processing;
Grant lottery execution means (sub-side A function of executing the processing of step S2907 in the MPU 82);
with
The grant lottery execution means executes the grant lottery process so that the probability of winning grant in the grant lottery process differs according to the privilege numerical value information of the privilege storage means. machine.

According to the feature F1, when the privilege numerical condition is established and the stored privilege numerical value information becomes information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference value, the predetermined privilege is granted. The game is played while expecting that the condition will be established, and the game is played while expecting that the privilege numerical value information will be information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference value. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, even if the information does not correspond to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference value, the predetermined privilege is granted by winning the grant lottery process. As a result, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the predetermined privilege is granted, and to increase the chances of granting the predetermined privilege.

Furthermore, the award lottery process is executed so that the probability of award winning differs according to the value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information. As a result, even if the privilege numerical information is information corresponding to a value less than the privilege reference value, the privilege numerical information will affect the probability of winning in the award lottery process, and the degree of attention to the privilege numerical information. can be increased.

As described above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature F2. The grant lottery execution means performs the grant lottery process so that the probability of winning the grant lottery process is higher when the value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information in the privilege storage means is larger than when the value is smaller. The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that it executes

According to the feature F2, even if the privilege numerical value information is information corresponding to a value less than the privilege reference value, the larger value of the privilege numerical value information has a higher probability of being awarded in the grant lottery process. As a result, even when the privilege numerical value information does not correspond to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference value, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the privilege numerical value information.

Feature F3. Erasing means for erasing the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means (function for executing the process of step S2911 in the sub-side MPU 82) when the grant lottery process results in a prize winner and the predetermined privilege is granted. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature F3, it is possible to limit the profit resulting from the privilege numerical value information to some extent.

Feature F4. The privilege numerical condition is a configuration that is established in a privilege-compatible game state (normal AT state),
A configuration in which one execution of the game state corresponding to the privilege is completed after the judgment trigger is reached,
The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the privilege numerical value information in the privilege storage means can be inherited when the grant lottery processing is not executed or when the grant lottery processing does not result in winning.

According to the feature F4, if the grant lottery process is not executed or if the grant lottery process does not result in grant winning, the privilege numerical value information can be inherited. The mode of handover will be diversified. As a result, the mode of progress of the game is diversified in relation to the privilege numerical information, and the interest in the game is improved.

Feature F5. The bonus numerical condition is established in an advantageous game state (normal AT state) that is more advantageous to the player than in a predetermined game state (non-AT state),
The predetermined privilege is that the advantageous gaming state continues,
Features F1 to F4 characterized by comprising means for terminating the advantageous gaming state (function of executing the processing of step S2913 in the sub-side MPU 82) when the grant lottery process does not become a grant winning 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the feature F5, the grant lottery process exists as the final opportunity to generate a series of games in an advantageous gaming state, and the degree of attention to the grant lottery process is increased. In addition, by referring to the privilege numerical value information in the grant lottery process that exists as the final opportunity to generate the continuous game in this advantageous gaming state, even if the privilege numerical value information acquired just before the end of the advantageous gaming state It is possible to enjoy the benefits of it. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the privilege numerical condition will be satisfied at any timing of the advantageous gaming state.

Feature F6. Continuous lottery execution for executing continuous lottery processing for determining whether or not a new execution round of the advantageous game state is to be started after one execution round of the advantageous game state is completed when a continuation lottery opportunity is reached. means (function for executing the process of step S2309 in the sub-side MPU 82),
When the privilege reference determination means determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference numerical value, a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is started without executing the continuous lottery process. can be,
The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the grant lottery executing means executes the grant lottery process after the continuation lottery process fails to continue.

According to the feature F6, it is possible to diversify the continuation mode of the advantageous game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F7. Even if the continuation lottery process fails to continue, the privilege numerical value information stored in the specific storage means in the subsequent post-continuation failure period is information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference value. The gaming machine according to feature F6, characterized in that, when it becomes true, a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is started.

According to feature F7, even if the privilege numerical value information does not correspond to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference numerical value by the time the judgment is triggered, the privilege numerical value information becomes equal to or greater than the privilege reference numerical value in the period after the continuation failure. By providing the corresponding information, the advantageous game state will continue. As a result, it is advantageous for the player to increase the value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information until the judgment trigger is reached, so that the privilege numerical value information has a larger value until the judgment trigger. The game is played while expecting the game, and the interest in the game is improved.

Feature F8. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern;
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
One game is that the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, Variable display control means for controlling the pattern display means in each game (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a prize corresponding award means (a prize determination in the main side MPU 72) that gives a prize corresponding to the player based on the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process is displayed. function to perform processing) and
with
The awarding lottery execution means performs the awarding such that the probability of winning the award differs depending on not only the value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information in the privilege storage means but also the result of the role lottery process or the winning result in the corresponding game. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, characterized in that it executes lottery processing.

According to the feature F8, not only the value corresponding to the privilege numerical information but also the winning combination or the winning result in the corresponding game influences the probability of winning the award in the award lottery process. As a result, points to be noted when executing the grant lottery process are diversified, and the interest in the game is improved.

Feature F9. If the result of the role lottery process in the corresponding game is a special role winning, or if a specific role winning occurs and the grant lottery process does not win the grant lottery process, the grant lottery process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature F8, further comprising means for increasing the number of continuous games in the state (function for making an affirmative determination in step S2912 in the sub-side MPU 82).

According to feature F9, the number of continuous games in which the grant lottery process is executed can be increased even if the grant lottery process does not win the grant lottery process in spite of winning a special role or winning a special role. . As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of disadvantage when the player does not win the award in the award lottery process even though the player wins the special role or wins the special role.

Feature F10. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The pattern display means is operated so that the variable display of the pattern is started when the starting operation means is operated, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. Variable display control means for controlling (function for executing reel control processing in main side MPU 72);
with
Characteristic feature F1, wherein the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied according to the result of a lottery process executed when the starting operation means is operated, or the winning result after the variable display of the pattern is stopped. The game machine according to any one of F9.

In a game machine like the feature F10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature F11. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display part of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts the variable display of the pattern on the plurality of variable display portions based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
The game machine is
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a prize corresponding award means (a prize determination in the main side MPU 72) that gives a prize corresponding to the player based on the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process is displayed. function to perform processing) and
with
As a combination to be selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order-corresponding combination (a first bell combination and a second bell combination) that enables a prize to be awarded when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. and
The gaming machine according to feature F10, wherein the predetermined privilege is to enable execution of a game in a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding combination is obtained.

In a game machine like the feature F11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features F1 to F11, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I16, features J1-J13, features K1-K11, features L1-L9, features M1-M10, features N1-N13, features O1-O38, features P1-P25, features Q1-Q20, features R1-R11, features S1- Any one or more of S3, features T1 to T4, features U1 to U6, and features V1 to V11 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. a winning lottery execution means for executing a winning lottery process (a function of executing the lottery process in the main side MPU 72);
Winning response granting means (function for executing winning determination processing in the main side MPU 72) that grants a winning response benefit corresponding to the winning combination in the winning combination lottery process;
With at least one condition that a predetermined combination (normal replay combination) is won in the combination lottery process in the transition expected state (transition chance state), the player's advantage is higher than the predetermined gaming state (non-AT state). Advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to a high advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) (function of executing the processing of steps S1614 to S1617 and steps S1709 to S1712 in the sub-side MPU 82);
Expectation to increase the degree of expectation that the transition to the advantageous gaming state will occur in the transition expected state, under at least one condition that another role (expectation improving role) is won in the role lottery process in the transition expected state. performance improving means (function for executing the processing of steps S1605 and S1606 in the sub-side MPU 82);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature G1, a transition to an advantageous gaming state can occur when a predetermined combination is won in the transition expected state. As a result, the player can play the game while expecting to win the predetermined combination in the transition expectation state, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, when another role is won in the transition expected state, the degree of expectation that the transition to the advantageous gaming state will occur in the transition expected state increases, so the player may win not only the predetermined role but also the different role in the transition expected state. As a result, the role expected to be elected will be diversified. As described above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature G2. The game according to feature G1, wherein the expectation level improving means extends the duration of the transition expectation state under at least one condition that the different role is won in the role lottery process. machine.

According to the feature G2, when a separate role is won, the duration of the transition expected state can be extended, so it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that the transition to the advantageous gaming state will occur.

Feature G3. Transition lottery execution means (function for executing step S1609 in the sub-side MPU 82) for executing the transition lottery process when the predetermined role is won in the role lottery process in the transition expected state,
The advantageous transition means transitions the game state to the advantageous game state when a transition win is obtained in the transition lottery process,
Characteristic G1, characterized in that the expectation level improving means increases the probability of winning the transition lottery in the transition lottery process, with at least one condition being that the other role has been won in the role lottery process. Or the gaming machine described in G2.

According to the feature G3, when another role is won, the probability of winning a transition lottery process can be increased, so it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that the transition to the advantageous gaming state will occur.

Feature G4. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, wherein the probability of winning the predetermined role is higher than the probability of winning the different role at least in the transition expected state.

According to the characteristic G4, it is possible to increase the frequency of winning the predetermined combination in the transition expected state, and to provide many opportunities to expect the transition to the advantageous gaming state. In addition, when winning a role with a low probability of winning, it is generally possible for the player to be in an advantageous situation. If the game is won, the degree of expectation for the shift to the advantageous game state is high, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the other role is won.

Feature G5. Any one of the features G1 to G4, characterized in that the predetermined combination serves as a trigger role for providing the advantageous gaming state in the transition expected state, but does not serve as a trigger role for providing the advantageous gaming state in another game state. game machine.

According to feature G5, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to winning a predetermined combination in the transition expected state.

Feature G6. The game according to any one of the characteristics G1 to G5, wherein the separate role does not become the opportunity to provide the advantageous gaming state in the transition expected state, but becomes the opportunity to provide the additional role in another game state. machine.

According to the feature G6, it is possible to give the player the recognition that the alternate role is an advantageous combination, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to winning the alternate role.

Feature G7. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics G1 to G6, wherein the winning response providing means provides a predetermined winning response privilege when the predetermined winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process.

According to the feature G7, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage in the case of winning the predetermined combination, and to increase the degree of attention to winning the predetermined combination.

Feature G8. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
The pattern display means is operated such that the variable display of the pattern is started when the starting operation means is operated, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. Variable display control means for controlling (function for executing reel control processing in main side MPU 72);
with
The winning lottery execution means executes the winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated,
wherein the means for giving prizes for winning awards the privilege for winning as a prize when the variable display of the symbols is stopped and a stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features G1 to G7.

In a game machine like the feature G8, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature G9. Characteristic feature G8, characterized in that the predetermined combination is a combination that, when winning in the combination lottery process, is a winning combination regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means in relation to the variable display position of the pattern. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature G9, when a predetermined combination is won, the corresponding prize is generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means, so that the player is clearly informed that an opportunity to shift to an advantageous game state has occurred. It is possible to recognize.

Feature G10. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display part of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts the variable display of the pattern on the plurality of variable display portions based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
As the winning combination selected by the winning lottery process, an order-corresponding winning combination (a first bell combination and a second bell combination) that enables a prize to be won when the variable display of patterns on the plurality of variable display units is stopped in a predetermined order. role) exists,
The gaming machine according to feature G8 or G9, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is announced when the order-corresponding combination is won.

In a game machine like the feature G10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features G1 to G10, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I16, features J1-J13, features K1-K11, features L1-L9, features M1-M10, features N1-N13, features O1-O38, features P1-P25, features Q1-Q20, features R1-R11, features S1- Any one or more of S3, features T1 to T4, features U1 to U6, and features V1 to V11 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern;
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
One game is that the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, Variable display control means for controlling the pattern display means in each game (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a prize corresponding award means (a prize determination in the main side MPU 72) that gives a prize corresponding to the player based on the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process is displayed. function to perform processing) and
A special standby period (start wait time) for waiting the progress of the game when a special event occurs where the winning combination lottery process becomes a special lottery result or the pattern stop result becomes a special stop result. special standby period setting means for setting the
If the special event occurs in a standby avoidance situation (a penalty situation if the value of the bonus AT counter is 1 or more), the special standby period setting means does not set the special standby period, or Standby avoidance means for setting a standby period shorter than the special standby period (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S804 in the main MPU 72, a function of making an affirmative determination in step S811, and a negative determination in step S901) a function to make a negative determination in step S902, and a function to make an affirmative determination in step S905);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature H1, a special waiting period is set when a special event that is either winning a special role or winning a special role occurs, thereby emphasizing that a special event has occurred through the setting of the special waiting period. It becomes possible to As a result, the player feels unexpected that the special waiting period has been set, and the feeling of elation at the occurrence of the special event is heightened. On the other hand, when the special waiting period is set, the progress of the game is put on hold, which may cause the player to feel annoyed. On the other hand, by preventing the special standby period from being set or shortening the standby period in such a situation, it is possible to cause the special standby period to occur in a favorable situation. As described above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature H2. The special standby period setting means starts measurement of the special standby period after the variable display of the pattern is stopped,
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the variable display control means waits for the start of variable display of the pattern during the special standby period.

According to the feature H2, when the special waiting period is set, the start of the variable display of the pattern is on standby, so that the player can be made to clearly recognize that the special waiting period is set. . On the other hand, if the special waiting period is set in an unfavorable situation, the variable display of the pattern is not started even though the game is about to start, which may make the player feel annoyed. On the other hand, in such a situation, by not setting the special standby period or by shortening the standby period, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring.

Feature H3. It is characterized by comprising an effect control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1109 and S1206 in the sub-side MPU 82) that allows the special event corresponding effect to be executed by the effect execution means during the special standby period. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2.

According to feature H3, since the special event response effect is executed during the special standby period, the feeling of elation at the occurrence of the special event can be heightened. On the other hand, if the special waiting period is set in an unfavorable situation and the special event corresponding effect is executed, the player may feel uncomfortable. or by shortening the waiting period, the special event response effect is not executed.

Feature H4. When the special event occurs in a predetermined game state (non-AT state), an advantageous transition means (main a function of executing the processes of steps S802 to S803, steps S809 to S810, and steps S903 to S904 in the side MPU 72;
When the special event occurs in the advantageous game state, the number of times of execution of the advantageous game state can be increased or the number of continuous games in the advantageous game state can be increased,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the standby avoidance situation is a situation in which the advantageous game state is established.

According to the feature H4, by setting a special waiting period for the occurrence of a special event that triggers the transition to the advantageous gaming state, the special waiting period is set as a break between emphasizing the transition to the advantageous gaming state and the game state. exists, which can have the effect of enhancing the player's sense of exhilaration. On the other hand, in the advantageous playing state, the player's attention is focused on completing the game, so if a special waiting period is set for the occurrence of a special event in the middle of the game, the player may think that it is troublesome. have a nature. On the other hand, in such a situation, by not setting the special standby period or by shortening the standby period, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring.

Feature H5. When the special event occurs in a predetermined game state (non-AT state), advantageous transition means (main a function of executing the processes of steps S802 to S803, steps S809 to S810, and steps S903 to S904 in the side MPU 72;
When the special event occurs in a penalty situation, transition regulation means for regulating the transition of the game state to the advantageous game state by the advantageous transition means (function to make a negative determination in step S901 in the main side MPU 72 , and a function of making a negative determination in step S902);
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the standby avoidance situation is the penalty situation.

According to the feature H5, by setting a special waiting period for the occurrence of a special event that triggers the transition to the advantageous gaming state, the special waiting period is set as a break between emphasizing the transition to the advantageous gaming state and the game state. exists, which can have the effect of enhancing the player's sense of exhilaration. On the other hand, even if a special event occurs in a penalty situation, the transition to the advantageous game state does not occur, so if a special waiting period is set in such a situation, the player may feel uncomfortable. . On the other hand, in such a situation, by not setting the special standby period or by shortening the standby period, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring.

Feature H6. As a combination to be selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order-corresponding combination (a first bell combination and a second bell combination) that enables a prize to be awarded when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. and
The gaming machine according to feature H4 or H5, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order-corresponding combination is achieved.

In a game machine like the feature H6, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature H7. Pre-start waiting period setting means (main side MPU 72 in a function to execute the processes of steps S310 and S408),
Any one of features H1 to H6, wherein the pre-start waiting period setting means sets the pre-start waiting period when the special lottery result is obtained even in the waiting avoidance situation. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to feature H7, when a special lottery result is obtained, a pre-start waiting period is set in the game, thereby making it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the special lottery result has been obtained. As a result, the player can feel the unexpectedness of the setting of the waiting period before the start of the game, and can lift the mood, and can stop the game while recognizing that it is the result of the special lottery. becomes possible. In addition, since such a function of the waiting period before the start can be generated regardless of whether it is in the standby avoidance situation, the function can be suitably generated by setting the waiting period before the start even in the standby avoidance situation. It is possible to

For the configuration of features H1 to H7, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, features I1 to I16, features J1-J13, features K1-K11, features L1-L9, features M1-M10, features N1-N13, features O1-O38, features P1-P25, features Q1-Q20, features R1-R11, features S1- Any one or more of S3, features T1 to T4, features U1 to U6, and features V1 to V11 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each invention of the feature group A, the feature group B, the feature group C, the feature group D, the feature group E, the feature group F, the feature group G, and the feature group H can solve the following problems. is.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, lottery processing is executed by the control means by operating the start lever while medals are being bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. pattern display means (reel unit 31) including a plurality of variable display units (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying patterns;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern;
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display portions and operated to stop the variable display of patterns in the corresponding variable display portions;
The variable display of the pattern on the plurality of variable display portions is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display portion corresponding to the stop operation means is operated on the basis of the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main side MPU 72) that controls the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern is stopped in
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a prize corresponding award means (a prize determination in the main side MPU 72) that gives a prize corresponding to the player based on the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process is displayed. function to perform processing) and
In a game machine equipped with
As the winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, a specified winning combination (normal replay winning combination) occurs regardless of the stop order of the variable display of the patterns on the variable display units when the winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process. ) exists and
A first control means (main side MPU 72) having the variable display control means, and a second control means (sub side MPU 82) for executing predetermined control based on transmission information transmitted by the first control means. ,
The first control means is
Order selection means for selecting the order in which the variable display of patterns in each of the variable display units should be stopped when the specified combination is won in the combination lottery process (function for executing the process of step S405 in the main MPU 72) When,
Order specifying means for specifying that the correct order event of stopping the variable display of the patterns on the variable display units in the order selected by the order selecting means has occurred (executing normal replay pressing order determination processing in the main MPU 72) function) and
with
The second control means is
order notification control means for notifying selection order information corresponding to the order selected by the order selection means (function for executing the processes of steps S1109 and S3505 in the sub-side MPU 82);
Notification determination means (function for executing the process of step S3504 in the sub-side MPU 82) for determining whether or not to notify the selection order information by the order notification control means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature I1, not only the first control means but also the second control means are provided as the control means, thereby reducing the processing load of the first control means.

In this case, the first control means intentionally selects the order in which the variable display of patterns should be stopped in the event of winning a prescribed winning combination that causes a prescribed prize regardless of the order in which the variable display of patterns is stopped. The means executes control as necessary to notify the selection order information. Then, the first control means specifies whether or not the selected order and the actual stopping order match. Thus, even if the second control means independently manages the progress of the game state, the progress of the game state does not require transmission of information from the second control means to the first control means. The situation can be grasped by the first control means.

As described above, by providing a plurality of control means, it is possible to achieve further optimization of the configuration in the configuration intended to reduce the processing load of each control means.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the order selection means always selects the order when the specified combination is won in the combination lottery process.

According to the feature I2, when a stipulated combination is won, the order is always selected, so that there is no need to switch between a situation in which order selection is performed and a situation in which it is not performed. is simplified.

Feature I3. The second control means is a progress management means for managing the progress of an advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than a predetermined gaming state (non-AT state) (executing AT processing in the sub-side MPU 82). function),
The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, wherein the notification determination means causes the order notification control means to notify the selection order information according to the progress of the advantageous game state.

According to the feature I3, the progress of the advantageous game state is independently managed by the second control means, so that the processing load on the first control means can be reduced. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature I1, even if the progress of the advantageous gaming state is independently managed by the second control means, the information is transmitted from the second control means to the first control means. , the progress of the advantageous game state can be grasped by the first control means.

Feature I4. The progress management means is a continuation setting for starting a new execution round of the advantageous game state after one execution round of the advantageous game state is completed when a condition for continuing the advantageous game state is established. Means (pre-branch AT state setting processing in the sub-side MPU 82 and a function of executing the processing of steps S2909 to S2911),
Characteristic I3, wherein the notification determination means causes the order notification control means to notify the selection order information in a situation where the execution times of the advantageous gaming state are continued by the continuation setting means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature I4, even if the progress of the advantageous game state is independently managed by the second control means, the advantageous game can be played without transmitting information from the second control means to the first control means. It is possible to grasp the occurrence of a state of continuous residence.

Feature I5. The gaming machine according to feature I3 or I4, wherein the specified combination is a combination with the highest probability of winning in the combination lottery process at least in the advantageous gaming state.

According to the feature I5, it is possible to increase the chances of grasping the progress of the advantageous game state by the first control means, and when the progress of the advantageous game state changes, the first control means can quickly detect it. It is possible to grasp the

Feature I6. As a combination to be selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order-corresponding combination (a first bell combination and a second bell combination) that enables a prize to be awarded when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. and
The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I5, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order-corresponding combination is achieved.

According to the feature I6, it is possible to reliably generate an order-corresponding winning combination in an advantageous gaming state, which is advantageous to the player.

Feature I7. The first control means controls specific output setting means (step S3112 and step A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I6, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of S3404.

According to feature I7, even if the second control means independently manages the progress of the game state, the game can be played without transmitting information from the second control means to the first control means. It becomes possible to perform the external output setting corresponding to the progress of the state in the first control means.

Feature I8. Characteristic I7, characterized in that the specific output setting means performs external output setting for the specific response based on the occurrence of the correct order event being identified a plurality of times by the order identifying means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the characteristic I8, the possibility that the external output setting for the specific correspondence is performed when the correct order event happens by chance is reduced.

Feature I9. The specified output setting means specifies that the occurrence of the correct order event is specified a plurality of times by the order specifying means without occurrence of an event that the correct order event does not occur when the prescribed combination is won. The gaming machine according to feature I8, characterized in that the external output setting corresponding to the specific correspondence is performed based on the fact that the gaming machine has been set.

According to the characteristic I9, the possibility that the external output setting for the specific correspondence is performed when the correct order event happens by chance is reduced.

Feature I10. The second control means is a different order notification control means (processes of steps S3507 and S3605 in the sub-side MPU 82) for notifying different order information corresponding to an order different from the order selected by the order selection means. A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I9, characterized in that it has a function of executing

According to the feature I10, it is possible to positively prevent the accidental occurrence of correct sequence events, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the content grasped by the first control means.

Feature I11. The second control means is a progress management means for managing the progress of an advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than a predetermined gaming state (non-AT state) (executing AT processing in the sub-side MPU 82). function),
The notification determination means causes the order notification control means to notify the selection order information according to the progress of the advantageous gaming state,
The gaming machine according to feature I10, wherein the different order notification control means notifies the different order information according to the progress of the advantageous game state.

According to the characteristic I11, the progress of the advantageous game state is independently managed by the second control means, so that the processing load of the first control means can be reduced. In this case, the selection order information is reported according to the progress of the advantageous game state, and the different order information is reported according to the progress of the advantageous game state. Thereby, even if the progress of the advantageous game state is independently managed by the second control means, the progress of the advantageous game state does not require transmission of information from the second control means to the first control means. The situation can be accurately grasped by the first control means.

Feature I12. The progress management means is a continuation setting for starting a new execution round of the advantageous game state after one execution round of the advantageous game state is completed when a condition for continuing the advantageous game state is established. Means (pre-branch AT state setting processing in the sub-side MPU 82 and a function of executing the processing of steps S2909 to S2911),
The notification determination means causes the order notification control means to notify the selection order information when the execution times of the advantageous gaming state are continued by the continuation setting means,
The different order notification control means is characterized in that the different order information is notified in a situation different from a situation in which the execution times of the advantageous gaming state are continued by the continuation setting means. The gaming machine according to feature I11.

According to the characteristic I12, even if the progress of the advantageous game state is independently managed by the second control means, the advantageous game can be played without transmitting information from the second control means to the first control means. It is possible to accurately grasp the occurrence of the state's consecutive residences.

Feature I13. The first control means controls the specific handling means (steps S3112 and S3404 in the main MPU 72) for executing specific handling processing based on the occurrence of the correct order event being specified multiple times by the order specifying means. function to execute the processing of
The second control means includes a second side order specifying means (function for executing the processes of steps S3510 and S3608 in the sub-side MPU 82) that specifies that the correct order event has occurred,
The different order notification control means is characterized in that the different order information is notified based on the fact that the occurrence of the correct order event is specified by the second side order specifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of features I10 to I12.

According to feature I13, the first control means executes the specific handling process when the correct order event occurs multiple times. reduced. Further, the second control means executes notification of a different order when a correct order event occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the different order notification from being performed more than necessary.

Feature I14. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I13, wherein when the prescribed combination is won, a prize is awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means in relation to the variable display position of the pattern. .

According to the feature I14, by purposely selecting the order in which the variable display of the symbols should be stopped when the winning of a regular combination that does not cause a so-called dropout occurs, the player's profit is increased depending on whether or not the selection order information is notified. It does not change. As a result, restrictions are less likely to occur when notifying the selection order information.

Feature I15. A left variable display portion (left reel 32L), a middle variable display portion (middle reel 32M), and a right variable display portion (right reel 32R) are provided as the plurality of variable display portions,
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I14, wherein the order selection means does not select the order in which the first stop order is the left variable display section.

According to feature I15, since the player generally stops the left variable display section first, the correct order event is accidentally generated by not selecting the order in which the first stop order is the left variable display section. It is possible to reduce the possibility of

Feature I16. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I15, wherein the specified combination is a replay combination.

According to the feature I16, it is possible to obtain the above-described effects by using the replay combination.

For the configuration of features I1 to I16, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H7, features J1-J13, features K1-K11, features L1-L9, features M1-M10, features N1-N13, features O1-O38, features P1-P25, features Q1-Q20, features R1-R11, features S1- Any one or more of S3, features T1 to T4, features U1 to U6, and features V1 to V11 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. pattern display means (reel unit 31) including a plurality of variable display units (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying patterns;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern;
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display portions and operated to stop the variable display of patterns in the corresponding variable display portions;
The variable display of the pattern on the plurality of variable display portions is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display portion corresponding to the stop operation means is operated on the basis of the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main side MPU 72) that controls the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern is stopped in
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a prize corresponding award means (a prize determination in the main side MPU 72) that gives a prize corresponding to the player based on the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process is displayed. function to perform processing) and
In a game machine equipped with
As the winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, a specified winning combination (normal replay winning combination) occurs regardless of the stop order of the variable display of the patterns on the variable display units when the winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process. ) exists and
A first control means (main side MPU 72) having the variable display control means, and a second control means (sub side MPU 82) for executing predetermined control based on transmission information transmitted by the first control means. ,
The first control means is
Order selection means for selecting the order in which the variable display of patterns in each of the variable display units should be stopped when the specified combination is won in the combination lottery process (function for executing the process of step S405 in the main MPU 72) When,
Order specifying means for specifying that the correct order event of stopping the variable display of the patterns on the variable display units in the order selected by the order selecting means has occurred (executing normal replay pressing order determination processing in the main MPU 72) function) and
with
The second control means is
order notification control means for notifying selection order information corresponding to the order selected by the order selection means (function for executing the processes of steps S1109 and S3505 in the sub-side MPU 82);
A different order notification control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3507 and S3605 in the sub-side MPU 82) for notifying different order information corresponding to an order different from the order selected by the order selection means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature J1, not only the first control means but also the second control means are provided as the control means, thereby reducing the processing load of the first control means.

In this case, the first control means dares to select the order in which the variable display of patterns should be stopped when the player wins a regulated role in which a regulated prize is generated regardless of the stop order of the variable display of the patterns. The second control means may notify the selected order, or may notify an order different from the selected order. Then, the first control means specifies whether or not the selected order and the actual stopping order match. Thus, even if the second control means independently manages the progress of the game state, the progress of the game state does not require transmission of information from the second control means to the first control means. The situation can be grasped by the first control means.

In particular, by notifying different order information, it becomes possible to actively prevent the accidental occurrence of correct order events, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the content grasped by the first control means. Become.

As described above, by providing a plurality of control means, it is possible to achieve further optimization of the configuration in the configuration intended to reduce the processing load of each control means.

Feature J2. The second control means is a progress management means for managing the progress of an advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than a predetermined gaming state (non-AT state) (executing AT processing in the sub-side MPU 82). function),
The order notification control means notifies the selection order information according to the progress of the advantageous gaming state,
The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the different order notification control means notifies the different order information according to the progress of the advantageous game state.

According to the characteristic J2, the progress of the advantageous game state is independently managed by the second control means, so that the processing load of the first control means can be reduced. In this case, the selection order information is reported according to the progress of the advantageous game state, and the different order information is reported according to the progress of the advantageous game state. Thereby, even if the progress of the advantageous game state is independently managed by the second control means, the progress of the advantageous game state does not require transmission of information from the second control means to the first control means. The situation can be accurately grasped by the first control means.

Feature J3. The progress management means is a continuation setting for starting a new execution round of the advantageous game state after one execution round of the advantageous game state is completed when a condition for continuing the advantageous game state is established. Means (pre-branch AT state setting processing in the sub-side MPU 82 and a function of executing the processing of steps S2909 to S2911),
The order notification control means is configured to notify the selection order information when the execution times of the advantageous gaming state are continued by the continuation setting means,
The different order notification control means is characterized in that the different order information is notified in a situation different from a situation in which the execution times of the advantageous gaming state are continued by the continuation setting means. The gaming machine according to feature J2.

According to the feature J3, even if the progress of the advantageous game state is independently managed by the second control means, the advantageous game can be played without requiring transmission of information from the second control means to the first control means. It is possible to accurately grasp the occurrence of the state's consecutive residences.

Feature J4. The gaming machine according to feature J2 or J3, wherein the specified combination is a combination with the highest probability of winning in the combination lottery process at least in the advantageous gaming state.

According to the feature J4, it is possible to increase the chances of grasping the progress of the advantageous gaming state by the first control means, and when the progress of the advantageous gaming state changes, the first control means can quickly detect it. It is possible to grasp the

Feature J5. As a combination to be selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order-corresponding combination (a first bell combination and a second bell combination) that enables a prize to be awarded when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. and
The gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J4, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order-corresponding combination is achieved.

According to the feature J5, it is possible to reliably generate an order-corresponding winning combination in an advantageous gaming state, which is advantageous to the player.

Feature J6. The first control means controls the specific handling means (steps S3112 and S3404 in the main MPU 72) for executing specific handling processing based on the occurrence of the correct order event being specified multiple times by the order specifying means. function to execute the processing of
The second control means includes a second side order specifying means (function for executing the processing of steps S3510 and S3608 in the sub-side MPU 82) that specifies that the correct order event has occurred,
The different order notification control means is characterized in that the different order information is notified based on the fact that the occurrence of the correct order event is specified by the second side order specifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5.

According to feature J6, the first control means executes the specific handling process when the correct order event occurs multiple times. reduced. Further, the second control means executes notification of a different order when a correct order event occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the different order notification from being performed more than necessary.

Feature J7. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6, wherein the order selection means always selects the order when the prescribed combination is won in the combination lottery process.

According to the feature J7, when a regular combination is won, the selection of the order is always performed, so that the processing content is to grasp the progress of the game state independently managed by the second control means. You don't have to do anything like change the Therefore, simplification of the processing configuration is achieved.

Feature J8. The first control means controls specific output setting means (step S3112 and step A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J7, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of S3404.

According to the feature J8, even if the second control means independently manages the progress of the game state, the game can be played without transmitting information from the second control means to the first control means. It becomes possible to perform the external output setting corresponding to the progress of the state in the first control means.

Feature J9. Characteristic J8, characterized in that the specific output setting means performs external output setting for the specific response based on the occurrence of the correct order event being specified a plurality of times by the order specifying means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature J9, the possibility that the external output setting for the specific correspondence is performed when the correct order event occurs by chance is reduced.

Feature J10. The specified output setting means specifies that the occurrence of the correct order event is specified a plurality of times by the order specifying means without occurrence of an event that the correct order event does not occur when the prescribed combination is won. The game machine according to feature J9, wherein the external output setting corresponding to the specific correspondence is performed based on the fact that the game machine has been set.

According to the feature J10, the possibility that the external output setting for the specific response is performed when the correct order event happens by chance is reduced.

Feature J11. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J10, wherein when the specified combination is won, a prize is awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means in relation to the variable display position of the pattern. .

According to the feature J11, by purposely selecting the order in which the variable display of symbols should be stopped when a regular combination is won in which there is no so-called dropout, the player's profit is increased depending on whether or not the selection order information is notified. It does not change. As a result, restrictions are less likely to occur when notifying the selection order information.

Feature J12. A left variable display portion (left reel 32L), a middle variable display portion (middle reel 32M), and a right variable display portion (right reel 32R) are provided as the plurality of variable display portions,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J11, wherein the order selection means does not select the order in which the first stop order is the left variable display section.

According to feature J12, since the player generally stops the left variable display section first, the correct order event is accidentally generated by not selecting the order in which the first stop order is the left variable display section. It is possible to reduce the possibility of

Feature J13. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J12, wherein the specified combination is a replay combination.

According to the feature J13, it is possible to obtain the above effects by using the replay combination.

For the configuration of features J1 to J13, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H7, features I1-I16, features K1-K11, features L1-L9, features M1-M10, features N1-N13, features O1-O38, features P1-P25, features Q1-Q20, features R1-R11, features S1- Any one or more of S3, features T1 to T4, features U1 to U6, and features V1 to V11 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. A first control means (main-side MPU 72) and a second control means (sub-side MPU 82) that executes predetermined control based on transmission information transmitted by the first control means,
The second control means is
Notification control means (sub-side MPU 82 in a function of executing the processes of steps S1109 and S1806;
A second side end means (a function of executing the process of step S2913 in the sub-side MPU 82) that ends the second advantageous gaming state when the condition for ending the second advantageous gaming state is satisfied;
with
The first control means provides a first side end means (a function of executing the processing of step S1009 in the main side MPU 72) for ending the first advantageous game state when the condition for ending the first advantageous game state is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic K1, not only the first control means but also the second control means are provided as the control means, thereby reducing the processing load of the first control means. In addition, since the second control means makes it possible to give a privilege to the player in each of the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to diversify the advantageous gaming states. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the first control means.

In this case, it is not the second control means that decides whether the first advantageous game state or the second advantageous game state is terminated, but the first advantageous game state is decided whether the termination opportunity is determined by the first control means. done. As a result, it is possible to execute special processing in the first control means in accordance with the progress of the first advantageous game state, thereby reducing the processing load of the first control means and enhancing the presentation effect. It becomes possible.

As described above, by providing a plurality of control means, it is possible to achieve further optimization of the configuration in the configuration intended to reduce the processing load of each control means.

Feature K2. The first control means is progress standby setting means for setting a progress standby period (end wait time) for waiting the progress of the game in the game execution means (reel unit 31) according to the progress of the first advantageous gaming state. (a function of executing the processing of step S1011 in the main side MPU 72).

According to the feature K2, by setting the waiting period for progress according to the progress of the first advantageous gaming state, the progress of the first advantageous gaming state is given to the player through the setting of the waiting period for progress. It is possible to make the player recognize the situation.

Feature K3. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern;
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
One game is that the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, Variable display control means for controlling the pattern display means in each game (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a prize corresponding award means (a prize determination in the main side MPU 72) that gives a prize corresponding to the player based on the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process is displayed. function to perform processing) and
with
The gaming machine according to feature K2, wherein the progress standby setting means causes the progress of the game to wait by setting the progress standby period according to the progress of the first advantageous gaming state.

According to the feature K3, progress of the game is waited by setting the progress standby period according to the progress of the first advantageous gaming state. In this case, the player feels unexpected that the progress of the game has been delayed, and by grasping that the progress waiting period has been set, it is possible to grasp the progress of the first advantageous gaming state. Become.

Feature K4. The progress standby setting means starts measurement of the progress standby period after the variable display of the pattern is stopped,
The gaming machine according to feature K3, wherein the variable display control means waits for the start of the variable display of the pattern during the progress standby period.

According to the characteristic K4, when the waiting period for progress is set, the start of the variable display of the pattern is waited, so that the player can clearly recognize that the waiting period for progress is set. .

Feature K5. The game according to feature K4, characterized by comprising means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1109 and S1208 in the sub-side MPU 82) for executing the progress standby production during the progress standby period. machine.

According to the feature K5, it is possible to execute an effect in accordance with the progress of the first advantageous game state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Feature K6. a winning lottery executing means for executing a winning lottery process (a function of executing the lottery process in the main side MPU 72);
Winning response granting means (function for executing winning determination processing in the main side MPU 72) that grants a winning corresponding privilege when a winning corresponding to a winning combination occurs in the winning combination lottery process;
with
The first control means at least confirms that the corresponding result, which is either the result of the winning combination lottery process or the winning result, is the first corresponding result (first to third special replay winning combinations, losing result). First result correspondence transition means for shifting the game state to the first advantageous game state as one condition (function to execute the processing of steps S802 to S803, steps S809 to S810 and steps S903 to S904 in the main side MPU 72 ),
The second control means is
A second result correspondence transition means (steps S1614 to S1614 in the sub-side MPU 82) for shifting the game state to the second advantageous game state under at least one condition that the correspondence result becomes the second correspondence result (normal replay winning) a function to execute the processing of step S1617);
Event response transition means for shifting the game state to the second advantageous game state under at least one condition that an event different from the response result becomes a response event (executes the processing of steps S1709 to S1712 in the sub-side MPU 82 function) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5, characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic K6, the transition pattern is different between the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state, thereby diversifying the game and improving the interest of the game. In this case, by making the transition pattern of the second advantageous game state more complicated than the transition pattern of the first advantageous game state, the processing load of the first control means is reduced while diversifying the game. becomes possible.

Feature K7. The first control means is a first continuation for starting a new execution round of the first advantageous gaming state based on the establishment of a first continuation condition when one execution round of the first advantageous gaming state is completed. means (function for executing the process of step S219 in the main MPU 72),
The second control means is a second continuation for starting a new execution round of the second advantageous gaming state based on the establishment of a second continuation condition when one execution round of the second advantageous gaming state is completed. Means (a function of executing the pre-branch AT state setting processing in the sub-side MPU 82 and the processing of steps S2909 to S2911),
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, wherein the number of patterns satisfying the second continuation condition is greater than the number of patterns satisfying the first continuation condition.

According to the feature K7, by differentiating the establishment pattern of the continuation condition between the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state, the game can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved. In this case, since the number of establishment patterns of the continuation condition for the second advantageous gaming state is more than the number of establishment patterns for the continuation condition for the first advantageous gaming state, the processing load of the first control means is reduced while the game is played. It will be possible to diversify

Feature K8. The second control means is
When the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied in the second advantageous gaming state (the privilege point is won in the privilege point lottery process), the privilege numerical value information (privilege point) is stored in the privilege storage means (the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84). storage executing means for storing (function for executing the processes of steps S2005, S2007, S2011 and S2504 in the sub-side MPU 82);
Privilege standard determination means (step S2301 in the sub-side MPU 82) that determines whether or not the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the privilege standard numerical value when a judgment trigger occurs. and a function to execute the processing of step S2609);
with
Characteristics K1 to K7 characterized in that a new execution of the second advantageous gaming state is started when the privilege criterion determining means determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege criterion numerical value. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature K8, when the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied in the second advantageous gaming state, the stored privilege numerical value information becomes information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference value, thereby continuing the second advantageous gaming state. , In the second advantageous game state, the player plays the game while expecting that the privilege numerical condition is satisfied and expects that the privilege numerical information corresponds to a value equal to or larger than the privilege reference value. becomes. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved. In this case, since the continuation setting of the second advantageous game state in relation to the privilege numerical information is performed by the second control means, the processing load of the first control means is reduced, and the amusement of the game is improved. becomes possible.

Feature K9. The second control means, when a continuation lottery trigger occurs, determines whether or not to start a new execution round of the advantageous game state after one execution round of the advantageous game state is completed. Continuous lottery execution means for executing the process (function for executing the process of step S2309 in the sub-side MPU 82),
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K8, wherein a new execution round of the second advantageous gaming state is started when the winning is continued in the continuous lottery process.

According to the feature K9, the second advantageous gaming state continues when the winning is continued in the continuous lottery process, so the player plays the game expecting to win continuously in the second advantageous gaming state. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved. In this case, since the continuation setting of the second advantageous game state in relation to the continuation lottery process is performed by the second control means, the processing load of the first control means is reduced, and the interest in the game is improved. becomes possible.

Feature K10. a winning lottery execution means for executing a winning lottery process (a function of executing the lottery process in the main side MPU 72);
Winning response granting means (function for executing winning determination processing in the main side MPU 72) that grants a winning corresponding privilege when a winning corresponding to a winning combination occurs in the winning combination lottery process;
with
The first control means performs the remaining execution of the first advantageous gaming state under at least one condition that the corresponding result, which is either the result of the winning combination lottery process or the result of the winning, becomes the first corresponding result. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K9, further comprising number setting means for setting the number of times (a function of executing the processes of steps S803, S810 and S904 in the main MPU 72).

According to the characteristic K10, since the first advantageous game state can be played continuously, the player plays the game expecting the first advantageous game state to be played consecutively, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, since the number of remaining executions of the first advantageous game state is set in relation to the result of the combination lottery process or the result of winning a prize, the processing load of the first control means is reduced and the interest in the game is improved. It is possible to plan

Feature K11. pattern display means (reel unit 31) including a plurality of variable display units for variably displaying patterns;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern;
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display portions and operated to stop the variable display of patterns in the corresponding variable display portions;
The variable display of the pattern on the plurality of variable display portions is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display portion corresponding to the stop operation means is operated on the basis of the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main side MPU 72) that controls the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern is stopped in
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a prize corresponding award means (a prize determination in the main side MPU 72) that gives a prize corresponding to the player based on the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process is displayed. function to perform processing) and
with
As a combination to be selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order-corresponding combination (a first bell combination and a second bell combination) that enables a prize to be awarded when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. and
Any one of the characteristics K1 to K10, wherein the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state are gaming states in which the predetermined order is notified when the order-corresponding combination is won. game machine.

In a game machine like the feature K11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features K1 to K11, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H7, features I1-I16, features J1-J13, features L1-L9, features M1-M10, features N1-N13, features O1-O38, features P1-P25, features Q1-Q20, features R1-R11, features S1- Any one or more of S3, features T1 to T4, features U1 to U6, and features V1 to V11 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each invention of the characteristic group I, the characteristic group J, and the characteristic group K can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, lottery processing is executed by the control means by operating the start lever while medals are being bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Further, in a slot machine, there is known a configuration in which an effect device such as a liquid crystal display device is provided in addition to the reel device, and the game is made more interesting through the effect executed by the effect device. In addition, in the configuration in which the production device is provided in this way, production control means is provided separately from the main control means for performing the lottery process and reel driving control, and the production control means is controlled by the production control means. Also known is a configuration designed to reduce the processing load of the main control means.

Here, it is necessary to further optimize the configuration in the configuration that aims to reduce the processing load of each control means by providing a plurality of control means as in the above example, and there is still room for improvement in this respect. be.

<Characteristic group L>
Feature L1. pattern display means (reel unit 31) including a plurality of variable display units for variably displaying patterns;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern;
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display portions and operated to stop the variable display of patterns in the corresponding variable display portions;
The variable display of the pattern on the plurality of variable display portions is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display portion corresponding to the stop operation means is operated on the basis of the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main side MPU 72) that controls the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern is stopped in
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a prize corresponding award means (a prize determination in the main side MPU 72) that gives a prize corresponding to the player based on the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process is displayed. function to perform processing) and
In a game machine equipped with
As the winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, an order-corresponding combination (a first bell combination and a first bell combination) that enables an order-based prize to occur when the variable display of patterns on the plurality of variable display units is stopped in a predetermined order. 2 bell roles) exist,
a first control means (main side MPU 72) having the combination lottery execution means and the variable display control means;
a second control means (sub-side MPU 82) for executing notification control so that the predetermined order is notified when the order-corresponding combination is won in an advantageous gaming state (normal AT state);
with
The first control means is
Winning identification means (function for executing the process of step S3203 in the main side MPU 72) for identifying whether or not the order-corresponding prize has occurred when the order-corresponding combination is won;
First setting means ( a function of executing the process of step S3105 in the main MPU 72;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature L1, not only the first control means but also the second control means are provided as the control means, thereby reducing the processing load of the first control means. In addition, since the notification control in a predetermined order in the advantageous game state is performed by the second control means, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the first control means in a configuration in which the interest in the game is improved by setting the advantageous game state. be done.

In this case, the first control means performs an external output setting indicating an advantageous gaming state when it is specified that an order-based winning has occurred when the order-based combination is won. As a result, even if the second control means independently manages the progress of the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state does not require transmission of information from the second control means to the first control means. It is possible to set the external output to indicate that.

As described above, it is possible to suitably perform external output.

Feature L2. The first setting means is configured to set an external output indicating that the advantageous gaming state is established when the number of times that the order-based winning specified by the winning specifying means has occurred is a specified number of times specified as a plurality of times. The gaming machine according to feature L1, characterized in that it performs

According to the feature L2, the possibility that an external output setting indicating an advantageous gaming state is performed when an order-based winning happens by chance is reduced.

Feature L3. The first setting means sets the number of times that the order-based winning is specified by the winning specifying means without specifying that the order-based winning has not occurred by the winning specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature L2, wherein an external output setting is performed to indicate that the advantageous gaming state is reached when a specific number of occurrences defined as .

According to the feature L3, the possibility that an external output setting indicating an advantageous gaming state is performed when an order-based winning happens by chance is reduced.

Feature L4. A left variable display portion (left reel 32L), a middle variable display portion (middle reel 32M), and a right variable display portion (right reel 32R) are provided as the plurality of variable display portions,
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, wherein the predetermined order does not include an order in which the first stop order is the left variable display portion.

According to feature L4, since the player generally stops the left variable display portion first, the order in which the first stop order is the left variable display portion is not included in the predetermined order, so that the order-based winning occurs by chance. It is possible to reduce the possibility of occurrence.

Feature L5. Disadvantage of generating a disadvantageous event for the player based on first stopping the variable display of the pattern on the variable display section different from the left variable display section in the predetermined game state which is not the advantageous game state. The gaming machine according to feature L4, characterized by comprising setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1408 and S1411 in the sub-side MPU 82).

According to the feature L5, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the order-based winning occurring accidentally in the predetermined game state.

Feature L6. The first control means, based on the fact that the win specifying means has specified that the order-dependent winning has not occurred when the order-corresponding combination has been won, indicates that the winning state is not the advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, characterized by comprising second setting means for setting output (a function of executing the process of step S3107 in the main MPU 72).

According to the feature L6, whether or not order-based winning occurs in both cases of external output setting indicating an advantageous gaming state and external output setting indicating that it is not an advantageous gaming state. should be monitored. This reduces the types of events to be monitored and reduces the processing load.

Feature L7. The first setting means performs an external output setting indicating the advantageous gaming state when the number of times the win specifying means has specified that the order-based winning has occurred reaches a first specified number of times. and
The second setting means performs an external output setting indicating that the advantageous gaming state is not achieved when the number of times the winning specifying means specifies that the order-based winning has not occurred reaches a second specified number of times. and
The gaming machine according to feature L6, wherein the first specific number of times and the second specific number of times are different.

According to the feature L7, it is monitored whether or not an order-based winning has occurred in both cases of external output setting indicating an advantageous gaming state and external output setting indicating that it is not an advantageous gaming state. In this configuration, it is possible to set the execution timing and accuracy of the external output setting according to the type of each external output setting.

Feature L8. The gaming machine according to feature L7, wherein the first specific number of times is greater than the second specific number of times.

According to the characteristic L8, it is possible to perform the external output setting indicating the advantageous gaming state with high accuracy while enabling the external output setting indicating that the advantageous gaming state is not obtained at an early stage.

Feature L9. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L8, wherein a plurality of wins are included as the order-corresponding win.

According to the feature L9, it is possible to set the external output at an early stage in response to an advantageous game state while increasing the degree of freedom in setting the winning probability of each combination.

For the configuration of features L1 to L9, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H7, features I1-I16, features J1-J13, features K1-K11, features M1-M10, features N1-N13, features O1-O38, features P1-P25, features Q1-Q20, features R1-R11, features S1- Any one or more of S3, features T1 to T4, features U1 to U6, and features V1 to V11 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The invention having the characteristic group L can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, lottery processing is executed by the control means by operating the start lever while medals are being bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, information is output to the outside in order to allow the management computer of the gaming hall to recognize the state of the gaming machine. There is room.

<Characteristic group M>
Feature M1. a winning lottery execution means for executing a winning lottery process (a function of executing the lottery process in the main side MPU 72);
Winning response granting means (function for executing winning determination processing in the main side MPU 72) that grants a winning corresponding privilege when a winning corresponding to a winning combination occurs in the winning combination lottery process;
with
As a winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, there is a winning maintenance combination (CB combination) that maintains the winning state until the corresponding prize is generated in the event of winning,
The gaming machine puts the player in an advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than a predetermined gaming state (non-AT state) under at least one condition that the winning maintenance hand is in a winning state. A game machine characterized by comprising advantageous transition means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1614 to S1617 and steps S1709 to S1712 in the sub-side MPU 82) for transitioning.

According to the feature M1, since the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs when the winning sustaining combination is in the winning state, it is possible to limit the period during which the transition to the advantageous gaming state is possible in relation to the winning combination. Become. As a result, the player pays attention to winning the winning sustaining role and maintaining the winning state of the winning sustaining role. As described above, it is possible to provide novel game contents.

It should be noted that "picture display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a picture,
a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
One game is that the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, Variable display control means for controlling the pattern display means in each game (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
with
The winning lottery execution means executes the winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated,
The winning correspondence providing means provides the winning correspondence privilege as a prize occurrence when a stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process is displayed when the variable display of the symbols is stopped,
Even if the win maintenance role is won, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the winning corresponding to the win maintenance role by the operation mode of the stop operation means." Winning corresponding to the winning combination can be generated and can be avoided, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Feature M2. When a prize corresponding to the winning maintenance combination occurs, a non-advantageous transition means (main side) for shifting to a non-advantageous game state in which the number of game media for the player at the end is not greater than the number of game media for the player at the start The gaming machine according to feature M1, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S704 to S706 in the MPU 72.

According to feature M2, in the event that a winning sustaining combination is won, if the winning is generated, the game transitions to a non-advantageous gaming state, but if the winning is not generated, a transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs. there's a possibility that. As a result, it is possible to greatly differentiate the player's profit depending on whether or not the win of the winning sustaining role is generated, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the winning state of the winning sustaining role.

Feature M3. The gaming machine according to feature M2, wherein the non-advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the number of game media for the player at the end is the same as the number of game media for the player at the start.

According to the feature M3, when the win of the winning maintenance combination is generated, not only does the opportunity to shift to the advantageous game state disappear, but also the state shifts to the non-advantageous game state. is not expected to increase, but there is no decrease. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling of the player who unintentionally caused the winning of the win-maintaining combination.

Feature M4. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
One game is that the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, Variable display control means for controlling the pattern display means in each game (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
with
The winning lottery execution means executes the winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated,
The winning correspondence providing means provides the winning correspondence privilege as a prize occurrence when a stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process is displayed when the variable display of the symbols is stopped,
The gaming machine according to feature M2 or M3, wherein the non-advantageous gaming state is a gaming state that continues over a plurality of games.

According to the feature M4, it is possible to make a big difference in the player's profit depending on whether or not the win of the winning sustaining role is generated, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the winning state of the winning sustaining role. .

Feature M5. Winning notification means (internal state notifying unit 63, function of executing step S707 in main side MPU 72) for executing winning state notification that the winning maintenance hand is in a winning state is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features M1 to M4.

According to the feature M5, it is possible to urge the player not to win the prize when the winning sustaining combination is won.

Feature M6. External setting means for performing external output setting indicating that it is the advantageous gaming state (function for executing the processing of steps S3105, S3404 and S3406 in the main side MPU 72),
The winning notification means, when the winning maintenance hand is in a winning state, starts the winning state notification before an external output setting indicating the advantageous gaming state is performed. The gaming machine according to feature M5, characterized by:

According to the feature M6, it is possible to notify the player that the winning sustaining combination has been won before notifying the outside of the gaming machine.

Feature M7. pattern display means (reel unit 31) including a plurality of variable display units (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying patterns;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display portions and operated to stop the variable display of patterns in the corresponding variable display portions;
The variable display of the pattern on the plurality of variable display portions is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display portion corresponding to the stop operation means is operated on the basis of the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main side MPU 72) that controls the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern is stopped in
with
The winning lottery execution means executes the winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated,
The winning correspondence providing means gives the winning correspondence privilege as a prize occurrence when a stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process is displayed when the variable display of the symbols is stopped,
When the winning sustaining combination is won in the winning combination lottery process, the winning informing means waits until the variable display of the pattern on the variable display section to be finally stopped can be stopped. The game machine according to feature M5 or M6, characterized in that it is one that allows status notification to be started.

According to the feature M7, it is possible to make the player recognize that the winning sustaining role has been won before the winning corresponding to the winning sustaining role occurs in the game in which the winning sustaining role is won. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of the prize winning corresponding to the winning maintenance role.

Feature M8. The winning notifying means is adapted to start the winning state notification before an operation to stop the variable display of the pattern becomes possible in the game when the winning sustaining combination is won in the winning combination lottery process. The game machine according to feature M7, characterized in that it

According to the feature M8, it is possible for the player to recognize that he/she has won the winning maintenance combination before the variable display of the pattern in the game is started, thereby avoiding the occurrence of the winning corresponding to the winning maintenance combination. becomes possible.

Feature M9. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
One game is that the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, Variable display control means for controlling the pattern display means in each game (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
with
The winning lottery execution means executes the winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated,
wherein the means for giving prizes for winning awards the privilege for winning as a prize when the variable display of the symbols is stopped and a stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features M1 to M8.

In a game machine like the feature M9, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature M10. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display part of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts variable display of patterns on the plurality of variable display portions based on the operation of the start operation means, and controls the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
As a combination to be selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order-corresponding combination (a first bell combination and a second bell combination) that enables a prize to be awarded when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. and
The gaming machine according to feature M9, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order-corresponding combination is achieved.

In a game machine like the feature M10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features M1 to M10, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H7, features I1-I16, features J1-J13, features K1-K11, features L1-L9, features N1-N13, features O1-O38, features P1-P25, features Q1-Q20, features R1-R11, features S1- Any one or more of S3, features T1 to T4, features U1 to U6, and features V1 to V11 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic N group>
Feature N1. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern;
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
One game is that the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, Variable display control means for controlling the pattern display means in each game (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped and the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process is displayed, the winning correspondence giving means (winning judgment processing in the main side MPU 72) that gives the winning correspondence privilege as a winning occurrence function) and
A first transition means (a function of executing the processing of steps S704 to S706 in the main side MPU 72) that shifts to the first gaming state (CB state) when the first transition condition is satisfied;
Second transition means for transitioning to the second game state (bonus AT state) when the second transition condition is satisfied functions to perform) and
When a predetermined number of continuous games are executed in the second game state, the game end means for ending one execution of the second game state (executes the processing of steps S1007 to S1012 in the main MPU 72 function) and
Priority means ( a function of executing the process of step S706 in the main MPU 72;
The number-of-games management means (the processing of step S1005 in the main side MPU 72) that treats the number of games executed under the situation where the game content of the first game state is prioritized by the priority means as the number of the predetermined number of continuous games. functions to perform) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic N1, when the first transition condition is satisfied in the game in which the transition condition to the second game state is satisfied or in the second game state, the game contents of the first game state are prioritized. In this case, instead of completely stopping the progress to the second game state, the number of games executed in the situation where the game content of the first game state is prioritized is the predetermined number of continuous games in the second game state. Treated as digestible. As a result, the player may, for example, prevent the transition to the first game state from occurring in the second game state, or expect the transition to the first game state from occurring in the second game state, for example, In the second game state, the player intentionally shifts to the first game state, or, for example, in the second game state, the player expects that the player intentionally shifts to the first game state. As described above, it is possible to provide novel game contents.

It should be noted that a configuration may be applied in which "the first game state is a game state that continues over a plurality of games".

Feature N2. After the end condition of the first game state is established, the second transition means shifts to the second game state in a situation where the game content of the first game state is prioritized by the priority means. Transition means (a function of making affirmative determinations in steps S1103 and S1104 in the sub-side MPU 82 and executing the processing of step S1106),
In the second game state shifted by the transition control of the post-end transition means, the game-response ending means, when the remaining game number of the predetermined number of continuous games at the time when the transition control occurred, is completed. The gaming machine according to feature N1, characterized in that it terminates the execution round.

According to the characteristic N2, in the game in which the transition condition to the second game state is established or in the second game state, when the transition to the first game state occurs, the second game state is entered after the first game state ends. However, the second game state ends when the remaining predetermined number of continuous games after the number of games executed in the first game state is subtracted. As a result, it is possible to associate the first game state and the second game state with each other, and to provide novel game contents, as compared with a configuration that simply disables the transition to the second game state. Become.

Feature N3. The post-completion transition means, after the conditions for terminating the first game state are established under a situation in which the game content of the first game state is prioritized by the priority means, and the winning state of the winning maintenance hand. The gaming machine according to feature N2, characterized in that the game machine shifts to the second game state when it becomes.

According to the feature N3, the second game state is not started immediately after the first game state is finished, but the second game state is not started until the win state of the winning sustaining hand is achieved. As a result, the player who expects the transition to the second game state will pay attention to whether or not the win maintenance combination will be won after the first game state ends, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Feature N4. The number-of-games management means determines that the winning state of the winning maintenance hand is after the end condition of the first gaming state is satisfied under the situation where the game contents of the first gaming state are prioritized by the priority means. The gaming machine according to feature N3, wherein the number of games that have been executed until the game reaches the predetermined number of continuous games is treated as the number of games that have been completed.

According to the feature N4, the amount of games required until the win state of the win maintaining combination after the end of the first game state is treated as the amount of the predetermined number of continued games in the second game state. As a result, the player who expects to shift to the second game state expects to win the win-maintenance role by the time the game for the predetermined number of continuous games is completed after the end of the first game state. By playing a game, the interest in the game is improved.

Feature N5. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N4, wherein the second gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.

According to feature N5, the player expects that the transition to the first game state will not occur in the second game state, or that the transition to the first game state will not occur in the second game state. As a result, the degree of attention to the game in the second game state is improved. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

Feature N6. The gaming machine according to feature N5, wherein the first game state is a game state in which the number of game media for the player at the end is not greater than the number of game media for the player at the start.

According to the feature N6, the player's profit greatly differs depending on whether or not the transition to the first game state occurs in the second game state. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the second game state, and to improve the interest in the game.

Feature N7. The gaming machine according to feature N6, wherein the first game state is a game state in which the number of game media for the player at the end is the same as the number of game media for the player at the start.

According to the feature N7, in the first game state, an increase in the amount of game media cannot be expected, but a decrease does not occur. This makes it possible to reduce the player's sense of disadvantage when the transition to the first game state occurs.

Feature N8. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for the pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display part of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts the variable display of the pattern on the plurality of variable display portions based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
As a combination to be selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order-corresponding combination (a first bell combination and a second bell combination) that enables a prize to be awarded when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. and
The gaming machine according to any one of features N5 to N7, wherein the second gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order-corresponding combination is achieved.

According to the feature N8, since the predetermined order is notified in the second game state, the game state is advantageous for the player.

Feature N9. As a winning combination selected by the winning combination lottery process, there is a winning maintenance combination (CB combination) that maintains the winning state until the corresponding prize is generated in the event of winning,
The first transition condition is that a prize corresponding to the winning maintenance role is generated,
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N8, wherein the second transition condition is satisfied as at least one condition that the winning sustaining hand is in a winning state.

According to the feature N9, it is possible to cause a transition to the second game state by maintaining the winning state of the winning sustaining combination, and the second gaming state is reached when a prize corresponding to the winning sustaining combination is generated. However, the game state is shifted to the first game state, and the number of games completed in the first game state is subtracted from the predetermined number of continuous games. As a result, it is possible to largely change the subsequent progress of the game depending on whether or not the winning corresponding to the win-maintenance role is generated, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the winning state of the win-maintenance role. Become.

In addition, by applying the configuration that ``even if the winning maintenance combination is won, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the winning corresponding to the winning maintenance combination according to the operation mode of the stop operation means'', the operation of the stop operation means can be performed. Depending on the aspect, it is possible to generate and avoid a winning prize corresponding to the win-maintenance combination, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Feature N10. The second game state has a higher advantage for the player than the first game state,
Winning notification means (internal state notifying unit 63, function of executing step S707 in main side MPU 72) for executing winning state notification that the winning maintenance hand is in a winning state is provided. The gaming machine according to characterizing feature N9.

According to the feature N10, it is possible to urge the player not to win the prize when the winning sustaining combination is won.

Feature N11. External setting means for performing external output setting indicating that it is the second game state (function for executing the processing of steps S3118, S3408 and S3703 in the main side MPU 72),
The winning notifying means is adapted to start the winning state notification until the external output setting indicating the second game state is performed when the winning state of the winning maintenance hand is established. The gaming machine according to feature N10, characterized by:

According to the feature N11, it is possible to notify the player that the winning sustaining combination has been won before notifying the outside of the gaming machine.

Feature N12. The pattern display means includes a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for the pattern,
A plurality of stop operation means are provided corresponding to the variable display part of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts the variable display of the pattern on the plurality of variable display portions based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display means is controlled so that the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
The winning notifying means is adapted to start the winning state notification before the variable display of all the patterns on the variable display section is stopped when the winning sustaining combination is won in the winning lottery process. The game machine according to feature N10 or N11, characterized in that

According to feature N12, it is possible to make the player recognize that the winning sustaining role has been won before the winning corresponding to the winning sustaining role occurs in the game in which the winning sustaining role is won. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of the prize winning corresponding to the winning maintenance role.

Feature N13. The win notification means starts the winning state notification before the variable display of the pattern is started in the game when the winning sustaining combination is won in the winning combination lottery process. The gaming machine according to feature N12, characterized by:

According to the characteristic N13, it is possible for the player to recognize that the winning maintenance combination has been won before the variable display of the pattern in the game is started, thereby avoiding the occurrence of the winning corresponding to the winning maintenance combination. becomes possible.

For the configuration of features N1 to N13, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H7, features I1-I16, features J1-J13, features K1-K11, features L1-L9, features M1-M10, features O1-O38, features P1-P25, features Q1-Q20, features R1-R11, features S1- Any one or more of S3, features T1 to T4, features U1 to U6, and features V1 to V11 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each of the inventions of the M group of features and the N group of features can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, lottery processing is executed by the control means by operating the start lever while medals are being bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, it is necessary to provide innovative game contents in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group O>
Features O1. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
A game of one game is started by starting the variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A game control means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main side MPU 72) that ends the game of the one game by
setting means (function for executing a precursor setting process in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting an expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15, false precursor state) that continues over a plurality of games when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Expectation effect control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1109 to S1111 in the sub-side MPU 82) that allows the player to expect the occurrence of the award of the privilege in each game in the expectation state )When,
with
The expected performance control means completes the expected state according to the contents determined when starting the expected state being executed even if the predetermined condition is newly established in the expected state.

According to the feature O1, an expectation effect is executed that enables the player to expect the awarding of a privilege in each game by entering the expectation state. As a result, the player who confirms the expected effect expects the awarding of the privilege, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Further, even if the predetermined condition is newly satisfied in the expected state, the expected state is completed according to the contents determined when starting the expected state being executed. This eliminates the need to adjust the mode of execution of the expected state even if the predetermined condition is newly established in the middle of the expected state, thereby reducing the processing load for executing the expected state.

As described above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the configuration provided with the winning lottery executing means (the function of executing the lottery processing in the main side MPU 72) for executing the winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated, the role may A configuration in which the form of the lottery process is not changed may be adopted, and the winning lottery executing means (function for executing the lottery process in the main side MPU 72) for executing the winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated, and the variable of the pattern. When the display is stopped, a prize-corresponding giving means (executing a prize-winning determination process in the main MPU 72) gives a prize-corresponding privilege to the player based on the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process. function), it may be configured such that the awarding mode of the award-corresponding benefit is not changed depending on whether or not it is in the expected state.

Further, the predetermined condition may be a condition that is satisfied 100% when an event recognizable by the player occurs, and a predetermined probability (less than 100%) when an event recognizable by the player occurs It may be a condition to be established.

Feature O2. As the expected state, there are a first expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15) in which the privilege is provided after the end, and a second expected state (false precursor state) in which the privilege is not provided after the end,
The setting means sets the first expected state to the first expected state when a first predetermined condition corresponding to the provision of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the activation lottery process of the sub-side MPU 82 wins the activation lottery), setting to the second expected state when a second predetermined condition not corresponding to the granting of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the sub-side MPU 82 wins the false omen occurrence lottery process);
The expected performance control means completes the second expected state according to the content determined when starting the second expected state being executed even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state. The gaming machine according to feature O1.

According to the feature O2, since not only the first expected state but also the second expected state exists, the expected effect is executed over a plurality of games even in a situation where the privilege is not actually given. It is possible to improve interest. In this case, even if the second predetermined condition is newly satisfied in the second expected state, the second expected state is completed according to the content determined when starting the second expected state being executed. As a result, even if the second predetermined condition is newly established in the middle of the second expected state, there is no need to adjust the execution mode of the second expected state, thereby reducing the processing load in executing the second expected state. is planned.

Feature O3. The expected effect control means completes the second expected state according to the content determined when starting the second expected state being executed even if the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state. The gaming machine according to feature O2.

According to feature O3, in the second expected state that does not lead to the granting of a privilege, even if the first predetermined condition that triggers the execution of the first expected state that leads to the granting of a privilege is satisfied, the second expected state that is being executed is started. The second expected state is completed according to the content determined when the second expected state is determined. As a result, even if the first predetermined condition is newly established in the middle of the second expected state, there is no need to adjust the execution mode of the second expected state, so the processing load in executing the second expected state is reduced. is planned.

Feature O4. The expectation effect control means, in either the first expectation state or the second expectation state, controls the expectation effect according to the content determined when starting the expectation state being executed even if the predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature O2 or O3, characterized by completing a state.

According to feature O4, in either the first expected state or the second expected state, even if the predetermined condition is newly established, the expected state is set according to the content determined when starting the expected state being executed. be completed. This eliminates the need to adjust the mode of execution of the expected state even if the predetermined condition is newly established during the expected state, thereby reducing the processing load in executing the expected state.

Feature O5. The expected effect control means continues the expected state over the number of games determined when the expected state is started, and even if the predetermined condition is newly established in the expected state, the determination is made. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O4, wherein the number of games played is not changed.

According to feature O5, even if the predetermined condition is newly established in the middle of the expectation state, there is no need to adjust the number of games to be continued in the expectation state, so the processing load for executing the expectation state can be reduced.

Feature O6. The expected effect control means is an effect content determination means (steps S3815, S3818 and S step S3823 in the sub-side MPU 82) that determines the effect content of each game that continues in the expected state when the expected state is started. function to execute processing), and even if the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, the decided effect contents of each game are not changed. The game machine described.

According to the feature O6, when the expectation state is started, the effect contents of each game that continues in the expectation state are determined, so there is no need to determine or adjust the effect contents during the expectation state. In addition, even if the predetermined condition is newly established in the middle of the expectation state, there is no need to adjust the effect content of each game in the expectation state. As described above, the processing load for executing the expected state can be reduced.

Feature O7. a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a prize corresponding award means (a prize determination in the main side MPU 72) that gives a prize corresponding to the player based on the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process is displayed. function to perform processing) and
Ceiling-matching granting for granting a predetermined privilege or a privilege different from the above-mentioned privilege when the number of ceiling games is played without the prescribed privilege being one of the privilege and the privilege different from it being granted. means (the function of executing the processes of steps S1709 to S1712 in the sub-side MPU 82);
A ceiling effect control means (sub-side MPU 82) for performing an expected effect in a ceiling expected state (ceiling game precursor state ST13) that continues over the specific number of games from a state before the specific number of games with respect to the ceiling game number. A function to execute the processing of steps S1109 to S1111 and steps S1707 to S1708 in
with
The establishment of the predetermined condition is the occurrence of a set trigger event that is at least one of the winning of the trigger role in the role lottery process and the granting of the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role, or The predetermined condition is established based on the occurrence of a setting trigger event that is at least one of winning the trigger role in the role lottery process and granting the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role. ,
In a situation where the number of remaining games of the ceiling game number is equal to or less than the sum of the upper limit number of games and the specific number of games, a start prevention means for preventing a new start of the expected state (the process of step S3809 in the sub-side MPU 82 A gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O6, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the feature O7, since a privilege is awarded when the number of ceiling games is played, an opportunity to award a privilege can be reliably generated. In addition, since the number of ceiling games is set to a ceiling expectation state from before a specific number of games and an expectation effect is performed, it is possible to heighten the expectation of awarding of the privilege, and the interest of the game is improved. In this case, when the number of games remaining in the number of ceiling games is equal to or less than the sum of the upper limit number of games in the expectation state and the specific number of games in the ceiling expectation state, a new start of the expectation state is prevented. This prevents the occurrence of the ceiling expectation state in the middle of the expectation state, or the occurrence of the ceiling expectation state in the middle of the ceiling expectation state, and reduces the processing load in executing the expectation state and the ceiling expectation state. be done.

Feature O8. Waiting information setting means for setting waiting information (information of the stock game counter 84b) for enabling a new expected state to start after the expected state ends when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O7, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of steps S3907 and S4015 in the sub-side MPU 82 .

According to feature O8, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in an expected state, the expected state is newly started after the expected state ends. This makes it possible to increase the chances of the expected state being executed.

Feature O9. The standby information setting means is characterized in that, when the predetermined condition is satisfied a plurality of times in the expected state, the standby information can be set corresponding to the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied a plurality of times. The gaming machine according to feature O8.

According to the feature O9, when the predetermined condition is satisfied multiple times in the expected state, the wait information is set accordingly, so that it is possible to diversify the manner in which the execution of the expected state is waited.

Feature O10. The waiting information setting means sets the number of games to be continued in a new expected state to be started after the end of the expected information to increase when the predetermined condition is met in the expected state more times. The gaming machine according to feature O8 or O9, characterized by:

According to the feature O10, the number of times the predetermined condition is met in the expected state increases the number of games to be continued in the expected state after the end of the expected state. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of improving the interest in the game through the execution of the expected state.

Feature O11. As the expected state, there are a first expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15) in which the privilege is provided after the end, and a second expected state (false precursor state) in which the privilege is not provided after the end,
The setting means sets the first expected state to the first expected state when a first predetermined condition corresponding to the provision of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the activation lottery process of the sub-side MPU 82 wins the activation lottery), setting to the second expected state when a second predetermined condition not corresponding to the granting of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the sub-side MPU 82 wins the false omen occurrence lottery process);
The gaming machine according to any one of features O8 to O10, wherein the standby information setting means sets the standby information when the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state.

According to the feature O11, by setting the standby information when the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the second expected state is executed, and increase the probability of awarding the privilege. It is possible to generate many situations that raise the expectations of the player without increasing the price.

Feature O12. The game according to feature O11, wherein the standby information setting means does not set the standby information even if the second predetermined condition is not satisfied in the first expected state or the second predetermined condition is satisfied. machine.

According to feature O12, it is possible to prevent the second expected state from starting immediately after the first expected state ends and the privilege is granted without intervening the establishment of the second predetermined condition. .

As a more specific configuration of feature O12, "the standby information setting means includes a number-of-games determining means for determining the number of games to be continued in the expected state when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state ( a function of executing the processing of steps S3913 and S4014 in the sub-side MPU 82); standby information storage means (stock game counter 84b) that stores information on the number of continuous games determined by the game number determination means as the standby information; , and even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the first expected state, the processing for storing the information on the number of continued games in the standby information storage means is not executed.

Feature O13. The gaming machine according to feature O11 or O12, wherein the standby information setting means sets the standby information even when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state.

According to feature O13, in the configuration in which the second expected state being executed is continued even when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, standby information is set when the first predetermined condition is satisfied. After the end of the second expected state, the privilege is given after the first expected state is executed. Thereby, even if the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the first expected state can be generated before the award is given.

Feature O14. The standby information setting means
a game number determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3913 and S4014 in the sub-side MPU 82) for determining the number of games to be continued in the expected state when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state;
standby information storage means (stock game counter 84b) for storing information on the number of continuous games determined by the game number determination means as the standby information;
The gaming machine according to any one of features O8 to O13, characterized by comprising:

According to feature O14, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, the information on the number of games to be continued is stored as standby information. There is no need to determine the number of games. In particular, in a configuration in which the number of continuous games changes according to the content of the predetermined condition, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for determining the number of continuous games.

Feature O15. The standby information storage means stores information on the total number of continuous games determined by the game number determination means each time the predetermined condition is met in the expected state, and
When the expected state ends and the information stored in the waiting information storage means is information corresponding to the number of continuous games equal to or greater than 1, the expected performance control means stores the information in the waiting information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature O14, wherein the expected state continues over the number of continuous games played.

According to the feature O15, when the predetermined condition is satisfied multiple times in the expected state, the number of times the expected state is executed is not added, but the number of continuous games in the expected state is added once. It is possible to prevent the number of executions of the expected state from becoming excessively large. In addition, no matter how many times the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, it is only necessary to add the information on the number of continued games, so it is necessary to collectively perform the processing according to the number of times the predetermined condition is satisfied after the expected state being executed ends. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature O16. The gaming machine according to feature O15, wherein the standby information storage means stores the information on the number of continuous games within a range of an upper limit number of games defined as a plurality of times.

According to the feature O16, it is possible to prevent the number of expected continued games from becoming excessively large.

Feature O17. a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a prize corresponding award means (a prize determination in the main side MPU 72) that gives a prize corresponding to the player based on the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process is displayed. function to perform processing) and
Ceiling-matching granting for granting a predetermined privilege or a privilege different from the above-mentioned privilege when the number of ceiling games is played without the prescribed privilege being one of the privilege and the privilege different from it being granted. means (the function of executing the processes of steps S1709 to S1712 in the sub-side MPU 82);
A ceiling effect control means (sub-side MPU 82) for performing an expected effect in a ceiling expected state (ceiling game precursor state ST13) that continues over the specific number of games from a state before the specific number of games with respect to the ceiling game number. A function to execute the processing of steps S1109 to S1111 and steps S1707 to S1708 in
with
The establishment of the predetermined condition is the occurrence of a set trigger event that is at least one of the winning of the trigger role in the role lottery process and the granting of the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role, or The predetermined condition is established based on the occurrence of a setting trigger event that is at least one of winning the trigger role in the role lottery process and granting the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role. ,
In a situation where the number of remaining games of the ceiling game number is equal to or less than the sum of the upper limit number of games and the specific number of games, a start prevention means for preventing a new start of the expected state (the process of step S3809 in the sub-side MPU 82 ), the gaming machine according to feature O16.

According to the feature O17, since a privilege is awarded when the number of ceiling games is played, an opportunity to award a privilege can be reliably generated. In addition, since the number of ceiling games is set to a ceiling expectation state from before a specific number of games and an expectation effect is performed, it is possible to heighten the expectation of awarding of the privilege, and the interest of the game is improved. In this case, when the number of games remaining in the number of ceiling games is equal to or less than the sum of the upper limit number of games in the expectation state and the specific number of games in the ceiling expectation state, a new start of the expectation state is prevented. This prevents the occurrence of the ceiling expectation state in the middle of the expectation state, or the occurrence of the ceiling expectation state in the middle of the ceiling expectation state, and reduces the processing load in executing the expectation state and the ceiling expectation state. be done.

Feature O18. The standby information setting means sets the standby information when the predetermined condition is satisfied in a situation where the remaining number of games of the ceiling game number is equal to or less than the sum of the upper limit number of games and the specific number of games. The game machine according to feature O17, characterized in that

According to the feature O18, in the configuration having the configuration of the feature O17 and aiming to reduce the processing load in executing the expected state and the ceiling expected state, the number of remaining games of the number of ceiling games is specified as the upper limit number of games. Wait information is set when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a situation where the expected state is prevented from starting because the number of games is less than the sum of the number of games, preventing the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied from being invalidated. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the expected state.

Feature O19. As the expected state, there are a first expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15) in which the privilege is provided after the end, and a second expected state (false precursor state) in which the privilege is not provided after the end,
The setting means sets the first expected state to the first expected state when a first predetermined condition corresponding to the provision of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the activation lottery process of the sub-side MPU 82 wins the activation lottery), setting to the second expected state when a second predetermined condition not corresponding to the granting of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the sub-side MPU 82 wins the false omen occurrence lottery process);
The standby information storage means stores the number of continuous games in the standby information storage means regardless of whether the first predetermined condition is satisfied or the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state. The gaming machine according to any one of features O14 to O18, which stores information.

According to feature O19, regardless of whether the first predetermined condition is satisfied or the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, refer to when the expected state is started after the second waiting state ends. It is possible to aggregate the information to be played into the information of the number of continuous games.

Feature O20. When both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied in the second expected state, the standby information storage means stores the number of continuous games determined by the number-of-games determining means when each of the predetermined conditions is satisfied. It stores information on the total number of
The expected effect control means is configured such that, when the second expected state ends, the information stored in the standby information storage means is information corresponding to the number of continuous games equal to or greater than 1, and in the second expected state, the The game according to feature O19, characterized in that the first expected state that continues over the number of continuous games stored in the standby information storage means is started when the first predetermined condition is met. machine.

According to the feature O20, when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, and when the other second predetermined condition is satisfied, the first expected state is started after the expected state ends. The number of continuous games increases. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect with a high sense of expectation as the first expectation state.

Features O21. a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a prize corresponding award means (a prize determination in the main side MPU 72) that gives a prize corresponding to the player based on the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process is displayed. function to perform processing) and
with
The establishment of the predetermined condition is the occurrence of a set trigger event that is at least one of the winning of the trigger role in the role lottery process and the granting of the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role, or The predetermined condition is established based on the occurrence of a setting trigger event that is at least one of winning the trigger role in the role lottery process and granting the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role. ,
The expected effect control means makes the content of the effect executed in the expected state correspond to the type of the setting trigger event of the expected state,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state and the standby information is set, type information storage means (forecast combination determination area 84c) for storing information on the type of the setting trigger event that triggered the setting of the standby information. ), the game machine according to any one of features O8 to O20.

According to the feature O21, each effect in the expected state is executed with the content corresponding to the type of the set trigger event, so that the expectations of the effect content can be used as the set trigger event while diversifying the content of the expected state effect. can be associated. Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state and the standby information is set, information about the type of the setting trigger event is stored, so the expected state is started based on the fact that the standby information is set. Even in this case, it is possible to make the content of each effect in the expected state correspond to the type of the setting trigger event.

Feature O22. A configuration in which the degree of expectation that the privilege is granted differs depending on the type of the setting trigger event,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied a plurality of times in the expected state, information on the type of the set trigger event having the highest degree of expectation among the set trigger events corresponding to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition each time is stored in the type information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature O21, further comprising memory execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4010 and S4011 in the sub-side MPU 82).

According to the feature O22, while reducing the storage capacity for storing the information on the type of the setting trigger event, it becomes easier to execute an effect with a high degree of expectation as each effect in the expected state.

Feature O23. The standby information setting means
a game number determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3913 and S4014 in the sub-side MPU 82) that determines the number of games to be continued in the expected state when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state;
standby information storage means (stock game counter 84b) for storing information on the number of continuous games determined by the game number determination means as the standby information;
with
The standby information storage means stores information on the total number of continuous games determined by the game number determination means each time the predetermined condition is met in the expected state, when the predetermined condition is met multiple times.
When the expected state ends and the information stored in the waiting information storage means is information corresponding to the number of continuous games equal to or greater than 1, the expected effect control means stores the information in the waiting information storage means. The expected state that continues over the number of continuous games is started, and the content of the effect executed in the expected state corresponds to the type of the set trigger event stored in the type information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature O22, characterized in that the game machine is configured so as to have the content of the character O22.

According to feature O23, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied multiple times in the same expected state, addition of information on the number of continued games and updating of information on the type of setting trigger event are performed for each of the predetermined conditions being satisfied. you just need to In addition, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of occurrence of an expectation state in which the number of continued games is large and an expectation state in which highly anticipated effects are executed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Feature O24. As the expected state, there are a first expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15) in which the privilege is provided after the end, and a second expected state (false precursor state) in which the privilege is not provided after the end,
The setting means sets the first expected state to the first expected state when a first predetermined condition corresponding to the provision of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the activation lottery process of the sub-side MPU 82 wins the activation lottery), setting to the second expected state when a second predetermined condition not corresponding to the granting of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the sub-side MPU 82 wins the false omen occurrence lottery process);
When both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied in the same expected state, the memory execution means stores the expected degree among the set trigger events corresponding to the establishment of the predetermined condition. The gaming machine according to feature O22 or O23, wherein information on the type of the highest setting trigger event is stored in the type information storage means.

According to feature O24, the information on the type of setting trigger event is information on the type of setting trigger event with a high degree of expectation regardless of whether the condition that triggered the setting is either the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition. are stored with priority. As a result, for example, even if the first predetermined condition is satisfied by a setting trigger event with a low degree of expectation, if the second predetermined condition is satisfied by a setting trigger event with a high degree of expectation, the first predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute an effect with a high degree of expectation as the expected state.

Feature O25. As the expected state, there are a first expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15) in which the privilege is provided after the end, and a second expected state (false precursor state) in which the privilege is not provided after the end,
The setting means sets the first expected state to the first expected state when a first predetermined condition corresponding to the provision of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the activation lottery process of the sub-side MPU 82 wins the activation lottery), setting to the second expected state when a second predetermined condition not corresponding to the granting of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the sub-side MPU 82 wins the false omen occurrence lottery process);
When the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state and the standby information is set, the change means (the sub-side MPU 82 in the A gaming machine according to any one of features O8 to O24, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S1505.

According to the feature O25, it is possible to diversify the mode of determining whether or not to give a privilege. Further, since the mode of determining whether or not to give the privilege is changed depending on whether or not the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state. It is possible to heighten expectations for the establishment.

Feature O26. Granting lottery means (function for executing the process of step S1507 in the sub-side MPU 82) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to grant the privilege when a lottery trigger occurs in a situation that is not the expected state;
addition lottery means (a function of executing the process of step S1510 in the sub-side MPU 82) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to increase the number of times the privilege is given when the lottery trigger occurs in the first expected state;
with
The changing means causes a lottery by the grant lottery means to be performed when the lottery opportunity occurs in a situation where the first predetermined condition is not satisfied in the second expectation state, and the second expectation state is obtained. The gaming machine according to feature O25, characterized in that, when the lottery is triggered in a state where the first predetermined condition is established, the lottery is carried out by the additional lottery means.

According to the feature O26, when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the additional lottery is executed, so it is possible to increase the chances that the number of rewards will be increased.

Feature O27. The gaming machine according to feature O26, wherein the number of times the privilege is expected to be given when the lottery is triggered differs between the granting lottery means and the additional lottery means.

According to the feature O27, when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the number of times the privilege is expected to be granted differs. It is possible to diversify people's expectations.

Feature O28. The expected state that is executed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is established and the standby information is set in the expected state, and the aforementioned that is executed without the predetermined condition being established and the standby information is set. The gaming machine according to any one of features O8 to O27, wherein the execution mode of the expected state differs from the expected state.

According to feature O28, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the expected state is executed. In addition, it is possible to execute the subsequent expected state in relation to the expected state being executed, and even if the expected state is executed immediately after the expected state, the execution mode of the expected state is suitable. It becomes possible to

Feature O29. The standby information setting means
If the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, the number of games determining means for determining the number of games to be continued in the expected state (in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4401 to S4408 and step S4014 in the sub-side MPU 82 , in the sixth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4501 to S4504 in the sub-side MPU 82);
standby information storage means (stock game counter 84b) for storing information on the number of continuous games determined by the game number determination means as the standby information;
with
The number-of-games determining means determines, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, the sum of the number of remaining games in the expected state and the number of continued games in the expected state to be executed after the end of the expected state. The gaming machine according to feature O28, wherein the number of continuous games is determined so as to be equal to or less than the upper limit number of games of the state.

According to feature O29, even if a new expectation state starts immediately after the expectation state ends, the number of games to be continued in the expectation state is the same as the number of games to be continued in the expectation state and the number of remaining games in the expectation state being executed. is determined so as to be equal to or less than the upper limit number of games in the expected state, it is possible to prevent the period during which the expected state is being executed from becoming excessively long.

Feature O30. The standby information setting means
a game number determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4501 to S4504 in the sub-side MPU 82) for determining the number of games to be continued in the expected state when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state;
standby information storage means (stock game counter 84b) for storing information on the number of continuous games determined by the game number determination means as the standby information;
with
The number-of-games determining means determines, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, the sum of the number of remaining games in the expected state and the number of continued games in the expected state to be executed after the end of the expected state. The gaming machine according to feature O29, wherein the number of continuous games is determined so as to be the upper limit number of games for the state.

According to feature O30, even when a new expected state is started immediately after the expected state ends, it is possible to prevent the period during which the expected state is being executed from becoming excessively long. Become. On the other hand, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, the sum of the number of remaining games in the expected state being executed and the number of continued games in the expected state to be executed thereafter is fixed to the upper limit number of games in the expected state. Therefore, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in a situation where the number of remaining games in the expected state is small, it is possible to generate an expected state with a large number of continued games.

Feature O31. Characteristic feature O28, characterized in that the expectation effect control means differentiates the determination mode of the number of games to be continued in the expectation state corresponding to the establishment of the predetermined condition depending on whether the predetermined condition is established in the expectation state. The gaming machine according to any one of O30.

According to feature O31, the mode of determining the number of games to be continued in the expected state corresponding to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition differs depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state. It is possible to diversify the mode.

Feature O32. The expectation effect control means makes the number of games continued in the expected state larger when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state than when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the non-expected state. Or the gaming machine according to any one of features O28 to O31, characterized in that it is made easy to increase.

According to the feature O32, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, the expected state with a large number of continued games is more likely to be executed. As a result, when the expectation state is executed continuously, it is possible to increase the number of games to be continued in the later execution expectation state, and the degree of expectation may be higher in the latter expectation state. It becomes easier to give the player the recognition that there is no such thing.

Feature O33. The expected effect control means differentiates the ease of execution of the effect with a high expectation of awarding in the expected state corresponding to the establishment of the predetermined condition according to whether the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state. The gaming machine according to any one of features O28 to O32, characterized by:

According to the feature O33, it is possible to vary the ease of execution of the effect with a high degree of expectation for giving benefits in the subsequent expectation state in relation to the expectation state being executed, and the expectation state is executed immediately after the expectation state. Even when the expected state is set, it is possible to make the execution mode of the expected state suitable.

Feature O34. The expectation performance control means provides a performance with a higher degree of expectation for granting benefits in the expected state when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state than when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the non-expected state. The gaming machine according to any one of features O28 to O33, characterized in that it facilitates execution.

According to the feature O34, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, the effect with the high expectation of the awarding of the privilege is more likely to be executed. As a result, when the expectation state is executed continuously, it is possible to increase the execution opportunities of the effect with a high degree of expectation of giving benefits in the expectation state of the later execution time, and the latter expectation state can be performed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation is higher.

Feature O35. As the expected state, there are a first expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15) in which the privilege is given after the end and a second expected state (false precursor state) in which the privilege is not given after the end,
The setting means sets the first expected state to the first expected state when a first predetermined condition corresponding to the provision of the privilege is established as the predetermined condition (that the activation lottery process of the sub-side MPU 82 wins the activation lottery), setting to the second expected state when a second predetermined condition that does not correspond to the provision of the privilege is established as the predetermined condition (that a false portent occurrence is won in the false portent lottery process of the sub-side MPU 82);
The first expected state executed based on the fact that the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the standby information is set in the second expected state, and the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the standby information is set. The gaming machine according to any one of features O8 to O34, wherein the execution mode of the first expected state is different from the first expected state that is executed without being executed.

According to the feature O35, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the first expected state. Further, it becomes possible to execute the first expected state in relation to the second expected state being executed, and even if the first expected state is executed immediately after the second expected state, the first expected state is executed. It is possible to make the execution mode of

Feature O36. The standby information setting means
If the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the number-of-games determining means for determining the number of games to be continued in the expected state (in the fifth embodiment, the processing of steps S4401 to S4408 and step S4014 in the sub-side MPU 82 is executed. a function to execute the processing of steps S4501 to S4504 in the sub-side MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment);
standby information storage means (stock game counter 84b) for storing information on the number of continuous games determined by the game number determination means as the standby information;
with
The number-of-games determination means determines, when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the number of remaining games in the second expected state and the first expected state to be executed after the second expected state ends. The gaming machine according to feature O35, wherein the number of continuous games is determined so that the sum of the number of continuous games and the number of continuous games is equal to or less than the upper limit number of games in the expected state.

According to feature O36, even if the first expected state starts immediately after the second expected state ends, the number of continued games in the first expected state is the same as the number of continued games in the second expected state. Since the sum of the number of remaining games and the remaining number of games is determined to be equal to or less than the upper limit number of games in the expected state, it is possible to prevent the period during which the expected state is being executed from becoming excessively long.

Feature O37. The standby information setting means
game number determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S4501 to S4504 in the sub-side MPU 82) for determining the number of games to be continued in the expected state when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state;
standby information storage means (stock game counter 84b) for storing information on the number of continuous games determined by the game number determination means as the standby information;
with
The number-of-games determining means determines, when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the number of remaining games in the second expected state and the first expected state to be executed after the second expected state ends. The gaming machine according to feature O36, wherein the number of continuous games is determined so that the sum of the number of continuous games and the number of continuous games is the upper limit number of games in the expected state.

According to feature O37, even if the first expected state starts immediately after the second expected state ends, it is possible to prevent the period during which the expected state is being executed from becoming excessively long. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the sum of the number of remaining games in the second expected state and the number of continued games in the first expected state is fixed to the upper limit number of games in the expected state. Therefore, when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in a situation where the number of remaining games in the second expected state is small, it is possible to generate the first expected state in which the number of continued games is large.

Feature O38. a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a prize corresponding award means (a prize determination in the main side MPU 72) that gives a prize corresponding to the player based on the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process is displayed. function to perform processing) and
Ceiling-matching granting for granting a predetermined privilege or a privilege different from the above-mentioned privilege when the number of ceiling games is played without the prescribed privilege being one of the privilege and the privilege different from it being granted. means (the function of executing the processes of steps S1709 to S1712 in the sub-side MPU 82);
A ceiling effect control means (sub-side MPU 82) for performing an expected effect in a ceiling expected state (ceiling game precursor state ST13) that continues over the specific number of games from a state before the specific number of games with respect to the ceiling game number. A function to execute the processing of steps S1109 to S1111 and steps S1707 to S1708 in
with
The establishment of the predetermined condition is the occurrence of a set trigger event that is at least one of the winning of the trigger role in the role lottery process and the granting of the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role, or The predetermined condition is established based on the occurrence of a setting trigger event that is at least one of winning the trigger role in the role lottery process and granting the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role. ,
In a situation where the number of remaining games of the ceiling game number is equal to or less than the sum of the upper limit number of games and the specific number of games, a start prevention means for preventing a new start of the expected state (the process of step S3809 in the sub-side MPU 82 A gaming machine according to any one of features O29 to O37, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the feature O38, since a privilege is awarded when the number of ceiling games is played, an opportunity to award a privilege can be reliably generated. In addition, since the number of ceiling games is set to a ceiling expectation state from before a specific number of games and an expectation effect is performed, it is possible to heighten the expectation of awarding of the privilege, and the interest of the game is improved. In this case, when the number of games remaining in the number of ceiling games is equal to or less than the sum of the upper limit number of games in the expectation state and the specific number of games in the ceiling expectation state, a new start of the expectation state is prevented. This prevents the occurrence of the ceiling expectation state in the middle of the expectation state, or the occurrence of the ceiling expectation state in the middle of the ceiling expectation state, and reduces the processing load in executing the expectation state and the ceiling expectation state. be done.

For the configuration of features O1 to O38, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H7, features I1-I16, features J1-J13, features K1-K11, features L1-L9, features M1-M10, features N1-N13, features P1-P25, features Q1-Q20, features R1-R11, features S1- Any one or more of S3, features T1 to T4, features U1 to U6, and features V1 to V11 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each of the inventions of the above feature group O can solve the following problems.

A slot machine is known as a kind of gaming machine. Specifically, regarding the slot machine, lottery processing is executed by the control means by operating the start lever while medals are being bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic P group>
Feature P1. game control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main side MPU 72) for controlling the game execution means (reel unit 31) so that one game is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition;
setting means (function for executing a precursor setting process in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting an expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15, false precursor state) that continues over a plurality of games when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Expectation effect control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1109 to S1111 in the sub-side MPU 82) that allows the player to expect the occurrence of the award of the privilege in each game in the expectation state )When,
with
The expected effect control means is a mode determining means (steps S3901 and A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S4004.

According to the feature P1, an expectation effect is executed that enables the player to expect the awarding of a privilege in each game by entering the expectation state. As a result, the player who confirms the expected effect expects the awarding of the privilege, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Moreover, since the execution mode of the expected state corresponding to the establishment of the predetermined condition differs depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the expected state. In addition, it is possible to execute the subsequent expected state in relation to the expected state being executed, and even if the expected state is executed immediately after the expected state, the execution mode of the expected state is suitable. It becomes possible to

As described above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in a configuration provided with winning lottery executing means (function for executing lottery processing in main side MPU 72) for executing winning lottery processing when starting operation means operated to start a game is operated, expected state The mode of the combination lottery process may not be changed depending on whether or not it is, and the combination lottery execution means (main side MPU 72 a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72); (a function of executing a winning determination process) may be configured such that the award mode of the award corresponding to the winning is not changed depending on whether or not the expected state is reached.

Further, the predetermined condition may be a condition that is satisfied 100% when an event recognizable by the player occurs, and a predetermined probability (less than 100%) when an event recognizable by the player occurs It may be a condition to be established.

Further, as a game machine to which the above configuration can be applied, specifically, there is a "starting machine which is provided with pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern as a game execution means, and is operated to start the variable display of the pattern. An operation means (start lever 41) and a stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern are provided, and the game control means is operated when the start operation means is operated. One game is started by starting the variable display of the pattern based on the operation, and the game of the one game is started by stopping the variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the stop operation means. A game machine that is configured to be terminated can be mentioned.

Feature P2. The feature P1 is characterized in that the mode determination means differentiates the determination mode of the number of continuous games in the expected state corresponding to the establishment of the predetermined condition depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state. The game machine described.

According to feature P2, the manner in which the number of games to be continued in the expected state corresponding to the establishment of the predetermined condition differs depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state. It is possible to diversify the mode. In addition, it is possible to determine the number of games to be continued in the subsequent expected state in relation to the expected state being executed, and even if the expected state is executed immediately after the expected state, the execution mode of the expected state can be determined. It becomes possible to make it suitable.

Feature P3. The mode determining means sets the number of games continued in the expected state to be greater when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state than when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the non-expected state, or The gaming machine according to feature P1 or P2, characterized in that it is easy to increase.

According to the feature P3, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, the expected state with a large number of continued games is more likely to be executed. As a result, when the expectation state is executed continuously, it is possible to increase the number of games to be continued in the later execution expectation state, and the degree of expectation may be higher in the latter expectation state. It becomes easier to give the player the recognition that there is no such thing.

Feature P4. The mode determination means differentiates the easiness of execution of an effect with a high expectation of privilege provision in an expected state corresponding to the establishment of the predetermined condition according to whether or not the predetermined condition is established in the expected state. The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P3, characterized by:

According to the feature P4, it is possible to change the ease of execution of the effect with a high degree of expectation of privilege provision in the subsequent expected state in relation to the expected state during execution, and the expected state is executed immediately after the expected state. Even when the expected state is set, it is possible to make the execution mode of the expected state suitable.

Feature P5. The mode determining means executes an effect in which the degree of expectation of privilege provision is higher in the expected state when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state than when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the non-expected state. The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P4, characterized in that it is easy to play.

According to the feature P5, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, it is easier to execute an effect with a high degree of expectation for awarding of the privilege. As a result, when the expectation state is executed continuously, it is possible to increase the execution opportunities of the effect with a high degree of expectation of giving benefits in the expectation state of the later execution time, and the latter expectation state can be performed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation is higher.

Feature P6. Waiting information setting means for setting waiting information (information of the stock game counter 84b) for enabling a new expected state to start after the expected state ends when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state. The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P5, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of steps S3907 and S4015 in the sub-side MPU 82 .

According to the feature P6, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, the expected state is newly started after the expected state ends. This makes it possible to increase the chances of the expected state being executed.

Feature P7. The standby information setting means is characterized in that, when the predetermined condition is satisfied a plurality of times in the expected state, the standby information can be set corresponding to the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied a plurality of times. The game machine according to feature P6.

According to the feature P7, when the predetermined condition is satisfied multiple times in the expected state, the wait information is set accordingly, so that it is possible to diversify the manner in which the execution of the expected state is waited.

Feature P8. The waiting information setting means sets the number of games to be continued in a new expected state to be started after the end of the expected information to increase when the predetermined condition is met in the expected state more times. The gaming machine according to feature P6 or P7, characterized by:

According to the feature P8, the number of times the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state is greater, the number of continued games in the expected state after the end of the expected state increases. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of improving the interest in the game through the execution of the expected state.

Feature P9. As the expected state, there are a first expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15) in which the privilege is provided after the end, and a second expected state (false precursor state) in which the privilege is not provided after the end,
The setting means sets the first expected state to the first expected state when a first predetermined condition corresponding to the provision of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the activation lottery process of the sub-side MPU 82 wins the activation lottery), setting to the second expected state when a second predetermined condition not corresponding to the granting of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the sub-side MPU 82 wins the false omen occurrence lottery process);
The gaming machine according to any one of features P6 to P8, wherein the standby information setting means sets the standby information when the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state.

According to the feature P9, by setting the standby information when the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the second expected state is executed, and increase the probability of awarding the privilege. It is possible to generate many situations that raise the expectations of the player without increasing the price.

Feature P10. The game according to feature P9, wherein the standby information setting means does not set the standby information even if the second predetermined condition is not satisfied in the first expected state or the second predetermined condition is satisfied. machine.

According to the characteristic P10, it is possible to prevent the second expected state from being started immediately after the first expected state ends and the privilege is given without intervening the establishment of the second predetermined condition. .

As a more specific configuration of the above feature P10, "the standby information setting means determines the number of games to be continued in the expected state when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state ( a function of executing the processing of steps S3913 and S4014 in the sub-side MPU 82); standby information storage means (stock game counter 84b) that stores information on the number of continuous games determined by the game number determination means as the standby information; , and even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the first expected state, the processing for storing the information on the number of continued games in the standby information storage means is not executed.

Feature P11. The gaming machine according to feature P9 or P10, wherein the standby information setting means sets the standby information even when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state.

According to feature P11, in the configuration in which the second expected state being executed is continued even when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, standby information is set when the first predetermined condition is satisfied. After the end of the second expected state, the privilege is given after the first expected state is executed. Thereby, even if the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the first expected state can be generated before the award is given.

Feature P12. The standby information setting means
a game number determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3913 and S4014 in the sub-side MPU 82) that determines the number of games to be continued in the expected state when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state;
standby information storage means (stock game counter 84b) for storing information on the number of continuous games determined by the game number determination means as the standby information;
The gaming machine according to any one of features P6 to P11, characterized by comprising:

According to feature P12, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, the information on the number of games to be continued is stored as standby information. There is no need to determine the number of games. In particular, in a configuration in which the number of continuous games changes according to the content of the predetermined condition, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for determining the number of continuous games.

Feature P13. The standby information storage means stores information on the total number of continuous games determined by the game number determination means each time the predetermined condition is met in the expected state, when the predetermined condition is met multiple times.
When the expected state ends and the information stored in the waiting information storage means is information corresponding to the number of continuous games equal to or greater than 1, the expected effect control means stores the information in the waiting information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature P12, wherein the expected state continues over the number of continuous games played.

According to the feature P13, when the predetermined condition is satisfied multiple times in the expected state, the number of times the expected state is executed is not added, but the number of continuous games in the expected state is added. It is possible to prevent an excessive increase in the number of executions of one unit of operation from the start of the expected state to the end of the expected state. In addition, no matter how many times the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, it is only necessary to add the information on the number of continued games, so it is necessary to collectively perform the processing according to the number of times the predetermined condition is satisfied after the expected state being executed ends. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature P14. The gaming machine according to feature P13, wherein the standby information storage means stores the information on the number of continuous games within a range of an upper limit number of games determined as a plurality of times.

According to the feature P14, it is possible to prevent the number of expected continued games from becoming excessively large.

Feature P15. a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the game of the one game;
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
When the game in the game executing means is stopped, a prize-corresponding granting means (a prize-winning determination process in the main MPU 72) which grants a prize corresponding to the player based on the fact that the result corresponds to the result of the winning lottery process function) and
Ceiling-matching granting for granting a predetermined privilege or a privilege different from the above-mentioned privilege when the number of ceiling games is played without the prescribed privilege being one of the privilege and the privilege different from it being granted. means (the function of executing the processes of steps S1709 to S1712 in the sub-side MPU 82);
A ceiling effect control means (sub-side MPU 82) for performing an expected effect in a ceiling expected state (ceiling game precursor state ST13) that continues over the specific number of games from a state before the specific number of games with respect to the ceiling game number. A function to execute the processing of steps S1109 to S1111 and steps S1707 to S1708 in
with
The establishment of the predetermined condition is the occurrence of a set trigger event that is at least one of the winning of the trigger role in the role lottery process and the granting of the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role, or The predetermined condition is established based on the occurrence of a setting trigger event that is at least one of winning the trigger role in the role lottery process and granting the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role. ,
In a situation where the number of remaining games of the ceiling game number is equal to or less than the sum of the upper limit number of games and the specific number of games, a start prevention means for preventing a new start of the expected state (the process of step S3809 in the sub-side MPU 82 The gaming machine according to feature P14, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the feature P15, since a privilege is awarded when the number of ceiling games is played, an opportunity to award a privilege can be reliably generated. In addition, since the number of ceiling games is set to a ceiling expectation state from before a specific number of games and an expectation effect is performed, it is possible to heighten the expectation of awarding of the privilege, and the interest of the game is improved. In this case, when the number of games remaining in the number of ceiling games is equal to or less than the sum of the upper limit number of games in the expectation state and the specific number of games in the ceiling expectation state, a new start of the expectation state is prevented. This prevents the occurrence of the ceiling expectation state in the middle of the expectation state, or the occurrence of the ceiling expectation state in the middle of the ceiling expectation state, and reduces the processing load in executing the expectation state and the ceiling expectation state. be done.

Feature P16. The standby information setting means sets the standby information when the predetermined condition is satisfied in a situation where the remaining number of games of the ceiling game number is equal to or less than the sum of the upper limit number of games and the specific number of games. The gaming machine according to feature P15, characterized in that:

According to the feature P16, in the configuration having the configuration of the feature P15 and aiming to reduce the processing load in executing the expected state and the ceiling expected state, the number of remaining games of the number of ceiling games is specified as the upper limit number of games. Wait information is set when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a situation where the expected state is prevented from starting because the number of games is less than the sum of the number of games, preventing the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied from being invalidated. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the expected state.

Feature P17. As the expected state, there are a first expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15) in which the privilege is given after the end and a second expected state (false precursor state) in which the privilege is not given after the end,
The setting means sets the first expected state to the first expected state when a first predetermined condition corresponding to the provision of the privilege is established as the predetermined condition (that the activation lottery process of the sub-side MPU 82 wins the activation lottery), setting to the second expected state when a second predetermined condition that does not correspond to the provision of the privilege is established as the predetermined condition (that a false portent occurrence is won in the false portent lottery process of the sub-side MPU 82);
The standby information storage means stores the number of continuous games in the standby information storage means regardless of whether the first predetermined condition is satisfied or the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state. The gaming machine according to any one of features P12 to P16, which stores information.

According to the feature P17, the information on the number of continuous games is stored in the standby information storage means regardless of whether the first predetermined condition is satisfied or the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state. Since it is sufficient to execute the processing, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature P18. When both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied in the second expected state, the standby information storage means stores the number of continuous games determined by the number-of-games determining means when each of the predetermined conditions is satisfied. It stores information on the total number of
The expected effect control means is configured such that, when the second expected state ends, the information stored in the standby information storage means is information corresponding to the number of continuous games equal to or greater than 1, and in the second expected state, the The game according to feature P17, characterized in that the first expected state that continues over the number of continuous games stored in the standby information storage means is started when the first predetermined condition is satisfied. machine.

According to the feature P18, when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, and when the second predetermined condition is otherwise satisfied, the first expected state is started after the expected state ends. The number of continuous games increases. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect with a high sense of anticipation as the first expectation state.

Feature P19. a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the game of the one game;
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
When the game in the game executing means is stopped, a prize-corresponding granting means (a prize-winning determination process in the main MPU 72) which grants a prize corresponding to the player based on the fact that the result corresponds to the result of the winning lottery process function) and
with
The establishment of the predetermined condition is the occurrence of a set trigger event that is at least one of the winning of the trigger role in the role lottery process and the granting of the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role, or The predetermined condition is established based on the occurrence of a setting trigger event that is at least one of winning the trigger role in the role lottery process and granting the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role. ,
The expected effect control means makes the content of the effect executed in the expected state correspond to the type of the setting trigger event of the expected state,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state and the standby information is set, type information storage means (forecast combination determination area 84c) for storing information on the type of the setting trigger event that triggered the setting of the standby information. ), the gaming machine according to any one of features P6 to P18.

According to the feature P19, each effect in the expected state is executed with the content corresponding to the type of the set trigger event, so that the expectations of the effect content can be used as the set trigger event while diversifying the content of the expected state effect. can be associated. Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state and the standby information is set, information about the type of the setting trigger event is stored, so the expected state is started based on the fact that the standby information is set. Even in this case, it is possible to make the content of each effect in the expected state correspond to the type of the setting trigger event.

Feature P20. A configuration in which the degree of expectation that the privilege is granted differs depending on the type of the setting trigger event,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied a plurality of times in the expected state, information on the type of the set trigger event having the highest degree of expectation among the set trigger events corresponding to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition each time is stored in the type information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature P19, characterized by comprising memory execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4010 and S4011 in the sub-side MPU 82) to store the information.

According to the feature P20, it is possible to easily execute a highly expected effect as each effect in the expected state while reducing the storage capacity for storing the information on the type of the setting trigger event.

Feature P21. The standby information setting means
a game number determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3913 and S4014 in the sub-side MPU 82) for determining the number of games to be continued in the expected state when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state;
standby information storage means (stock game counter 84b) for storing information on the number of continuous games determined by the game number determination means as the standby information;
with
The standby information storage means stores information on the total number of continuous games determined by the game number determination means each time the predetermined condition is met in the expected state, and
When the expected state ends and the information stored in the waiting information storage means is information corresponding to the number of continuous games equal to or greater than 1, the expected performance control means stores the information in the waiting information storage means. The expected state that continues over the number of continuous games is started, and the content of the effect executed in the expected state corresponds to the type of the set trigger event stored in the type information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature P20, characterized in that the game machine is configured to have the contents of the game.

According to feature P21, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied multiple times in the same expected state, addition of information on the number of continued games and updating of information on the type of setting trigger event are performed for each of the predetermined conditions being satisfied. you just need to In addition, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of occurrence of an expectation state in which the number of continued games is large and an expectation state in which highly anticipated effects are executed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Feature P22. As the expected state, there are a first expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15) in which the privilege is provided after the end, and a second expected state (false precursor state) in which the privilege is not provided after the end,
The setting means sets the first expected state to the first expected state when a first predetermined condition corresponding to the provision of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the activation lottery process of the sub-side MPU 82 wins the activation lottery), setting to the second expected state when a second predetermined condition not corresponding to the granting of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the sub-side MPU 82 wins the false omen occurrence lottery process);
When both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied in the same expected state, the memory execution means stores the expected degree among the set trigger events corresponding to the establishment of the predetermined condition. The gaming machine according to feature P20 or P21, wherein information on the type of the highest setting trigger event is stored in the type information storage means.

According to the feature P22, regardless of whether the condition that triggered the setting is the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition, the information on the type of the setting trigger event is the information on the type of the setting trigger event with a high degree of expectation. are stored with priority. As a result, for example, even if the first predetermined condition is satisfied by a setting trigger event with a low degree of expectation, if the second predetermined condition is satisfied by a setting trigger event with a high degree of expectation, the first predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute an effect with a high degree of expectation as an expectation state.

Feature P23. As the expected state, there are a first expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15) in which the privilege is provided after the end, and a second expected state (false precursor state) in which the privilege is not provided after the end,
The setting means sets the first expected state to the first expected state when a first predetermined condition corresponding to the provision of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the activation lottery process of the sub-side MPU 82 wins the activation lottery), setting to the second expected state when a second predetermined condition not corresponding to the granting of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the sub-side MPU 82 wins the false omen occurrence lottery process);
When the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state and the standby information is set, the change means (the sub-side MPU 82 in the A gaming machine according to any one of features P6 to P22, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S1505.

According to the feature P23, it is possible to diversify the mode of determining whether or not to give a privilege. Further, since the mode of determining whether or not to give the privilege is changed depending on whether or not the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state. It is possible to heighten expectations for the establishment.

Feature P24. Granting lottery means (function for executing the process of step S1507 in the sub-side MPU 82) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to grant the privilege when a lottery trigger occurs in a situation that is not the expected state;
addition lottery means (a function of executing the process of step S1510 in the sub-side MPU 82) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to increase the number of times the privilege is given when the lottery trigger occurs in the first expected state;
with
The changing means causes a lottery by the grant lottery means to be performed when the lottery opportunity occurs in a situation where the first predetermined condition is not satisfied in the second expectation state, and the second expectation state is obtained. The gaming machine according to feature P23, wherein the lottery is performed by the additional lottery means when the lottery is triggered in a state where the first predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the feature P24, when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the additional lottery is executed, so it is possible to increase the chances of increasing the number of times the privilege is granted.

Feature P25. The gaming machine according to feature P24, wherein the number of times the privilege is expected to be granted when the lottery is triggered differs between the grant lottery means and the additional lottery means.

According to the feature P25, when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the number of times the privilege is expected to be granted differs. It is possible to diversify people's expectations.

For the configuration of features P1 to P25, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H7, features I1-I16, features J1-J13, features K1-K11, features L1-L9, features M1-M10, features N1-N13, features O1-O38, features Q1-Q20, features R1-R11, features S1- Any one or more of S3, features T1 to T4, features U1 to U6, and features V1 to V11 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic Q group>
Feature Q1. game control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main side MPU 72) for controlling the game execution means (reel unit 31) so that one game is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition;
setting means (function for executing a precursor setting process in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting an expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15, false precursor state) that continues over a plurality of games when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Expectation effect control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1109 to S1111 in the sub-side MPU 82) that allows the player to expect the occurrence of the award of the privilege in each game in the expectation state )When,
Waiting information setting means for setting waiting information (information of the stock game counter 84b) for enabling a new expected state to start after the expected state ends when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state. a function of executing the processing of steps S3907 and S4015 in the sub-side MPU 82);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature Q1, an expectation effect is executed that enables the player to expect the awarding of a privilege in each game by entering the expectation state. As a result, the player who confirms the expected effect expects the awarding of the privilege, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, the expected state is newly started after the expected state ends. This makes it possible to increase the chances of the expected state being executed.

As described above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in a configuration provided with winning lottery executing means (function for executing lottery processing in main side MPU 72) for executing winning lottery processing when starting operation means operated to start a game is operated, expected state The mode of the combination lottery process may not be changed depending on whether or not it is, and the combination lottery execution means (main side MPU 72 a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72); (a function of executing a winning determination process) may be configured such that the award mode of the award corresponding to the winning is not changed depending on whether or not the expected state is reached.

Further, the predetermined condition may be a condition that is satisfied 100% when an event recognizable by the player occurs, and a predetermined probability (less than 100%) when an event recognizable by the player occurs It may be a condition to be established.

Further, as a game machine to which the above configuration can be applied, specifically, there is a "starting machine which is provided with pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern as a game execution means, and is operated to start the variable display of the pattern. An operation means (start lever 41) and a stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern are provided, and the game control means is operated when the start operation means is operated. One game is started by starting the variable display of the pattern based on the operation, and the game of the one game is started by stopping the variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the stop operation means. A game machine that is configured to be terminated can be mentioned.

Feature Q2. The standby information setting means is characterized in that, when the predetermined condition is satisfied a plurality of times in the expected state, the standby information can be set corresponding to the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied a plurality of times. The game machine according to feature Q1.

According to the feature Q2, when the predetermined condition is satisfied multiple times in the expected state, the standby information is set accordingly, so that it is possible to diversify the manner in which the execution of the expected state is waited.

Feature Q3. The waiting information setting means sets the number of games to be continued in a new expected state to be started after the end of the expected information to increase when the predetermined condition is met in the expected state more times. The gaming machine according to feature Q1 or Q2, characterized by:

According to the feature Q3, the number of times the predetermined condition is met in the expected state is greater, the number of games continued in the expected state after the end of the expected state increases. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of improving the interest in the game through the execution of the expected state.

Feature Q4. As the expected state, there are a first expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15) in which the privilege is provided after the end, and a second expected state (false precursor state) in which the privilege is not provided after the end,
The setting means sets the first expected state to the first expected state when a first predetermined condition corresponding to the provision of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the activation lottery process of the sub-side MPU 82 wins the activation lottery), setting to the second expected state when a second predetermined condition not corresponding to the granting of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the sub-side MPU 82 wins the false omen occurrence lottery process);
The gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q3, wherein the standby information setting means sets the standby information when the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state.

According to feature Q4, by setting the standby information when the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the frequency with which the second expected state is executed can be increased, and the probability of awarding the privilege can be increased. It is possible to generate many situations that raise the expectations of the player without increasing the price.

Feature Q5. The game according to feature Q4, wherein the standby information setting means does not set the standby information even if the second predetermined condition is not satisfied in the first expected state or the second predetermined condition is satisfied. machine.

According to the feature Q5, it is possible to prevent the second expected state from starting immediately after the first expected state ends and the privilege is given without intervening the establishment of the second predetermined condition. .

As a more specific configuration of feature Q5, "the standby information setting means determines the number of games to be continued in the expected state when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state ( a function of executing the processing of steps S3913 and S4014 in the sub-side MPU 82); standby information storage means (stock game counter 84b) that stores information on the number of continuous games determined by the game number determination means as the standby information; , and even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the first expected state, the processing for storing the information on the number of continued games in the standby information storage means is not executed.

Feature Q6. The gaming machine according to feature Q4 or Q5, wherein the standby information setting means sets the standby information even when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state.

According to feature Q6, in the configuration in which the second expected state being executed is continued even when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, standby information is set when the first predetermined condition is satisfied. After the end of the second expected state, the privilege is given after the first expected state is executed. Thereby, even if the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the first expected state can be generated before the award is given.

Feature Q7. The standby information setting means
a game number determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3913 and S4014 in the sub-side MPU 82) for determining the number of games to be continued in the expected state when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state;
standby information storage means (stock game counter 84b) for storing information on the number of continuous games determined by the game number determination means as the standby information;
The gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q6, characterized by comprising:

According to feature Q7, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, the information on the number of games to be continued is stored as standby information. There is no need to determine the number of games. In particular, in a configuration in which the number of continuous games changes according to the content of the predetermined condition, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for determining the number of continuous games.

Feature Q8. The standby information storage means stores information on the total number of continuous games determined by the game number determination means each time the predetermined condition is met in the expected state, and
When the expected state ends and the information stored in the waiting information storage means is information corresponding to the number of continuous games equal to or greater than 1, the expected performance control means stores the information in the waiting information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature Q7, wherein the expected state that continues over the number of continuous games that are played is started.

According to the feature Q8, when the predetermined condition is satisfied multiple times in the expected state, the number of times the expected state is executed is not added, but the number of continuous games in the expected state is added once. It is possible to prevent an excessive increase in the number of executions of one unit of operation from the start of the expected state to the end of the expected state. In addition, no matter how many times the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, it is only necessary to add the information on the number of continued games, so it is necessary to collectively perform the processing according to the number of times the predetermined condition is satisfied after the expected state being executed ends. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature Q9. The gaming machine according to feature Q8, wherein the standby information storage means stores the information on the number of continuous games within a range of an upper limit number of games defined as a plurality of times.

According to the feature Q9, it is possible to prevent the number of expected games to be continued from becoming excessively large.

Characteristics Q10. a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the game of the one game;
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
When the game in the game executing means is stopped, a prize-corresponding granting means (a prize-winning determination process in the main MPU 72) which grants a prize corresponding to the player based on the fact that the result corresponds to the result of the winning lottery process function) and
Ceiling-matching granting for granting a predetermined privilege or a privilege different from the above-mentioned privilege when the number of ceiling games is played without the prescribed privilege being one of the privilege and the privilege different from it being granted. means (the function of executing the processes of steps S1709 to S1712 in the sub-side MPU 82);
A ceiling effect control means (sub-side MPU 82) for performing an expected effect in a ceiling expected state (ceiling game precursor state ST13) that continues over the specific number of games from a state before the specific number of games with respect to the ceiling game number. A function to execute the processing of steps S1109 to S1111 and steps S1707 to S1708 in
with
The establishment of the predetermined condition is the occurrence of a set trigger event that is at least one of the winning of the trigger role in the role lottery process and the granting of the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role, or The predetermined condition is established based on the occurrence of a setting trigger event that is at least one of winning the trigger role in the role lottery process and granting the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role. ,
In a situation where the number of remaining games of the ceiling game number is equal to or less than the sum of the upper limit number of games and the specific number of games, a start prevention means for preventing a new start of the expected state (the process of step S3809 in the sub-side MPU 82 The gaming machine according to feature Q9, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the feature Q10, since a privilege is awarded when the number of ceiling games is played, an opportunity to award a privilege can be reliably generated. In addition, since the number of ceiling games is set to a ceiling expectation state from before a specific number of games and an expectation effect is performed, it is possible to heighten the expectation of awarding of the privilege, and the interest of the game is improved. In this case, when the number of games remaining in the number of ceiling games is equal to or less than the sum of the upper limit number of games in the expectation state and the specific number of games in the ceiling expectation state, a new start of the expectation state is prevented. This prevents the occurrence of the ceiling expectation state in the middle of the expectation state, or the occurrence of the ceiling expectation state in the middle of the ceiling expectation state, and reduces the processing load in executing the expectation state and the ceiling expectation state. be done.

Feature Q11. The standby information setting means sets the standby information when the predetermined condition is satisfied in a situation where the remaining number of games of the ceiling game number is equal to or less than the sum of the upper limit number of games and the specific number of games. The gaming machine according to feature Q10, characterized in that:

According to the feature Q11, in the configuration having the configuration of the feature Q10 and aiming to reduce the processing load in executing the expected state and the ceiling expected state, the number of remaining games of the number of ceiling games is specified as the upper limit number of games. Wait information is set when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a situation where the expected state is prevented from starting because the number of games is less than the sum of the number of games, preventing the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied from being invalidated. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the expected state.

Feature Q12. As the expected state, there are a first expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15) in which the privilege is provided after the end, and a second expected state (false precursor state) in which the privilege is not provided after the end,
The setting means sets the first expected state to the first expected state when a first predetermined condition corresponding to the provision of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the activation lottery process of the sub-side MPU 82 wins the activation lottery), setting to the second expected state when a second predetermined condition not corresponding to the granting of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the sub-side MPU 82 wins the false omen occurrence lottery process);
The standby information storage means stores the number of continuous games in the standby information storage means regardless of whether the first predetermined condition is satisfied or the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state. The game machine according to any one of features Q7 to Q11, which stores information.

According to the feature Q12, the information on the number of continuous games is stored in the standby information storage means regardless of whether the first predetermined condition is satisfied or the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state. Since it is sufficient to execute the processing, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature Q13. When both of the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied in the second expected state, the standby information storage means stores the number of continuous games determined by the number-of-games determining means when each of the predetermined conditions is satisfied. It stores information on the total number of
The expected effect control means is configured such that, when the second expected state ends, the information stored in the standby information storage means is information corresponding to the number of continuous games equal to or greater than one, and in the second expected state, the The game according to feature Q12, characterized in that the first expected state that continues over the number of continuous games stored in the standby information storage means is started when the first predetermined condition is satisfied. machine.

According to the feature Q13, when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, and when the second predetermined condition is otherwise satisfied, the first expected state is started after the expected state ends. The number of continuous games increases. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect with a high sense of anticipation as the first expectation state.

Feature Q14. a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the game of the one game;
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
When the game in the game executing means is stopped, a prize-corresponding granting means (a prize-winning determination process in the main MPU 72) which grants a prize corresponding to the player based on the fact that the result corresponds to the result of the winning lottery process function) and
with
The establishment of the predetermined condition is the occurrence of a set trigger event that is at least one of the winning of the trigger role in the role lottery process and the granting of the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role, or The predetermined condition is established based on the occurrence of a setting trigger event that is at least one of winning the trigger role in the role lottery process and granting the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role. ,
The expected effect control means makes the content of the effect executed in the expected state correspond to the type of the setting trigger event of the expected state,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state and the standby information is set, type information storage means (forecast combination determination area 84c) for storing information on the type of the setting trigger event that triggered the setting of the standby information. ), the gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q13.

According to the feature Q14, each effect in the expected state is executed with the content corresponding to the type of the set trigger event, so that the expectation of the effect content can be used as the set trigger event while diversifying the content of the expected state effect. can be associated. Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state and the standby information is set, information about the type of the setting trigger event is stored, so the expected state is started based on the fact that the standby information is set. Even in this case, it is possible to make the content of each effect in the expected state correspond to the type of the setting trigger event.

Feature Q15. A configuration in which the degree of expectation that the privilege is granted differs depending on the type of the setting trigger event,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied a plurality of times in the expected state, information on the type of the set trigger event having the highest degree of expectation among the set trigger events corresponding to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition each time is stored in the type information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature Q14, characterized by comprising memory execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4010 and S4011 in the sub-side MPU 82) to store the information.

According to the feature Q15, it is possible to easily execute a highly expected effect as each effect in the expected state while reducing the storage capacity for storing the information on the type of the setting trigger event.

Feature Q16. The standby information setting means
a game number determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3913 and S4014 in the sub-side MPU 82) for determining the number of games to be continued in the expected state when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state;
standby information storage means (stock game counter 84b) for storing information on the number of continuous games determined by the game number determination means as the standby information;
with
The standby information storage means stores information on the total number of continuous games determined by the game number determination means each time the predetermined condition is met in the expected state, when the predetermined condition is met multiple times.
When the expected state ends and the information stored in the waiting information storage means is information corresponding to the number of continuous games equal to or greater than 1, the expected effect control means stores the information in the waiting information storage means. The expected state that continues over the number of continuous games is started, and the content of the effect executed in the expected state corresponds to the type of the set trigger event stored in the type information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature Q15, characterized in that the game machine is configured to have the contents of the game.

According to feature Q16, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied multiple times in the same expected state, addition of information on the number of continued games and updating of information on the type of setting trigger event are performed for each of the predetermined conditions being satisfied. you just need to In addition, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of occurrence of an expectation state in which the number of continued games is large and an expectation state in which highly anticipated effects are executed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Feature Q17. As the expected state, there are a first expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15) in which the privilege is provided after the end, and a second expected state (false precursor state) in which the privilege is not provided after the end,
The setting means sets the first expected state to the first expected state when a first predetermined condition corresponding to the provision of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the activation lottery process of the sub-side MPU 82 wins the activation lottery), setting to the second expected state when a second predetermined condition not corresponding to the granting of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the sub-side MPU 82 wins the false omen occurrence lottery process);
When both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied in the same expected state, the memory execution means stores the expected degree among the set trigger events corresponding to the establishment of the predetermined condition. The gaming machine according to feature Q15 or Q16, wherein information on the type of the highest setting trigger event is stored in the type information storage means.

According to feature Q17, the information on the type of setting trigger event is information on the type of setting trigger event with a high degree of expectation regardless of whether the condition that triggered the setting is the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition. are stored with priority. As a result, for example, even if the first predetermined condition is satisfied by a setting trigger event with a low degree of expectation, if the second predetermined condition is satisfied by a setting trigger event with a high degree of expectation, the first predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute an effect with a high degree of expectation as an expectation state.

Feature Q18. As the expected state, there are a first expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15) in which the privilege is provided after the end, and a second expected state (false precursor state) in which the privilege is not provided after the end,
The setting means sets the first expected state to the first expected state when a first predetermined condition corresponding to the provision of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the activation lottery process of the sub-side MPU 82 wins the activation lottery), setting to the second expected state when a second predetermined condition not corresponding to the granting of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the sub-side MPU 82 wins the false omen occurrence lottery process);
When the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state and the standby information is set, the change means (the sub-side MPU 82 in the A gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q17, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S1505.

According to feature Q18, it is possible to diversify the mode of determining whether or not to give a privilege. Further, since the mode of determining whether or not to give the privilege is changed depending on whether or not the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state. It is possible to heighten expectations for the establishment.

Feature Q19. Granting lottery means (function for executing the process of step S1507 in the sub-side MPU 82) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to grant the privilege when a lottery trigger occurs in a situation that is not the expected state;
addition lottery means (a function of executing the process of step S1510 in the sub-side MPU 82) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to increase the number of times the privilege is given when the lottery trigger occurs in the first expected state;
with
The changing means causes a lottery by the grant lottery means to be performed when the lottery opportunity occurs in a situation where the first predetermined condition is not satisfied in the second expectation state, and the second expectation state is obtained. The gaming machine according to feature Q18, characterized in that, when the lottery is triggered in a state where the first predetermined condition is established, the lottery is performed by the additional lottery means.

According to the feature Q19, when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the additional lottery is executed, so it is possible to increase the chances that the number of rewards will be increased.

Characteristics Q20. The gaming machine according to feature Q19, wherein the number of times the privilege is expected to be granted when the lottery is triggered is different between the grant lottery means and the additional lottery means.

According to the feature Q20, when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the number of times the privilege is expected to be granted differs. It is possible to diversify people's expectations.

For the configuration of features Q1 to Q20, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H7, features I1-I16, features J1-J13, features K1-K11, features L1-L9, features M1-M10, features N1-N13, features O1-O38, features P1-P25, features R1-R11, features S1- Any one or more of S3, features T1 to T4, features U1 to U6, and features V1 to V11 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group R>
Feature R1. game control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main side MPU 72) for controlling the game execution means (reel unit 31) so that one game is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition;
setting means (function for executing a precursor setting process in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting an expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15, false precursor state) that continues over a plurality of games when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Expectation effect control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1109 to S1111 in the sub-side MPU 82) that allows the player to expect the occurrence of the award of the privilege in each game in the expectation state )When,
a game number determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3913 and S4014 in the sub-side MPU 82) for determining the number of games to be continued in the expected state when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state;
standby information storage means (stock game counter 84b) for storing information on the number of continuous games determined by the number-of-games determination means;
with
The standby information storage means stores information on the total number of continuous games determined by the number-of-games determining means when the predetermined condition is satisfied multiple times in the expected state, and
When the expected state ends and the information stored in the waiting information storage means is information corresponding to the number of continuous games equal to or greater than 1, the expected performance control means stores the information in the waiting information storage means. A gaming machine characterized by starting the expected state that continues over the number of continuous games that are played.

According to the feature R1, an expectation effect is executed that enables the player to expect the awarding of a privilege in each game by entering the expectation state. As a result, the player who confirms the expected effect expects the awarding of the privilege, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, the expected state is newly started after the expected state ends. This makes it possible to increase the chances of the expected state being executed.

In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, information on the number of continued games is stored as standby information. does not need to be done. In particular, in a configuration in which the number of continuous games changes according to the content of the predetermined condition, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for determining the number of continuous games.

In addition, when the predetermined condition is satisfied multiple times in the expected state, the number of times the expected state is executed is not added, but the number of continuous games in one expected state is added, so the expected state starts. It is possible to prevent an excessive increase in the number of executions of one unit of operation from being performed to being finished. In addition, no matter how many times the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, it is only necessary to add the information on the number of continued games, so it is necessary to collectively perform the processing according to the number of times the predetermined condition is satisfied after the expected state being executed ends. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

As described above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in a configuration provided with winning lottery executing means (function for executing lottery processing in main side MPU 72) for executing winning lottery processing when starting operation means operated to start a game is operated, expected state The mode of the combination lottery process may not be changed depending on whether or not it is, and the combination lottery execution means (main side MPU 72 a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72); (a function of executing a winning determination process) may be configured such that the award mode of the award corresponding to the winning is not changed depending on whether or not the expected state is reached.

Further, the predetermined condition may be a condition that is satisfied 100% when an event recognizable by the player occurs, and a predetermined probability (less than 100%) when an event recognizable by the player occurs It may be a condition to be established.

Further, as a game machine to which the above configuration can be applied, specifically, there is a "starting machine which is provided with pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern as a game execution means, and is operated to start the variable display of the pattern. An operation means (start lever 41) and a stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern are provided, and the game control means is operated when the start operation means is operated. One game is started by starting the variable display of the pattern based on the operation, and the game of the one game is started by stopping the variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the stop operation means. A game machine that is configured to be terminated can be mentioned.

Feature R2. The gaming machine according to feature R1, wherein the standby information storage means stores information on the number of continuous games within a range of an upper limit number of games determined as a plurality of times.

According to the feature R2, it is possible to prevent the number of expected games to be continued from becoming excessively large.

Feature R3. a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the game of the one game;
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
When the game in the game executing means is stopped, a prize-corresponding granting means (a prize-winning determination process in the main MPU 72) which grants a prize corresponding to the player based on the fact that the result corresponds to the result of the winning lottery process function) and
Ceiling-matching granting for granting a predetermined privilege or a privilege different from the above-mentioned privilege when the number of ceiling games is played without the prescribed privilege being one of the privilege and the privilege different from it being granted. means (the function of executing the processing of steps S1709 to S1712 in the sub-side MPU 82);
A ceiling effect control means (sub-side MPU 82) for performing an expected effect in a ceiling expected state (ceiling game precursor state ST13) that continues over the specific number of games from a state before the specific number of games with respect to the ceiling game number. A function to execute the processing of steps S1109 to S1111 and steps S1707 to S1708 in
with
The establishment of the predetermined condition is the occurrence of a set trigger event that is at least one of the winning of the trigger role in the role lottery process and the granting of the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role, or The predetermined condition is established based on the occurrence of a setting trigger event that is at least one of winning the trigger role in the role lottery process and granting the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role. ,
In a situation where the number of remaining games of the ceiling game number is equal to or less than the sum of the upper limit number of games and the specific number of games, a start prevention means for preventing a new start of the expected state (the process of step S3809 in the sub-side MPU 82 The gaming machine according to feature R2, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the feature R3, since a privilege is given when the number of ceiling games is played, it is possible to reliably generate an opportunity to give a privilege. In addition, since the number of ceiling games is set to a ceiling expectation state from before a specific number of games and an expectation effect is performed, it is possible to heighten the expectation of awarding of the privilege, and the interest of the game is improved. In this case, when the number of games remaining in the number of ceiling games is equal to or less than the sum of the upper limit number of games in the expectation state and the specific number of games in the ceiling expectation state, a new start of the expectation state is prevented. This prevents the occurrence of the ceiling expectation state in the middle of the expectation state, or the occurrence of the ceiling expectation state in the middle of the ceiling expectation state, and reduces the processing load in executing the expectation state and the ceiling expectation state. be done.

Feature R4. When the predetermined condition is established in a situation where the remaining number of games of the ceiling number of games is equal to or less than the sum of the upper limit number of games and the specific number of games, information on the number of continued games is stored in the standby information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature R3, characterized by:

According to the feature R4, in the configuration having the configuration of the feature R3 and aiming to reduce the processing load in executing the expected state and the ceiling expected state, the number of remaining games of the number of ceiling games is specified as the upper limit number of games. If the predetermined condition is satisfied in a situation where the expected state is prevented from starting because the number of games is less than the sum of the number of games, the information about the number of continued games is stored, so the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied is invalidated. In addition, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the expected state.

Feature R5. As the expected state, there are a first expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15) in which the privilege is provided after the end, and a second expected state (false precursor state) in which the privilege is not provided after the end,
The setting means sets the first expected state to the first expected state when a first predetermined condition corresponding to the provision of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the activation lottery process of the sub-side MPU 82 wins the activation lottery), setting to the second expected state when a second predetermined condition not corresponding to the granting of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the sub-side MPU 82 wins the false omen occurrence lottery process);
The standby information storage means stores the number of continuous games in the standby information storage means regardless of whether the first predetermined condition is satisfied or the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state. The game machine according to any one of features R1 to R4, which stores information.

According to the feature R5, the information on the number of continued games is stored in the standby information storage means regardless of whether the first predetermined condition is satisfied or the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state. Since it is sufficient to execute the processing, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature R6. When both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied in the second expected state, the standby information storage means stores the number of continuous games determined by the number-of-games determining means when each of the predetermined conditions is satisfied. It stores information on the total number of
The expected effect control means is configured such that, when the second expected state ends, the information stored in the standby information storage means is information corresponding to the number of continuous games equal to or greater than 1, and in the second expected state, the The game according to feature R5, characterized in that the first expected state that continues over the number of continuous games stored in the standby information storage means is started when the first predetermined condition is met. machine.

According to feature R6, when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, and when the second predetermined condition is otherwise satisfied, the first expected state is started after the expected state ends. The number of continuous games increases. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect with a high sense of anticipation as the first expectation state.

Feature R7. a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the game of the one game;
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
When the game in the game executing means is stopped, a prize-corresponding granting means (a prize-winning determination process in the main MPU 72) which grants a prize corresponding to the player based on the fact that the result corresponds to the result of the winning lottery process function) and
with
The establishment of the predetermined condition is the occurrence of a set trigger event that is at least one of the winning of the trigger role in the role lottery process and the granting of the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role, or The predetermined condition is established based on the occurrence of a setting trigger event that is at least one of winning the trigger role in the role lottery process and granting the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role. ,
The expected effect control means makes the content of the effect executed in the expected state correspond to the type of the setting trigger event of the expected state,
When the predetermined condition is established in the expected state and the information on the number of continued games is stored in the standby information storage means, type information storage for storing information on the type of the setting trigger event that triggered the setting of the standby information. The gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R7, further comprising means (an indication combination determination area 84c).

According to feature R8, since each production in the expected state is executed with content corresponding to the type of the set trigger event, the content of the production in the expected state is diversified, and the expectation of the content of the production can be used as the set trigger event. can be associated. Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state and the standby information is set, information about the type of the setting trigger event is stored, so the expected state is started based on the fact that the standby information is set. Even in this case, it is possible to make the content of each effect in the expected state correspond to the type of the setting trigger event.

Feature R9. A configuration in which the degree of expectation that the privilege is granted differs depending on the type of the setting trigger event,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied a plurality of times in the expected state, information on the type of the set trigger event having the highest degree of expectation among the set trigger events corresponding to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition each time is stored in the type information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature R8, characterized by comprising storage execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4010 and S4011 in the sub-side MPU 82) to store the information.

According to feature R9, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing the information on the types of setting trigger events, while making it easier to execute highly expected effects as the effects in the expected state.

Feature R10.
The standby information storage means stores information on the total number of continuous games determined by the game number determination means each time the predetermined condition is met in the expected state, and
When the expected state ends and the information stored in the waiting information storage means is information corresponding to the number of continuous games equal to or greater than 1, the expected performance control means stores the information in the waiting information storage means. The expected state that continues over the number of continuous games is started, and the content of the effect executed in the expected state corresponds to the type of the set trigger event stored in the type information storage means. The game machine according to feature R9, characterized in that the game machine is configured to have the contents of the game.

According to the feature R10, even if the predetermined condition is satisfied multiple times in the same expected state, addition of information on the number of continued games and updating of information on the type of the set trigger event are performed for each of the predetermined conditions being satisfied. you just need to In addition, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of occurrence of an expectation state in which the number of continued games is large and an expectation state in which highly anticipated effects are executed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Feature R11. As the expected state, there are a first expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15) in which the privilege is provided after the end, and a second expected state (false precursor state) in which the privilege is not provided after the end,
The setting means sets the first expected state to the first expected state when a first predetermined condition corresponding to the provision of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the activation lottery process of the sub-side MPU 82 wins the activation lottery), setting to the second expected state when a second predetermined condition not corresponding to the granting of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the sub-side MPU 82 wins the false omen occurrence lottery process);
When both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied in the same expected state, the memory executing means stores the expected degree among the set trigger events corresponding to the establishment of the predetermined condition. The gaming machine according to feature R9 or R10, wherein information on the type of the highest setting trigger event is stored in the type information storage means.

According to feature R11, regardless of whether the condition that triggered the setting is the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition, the information on the type of setting trigger event is the information on the type of setting trigger event with a high degree of expectation. are stored with priority. As a result, for example, even if the first predetermined condition is satisfied by a setting trigger event with a low degree of expectation, if the second predetermined condition is satisfied by a setting trigger event with a high degree of expectation, the first predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute an effect with a high degree of expectation as an expectation state.

For the configuration of features R1 to R11, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H7, features I1-I16, features J1-J13, features K1-K11, features L1-L9, features M1-M10, features N1-N13, features O1-O38, features P1-P25, features Q1-Q20, features S1- Any one or more of S3, features T1 to T4, features U1 to U6, and features V1 to V11 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature S group>
Feature S1.1 Starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start playing the game;
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
game control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main side MPU 72) for controlling the game execution means (reel unit 31) so that one game is executed based on the operation of the starting operation means; ,
When the game in the game executing means is stopped, a prize corresponding award means (a prize determination in the main side MPU 72) is provided to the player based on the fact that the result corresponds to the result of the winning lottery process. function to perform processing) and
setting means (function for executing a precursor setting process in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting an expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15, false precursor state) that continues over a plurality of games when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Expectation effect control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1109 to S1111 in the sub-side MPU 82) that allows the player to expect the occurrence of the award of the privilege in each game in the expectation state )When,
Waiting information setting means for setting waiting information (information of the stock game counter 84b) for enabling a new expected state to start after the expected state ends when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state. a function of executing the processing of steps S3907 and S4015 in the sub-side MPU 82);
with
The establishment of the predetermined condition is the occurrence of a set trigger event that is at least one of the winning of the trigger role in the role lottery process and the granting of the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role, or The predetermined condition is established based on the occurrence of a setting trigger event that is at least one of winning the trigger role in the role lottery process and granting the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role. ,
The expected effect control means makes the content of the effect executed in the expected state correspond to the type of the setting trigger event of the expected state,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state and the standby information is set, type information storage means (forecast combination determination area 84c) for storing information on the type of the setting trigger event that triggered the setting of the standby information. ) is provided.

According to the feature S1, an expectation effect is executed that enables the player to expect the awarding of a privilege in each game by entering the expectation state. As a result, the player who confirms the expected effect expects the awarding of the privilege, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, the expected state is newly started after the expected state ends. This makes it possible to increase the chances of the expected state being executed.

In addition, since each production in the expected state is executed with the content corresponding to the type of the set trigger event, it is possible to diversify the production content of the expected state and associate the expectation of the production content with the set trigger event. becomes. Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state and the standby information is set, information about the type of the setting trigger event is stored, so the expected state is started based on the fact that the standby information is set. Even in this case, it is possible to make the content of each effect in the expected state correspond to the type of the setting trigger event.

As described above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

The predetermined condition may be a condition that is satisfied 100% when an event recognizable by the player occurs, or is satisfied with a predetermined probability (less than 100%) when an event recognizable by the player occurs. It may be a condition to

In addition, as a game machine to which the above configuration can be applied, specifically, "a pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern is provided as a game execution means, and the starting operation means starts the variable display of the pattern. The game control means includes stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern, and the game control means is operated when the start operation means is operated. Then, one game is started by starting the variable display of the pattern, and the one game is finished by stopping the variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the stop operation means. A game machine that is a configuration is mentioned.

Feature S2. A configuration in which the degree of expectation that the privilege is granted differs depending on the type of the setting trigger event,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied a plurality of times in the expected state, information on the type of the set trigger event having the highest degree of expectation among the set trigger events corresponding to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition each time is stored in the type information storage means. The game machine according to feature S1, characterized by comprising memory execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4010 and S4011 in the sub-side MPU 82) to store the information.

According to the feature S2, while reducing the storage capacity for storing the information on the types of setting trigger events, it becomes easier to execute highly expected effects as the respective effects in the expected state.

Feature S3. As the expected state, there are a first expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15) in which the privilege is provided after the end, and a second expected state (false precursor state) in which the privilege is not provided after the end,
The setting means sets the first expected state to the first expected state when a first predetermined condition corresponding to the provision of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the activation lottery process of the sub-side MPU 82 wins the activation lottery), setting to the second expected state when a second predetermined condition not corresponding to the granting of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the sub-side MPU 82 wins the false omen occurrence lottery process);
When both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied in the same expected state, the memory execution means stores the expected degree among the set trigger events corresponding to the establishment of the predetermined condition. The gaming machine according to feature S2, wherein information on the type of the highest setting trigger event is stored in the type information storage means.

According to feature S3, the information on the type of setting trigger event is information on the type of setting trigger event with a high degree of expectation regardless of whether the condition that triggered the setting is the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition. is stored with priority. As a result, for example, even if the first predetermined condition is satisfied by a setting trigger event with a low degree of expectation, if the second predetermined condition is satisfied by a setting trigger event with a high degree of expectation, the first predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute an effect with a high degree of expectation as an expectation state.

In addition, for the configuration of features S1 to S3, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H7, features I1-I16, features J1-J13, features K1-K11, features L1-L9, features M1-M10, features N1-N13, features O1-O38, features P1-P25, features Q1-Q20, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R11, features T1 to T4, features U1 to U6, and features V1 to V11 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic T group>
Feature T1. game control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main side MPU 72) for controlling the game execution means (reel unit 31) so that one game is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition;
When a first predetermined condition corresponding to the granting of a privilege is met (the activation lottery process of the sub-side MPU 82 activates and wins), the first expectation is that the privilege is granted after the end of a plurality of games. a first setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3812 to S3816 in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting the state (transition chance precursor state ST15);
If a second predetermined condition that does not correspond to the granting of a privilege is met (that the sub-side MPU 82 wins the false sign lottery process with the occurrence of a false sign), the privilege is not granted after a plurality of games are continued. 2 a second setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3817 to S3820 in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting to the expected state (false precursor state);
Expectation effect control means (steps S1109 to S1109 in the sub-side MPU 82) for performing an expectation effect that enables the player to expect the awarding of a privilege in each game in the first expectation state or the second expectation state a function to execute the process of step S1111);
Standby information (information of the stock game counter 84b) for making it possible to newly start the first expected state after the end of the second expected state when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state. standby information setting means (function for executing the processes of steps S3907 and S4015 in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting
When the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state and the standby information is set, the change means (the sub-side MPU 82 in the a function to execute the processing of step S1505);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature T1, an expectation effect is executed that enables the player to expect the awarding of a privilege in each game by entering the expectation state. As a result, the player who confirms the expected effect expects the awarding of the privilege, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In addition, since not only the first expected state but also the second expected state exists, even in a situation where a privilege is not actually granted, the enjoyment of the game is improved based on the expected performance being executed over a plurality of games. It becomes possible to plan

Further, when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the first expected state is newly started after the end of the second expected state. This makes it possible to increase the chances of executing the first expected state.

Further, when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the mode of determining whether or not to grant the privilege is changed, so it is possible to diversify the mode of determining whether or not to grant the privilege. becomes. Further, since the mode of determining whether or not to give the privilege is changed depending on whether or not the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state. It is possible to heighten expectations for the establishment.

As described above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in a configuration provided with winning lottery executing means (function for executing lottery processing in main side MPU 72) for executing winning lottery processing when starting operation means operated to start a game is operated, expected state The mode of the combination lottery process may not be changed depending on whether or not it is, and the combination lottery execution means (main side MPU 72 a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72); (a function of executing a winning determination process) may be configured such that the award mode of the award corresponding to the winning is not changed depending on whether or not the expected state is reached.

Further, the predetermined condition may be a condition that is satisfied 100% when an event recognizable by the player occurs, and a predetermined probability (less than 100%) when an event recognizable by the player occurs It may be a condition to be established.

Further, as a game machine to which the above configuration can be applied, specifically, there is a "starting machine which is provided with pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern as a game execution means, and is operated to start the variable display of the pattern. An operation means (start lever 41) and a stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern are provided, and the game control means is operated when the start operation means is operated. One game is started by starting the variable display of the pattern based on the operation, and the game of the one game is started by stopping the variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the stop operation means. A game machine that is configured to be terminated can be mentioned.

Feature T2. provision lottery means (function for executing the process of step S1507 in the sub-side MPU 82) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give the privilege when a lottery trigger occurs in a situation other than the first expected state;
addition lottery means (a function of executing the process of step S1510 in the sub-side MPU 82) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to increase the number of times the privilege is given when the lottery trigger occurs in the first expected state;
with
The changing means causes a lottery by the grant lottery means to be performed when the lottery opportunity occurs in a situation where the first predetermined condition is not satisfied in the second expectation state, and the second expectation state is obtained. The gaming machine according to feature T1, wherein when the lottery is triggered in a state where the first predetermined condition is satisfied, a lottery is performed by the additional lottery means.

According to the feature T2, when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the additional lottery is executed, so it is possible to increase the chances of increasing the number of times the privilege is granted.

Feature T3. The gaming machine according to feature T2, wherein the number of times the privilege is expected to be given when the lottery is triggered differs between the grant lottery means and the additional lottery means.

According to feature T3, when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the expected number of times the privilege is granted differs. Therefore, the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state. It is possible to diversify the player's expectations of the game.

Feature T4. When the lottery is performed by the additional lottery means than when the lottery is performed by the grant lottery means, the number of times of granting of the benefits expected when the lottery is triggered is larger. The gaming machine according to feature T3.

According to the feature T4, the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, so that the number of times the benefit is expected to be granted even in the second expected state increases. It is possible to increase the player's expectation that the first predetermined condition is satisfied in .

For the configuration of features T1 to T4, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H7, features I1-I16, features J1-J13, features K1-K11, features L1-L9, features M1-M10, features N1-N13, features O1-O38, features P1-P25, features Q1-Q20, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R11, features S1 to S3, features U1 to U6, and features V1 to V11 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group U>
Features U1. game control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main side MPU 72) for controlling the game execution means (reel unit 31) so that one game is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition;
setting means (function for executing a precursor setting process in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting an expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15, false precursor state) that continues over a plurality of games when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Expectation effect control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1109 to S1111 in the sub-side MPU 82) that allows the player to expect the occurrence of the award of the privilege in each game in the expectation state )When,
If the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, the number of games determining means (second 5, the function of executing the processing of steps S4401 to S4408 and step S4014 in the sub-side MPU 82, and the function of executing the processing of steps S4501 to S4504 in the sub-side MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature U1, an expectation effect is executed that enables the player to expect the awarding of a privilege in each game by entering the expectation state. As a result, the player who confirms the expected effect expects the awarding of the privilege, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Further, when a predetermined condition is established in the expected state, the number of games to be continued in the expected state to be executed after the end of the expected state being executed is determined in relation to the expected state being executed. It is possible to prevent the later expected state from being executed regardless of the expected state. Therefore, when the expected state is executed continuously, the execution mode can be made suitable.

As described above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in a configuration provided with winning lottery executing means (function for executing lottery processing in main side MPU 72) for executing winning lottery processing when starting operation means operated to start a game is operated, expected state The mode of the combination lottery process may not be changed depending on whether or not it is, and the combination lottery execution means (main side MPU 72 a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72); (a function of executing a winning determination process) may be configured such that the award mode of the award corresponding to the winning is not changed depending on whether or not the expected state is reached.

Further, the predetermined condition may be a condition that is satisfied 100% when an event recognizable by the player occurs, and a predetermined probability (less than 100%) when an event recognizable by the player occurs It may be a condition to be established.

Further, as a game machine to which the above configuration can be applied, specifically, there is a "starting machine which is provided with pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern as a game execution means, and is operated to start the variable display of the pattern. An operation means (start lever 41) and a stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern are provided, and the game control means is operated when the start operation means is operated. One game is started by starting the variable display of the pattern based on the operation, and the game of the one game is started by stopping the variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the stop operation means. A game machine that is configured to be terminated can be mentioned.

Feature U2. The number-of-games determining means determines, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, the sum of the number of remaining games in the expected state and the number of continued games in the expected state to be executed after the end of the expected state. The gaming machine according to feature U1, wherein the number of continuous games is determined so as to be equal to or less than the upper limit number of games of the state.

According to feature U2, even when a new expectation state starts immediately after the expectation state ends, the number of games to be continued in the expectation state is the same as the number of games to be continued in the expectation state and the number of remaining games in the expectation state being executed. is determined so as to be equal to or less than the upper limit number of games in the expected state, it is possible to prevent the period during which the expected state is being executed from becoming excessively long.

Feature U3. The number-of-games determining means determines, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, the sum of the number of remaining games in the expected state and the number of continued games in the expected state to be executed after the end of the expected state. The gaming machine according to feature U1 or U2, wherein the number of continuous games is determined so as to be the upper limit number of games for the state.

According to feature U3, even when a new expected state is started immediately after the expected state ends, it is possible to prevent the period during which the expected state is being executed from becoming excessively long. Become. On the other hand, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the expected state, the sum of the number of remaining games in the expected state being executed and the number of continued games in the expected state to be executed thereafter is fixed to the upper limit number of games in the expected state. Therefore, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in a situation where the number of remaining games in the expected state is small, it is possible to generate an expected state with a large number of continued games.

Feature U4. As the expected state, there are a first expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15) in which the privilege is provided after the end, and a second expected state (false precursor state) in which the privilege is not provided after the end,
The setting means sets the first expected state to the first expected state when a first predetermined condition corresponding to the provision of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the activation lottery process of the sub-side MPU 82 wins the activation lottery), setting to the second expected state when a second predetermined condition not corresponding to the granting of the privilege is satisfied as the predetermined condition (that the sub-side MPU 82 wins the false omen occurrence lottery process);
The number-of-games determination means determines, when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the number of remaining games in the second expected state and the first expected state to be executed after the second expected state ends. The gaming machine according to any one of characteristics U1 to U3, wherein the number of continuous games is determined so that the sum of the number of continuous games and the number of continuous games is equal to or less than the upper limit number of games in the expected state.

According to feature U4, even if the first expected state starts immediately after the second expected state ends, the number of continued games in the first expected state is the same as the number of continued games in the second expected state. Since the sum of the number of remaining games and the remaining number of games is determined to be equal to or less than the upper limit number of games in the expected state, it is possible to prevent the period during which the expected state is being executed from becoming excessively long.

Feature U5. As the expected state, there are a first expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15) in which the privilege is given after the end and a second expected state (false precursor state) in which the privilege is not given after the end,
The setting means sets the first expected state to the first expected state when a first predetermined condition corresponding to the provision of the privilege is established as the predetermined condition (that the activation lottery process of the sub-side MPU 82 wins the activation lottery), setting to the second expected state when a second predetermined condition that does not correspond to the provision of the privilege is established as the predetermined condition (that a false portent occurrence is won in the false portent lottery process of the sub-side MPU 82);
The number-of-games determining means determines, when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the number of remaining games in the second expected state and the first expected state to be executed after the second expected state ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U4, wherein the number of continuous games is determined so that the sum of the number of continuous games and the number of continuous games is equal to the upper limit number of games in the expected state.

According to feature U5, even if the first expected state starts immediately after the second expected state ends, it is possible to prevent the period during which the expected state is being executed from becoming excessively long. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state, the sum of the number of remaining games in the second expected state and the number of continued games in the first expected state is fixed to the upper limit number of games in the expected state. Therefore, when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in a situation where the number of remaining games in the second expected state is small, it is possible to generate the first expected state in which the number of continued games is large.

Feature U6. a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the game of the one game;
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
When the game in the game executing means is stopped, a prize-corresponding granting means (a prize-winning determination process in the main MPU 72) which grants a prize corresponding to the player based on the fact that the result corresponds to the result of the winning lottery process function) and
Ceiling-matching granting for granting a predetermined privilege or a privilege different from the above-mentioned privilege when the number of ceiling games is played without the prescribed privilege being one of the privilege and the privilege different from it being granted. means (the function of executing the processes of steps S1709 to S1712 in the sub-side MPU 82);
A ceiling effect control means (sub-side MPU 82) for performing an expected effect in a ceiling expected state (ceiling game precursor state ST13) that continues over the specific number of games from a state before the specific number of games with respect to the ceiling game number. A function to execute the processing of steps S1109 to S1111 and steps S1707 to S1708 in
with
The establishment of the predetermined condition is the occurrence of a set trigger event that is at least one of the winning of the trigger role in the role lottery process and the granting of the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role, or The predetermined condition is established based on the occurrence of a setting trigger event that is at least one of winning the trigger role in the role lottery process and granting the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role. ,
In a situation where the number of remaining games of the ceiling game number is equal to or less than the sum of the upper limit number of games and the specific number of games, a start prevention means for preventing a new start of the expected state (the process of step S3809 in the sub-side MPU 82 A gaming machine according to any one of features U2 to U5, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the feature U6, since a privilege is awarded when the number of ceiling games is played, an opportunity to award a privilege can be reliably generated. In addition, since the number of ceiling games is set to a ceiling expectation state from before a specific number of games and an expectation effect is performed, it is possible to heighten the expectation of awarding of the privilege, and the interest of the game is improved. In this case, when the number of games remaining in the number of ceiling games is equal to or less than the sum of the upper limit number of games in the expectation state and the specific number of games in the ceiling expectation state, a new start of the expectation state is prevented. This prevents the occurrence of the ceiling expectation state in the middle of the expectation state, or the occurrence of the ceiling expectation state in the middle of the ceiling expectation state, and reduces the processing load in executing the expectation state and the ceiling expectation state. be done.

For the configuration of features U1 to U6, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H7, features I1-I16, features J1-J13, features K1-K11, features L1-L9, features M1-M10, features N1-N13, features O1-O38, features P1-P25, features Q1-Q20, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R11, features S1 to S3, features T1 to T4, and features V1 to V11 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each invention of the feature P group, the feature Q group, the feature R group, the feature S group, the feature group T, and the feature group U can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, lottery processing is executed by the control means by operating the start lever while medals are being bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group V>
Feature V1. Penalty setting means for generating a penalty that is disadvantageous to the player when a penalty event based on the player's operation occurs (function of executing the processing of steps S1411, steps S1702 to S1703 and S1804 in the sub-side MPU 82) with
The penalty setting means is
If the penalty event occurs in a state other than the specific state (ceiling game precursor state ST13), the first penalty setting means (step S1411 and step S1702 to step S1703 in the sub-side MPU 82) that generates a penalty in that state is executed. function) and
When the penalty event occurs in the specific state, the second penalty setting means (the sub-side MPU 82 executes the processing of step S1804) for generating at least part of the penalty for the occurrence of the penalty event after the specific state ends. function) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature V1, when a penalty event occurs, a penalty that is disadvantageous to the player occurs, thereby making it possible to encourage the player not to allow the penalty event to occur. In this case, if a penalty event occurs in a particular state, the penalty is not incurred in the particular state, but after the particular state ends. As a result, it is possible to eventually issue a penalty for the occurrence of a penalty event while avoiding the occurrence of a penalty in situations where it would not be desirable to do so.

As described above, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the penalty event.

Feature V2. The specific state is a state that continues over a plurality of games,
Anticipation effect control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1109 to S1111 in the sub-side MPU 82) for performing an expectation effect that allows the player to expect the awarding of the privilege in the specific state is provided. The game machine according to feature V1, characterized in that

According to feature V2, even if a penalty event occurs in a situation where the expected effect is being executed, the occurrence of penalty is prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent the smooth execution of the expected effect from being hindered due to the occurrence of the penalty.

Feature V3. a privilege granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1709 to S1712 in the sub-side MPU 82) that grants a privilege after the end of the specific state;
The second penalty setting means, when the penalty event occurs in the specific state, generates a penalty after the specific state ends and before the award is given, characterized by V1 or A gaming machine described in V2.

According to feature V3, it is possible not only to prevent a penalty from occurring in a specific state, but also to cause a penalty for the occurrence of a penalty event while preventing the award of a privilege and a penalty from occurring at the same time. It becomes possible.

The awarding of the privilege includes the occurrence of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and more specifically, the occurrence of an advantageous state in which the expected value of acquisition of game media per game increases.

Feature V4. a privilege granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1709 to S1712 in the sub-side MPU 82) that grants a privilege after the end of the specific state;
The second penalty setting means, when the penalty event occurs in the specific state, delays the provision of the privilege until the penalty corresponding period elapses after the specific state ends. The gaming machine according to any one of V3.

According to the feature V4, since the penalty occurs before the privilege is granted, the player can easily recognize the reason for the penalty compared with the structure in which the penalty occurs after the privilege is granted.

Feature V5. The gaming machine according to feature V4, further comprising delay notification means for notifying that the provision of the privilege is delayed.

According to feature V5, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the awarding of the privilege is delayed.

Feature V6. game control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main side MPU 72) for controlling the game execution means (reel unit 31) so that one game is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition;
Specific setting means for setting the specific state that continues over a plurality of games (function for executing the processing of steps S1707 and S1708 in the sub-side MPU 82);
A specific effect control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1109 to S1111 in the sub-side MPU 82) that allows the player to expect the occurrence of a privilege in each game in the specific state. )When,
The gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V5, characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine having the configuration of feature V6, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above.

Feature V7. a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the game of the one game;
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
When the game in the game executing means is stopped, a prize-corresponding granting means (a prize-winning determination process in the main MPU 72) which grants a prize corresponding to the player based on the fact that the result corresponds to the result of the winning lottery process function) and
Ceiling corresponding granting means (in the sub-side MPU 82) for granting the privilege when the game for the number of ceiling games is executed without the predetermined privilege, which is either the privilege or a privilege different from it, being granted a function to execute the processing of steps S1709 to S1712);
with
The first penalty setting means prevents the number of remaining games from being subtracted from the ceiling game number even if one game is played when the penalty event occurs,
The specific state is a state that continues for the specific number of games from a state before the specific number of games with respect to the ceiling number of games,
The second penalty setting means is characterized in that, even if the penalty event occurs, the number of remaining games of the ceiling game number is subtracted when one game is played in the specific state. A gaming machine described in V6.

According to feature V7, even if a penalty event occurs in a specific state, the subtraction of the remaining games of the ceiling game is continued. As a result, even if a penalty event occurs in a specific state, the end timing of the specific state and the timing at which the remaining game in the ceiling game becomes "0" may lag, or the end timing of the specific state may be adjusted to eliminate the lag. No need to adjust.

Feature V8. As the game executing means, pattern display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying patterns,
a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern;
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display portions and operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the corresponding variable display portions;
When the variable display of the pattern on each variable display unit is stopped, the winning correspondence providing means (main side) provides the player with the prize corresponding to the winning result based on the stop result corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process. a function of executing winning determination processing in the MPU 72);
with
The game control means starts the game of one game by starting the variable display of the pattern on each variable display section based on the operation of the start operation means, and the plurality of stop operation means are operated respectively. The one game is ended by stopping the variable display of the pattern on each variable display unit based on the result,
As a combination to be selected by the combination lottery process, there is an order-corresponding combination (a first bell combination and a second bell combination) that enables a prize to be awarded when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. and
After the end of the specific state, transition means (steps S1709 to S1712 in the sub-side MPU 82) for shifting the game state to the notification state (normal AT state) in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding hand is won function to execute the processing of
The second penalty setting means, when the penalty event occurs in the specific state, delays the transition to the notification state until a penalty response period elapses after the specific state ends. A gaming machine according to V6 or V7.

According to the feature V8, since the penalty occurs before the transition to the notification state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the reason why the penalty occurred compared to the configuration in which the penalty occurs after the notification state ends. .

Feature V9. The gaming machine according to feature V8, wherein the penalty setting means does not extend the penalty response period even if the penalty event occurs in a state in which transition to the notification state is delayed.

According to feature V9, it is possible to prevent the transition to the notification state from being continuously delayed.

Feature V10. setting means (function for executing a precursor setting process in the sub-side MPU 82) for setting an expected state (transition chance precursor state ST15, false precursor state) that continues over a plurality of games when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Expectation effect control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1109 to S1111 in the sub-side MPU 82) that allows the player to expect the occurrence of the award of the privilege in each game in the expectation state )When,
with
The gaming machine according to any one of characteristics V6 to V9, wherein the first penalty setting means generates a penalty in the expected state when the penalty event occurs in the expected state.

According to the feature V10, it is possible to differentiate the manner in which the penalty is generated between the specific state and the expected state, and it is possible to generate the penalty in a manner suitable for each state.

In addition, starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the game of the one game, and winning lottery executing means (lottery in the main MPU 72) for executing the winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated. a function to execute processing) and a prize-corresponding granting means for granting a prize-corresponding privilege to the player based on the result corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process when the game in the game execution means is stopped. (a function of executing a winning determination process in the main MPU 72), and at least one of winning the winning combination in the winning combination lottery process and awarding the winning corresponding privilege corresponding to the winning combination. Setting that at least one of the following: the occurrence of the setting trigger event is the establishment of the predetermined condition, or the winning of the trigger role in the role lottery process, and the granting of the prize corresponding privilege corresponding to the trigger role. The predetermined condition may be established based on the occurrence of a trigger event.

Feature V11. As the game executing means, pattern display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display portions (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying patterns,
a starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern;
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a winning lottery process when the starting operation means is operated;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display portions and operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the corresponding variable display portions;
When the variable display of the pattern on each variable display unit is stopped, the winning correspondence providing means (main side) provides the player with the prize corresponding to the winning result based on the stop result corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process. a function of executing winning determination processing in the MPU 72);
with
The game control means starts the game of one game by starting the variable display of the pattern on each variable display section based on the operation of the start operation means, and the plurality of stop operation means are operated respectively. The one game is ended by stopping the variable display of the pattern on each variable display unit based on the result,
The gaming machine according to any one of characteristics V6 to V10, wherein the penalty event is an event in which the variable display of the pattern in a predetermined variable display portion among the plurality of variable display portions is stopped first. .

It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the penalty event as described above.

As the combination selected by the combination lottery process, there are order-corresponding combinations (a first bell combination and a second bell combination) that allow a prize to be won when the plurality of variable display units are stopped in a predetermined order. In the existing configuration, the variable display of the pattern in a predetermined variable display portion among the plurality of variable display portions is first stopped in a situation where the predetermined order is not notified of the advantageous game state, and the order-corresponding combination is played. The penalty event may be an event in which the player is awarded a prize corresponding to the .

For the configuration of features V1 to V11, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H7, features I1-I16, features J1-J13, features K1-K11, features L1-L9, features M1-M10, features N1-N13, features O1-O38, features P1-P25, features Q1-Q20, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R11, features S1 to S3, features T1 to T4, and features U1 to U6 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The invention of the characteristic group V can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, lottery processing is executed by the control means by operating the start lever while medals are being bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in a game machine such as the one exemplified above, there is a possibility that a player performs an operation that is not preferable for the game machine, and it is necessary to appropriately deal with such an unfavorable event.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: The rotation of the rotating body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the rotating body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player responds to the pattern after the stop. A game machine that gives benefits to

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine, 31... Reel unit, 32L, 32M, 32R... Reel, 41... Start lever, 42-44... Stop button, 63... Internal state notification part, 66... Image display device, 67... Bonus point notification part, 68 Stock notification unit 69 Victory number notification unit 70 Main control device 72 Main MPU 73 Main ROM 74 Main RAM 80 Sub control device 82 Sub MPU 83 . . Sub-side ROM 84 .. Sub-side RAM 84b .

Claims (1)

game control means for controlling the game execution means so that one game is executed based on the establishment of the start condition;
a first setting means for setting a first expected state in which, when a first predetermined condition corresponding to awarding of a privilege is satisfied, the privilege is granted after the game is completed and continues over a plurality of games;
a second setting means for setting a second expected state that continues over a plurality of games and that the privilege is not awarded after the end of a plurality of games when a second predetermined condition that does not correspond to the awarding of the privilege is satisfied;
expectation effect control means for performing an expectation effect that enables the player to expect the awarding of a privilege in each game in the first expectation state or the second expectation state;
standby information setting means for setting standby information for newly starting the first expected state after the end of the second expected state when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the second expected state; ,
grant lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to grant the privilege when a lottery trigger occurs in a situation other than the first expected state;
addition lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to increase the number of times the privilege is granted when the lottery trigger occurs in the first expected state;
When the lottery opportunity occurs in the second expected state and the first predetermined condition is not satisfied, the lottery is performed by the grant lottery means, and the second expected state and the changing means for performing a lottery by the additional lottery means when the lottery is triggered in a situation where a first predetermined condition is satisfied ;
with
The degree of expectation that the privilege will be granted by the lottery of the grant lottery means is configured to be higher as the number of games played before the lottery triggers is larger,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the addition lottery means draws a lottery to determine whether or not to add the game without being affected by the number of games completed before the lottery trigger .

Images